Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAbout2018-425-E AMS - Sasser Companies Annex upfitDocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 [Departmental Use Only] TITLE BOE HVAC Relocate FY 2018 -19 NORTH CAROLINA CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT OVER $250,000.00 ORANGE COUNTY THIS CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT (hereinafter called "Agreement "), made as of the 7th day of August, 2018, by and between Sasser Companies, (hereinafter called the "Contractor "), and Orange County, a political subdivision of the State of North Carolina, (hereinafter called the "County," "Orange County," or "Owner "). WITNESSETH: That the Contractor and the Owner, for the consideration herein named, agree as follows: 1. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS; PRIORITY The Contract Documents consist of this Agreement, the General Conditions which are fully incorporated in this Agreement, the Request for Proposals, designer approved communications and /or field orders, the Proposal, Construction Documents and Drawings and Written Specifications. The Contract Documents form the Contract. In the event of any inconsistency between or among the Contract Documents the Contract Documents shall be interpreted in the following order of priority: a. This Agreement and incorporated General Conditions attached as Exhibit 1. b. Designer approved and stamped construction documents and drawings and written specifications. c. Designer approved communications and/or field orders. d. Request for Proposals and addenda thereto. e. Proposal. 2. SCOPE OF WORK The Contractor shall furnish and deliver all of the materials, and perform, and be fully responsible for all of the Work required by this Agreement within the time period stipulated in a written Notice -to- Proceed to be executed by the Contractor and Owner and in accordance with the following enumerated documents, which are made a part hereof as if fully contained herein: a. Construction Drawings prepared by RN &M Engineers (Sheet M.01, M.02, M.03, M.04, M1.1, M1.2, M1.3, M2.1, E1.0, E2.0, dated 5/7/2017, and Mechanical Specifications dated 5/4/2018, and includes all roofing work associated with the HVAC installation) b. Written specifications prepared by the Designer. c. Sasser Companies proposal dated August 7, 202018 which fully describes the work to be Revised 10/17 1 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 performed, such work (hereinafter called the "Work "). d. Related documents listed under Section 2 above. 3. TERM AND SCHEDULING a. The Contractor agrees to commence work pursuant to the written Notice -to Proceed. b. The Contractor agrees to complete substantially all Work included by September 7 , 2018. c. Time is of the essence with respect to all dates specified in the Contract Documents as Completion Dates. d. The Contractor shall perform the Work in the time, manner and form required by the Contract Documents and as stipulated in a written Notice -to- Proceed to be executed by the Contractor and Owner. 4. STANDARD OF CARE AND DUTIES OF CONTRACTOR a. The Contractor shall exercise reasonable care and diligence in performing the Work in accordance with the generally accepted standards of this type of Contractor practice throughout the United States and in accordance with applicable federal, state and local laws and regulations applicable to the performance of these services. Contractor is solely responsible for the professional quality, accuracy and timely completion and/or submission of all work. b. The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the Work to be loaded with a weight that will endanger its safety, intended performance or configuration. c. Contractor shall be responsible for all Contractor, Subcontractor, and Sub - subcontractor errors or omissions, in the performance of the Agreement together with the errors and omissions of any agent or employee of the Contractor or any Subcontractor or Sub - subcontractor. Contractor shall correct any and all errors, omissions, discrepancies, ambiguities, mistakes or conflicts at no additional cost to the Owner. d. Contractor is an independent contractor of Owner. Any and all employees of the Contractor engaged by the Contractor in the performance of any work or services required of the Contractor under this Agreement, shall be considered employees or agents of the Contractor only and not of the Owner, and any and all claims that may or might arise under any workers compensation or other law or contract on behalf of said employees while so engaged shall be the sole obligation and responsibility of the Contractor. Contractor shall at all times remain in compliance with all applicable local, state, and federal laws, rules, and regulations including but not limited to all state and federal - discrimination laws, policies, rules, and regulations and the Orange County Non - Discrimination Policy and Orange County Living Wage Policy (each policy is incorporated herein by reference and may be viewed at http: / /www.oran etync og v/departments /purchasing _division /contracts.php). Any violation of the Orange County Non - Discrimination Policy is a breach of this Agreement and County may immediately terminate this Agreement without further obligation on the part of the County. This paragraph is not intended to limit and does not limit the definition of breach to discrimination. Revised 10/17 2 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 f. If activities related to the performance of this Agreement require specific licenses, certifications, or related credentials Contractor represents that it and/or its employees, agents and subcontractors engaged in such activities possess such licenses, certifications, or credentials and that such licenses certifications, or credentials are current, active, and not in a state of suspension or revocation. g. The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work efficiently and with the Contractor's best skill and attention. Except as specifically set forth in the Contract Documents the Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction, and for safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. The Contractor shall be responsible to see that the finished Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. h. The Contractor shall appoint a competent Project Manager with general authority to manage the Project for the Contractor. The Contractor shall also keep on the Project at all times during the Work of the Contractor a competent Resident Superintendent and necessary assistants who shall not be replaced without prior written approval by the Designer or by the Owner if a Designer is not retained for the Project. i. If, in the opinion of the Designer, any Subcontractor on the Project is incompetent or otherwise unsatisfactory, such Subcontractor shall be replaced by the Contractor with no increase in the Contract Price if and when directed by the Designer. j. The Contractor shall attend all progress conferences and all other meetings or conferences. The Contractor shall be represented at these progress conferences by a representative having the authority of the Project Manager and by such other representatives as the Designer may direct. k. Costs and expenses of providing samples for and assistance in any testing shall be borne by the Contractor. Any Work in which untested materials are used without approval or written permission of the Owner and/or Designer shall be removed and replaced at Contractor's expense. 5. PAYMENT & TAXES a. The Owner hereby agrees to pay to the Contractor for the faithful performance of this Agreement, and the Contractor hereby agrees to perform all of the Work for a sum not -to- exceed Three Hundred Ninety Thousand, Eight Hundred Forty Nine Dollars ($390,849.00) ($59,723- contents; $73,600 - Structure Cleaning; $38,714- Ductwork/HVAC demo; $83,812 - Ceiling Insulation; $135,000 -HVAC Installation/ Associated Roof Work). Not later than the fifth (5th) day of each calendar month the Contractor shall submit to the Owner's Representative, generally the Designer if a Designer is retained on the Work, a Request for Payment for work done during the previous calendar month. (i) The Request for Payment shall be in form of a standardized invoice or AIA Document G702 -703 appropriately addressed to Owner's Representative at Orange County, PO Box 8181, Hillsborough NC 27278 and shall show substantially the value of work done during the previous calendar month. Revised 10/17 3 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 (ii) The amount due for payment shall be ninety -five percent (95 %) of the value of work completed since the last Request for Payment and this amount shall be paid by the Owner on or before the last business day of the month. Owner shall retain five percent (5 %) (the "Retainage "). (1) Upon Owner's Representative's certification that fifty percent (50 %) of the Work has been satisfactorily completed Retainage shall be reduced to two and one half percent (21/2 %). (2) Upon Owner's Representative's certification that ninety percent (90 %) of the Work has been satisfactorily completed Retainage may be discontinued. Retainage may be discontinued, at Owner's Discretion, so long as work continues to be completed satisfactorily and on schedule. (iii) Final payment shall not be due to the Contractor until thirty (30) days after Final Completion of the Work, including punch list work, has been satisfactorily completed and an appropriate Affidavit, Indemnification, and Release as required in Section 8(d) below has been received by Owner. b. Should Owner reasonably determine that Contractor has failed to perform the Work related to a Request for Payment, Owner, at its discretion may provide the Contractor ten (10) days to cure the breach. Owner may withhold the accompanying payment without penalty until such time as Contractor cures the breach. (i) Should Contractor or its representatives fail to cure the breach within ten (10) days, or fail to reasonably agree to such modified schedule, Owner may immediately terminate this Agreement in writing, without penalty or incurring further obligation to Contractor. (ii) This section shall not be interpreted to limit the definition of breach to the failure to perform the Work related to a Request for Payment. c. The Contractor has included in the Contract Price and shall pay all taxes assessed by any authority on the Work or the labor and materials used therein. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to furnish the Owner documentary evidence showing the materials used and sales and use tax paid by the Contractor and each of its subcontractors. d. Should the Owner receive notice that the Contractor has failed to pay a Subcontractor for the Work performed related to a Request for Payment, Owner shall have the authority to withhold payment of the disputed amount until parties resolve their dispute. Failure to pay the Contractor pursuant to this section of the Agreement shall not be deemed to be a breach of the Agreement. 6. NON — APPROPRIATION a. Contractor acknowledges that Owner is a governmental entity, and the validity of this Agreement is based upon the availability of public funding under the authority of its statutory mandate. Revised 10/17 4 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 b. In the event that public funds are unavailable and not appropriated for the performance of Owner's obligations under this Agreement, then this Agreement shall automatically expire without penalty to Owner immediately upon written notice to Contractor of the unavailability and non - appropriation of public funds. It is expressly agreed that Owner shall not activate this non - appropriation provision for its convenience or to circumvent the requirements of this Agreement, but only as an emergency fiscal measure during a substantial fiscal crisis. In the event of a change in the Owner's statutory authority, mandate and/or mandated functions, by state and /or federal legislative or regulatory action, which adversely affects Owner's authority to continue its obligations under this Agreement, then this Agreement shall automatically terminate without penalty to Owner upon written notice to Contractor of such limitation or change in Owner's legal authority. 7. NOTICES Any notice required by this Agreement shall be in writing and delivered by certified or registered mail, return receipt requested to the following: Owner: Orange County Attn: Jeff Thompson P.O. Box 8181 Hillsborough, NC 27278 8. MISCELLANEOUS Contractor: Sasser Companies Attn: Kevin Sasser P.O. Box 10 Whitsett, NC27377 a. Duties and Obligations imposed by the Contract Documents shall be in addition to any Duties and Obligations imposed by state, federal or local law, rules, regulations and ordinances. b. No act or failure to act by the Owner or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of any right or duty granted them under the Contract Documents, nor shall any act or failure to act constitute any approval except as specifically agreed in writing. The Work shall be tested and inspected as required by the Contract Documents and as required by law. Unless prohibited by law the costs of all such tests and inspections related to state and federal codes such as ADA, Administrative, Electrical, Plumbing, Mechanical and Building Codes shall be borne by the Contractor. The costs for material and structural testing shall be conducted by an independent third party at the expense of the Owner. Delays related to any of the aforementioned tests and inspections shall not be grounds for delaying the completion of the work. If any such tests and inspections reveal deficiencies in the Work such that the Work does not comply with terms or requirements of the Contract Documents and/or the requirements of any code or law the Contractor is solely responsible for the cost of bringing such deficiencies into compliance with the terms of the Contract Documents and/or any code or law. d. Should the Designer, if a Designer is retained for the project involving the Work, or Owner reject any portion of the Work for failing to comply with the Contract Documents Contractor shall immediately, at Contractor's expense, correct the Work. Any such rejection may be made before or after substantial completion. If applicable, any additional expense borne by the Designer under this section shall be paid at Contractor's expense. Revised 10/17 5 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 The Contractor shall not assign any portion of this Agreement nor subcontract the Work in its entirety without the prior written consent of the Owner. 9. CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES a. Owner and Contractor mutually waive any claim against each other for consequential damages. Consequential Damages include: (i) Damages incurred by Owner for loss of use, income, financing, or business. (ii) Damages incurred by Contractor for office expenses, including personnel, loss of financing, profit, income, business, damage to reputation, or any other non - direct damages. 10. ENTIRE AGREEMENT All of the documents listed, referenced or described in this Agreement, the written Notice -to- Proceed, together with Modifications made or issued in accordance herewith are the Contract Documents, and the work, labor, materials, and completed construction required by the Contract Documents and all parts thereof is the Work. The Contract Documents constitute the entire agreement between Owner and Contractor. This Agreement may be amended only by written instrument signed by both parties. Modifications may be evidenced by facsimile signatures. If any provision of the Agreement or General Conditions shall be declared invalid or unenforceable, the remainder of the Agreement shall continue in full force and effect. [SIGNATURE PAGE TO FOLLOW] Revised 10/17 6 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Parties hereto have executed this Agreement as of the day and date first above written in a number of counterparts, each of which shall, without proof or accounting for other counterparts, be deemed an original contract. �@ _:_ _ \ __ I 1 i c M. bm"'m A-0AK1tk" 8/15/2018 Mark Dorosin, Chair Orange County Board of Commissioners Revised 10/17 CONTRACTOR: C By. %wk Sasstr ' Kevin Sasser, President Printed Name and Title 7 8/9/2018 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 Orange County Board of Elections 205 South Cameron Street Hillsborough, NC 27275 August 8, 2018 Dear Ms. Barnes, Thank you for the opportunity to provide you with a proposal for the Contents, HVAC Demo, Ceiling and Insulation, Mold Remediation and HVAC Installation in the Orange County Board of Elections building located at 208 South Cameron Street in Hillsborough, NC. The attached description will detail all items included in our scope of work. The proposal is based on the site meeting with the owner. The items of work as required to complete the project at the Orange County Board of Elections building located at 208 South Cameron Street in Hillsborough, NC will be performed for THE INVESTMENT OF: ............................................................................. Thank y in Sasser President Office (336) 4491144 Cell (336) 516 -5140 kevin2(cc�,sassercompanies.com Phone: (336)449 -1144 PO Box 10, Whitsett NC 27377 Fax: (336)449-1151 www.SASSERCOMPANIES.com DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 Orange County Board of Elections 208 South Cameron Street Hillsborough, NC 27278 August 8, 2018 GENERAL CONDITIONS • Site supervision • Project management • Dumpsters • Daily clean up • Final clean. • Permit Contents Pack out, perform mold clean, third party post remediation verification (PRV) and pack in. Lump sum amount $59,723.00 HVAC Demo Evacuate refrigerant from all units, remove related electrical, condensing units, air handlers, duct work and seal all penetrations through floor and ceiling. Lump sum amount $38,714.00 Ceiline and Insulation Remove existing 2x4 lay -in ceiling, install R -38 unfaced insulation between bar joists of first floor ceiling, secure with wire, install new 2x4 standard lay -in ceiling, install tie wires on existing fixtures and secure fixture to grid per code. Lump Sum amount $83,812.00 LITt TITTWIRUMI T Perform mold remediation of first floor and third party post remediation verification (PRV). Lump sum amount $73,600.00 HVAC Furnish labor and materials on a time and material basis with a not to exceed of $135,000 for installation of owner furnished HVAC equipment per construction drawings prepared by RN &M (Sheet M.01, M.02, M,03, M.04, M1.1, M1.2, M1.3, M2.1, E1.0, E2.0, dated 5/72017, and Mechanical Specifications dated 5,14/2018, and includes all roofing work associated with the HVAC installation) Page 12 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 Trademasters Services, Inc. Labor Rates proposal dated July 17, 2018 which fully describes the work performed. Such work will hereafter be called the "Work". ITEMS NOT INCLUDED • Any work other than noted above • Any electrical other than noted above • Any plumbing work other than noted above • Any code upgrades required Page 13 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SASSCOM -01 DBAKER 'ACC]RU CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE (MM /DD YYYY) 02/26/2018 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER License #1000009384 CONTACT NAME: PHONE FAX (A/C, No, Et): (336) 228 -0541 (A/C, No):(866) 590 -4281 Hub International Carolinas PO Box 939 Burlington, NC 27216 ADDRIESS: INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC # 02/01/2019 INSURER A: Selective Insurance Company of America 12572 INSURED INSURER B: Accident Fund General Insurance Company 12304 INSURER C : $ 15,000 Sasser Companies Inc INSURER D: PERSONAL & ADV INJURY P O Box 10 Whitsett, NC 27377 INSURER E GENERAL AGGREGATE INSURER F: PRODUCTS - COMP /OP AGG $ 3'000'000 COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE ADDL IN SD SUBR WVD POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFF MM DD POLICY EXP MM DD LIMBS A X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CLAIMS -MADE F_X] OCCUR S 2253759 02101/2018 02/01/2019 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000 DAMAGE TO RENTED PREMISES Ea occurrence 500,000 MED EXP (Any one person) $ 15,000 PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $ 1,000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: POLICY PRO- F—] LOC JECT OTHER: GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 3,000,000 PRODUCTS - COMP /OP AGG $ 3'000'000 • AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY ANY AUTO OWNED SCHEDULED AUTOS ONLY AUTOS HIRED NON -OWNED AUTOS ONLY AUTOS ONLY S 2253759 02/01/2018 02/01/2019 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT Ea accident 1,000,000 $ X BODILY INJURY Per person) $ BODILY INJURY Per accident $ PROPERTY DAMAGE Per accident) $ • X UMBRELLA LIAB EXCESS LIAB X OCCUR CLAIMS -MADE S 2253759 02/01/2018 02/0112019 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 10,000,000 AGGREGATE $ D I I RETENTION $ B WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY ANY PROPRIMBER/PXCLUDE/EXECUTIVE ❑ OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? (Mandatory in NH) If yes, describe under DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below NIA WCV6139124 02/01/2018 02/01/2019 PER OTH- STATUTE ER E.L. EACH ACCIDENT 1,000,000 $ E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $ 1,000,000 E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT 1,000,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS / LOCATIONS / VEHICLES (ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule, may be attached if more space is required) Orange County is an additional insured under the General Liability for work performed by the named insured for such additional insured, if required by contract signed by an authorized representative of the named insured. CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION ACORD 25 (2016/03) © 1988 -2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE Orange Count 9 y THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. PO Box 8181 Hillsborough, NC 27278 AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE ACORD 25 (2016/03) © 1988 -2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 1 EXHIBIT 1 - - -- GENERAL CONDITIONS Table of Contents Page Article1. Definitions ........................................................................................ ..............................3 Article 2. Correlation, Interpretation, and Intent of Contract Documents ....... ..............................7 Article 3. Familiarity with Work, Conditions and Laws .................................... ..............................8 Article4. Bonds .............................................................................................. ..............................9 Article 5. Insurance and Indemnity ................................................................ ..............................9 Article 6. Other Record Documents and Submittals ...................................... .............................16 Article7. Contractor ....................................................................................... .............................18 Article8. Owner ............................................................................................ .............................26 Article 9. Construction Manager ................................................................... .............................26 Article10. Designer ...................................................................................... .............................26 Article 11. Testing and Surveying ................................................................. .............................27 Article 12. Separate Contracts ...................................................................... .............................27 Article13. Contract Time ............................................................................. .............................28 Article 14. Changes in the Work .................................................................. .............................31 Article 15. Change of the Contract Price ..................................................... .............................33 Article 16. Unforeseen Conditions ................................................................ .............................35 Article 17. Correction of Work before Final Payment .................................. .............................35 Article 18. Correction of Work after Substantial Completion; Warranties and Guaranties ........ 36 Article 19. Owner's Right to Do Work .......................................................... .............................37 Article20. Partial Payments ........................................................................ .............................37 Article21. Final Payment ............................................................................. .............................40 Article 22. Contractor, Subcontractor and Supplier Affidavit ....................... .............................41 Article 23. Assignments and Subcontracts ................................................... .............................41 Revised 10/17 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 2 Article 24. Measurements ........................................................................... .............................41 Article 25. Contractor and Subcontractor Relationships ............................. .............................42 Article26. Use of Premises ........................................................................ .............................42 Article 27. Cutting, Patching and Fitting ..................................................... .............................42 Article 28. Dispute Resolution ................................................................... .............................43 Article29. Taxes ......................................................................................... .............................43 Article 30. Operation of Owner's Facilities .................................................. .............................44 Article 31. Third Party Beneficiary Clause .................................................. .............................44 Article 32. Measurement of Quantities ....................................................... .............................44 Article 33. Termination by the Owner for Cause ........................................ .............................44 Article 34. Termination or Suspension by the Owner for Convenience ...... .............................45 Article 35. Minority Business Enterprise Program ........................... .............................46 Article 36 E- Verify, Iran Divestment, Israel Boycott, and Digital ....... .............................46 Article37. General ...................................................................................... .............................46 Revised 10/17 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 ARTICLE 1. DEFINITIONS 1.1 Agreement - The Construction Contract, these General Conditions, and any Supplementary Conditions. 1.2 AIA - The American Institute of Architects. 1.3 ASTM - The American Society for Testing and Materials. 1.4 Beneficial Occupancy — Use of the Project by the Owner after Substantial Completion, but prior to Final Completion.. 1.5 Change Order - A written order to the Contractor signed by the Owner and the Designer authorizing an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work and /or an adjustment in the Contract Price and /or the Contract Time issued after execution of the Construction Contract. See paragraph 14.1. 1.6 Completion Date - Those dates identified as Completion Dates in the Contract Construction Schedule or elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 1.7 Construction Contract — The document executed by the Contractor and the Owner to formally memorialize their consent to the terms of the Agreement. 1.8 Construction Change Directive — A written order to the Contractor signed by the Owner and the Designer directing an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work after execution of the Construction Contract, in circumstances when the parties have been unable to agree on an adjustment to the Contract Price or the Contract Time, but the Owner requests that the Contractor proceed with said addition, deletion, or revision in the Work subject to adjustment of the Contract Price and /orContract Time under the procedures described herein. 1.9 Construction Manager(s) - The person(s) or firm designated as the Construction Manager in the Contract Documents, or their authorized representatives. The Construction Manager(s), as referred to herein, will be referred to hereinafter as if each were of the singular number and masculine gender. 1.10 Contract Construction Schedule - That schedule described in Article 13 hereof and identified as the Contract Construction Schedule. 1.11 Contract Documents - All of the documents that make up the Agreement, plus the Drawings and Specifications that describe the scope of the Work, plus allowable Modifications to the Contract Documents. 1.12 Contract Price - The total monies payable to the Contractor under the Contract Documents pursuant to paragraph 15.1 of the Agreement. Revised 10/17 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 4 1.13 Contract Time - The number of calendar days stated in, or computed from, the Contract Documents for the completion of the Work, or any portion thereof. See, particularly, Article 13 hereof and the Contract Construction Schedule. Time of completion as specified therein is of the essence. The time used and referred to on the Project will be that time which is observed in Raleigh, North Carolina, being Eastern Daylight Savings Time (EDT), Eastern Standard Time (EST), or other as designated by the Designer. 1.14 Contractor - The Contractor shall be that party identified as such in the Contract Documents. 1.15 Days - Unless otherwise indicated, the term "days" shall mean consecutive calendar days. 1.16 Daylight Hours - The hours or portions of hours between sunrise and sunset local time. 1.17 Designer(s) — The person or firm designated as the Designer in the Contract Documents, or their authorized representatives. The Designer(s), as referred to herein, shall mean architect, landscape architect, and /or engineer. They will be referred to hereinafter as if each were of the singular number and masculine gender. On projects for which there is no Designer designated references to approvals or authorizations of or by the Designer shall be interpreted to refer to approvals or authorizations of Owner or Owner's designee. 1.18 Drawings - The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents, wherever located and whenever issued, showing the design, location, and dimensions of the Work, and generally including plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules and diagrams. A list of the Drawings is contained in the Contract Documents. 1.19 Field Order - A written order issued by the Designer which clarifies or interprets the Contract Documents or orders minor changes in the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. See paragraph 14.2. 1.20 Final Completion - The point at which the Contractor has completed the Work, with the exception of guaranty and warranty obligations and as determined by the Designer and becomes entitled to final payment upon the recommendation of the Designer and determination by the Owner. 1.21 The words "furnish," "furnish and install," "install," and "provide" or words with similar meanings shall be interpreted, unless otherwise stated, to mean furnish and install complete, in place and ready for service. 1.22 Liquidated Damages — See paragraph 13.18 of these General Conditions. 1.23 Modification - (A) a written amendment to the Contract Documents signed by the Owner and the Contractor and identified therein as such, (B) a Change Order, (C) Construction Change Directive, or (D) a Field Order. A Modification may only be issued after execution of the Agreement. 1.24 Notice of Award - The written notice by the Owner to the Contractor that the Contractor is the successful Bidder and that upon compliance with the conditions precedent to be fulfilled by Revised 10/17 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 the Contractor within the time specified, the Owner will execute and deliver the Agreement to him. 1.25 Notice to Proceed - See paragraph 13.3. 1.26 Owner - The Owner is the person designated as such in the Agreement. 1.27 Owner's Authorized Representative - A person, or persons, employed by the Owner and designated from time to time by written notice to the Contractor to administer the Contract Documents, and to observe and monitor the Work on behalf of the Owner with authority and responsibility as herein specified. 1.28 Notice - The term "notice" or "written notice" as used herein shall mean and include all written notices, demands, instructions, and claims approvals and disapprovals furnished by the Owner or the Designer to obtain compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, as well as all written notices, demands, instructions and claims furnished by the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents. Where notice is required under the terms of the Contract Documents written notice shall always be required, and oral or "constructive" notice shall be insufficient and ineffective as notice. Email or other electronic delivery shall be insufficient and ineffective as notice unless specifically allowed by the Supplementary Conditions or a Modification to the Agreement. Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served on the date that it is delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm, to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, to an authorized representative of such individual, firm, or corporation, or on the date that it is mailed by registered or certified mail, return receipt requested, addressed to the last business address of such individual, firm, or corporation known to the person giving the notice. Written notice may also be given by facsimile transmission, provided that proof of delivery is obtained. In the case of delivery in person, such delivery shall not be effective unless and until a written and signed receipt showing the date and time of delivery is obtained. 1.29 Project - The total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part. 1.30 Project Expediter — As used herein, is an entity stated in the Contract Documents, designated to effectively facilitate scheduling and coordination of Work activities. For the purpose of a single prime contract, the single prime contractor is designated as the Project Expediter. For the purpose of a project involving separate prime contracts, the Contractor for general work shall be designated as the Project Expediter unless otherwise indicated in the Supplementary General Conditions. See paragraph 7.27. 1.31 Project Manager - That person designated by the Contractor in accordance with paragraph 7.2 who shall be in general charge of the Work and its performance and who shall have the authority set forth in the last sentence of paragraph 7.2. 1.32 Request for Information - A written communication from the Contractor to the Designer for any interpretation of, or information needed, required, or desired under the Contract Documents. The Owner reserves the right to determine the reasonable format and contents required for a Request for Information. In any Request for Information, the Contractor shall state a reasonable date by which a response is necessary in order to avoid delay in progress on the Work and shall Revised 10/17 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 make such request sufficiently in advance of such date as to avoid any such delay. The Designer shall respond in writing to the Request for Information by the date stated by the Contractor unless he cannot reasonably do so, in which case he shall prior to that date notify the Contractor of the date by which he can reasonably respond. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any additional time for the completion of the Work or any portion thereof by reason of the Designer's failure to respond if he has not submitted his Request for Information sufficiently in advance to allow the Designer a reasonable time within which to respond. 1.33 Request for Payment - The form, in the form of AIA Document G702 (latest ed.) or other published document approved by Owner, which is to be used by the Contractor in requesting progress payments and which is to include a Schedule of Values as required by the Contract Documents and an affidavit of the Contractor that progress payments theretofore received from the Owner on account of the Work have been applied by the Contractor to discharge in full all the Contractor's obligations incurred in connection with Work covered by all prior applications for payment. See paragraph 20.2. 1.34 Resident Superintendent - That person designated by the Contractor in accordance with paragraph 7.2 who has day -to -day responsibility for the prosecution of the Work and the obtaining of proper materials and equipment, and adequate labor and who shall have the authority set forth in the last sentence of paragraph 7.2. 1.35 Schedule of Values - Any breakdown of the Contract Price which may be required by the Contract Documents, and designated as such. See paragraph 20.1. 1.36 Specifications - That portion of the Contract Documents consisting generally of the written requirements for materials, equipment, construction systems, standards, and workmanship for the Work and performance of related services. 1.37 Subcontractor - A person, firm, or corporation who has entered into a direct contract with the Contractor to perform any of the Work at the Project. 1.38 Submittal - Shop drawings, product data, samples, and other documents required by the Contract Documents to be submitted by the Contractor to the Designer. 1.39 Submittal Register - See paragraph 13.2 of these General Conditions. 1.40 Substantial Completion - The point at which the Work, and Work by other Contractors on or in connection with the Project, as determined by the Designer, is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents that it can be beneficially occupied by the Owner, and the Work can be utilized by the Owner for its intended use, and all necessary permits and permissions for Beneficial Occupancy and utilization having been obtained by the Contractor. All operations and maintenance manuals, Owner training, and as -built drawings must be submitted prior to Substantial Completion being achieved. 1.41 Sub - subcontractor - A person or entity that has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform any of the Work at the Project. Revised 10/17 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 7 1.42 Work - The construction and services required by the Contract Documents, including all labor, materials, equipment, and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations. 1.43 All references in the Contract Documents to the masculine shall be interpreted as including the feminine or neuter and all references in the Contract Documents to the singular or the plural shall be interpreted as including the other, as may be appropriate in the reasonable interpretation of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 2. CORRELATION, INTERPRETATION AND INTENT OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 2.1 It is the intent of the Specifications and Drawings and other Contract Documents to describe a complete Project in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2.2 The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. If the Contractor finds a conflict, error or discrepancy in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall notify the Designer in writing before proceeding with the Work affected thereby. In resolving such conflicts, errors and discrepancies, the Contract Documents shall be given preference in the following order: Construction Contract, Modifications, Addenda, General Conditions, Specifications, and Drawings. Figure dimensions on Drawings shall govern over scale dimensions, and detailed Drawings shall govern over general Drawings. Any Work that may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents as being required to produce the intended result shall be supplied whether or not it is specifically called for. Work, materials or equipment described in words which, so applied, have a well -known technical trade meaning shall be deemed to refer to such meaning and to incorporate any recognized standards which are a part of such meaning if not otherwise defined within the Contract Documents. 2.3 Miscellaneous items, accessories and work which are not specifically mentioned, but which are essential to produce a complete and properly operating installation, or useable structure or plant providing the indicated function shall be furnished and installed without change in the Contract Price. Such miscellaneous items and accessories shall be of the same quality standards, including material, style, finish, strength, class, weight and other applicable characteristics, as specified for the major component of which the miscellaneous item or accessory is an essential part, and shall be approved by the Designer before installation. This requirement is not intended to include major components not covered by or inferable from the Contract Documents. 2.4 The Work of all trades under the Contract Documents shall be coordinated by the Contractor in such a manner as to obtain the best workmanship possible for the entire Project and all components of the Work shall be installed or erected in accordance with the best practices of the particular trade. 2.5 The Contractor shall fully complete the Work and shall be responsible for all of the Work under the Contract Documents to which the Construction Contract applies. If the Contractor is prevented from doing so by any limitation of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall immediately give notice thereof to the Designer and the Owner in writing. Revised 10/17 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 S 2.6 Standard specifications or manufacturers' literature, when referenced, shall be of the latest revision or printing unless otherwise stated and is intended to establish the minimum requirements acceptable. 2.7 For those materials specified without the use of brand names, the Contractor shall submit within thirty (30) days after his receiving the Construction Contract for signatures, any product that meets the express requirements of the Specifications. Such Submittal shall include manufacturer's data, test reports, performance data and certifications, samples, erection details, and other applicable information as required to permit determination by the Designer whether such proposed products are suitable. The Designer shall be the sole judge as to the suitability of any proposed product. The burden of proof of quality rests with the Contractor. 2.8 The Contractor is required to examine and read the complete set of Contract Documents for information concerning the Work, because some of the Work for which the Contractor will be responsible may be indicated on or in documentation applying primarily to the Work of one or more other separate prime contractors. No allowance will be made for the Contractor's failure to become familiar with the complete set of project documents. 2.9 Contractor's requests for clarification or information shall clearly define the cause(s) of Contractor's request and, as appropriate, shall include Contractor's interpretation and Contractor's proposed solution. ARTICLE 3. FAMILIARITY WITH WORK, CONDITIONS AND LAWS 3.1 The Contractor has investigated prior to bidding and is satisfied with all conditions affecting the Work, including but not restricted to those bearing upon transportation, disposal, handling and storage of materials, availability of labor, water, electrical power, roads and uncertainties of weather, or similar physical conditions at the Project site, and the character of equipment and facilities needed prior to and during prosecution of the Work. The Contractor is satisfied as to the character, quality and quantity of surface and subsurface materials or obstacles to be encountered insofar as this information is reasonably ascertainable from inspection of the Project site, including all exploratory work done by the Owner, as well as from information presented by the Contract Documents, or any other information made available to the Contractor prior to receipt of bids. Any failure by the Contractor to become acquainted with the available information shall not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility for estimating properly the difficulty or cost of successfully performing the Work. 3.2 The Contractor shall be entitled to make all inferences from the Contract Documents that would reasonably be made by a contractor having knowledge and experience with similar work; however, the Contractor shall not be entitled to infer from the Contract Documents any fact or condition which would not be inferred by a contractor having knowledge and experience with similar work and the Contractor shall be required to obtain independently such other information as a knowledgeable and experienced contractor would prudently obtain in order to evaluate any such condition. 3.3 The Contractor specifically acknowledges familiarity with all Federal, State, and local laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations which may in any manner affect those engaged or employed in the Work, or the materials or equipment in or about the Work, or in any way affect the conduct of the Work and agrees that the Contractor and the Contractor's employees, subcontractors, Revised 10/17 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 W and suppliers will, at all times, comply with same. If the Contractor shall discover any provisions in the Contract Documents which are contrary to or inconsistent with any such law, ordinance, rule, or regulation, the Contractor shall immediately give notice thereof to the Designer and the Owner in writing, identifying any items of Work affected, and the Contractor shall not proceed until the Contractor has received written direction from the Designer with respect to these items. If the Contractor performs contrary to or inconsistently with any such law, ordinance, rule, or regulation without such written direction, the Contractor shall bear all costs which are a consequence of such performance. 3.4 At times selected by the Designer after execution by the Contractor of the Construction Agreement, a pre- construction conference shall be scheduled and conducted for the benefit of the Project. ARTICLE 4. BONDS 4.1 A performance bond in the full amount of the Contract Price shall be required of the Contractor to guarantee the faithful performance of the Work in compliance with the Contract Documents, in such form as may be required by law and approved by the Owner. The bond shall be dated the same date as the Construction Contract and must be accompanied by a current copy of the power of attorney for the attorney -in -fact executing such bond on behalf of a surety company licensed to do business in the state of North Carolina. 4.2 A payment bond in the full amount of the Contract Price shall be required of the Contractor to guarantee the payment of all labor and material costs or claims in connection with compliance with the Contract. The payment bond shall be in such form as may be required by law and approved by the Owner. Said bond shall be dated and executed in the same manner as the performance bond in paragraph 4.1. ARTICLE 5. INSURANCE AND INDEMNITY 5.1 CONTRACTOR PROVIDED INSURANCE The Contractor shall, without limiting its obligations or liabilities, procure, pay for and maintain such insurance as is required by law and as is required by this Agreement to protect the Contractor and the Owner from claims for damages for bodily injury, including death, and from claims for property damage which may arise from the Contractor's or its representatives', consultants', Subcontractors', agents', or employees' operations under this Agreement. Such insurance shall be of the kinds and have limits of liability and coverages not less than the minimum limits hereinafter specified or required by law, whichever is greater. The Owner makes no representation as to the adequacy or sufficiency of such coverages. The following requirements shall in no way be construed to limit or eliminate the liability of the Contractor, which arises from performance of Work under the Agreement. The Contractor is strictly responsible for any losses, claims, and costs of any kind which exceed the Contractor's limits of liability, or which may be outside the coverage scope of the policies. The insurance specified shall be provided by an insurer approved by the Owner, authorized to do such business in the State of North Carolina, and on terms approved by the Owner. Insurance companies utilized shall have a minimum rating of A- and Class VII as evaluated by the most current A.M. Best Rating Guide. If the insurer has a Best Rating less than A- and Class VII, the Revised 10/17 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 10 Contractor must receive specific written approval from the Owner prior to proceeding with any Work under the Agreement. All agents and brokers shall hold valid licenses from the State of North Carolina. Before commencing mobilization to the Project site and not later than 7 days after the receipt of the Construction Contract by the Contractor for signatures, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner a certificate or certificates of insurance in a form satisfactory to the Owner. Upon request of the Owner, the Contractor shall provide the Owner with certified copies of the insurance policies required by this Article, including without limitation declaration pages, conditions, exclusions and endorsements, and confirmation that each policy premium has been paid for the required term of this Agreement. A copy of the umbrella policy shall be provided to the Orange County Risk Manager. Certificates shall be signed by a person authorized by that insurer to bind coverage on its behalf. All insurance policies shall provide, as evidenced by Certificates of Insurance, that the insurance shall not be canceled, reduced, restricted, or changed in any way without at least 30 days prior written notice to the Owner. With regard to expiration, cancellation, reduction, restriction, or any other change, certificates shall state: "Should any of the following described policies be canceled before expiration date or be due to expire within 30 days, the insurer shall mail 30 days prior written notice to named certificate holder." In the event of any such cancellation, non - renewal, reduction, restriction, or change in any insurance, the Contractor is obligated to replace such insurance within 7 days without a gap in coverage and file accordingly such notice with the Owner, and other interested parties. Failing immediate receipt of evidence of such replacement of insurance the Owner reserves the right to procure such insurance as the Owner considers desirable and the Contractor shall pay or reimburse the cost of the premium in respect thereof. It is expressly provided, however, that any action or inaction on the part of the Owner in this respect shall in no way change or reduce the Contractor's responsibilities and liabilities under this Agreement. Self- funded, policy fronting, or other non -risk transfer insurance mechanisms are not acceptable without prior written approval of the Owner. Full disclosure of such a program must be made prior to commencing mobilization to the Project site. Failure to make a full disclosure constitutes a material breach of the Agreement, justifying termination for default. The Contractor shall name the Owner, the Designer, the Designer's consultants, and the Construction Manager as additional insureds under all its insurance contracts (except workers' compensation) with respect to and including without limitation liability arising out of activities performed by or on behalf of the Contractor, products and completed operations of the Contractor, and automobiles owned, hired, leased, or borrowed by the Contractor. The coverage shall contain no special limitations on the scope of protection afforded to additional insureds. For any claims related to this Project, the Contractor's insurance or self- insurance shall be primary and noncontributory with respect to the Owner's insurance. Any insurance or self - insurance maintained by the Owner shall be excess and noncontributory with respect to the Contractor's insurance. All policies of insurance shall contain a clause waiving rights of subrogation against the Owner, unless the Owner approves otherwise in writing. Limits of coverage are not to be amended by deductible clauses of any nature without the express written consent of the Owner. Revised 10/17 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 11 The Contractor shall be solely responsible for any deductible assumptions that may exist in any insurance policies required under this Agreement. In addition, the Contractor shall be responsible and shall not be reimbursed for any losses arising from any risk or exposure not insured as required herein, or not covered as a result of a normal policy exclusion or that falls within the self- insured retention, if Contractor self- insured. The Contractor's insurance shall apply separately to each insured against whom claim is made or suit is brought, except with respect to the limits of the insurer's liability. The claim provisions in the Contractor's insurance policies must specifically state the insurance company or Contractor's Third Party Administrator, if self- insured, has both the right and duty to adjust a claim and provide defense. The policies shall not contain any provision or definition which would serve to exclude or eliminate from coverage third party claims, including exclusions of claims for bodily or other injury to shareholders, partners, officers, directors, or employees of the insured, the premises owner, real estate manager, or the insured's Subcontractor, or any family relative of such persons. If the policies contain any warranty stating that coverage is null and void (or words to that effect) if the Contractor does not comply with the most stringent regulations governing the Work, it shall be modified so that coverage shall be afforded in all cases except for the Contractor's willful or intentional noncompliance with applicable government regulations. Any failure by any person to comply with reporting or other provisions of the policy including breach of warranties, shall not affect coverage provided to the Owner and its representatives, officials, and employees. The insolvency or bankruptcy of the Insured or of the Insured's estate shall not relieve the insurance companies of their obligations under these policies. Any clauses to the contrary are unacceptable and must be stricken. Failure to comply with these requirements shall be a material breach of this Agreement justifying termination for default. 5.1.1 Worker's Compensation and Employers' Liability Insurance The Contractor and its Subcontractors shall procure and maintain Workers' Compensation Insurance in the amount and type required by the State of North Carolina and federal law for all employees employed under the Agreement who may come within the protection of Workers' Compensation Laws and covering all operations under the Agreement whether performed by the Contractor or by his Subcontractors. In jurisdictions not providing complete Workers' Compensation protection, the Contractor and his Subcontractors shall maintain employers' liability insurance in an amount, form, company, and agency satisfactory to the State of North Carolina and the Owner for the benefit of all employees not protected by Workers' Compensation Laws and covering all operations under the Agreement whether performed by the Contractor or by his Subcontractors. The Contractor shall pay such assessments as will protect the Contractor and the Owner from claims under the Workers' Compensation Laws, workers' or workmen's compensation disability benefits, and other similar employee benefit acts. The current Experience Modification Factor shall be indicated on the Certificate of Insurance. Coverage under this section shall be as required by federal and state Workers' Compensation and Occupational Disease Statutes, and shall have minimum limits as follows: Coverage A: Statutory, State of North Carolina Employers' Liability: Each Accident $1,000,000 Disease - Policy Limit $1,000,000 Disease - Each Employee $1,000,000 Such insurance shall include Voluntary Compensation coverage, a Waiver of Subrogation Revised 10/17 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 12 in favor of the Owner as well as other endorsements that may be required by applicable jurisdictions. 5.1.2 Automobile Liability Insurance The Contractor shall procure and maintain automobile insurance against liability for bodily injury and property damage as described below, that may arise with respect to the Work being performed under the Agreement, and as will provide protection from claims which may arise out of or result from the Contractor's performance of the Work and the Contractor's other obligations under the Agreement, whether such performance of the Work is by the Contractor, by any representative or Subcontractor, by anyone, both officially and personally, directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable. This policy of insurance shall carry the following minimum Limit of Liability: Combined Single Limit $1,000,000. The policy of insurance shall contain or be endorsed to include the following: a) owned, hired, and non -owned automobile liability. b) If the policy contains a warranty stating that coverage is null and void (or words to that effect) if the transporter does not comply with the most stringent regulations governing the Work, it shall be modified so that coverage shall be afforded in all cases except for the transporter's willful or intentional noncompliance with applicable government regulations. Any failure by any party to comply with reporting or other provisions of the policy including breach of warranties, shall not affect coverage provided to the Owner and its representatives, officials, and employees. No subcontracting of waste hauling shall be permitted without prior, written approval of the Owner. 5.1.3 General Liability This policy must be written on an Occurrence basis, with the following minimum Limits of Liability: General Aggregate per project $2,000,000.00 Products /Completed Operations Aggregate $2,000,000.00 Bodily Injury and Property Damage csl /each occurrence $1,000,000.00 Personal Injury and Advertising Injury $2,000,000.00 The policy of insurance shall contain or be endorsed to include the following: a) Blanket Contractual Liability covering Contractor's indemnification obligations under this Agreement, in accordance with ISO policy form CG 00 01. Modifications to the standard provision will not be acceptable if they serve to reduce coverage. b) Premises /Operations Liability. c) Explosion, collapse, and underground fault. d) Independent Contractors and Independent Subcontractors coverage. e) Broad Form Property Damage. Revised 10/17 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 13 f) Personal Injury g) Cross Liability /Severability of Interest clause. h) Employer's Stop -Gap Liability endorsement, if applicable. i) Amendment of the Pollution Exclusion Endorsement to allow coverage for bodily injury or property damage caused by heat, smoke, or fumes from a hostile fire. j) Designated General Aggregate Limit Endorsement if required by the Contract Documents. Coverage shall remain continuously in effect and without interruption for at least 6 years from the date of the Notice of Award and shall include coverage for exposures arising from operations that have been completed. The Contractor shall furnish the Owner and each other additional insured listed in the Agreement to whom the Certificates have been issued, evidence satisfactory to the Owner of continuation of such insurance at the date of Preliminary Acceptance and each year thereafter. 5.1.4 Pollution Legal Liability (PLL) Pollution Legal Liability coverage will be provided if required by the Supplementary General Conditions. 5.1.5 Umbrella Liability The Contractor shall maintain an occurrence basis (as distinguished from a "claims made" basis) Umbrella Liability policy (true follow form) over the underlying General Liability, Automobile Liability, and Employer's Liability, with the following limits of liability: Each Occurrence $3,000,000, Aggregate $3,000,000. On a fully insured basis such coverage will be subject to a deductible no greater than $10,000 per occurrence where coverage is not provided by the underlying insurance, but is provided by the Umbrella Liability policy. The Contractor may use any combination of primary and umbrella insurance policies to comply with the insurance requirements, provided the resulting insurance is equivalent to the insurance stated herein. All Occupational Disease exclusions must be deleted. Any Pollution Exclusion must be amended to allow coverage for bodily injury or property damage caused by spill, upset, overturn, heat, smoke, or fumes from a hostile fire. 5.1.6 Property Insurance The Contractor shall purchase All Risk Property Insurance on a Completed Value Form in the names of the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and sub - subcontractors as their interests may appear with limits as follows: a) Full insurance value of the Work, or b) Amount equal to the Contract Price for the Work, whichever is higher. Revised 10/17 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 14 The Contractor is responsible for all physical damage to owned or rented machinery, tools, equipment, forms, and other items owned, rented or used by the Contractor and /or Subcontractor(s) in the performance of the Work. The insurance coverage evidencing such shall include a waiver of subrogation in favor of the Owner. 5.1.7 Valuable Papers and Records The Contractor shall provide valuable papers and records insurance with coverage in an amount commensurate with project scope and set forth in the Supplementary General Conditions. 5.1.8 Claims The Contractor shall notify the Owner within 24 hours of any claims or alleged claims received by the Contractor covered by any of the policies of insurance required in this Agreement. The Contractor shall provide a written copy of the claim or alleged claim to the Owner within 3 days of the Contractor's receipt of the claim or alleged claim. If a claim is settled to the satisfaction of the claimant, the Contractor shall submit a copy of the claimant's release to the Owner. If a claim or alleged claim is rejected by the Contractor and /or its insurance company, the Contractor shall immediately report this fact to the Owner. Should 30 days elapse after the claim or alleged claim has been received by the Contractor, and the Contractor is not able to report a settlement or rejection of the claim, it shall report to the Owner the steps being taken with respect to the claim. Without limiting the foregoing, the Contractor shall notify in writing the county risk manager of any paid or incurred claims which may impair annual aggregate or general liability. 5.1.9 Deductibles and Self- insured Retentions Any deductibles or self- insured retentions must be declared to and approved by the Owner. At the option of the Owner, either: a) the insurer shall reduce to a maximum of $250,000 or eliminate such deductibles or self- insured retentions with respect to the Owner, or (b) the Contractor shall provide evidence of collateral provided to insurers or procure a bond guaranteeing payment of losses and related investigations, claim administration, and defense expenses within the deductible or self- insured retention amount. Any self- insured retention or deductible amount on the policy shall not reduce the amount of collectible limits or liability. 5.1.10 Subcontractors The Contractor shall include all Subcontractors as Insureds under its policies, or shall furnish separate certificates, policies, and endorsements for each Subcontractor the Contractor intends to use. If a Subcontractor does not take out insurance in his own name and the Contractor wishes to provide insurance protection for such Subcontractor and such Subcontractor's employees, the Contractor shall either (a) procure appropriate policies in the name of the Subcontractor, or (b) cause a rider or riders to be attached to the Contractor's policies which shall identify the Subcontractor thereby covered; provided, however, in the case of the latter option, such a rider need not be attached to the Contractor's workers' compensation policy if such policy by its terms is sufficiently broad to cover the employees of all Subcontractors performing Work under the Contract Documents. Except as otherwise approved by the Owner in writing, Limits of Liability and coverage scope must be at a minimum as stringent as required of the Contractor by the Contract Documents. All Work performed for the Contractor by any Subcontractor shall be pursuant to an appropriate agreement between the Contractor and the Revised 10/17 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 15 Subcontractor which shall contain provisions that waive all rights the contracting parties may have against one another for damages caused by fire or other perils covered by insurance as provided herein. Insurance monies received from any loss shall be divided as the respective interest of the parties affected shall appear. 5.2 OWNER CONTROLLED PROJECT SPECIFIC INSURANCE In the event the Owner elects to purchase project- specific insurance affording coverage to the Contractor and Subcontractors, the terms and conditions of such coverage shall be set forth in the Supplementary Conditions. 5.3 CONTRACTOR AS JOINT VENTURE If the Contractor is completing this Project on a joint venture basis, both joint venture partners retain all liabilities assumed by this Agreement, individually and collectively. This may include, but is not limited to, all premiums due, deductibles /self- insured retentions, coinsurance provisions, claim provisions, insurance policy conditions, and indemnification provisions hereunder. Evidence of a Blanket Joint Venture Endorsement must be obtained from the General Liability and Contractor's Pollution Legal Liability carriers of each joint venture partner for a period of 6 years after completion of the Project, substantially as follows: With respect to "your work ", and the "products- completed operations hazard ", you are an insured for your liability arising out of the conduct of any partnership or joint venture of which you were a partner or member, even though this partnership or joint venture is not shown as a Named Insured in the Declarations. This coverage is excess over any available liability purchased specifically to insure the partnership or joint venture. This coverage will not inure to the benefit of any other party except you." 5.4 INDEMNIFICATION The Contractor, to the fullest extent not expressly prohibited by law, shall defend, indemnify, and save harmless the Owner, the Designer, the Construction Manager and their respective officials, officers, employees, and agents from and against any and all liabilities (foreseeable or unforeseeable), penalties, fines, liens, forfeitures, demands, claims, causes of actions, suits, judgments, and costs and expenses incidental thereto, (including, without limitation, amounts paid pursuant to investigations, defense or settlements, and reasonable attorneys' fees), which any or all of them may hereafter suffer, incur, be responsible for, or pay out as a result of but not limited to: a) bodily injury (including sickness, disease, or death) to any person including but not limited to, the Contractor's employees or its representatives while on the site of the Project; or b) actual or alleged damage (including loss of use) to any property (public or private, including the Project or other property on the Project site); or c) contamination of or adverse effects on the environment arising directly or indirectly out of or in connection with the performance of the Work, including but not limited to any hazardous or toxic waste, substance, or constituent of any substance subject to regulation under CERCLA, RCRA, TSCA, and other Federal and state authorities that is spilled, released, threatening to release, or disposed of or destroyed by the Contractor or its Subcontractors on or off the site of the Project or while in transport to or from the site; or Revised 10/17 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 16 d) any violation or alleged violation of laws and regulations, arising out of or in any way connected with the Work, caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, any Subcontractor or supplier or any representatives of the Contractor. The Contractor shall not be required to indemnify the Owner against losses resulting from a breach of this Agreement by the Owner or its other agents and contractors, or resulting from negligence, misconduct or violation of laws on the part of the Owner or its other agents and contractors. e) upon completion of the Work the Contractor shall execute an affidavit, indemnification, and release stating there are no unpaid debts for any work that has been done or materials that have been furnished to the Project prior to and as of the date of substantial completion and further stating that Contractor shall indemnify, save and protect Owner and Owner's lender, if any, harmless from and against any and all claims, liabilities, liens, losses, damages, causes of action, and expenses (including court costs and reasonable attorney's fees related thereto) arising out of, in connection with, or resulting from any such claims, liabilities, liens, losses, damages, causes of action, or expenses. Such affidavit, indemnification, and release shall be in a form and substance acceptable to Owner. By executing this Agreement Contractor acknowledges the receipt of adequate consideration in return for said release. The Contractor further agrees to obtain, maintain, and pay for such liability insurance coverages and endorsements as will insure the provisions of this paragraph 5.4. Furthermore, the Contractor agrees to be liable for and to indemnify and reimburse the Owner for all legal fees and disbursements paid or incurred to enforce the provisions of this paragraph. The indemnification obligations under this paragraph shall not be limited in any way by the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable under worker's compensation acts, disability benefit acts, other employment benefit acts, or the amount of insurance carried or recovered. The Owner acknowledges that hazardous or toxic waste, material, chemicals, compounds or substances, or other environmental hazards, contamination or pollution, (referred to hereinafter as "environmental hazards ") may be present at the Project site that were not created, generated, or released at the Project site by the Contractor or its Subcontractors, agents or employees, acting alone or in concert with others. Unless the remediation, abatement or handling of such environmental hazards is part of the scope of the Work under this Agreement, then upon the discovery of such environmental hazards, the Contractor shall immediately, and in no event more than three days later, give notice to the Owner of the environmental hazards before they are disturbed. The Owner and the Designer shall thereupon promptly investigate the environmental hazards, and make such changes in the Drawings and /or Specifications as they may find necessary to abate, remediate, isolate or handle the environmental hazards. Any increase or decrease in the Contract Price or the Contract Time resulting from such changes shall be adjusted in the manner provided herein for adjustments as to extra and /or additional Work and changes. It is agreed that the Contractor shall have no liability under this Agreement for any environmental hazards existing prior to the date that Work commences under this Agreement unless the Contractor or its Subcontractors, agents or employees, acting alone or in concert with others, by their own negligence or misconduct, release or expose the Owner or third parties to the environmental hazards. The provisions of this paragraph shall survive the termination or cancellation or completion of this Agreement. 5.5 RISK MANAGEMENT POLICY Revised 10/17 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 17 The Orange County Risk Management Policy shall not apply to construction contracts for amounts over $250,000. The terms of these General Conditions related to insurance shall be the sole authority governing insurance requirements for such contracts. ARTICLE 6. OTHER RECORD DOCUMENTS AND SUBMITTALS 6.1 The Designer shall furnish to the Contractor the number of copies of Drawings and Specifications stated in the Contract Documents. Additional copies of Drawings and Specifications may be obtained at the cost of reproduction and handling. 6.2 The Contractor shall submit to the Designer all Submittals required by the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall submit at least three (3) reproducible prints of all shop drawings. The Contractor shall submit samples in quantities required by the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall submit product data in at least five (5) copies. All shop drawings shall be reviewed by the Contractor and shall bear the Contractor's stamp of approval before being forwarded to the Designer. Submittals shall be submitted in such time as to cause no delay to the Work or any part thereof and in accordance with the Contract Construction Schedule and Submittal Register. The Designer shall review the submittal with reasonable promptness, noting desired corrections, if any. The Designer shall retain two (2) copies of the submittal and shall return the balance of the reviewed submittal to the Contractor for action. The Contractor shall furnish any corrected submittal to the Designer. The Designer shall retain two (2) copies of the corrected submittal and will return the balance of the reviewed submittal to the Contractor. All substitutions prior to the receipt of bids shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents. Refer to Instructions to Bidders, Substitutions. The Contractor acknowledges that the processing of shop drawings and other submittals is directly impacted by the clarity, completeness, and accuracy of said documents and that it is the Contractor's responsibility to (i) review and coordinate each submittal with all other related or affected Work and (ii) approve each submittal before submitting same to the Designer for approval. 6.3 No substitutions and no deviations from any requirement of the Contract Documents shall be deemed allowed unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Designer and the Owner in writing of such deviations at the time of submittal and the Designer and the Owner have given written and specific approval to the substitutions or deviations. In proposing a deviation or substitution the Contractor warrants to the Owner, notwithstanding any review, allowance or approval by the Designer or the Owner that the deviation or substitution is at least equal to or better in quality and for the purpose intended, and that Contractor shall not by reason of any such review, allowance or approval be relieved from any obligation or responsibility contained in the Contract Documents. 6.4 Review of submittal by the Designer shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from responsibility for compliance with terms or designs of the Contract Documents nor from responsibility for errors of any sort in the submittal. 6.5 The Contractor shall keep one record copy marked "As- Built" of all Specifications, Drawings, Addenda, Modifications, and Submittals at the Project in good order and annotated at least monthly to show all changes made during the construction process. Such monthly annotations Revised 10/17 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 S and their approval by the Designer shall be a condition precedent to approval by the Designer of each monthly Request for Payment. Said record copy shall be stored at the Project and fully protected from damage by fire or other hazard. This record copy shall be available to the Designer and Owner for inspection at all times and shall be delivered to the Designer for the Owner's purposes prior to the Designer's certifying Substantial Completion of the Work. 6.6 At completion of the Project and before Final Payment, the Contractor shall assemble and deliver to the Owner one complete set of all as -built drawings and one complete set of all approved submittals, product data, and samples which were reviewed by the Designer. These drawings and submittals shall be on paper, or in electronic or other media if required by the Supplementary Conditions. These drawings and submittals shall be categorized and packaged as directed by the Designer. ARTICLE 7. CONTRACTOR 7.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work efficiently and with the Contractor's best skill and attention. Except as may be set forth specifically in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and for safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. The Contractor shall be responsible to see that the finished Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. 7.2 The Contractor shall appoint a Project Manager and shall keep on the Project at all times during its progress a competent Resident Superintendent and necessary assistants who shall not be replaced without prior written approval by the Owner except under extraordinary circumstances, in which event immediate written notice shall be given to the Designer and the Owner. The Project Manager and the Resident Superintendent may be the same person or different persons. At any time, the Owner, in its sole and absolute discretion, may require the Contractor to replace the Project Manager or Resident Superintendent with an experienced and competent person or persons upon seven (7) days written notice from the Owner to the Contractor. Such replacement shall be at the Contractor's expense and at no cost to the Owner. Both the Project Manager and the Resident Superintendent shall have authority to act on behalf of the Contractor, and instructions, directions or notices given to either of them shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. 7.3 The Contractor shall provide sufficient competent and suitably qualified personnel, equipment, and supplies to lay out the Work and perform construction as required by the Contract Documents. The Contractor will at all times maintain good discipline and order at the site, and will comply with all applicable OSHA standards. Any person employed by the Contractor, any Subcontractor, or any sub - subcontractor who, in the opinion of the Designer or the Owner, does not perform his Work in a proper and skillful manner or is intemperate or disorderly shall, at the written request of the Owner or Designer, be removed forthwith by the Contractor, Subcontractor, or sub - subcontractor employing such person without cost to the Owner, and shall not be employed again in any portion of the Work without the written approval of the Owner or Designer. Should the Contractor fail to remove such person or persons or fail to furnish suitable and sufficient personnel for the proper prosecution of the Work within three (3) days after written Revised 10/17 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 19 order, the Owner may withhold further payment by written notice until compliance with such order. 7.4 If, in the opinion of the Designer or the Owner, any Subcontractor on the Project is incompetent or otherwise unsatisfactory, he shall be replaced by the Contractor with no increase in the Contract Price if and when directed by the Designer or the Owner in writing. 7.5 The Contractor shall furnish all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools appliances, fuel, light, heat, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the execution, maintenance, initial operation, and completion of the Work, other than those specifically excluded by the Contract Documents and to be furnished by the Owner or others. When use or storage of hazardous materials or equipment or methods of more than ordinary risk are necessary in accomplishing the Work, the Contractor shall give the Owner and Designer reasonable advance notice. If any materials are to be furnished or installed by the Owner or others under the terms of the Contract Documents, said materials shall be made available to the Contractor at the location(s) specified in the Contract Documents. All costs of handling, transportation from the specified location to the Project, storage, and installing of Owner - furnished materials shall be included in the Contract Price. The Contractor shall be responsible for any demurrage, damage, loss, or other deficiencies which may occur during the Contractor's handling, storage, or use of such Owner - furnished material. The Owner shall deduct from any monies due or to become due the Contractor any cost incurred by the Owner in making good any such damage, loss, or efficiency All equipment which is proposed to be used in the Work shall be of sufficient size and in such mechanical condition as to meet the requirements of the Work and produce a satisfactory quality of work. Equipment used on any portion of the Work shall be such that no injury to previously completed Work, adjacent property, or existing facilities shall result from its use. When the methods and equipment to be used by the Contractor accomplishing the Work are not prescribed in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall be free to use any methods or equipment that will accomplish the Work in conformity with the requirements of the Contract Documents. When the Contract Documents specify the use of certain methods and equipment, such methods and equipment shall be used unless others are authorized by the Designer. If the Contractor desires to use a method or type of equipment other than specified in the Contract Documents, the Contractor may request authority from the Designer to do so. The request shall be in writing and shall include a full description of the methods and equipment proposed and of the reasons for desiring to make the change. If approval is given, it shall be on the condition that the Contractor shall be fully responsible for producing Work in conformity with the requirements of the Contract Documents. If, after trial use of the substituted methods or equipment, the Designer determines that the Work produced does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall discontinue the use of the substitute method or equipment and shall complete the remaining Work with the specified methods and equipment at no additional cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall remove any deficient Work and replace it with Work of specified quality, or take such other corrective action as the Designer may direct. No change in the Contract Price or in Contract Time shall be made as a result of authorizing a change in methods or equipment under this paragraph. Revised 10/17 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 20 7.6 All materials and equipment shall be new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. When special makes or grades of material which are normally packaged by the supplier or manufacturer are specified or approved, such materials shall be delivered to the Project site in their original packages or containers with seals unbroken and labels intact. Materials shall be so stored as to assure the preservation of their quantity, quality and fitness for the Work. Stored materials, even though approved before storage, may again be inspected by the Designer or Owner prior to their use in the Work and shall meet the requirements of the Contract Documents at the time they are incorporated into the Work. Stored materials shall be located so as to facilitate their prompt inspection. The Contractor shall coordinate the storage of all materials with the Designer and the Owner. Materials to be stored at the Project or on the Owner's property shall not create an obstruction to the Owner's or other contractor's reasonable activities. Private property shall not be used for storage purposes without written permission of the owner or lessee of such property. The Contractor shall make all arrangements and bear all expenses for the storage of materials on private property. Upon request, the Contractor shall furnish the Owner a copy of the property owner's permission. All storage sites on private or the Owner's property shall be restored to their original condition by the Contractor at his entire expense, except as otherwise agreed to (in writing) by the owner or lessee of the property. 7.7 All materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned in accordance with the instructions of the applicable manufacturer, fabricator, or processor, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 7.8 The Contractor will be fully responsible for all acts and omissions of his Subcontractors and of persons directly or indirectly employed by them and of persons for whose acts any of them may be liable to the same extent that the Contractor is responsible for the acts and omissions of the Contractor's own employees. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relationship between any Subcontractor or supplier and the Owner or the Designer, or any obligation on the part of the Owner or the Designer to pay or see to the payment of any money due any such Subcontractor or material furnisher except as may otherwise be required by law. The Owner or the Designer may furnish to any Subcontractor or supplier, to the extent practicable, evidence of amounts paid to the Contractor on account of specific Work done. 7.9 The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors. 7.10 The Contractor agrees to bind specifically every Subcontractor to the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of the Owner and to furnish written evidence thereof to the Designer and the Owner within seven (7) days after written request by the Owner. 7.11 The Contractor shall attend job progress conferences and all other meetings or conferences as directed by the Designer. The Contractor shall be represented at these job progress conferences by a representative having the authority of the Project Manager and by such other representatives as the Designer may direct. Job progress conferences shall be open to Subcontractors, suppliers and any others who may contribute beneficially toward maintaining required job progress, and such personnel shall be encouraged by the Contractor to attend. It shall be the principal purpose of job progress conferences to effect coordination, cooperation and assistance in every practical way toward the end of maintaining progress of the Project on Revised 10/17 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 21 schedule and to complete the Work and the Project by the specified Completion Dates. The Contractor shall be prepared to assess progress of the Work as required in the Contract Documents and to recommend remedial measures for correction of progress as may be appropriate. The Designer shall preside as chairman and arrange for minutes to be taken and circulated. In the event that the prosecution of the Work is discontinued for any reason, the Contractor shall notify the Designer and the Owner at least forty -eight (48) hours in advance of resuming operations. Should the terms of the Contract Documents require completion of one or more portions of the Work for the Beneficial Occupancy of the Owner prior to completion of the entire Work, the Contractor shall complete such portion(s) of the Work on or before the date specified. Such completion shall include the obtaining of all government or other permits, permission, and /or approvals necessary to occupancy. The Contractor shall independently estimate the difficulties involved in arranging the Work to permit such Beneficial Occupancy and shall not claim any additional compensation or time extension by reason of any delay or increased cost due to completing such portion(s) of the Work. The Owner's possession and use of such portion(s) of the Work shall not be deemed an acceptance of any Work not completed in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Owner shall be responsible for the security, maintenance, utilities, and insurance of all portions of the Work completed and beneficially occupied by the Owner. 7.12 The Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties, and assume all costs incident to the use of any invention, design process, or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others, except for inventions, design processes, or devices specified by the Designer in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, the Designer, and anyone directly employed by either of them, from and against all claims, damages, losses and expenses, including attorney's fees and costs of defense, arising out of any infringement or alleged infringement of such rights during or after completion of the Work, and shall defend all such claims in connection with any actual or alleged infringement of such rights. 7.13 The Contractor shall secure and pay for all permits, including without limitation construction permits and licenses, and will pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work. 7.14 The Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations applicable to the Work and shall protect and indemnify the Owner and the Owner's officers, agents, or servants against any claim or liability arising from or based on the violation of any such law, ordinance, regulation, order, or decree, whether by the Contractor or by the Contractor's employees, Subcontractors, sub - subcontractors, or their employees. 7.15 The Contractor shall be responsible for the entire site of the Project (except those under the Beneficial Occupancy of the Owner) and for its reasonable and necessary protection and security, as required by laws or ordinances governing such conditions, or by custom or sound construction practices, and shall share such responsibilities as may be agreed upon among them, or in the absence of such agreement, as may be directed by the Contract Documents, Owner, or Designer. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to the Owner's property, or that of others, by the Contractor or the Contractor's employees, Subcontractors, Revised 10/17 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 22 sub - subcontractors, or their employees or agents, and shall make good such damages. The Contractor shall be responsible for and pay for any such claims against the Owner. 7.16 The Contractor shall protect all landscaping designated to remain in the vicinity of the operations and barricade all walks, roads, and areas as necessary to keep the public away from the construction. 7.17 The Contractor shall provide cover and /or protect all portions of the Work and provide all materials necessary to protect the Work whether performed by the Contractor or any of the Subcontractors or sub - subcontractors. Any Work damaged through the lack of proper protection, or from any other cause, shall be repaired or replaced without extra cost to the Owner or extension to the Contract Time. The Contractor shall maintain the Work during construction and until the Work is accepted. This maintenance shall constitute continuous and effective effort prosecuted day by day, with adequate equipment and forces so that the Work is maintained in satisfactory condition at all times. All costs of maintenance shall be included in the Contract Price and the Contractor will not be paid an additional amount for such effort. Should the Owner or Designer observe that the Contractor at any time has failed to maintain the Work as provided herein, the Designer may immediately notify the Contractor of such noncompliance. Such notification shall specify a reasonable time within which the Contractor shall be required to remedy such unsatisfactory maintenance condition. Should the Contractor fail to properly respond to the Designer's notification, the Owner may, at the Contractor's expense, take such action as it may deem appropriate to remedy the defective maintenance, including suspension of the Contractor's Work or any part thereof. Any such expense incurred by the Owner shall be deducted from monies due or to become due the Contractor. Parking lots, streets, and walks connecting to the Project area shall be protected by the Contractor from deposits of mud, sand, stone, litter, or debris in any form. Pedestrian traffic areas around the construction limits must be maintained in a clean and safe condition at all times with required barricades and covered walkways. When excavation or other operations outside the Project limits is required, the Contractor shall, immediately following that work, return the area to its original condition. All catch basins and storm drain lines in the vicinity of the Project site shall be protected at all times from entry of dirt, rubble and other debris. The residue from the cleaning of trucks, wheelbarrows, concrete buggies, etc. must be prevented from entering the drainage system, and if cleaning is done, the residue must be contained and removed from the Project site with other refuse. 7.18 No burning of refuse or debris shall be allowed inside or around the Project during the course of construction without written authority from authorities having jurisdiction and the Owner. 7.19 The Contractor shall provide for and maintain necessary safety measures and safety programs for the protection of all persons involved with the Work. Such measures and programs shall include the requirements of the most current edition of the CAGC Safety and Health Manual [or the AGC Accident Prevention Manual in Construction], or equivalent requirements, and shall fully comply with all Federal, State, and local laws, rules, regulations, and building Revised 10/17 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 23 code requirements relating to the prevention of accidents or injuries to persons on or about the location of the Work. All trenches, excavations, or other hazards in the vicinity of the Work shall be well barricaded, and properly lighted at night. When Work requires closing of an area normally used by the Owner or the public, the Contractor shall furnish, erect, and maintain temporary barricades, and properly light the area. The Contractor shall comply with any directions and public authorities in this respect. 7.20 The Contractor shall designate a responsible officer or employee as safety inspector, whose duties shall include accident prevention on the Project as well as implementation of the Contractor's safety measures and safety programs on the Project. The name of the safety inspector shall be made known to the Designer and the Owner at the preconstruction conference. 7.21 In emergencies affecting the safety of persons, the Work, or property at the Project site or adjacent thereto, the Contractor is obligated to act in the Contractor's discretion to prevent threatened damage, injury, or loss. As soon as practicable, the Contractor shall notify the Designer and Owner of such emergency. The Contractor shall give the Designer and the Owner prompt written notice of any significant changes in the Work or deviations from the Contract Documents caused by such emergency. If the Contractor believes that additional work done in an emergency entitles the Contractor to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time, the Contractor may make a claim therefore as provided in Articles 14 and /or 15. 7.22 The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by the Work. At least weekly and at the completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove all waste materials and rubbish from and about the Project. At the completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove all tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus materials. The Contractor shall leave the Work in condition for occupancy by the Owner such that no cleaning or other operations are required. Material cleared from the Project and deposited on adjacent property shall not be considered as having been disposed of satisfactorily. If the Contractor fails to keep the Project clean of waste materials or rubbish, fails to satisfactorily clean -up weekly or at the completion of the Work, the Owner may do so and the costs thereof may be deducted from any amounts due the Contractor. 7.23 Utilities, temporary facilities, and signs shall be provided as described in the Contract Documents. Absent a contrary direction in the Supplementary Conditions, the Contractor shall pay all bills for water, electricity, or other public utility service to the Project site. 7.24 The Contractor shall indemnify and hold the Owner, the Designer, the Designer's consultants, and their officers, agents, and employees harmless against all costs, damages, and expenses, including attorney's fees and costs of defense, arising out of claims by any separate contractor or by any Subcontractor, sub - subcontractor, or supplier engaged by or employed by the Contractor or employed by any of the Subcontractors claiming through him, including without limitation damages, losses, and expenses arising out of or relating to any inconvenience, delay, interference, or other action or non - action of the Contractor or the Contractor's Subcontractors on the Project. Revised 10/17 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 24 The Contractor acknowledges that should the Contractor or any of the Contractor's Subcontractors be damaged by any breach of contract by any other separate prime contractor on the Project, the Contractor may invoke applicable dispute resolution procedures with said other separate prime contractor or bring a direct civil action against said other separate prime contractor. The Contractor hereby expressly agrees that neither the Owner nor its officers, agents, or employees shall have any liability of any kind or nature whatsoever to the Contractor, its Subcontractors, sub - subcontractors, or suppliers arising out of or relating to any breach, inconvenience, delay, interference, or other action or non - action by any other separate prime contractor. The Contractor covenants not to sue the Owner for any loss or damage caused by any breach, inconvenience, delay, interference, or other action or non - action by any other separate prime contractor, notwithstanding whatever rights at law the Contractor might have to bring a civil action against the Owner for any breach, inconvenience, delay, interference, or other action or non - action of any other separate prime contractor. The Contractor agrees to look exclusively to the other prime contractor for relief or remedy. Nothing contained herein or appearing anywhere in the Contract Documents shall obligate or require the Owner to exercise any right or privilege, or to take any action or to refrain from taking any action under any contract it may have with any other prime contractor or party to the Project for the benefit of the Contractor or any Subcontractor, subSubcontractor, or supplier claiming through the Contractor. 7.25 Prior to completion of the Work and Final Payment of the Contract Price, excepting only those portions of the Work deemed accepted in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall have charge and care of the Work, and shall take every precaution against injury or damage to any part due to the action of the elements or from any other cause, whether arising from the execution or from the non - execution of the Work. The Contractor shall as required by the Owner replace, rebuild, repair, restore, and make good all injury or damage to any portion of the Work occasioned by any of the above causes before Final Completion and shall bear the expenses thereof. 7.26 In the event that the Work, or any portion thereof, is suspended at any time pursuant to an order of the Owner, the Contractor shall obey all instructions of the Owner regarding storage of materials, drainage, protection of the Work, and erection of temporary structures during the suspension period. 7.27 The Project Expediter for the Project shall be responsible for the coordination of the Work of itself and any other separate contractors, both as to space and time. The Project Expediter shall coordinate the implementation of the Contract Construction Schedule, all construction activities and close -out of the Project, including but not limited to all testing, inspection, certifications, and approvals required by public agencies. The Contractor and the Project Expediter shall each be required to notify the Designer and the Owner promptly of any event or condition which could affect the conduct or progress of the Work and shall cooperate fully with all other contractors on the Project site. 7.28 The Owner hereby delegates to the Project Expediter all of its duties to coordinate and to expedite the Work not expressly reserved to the Owner by other provisions of the Contract Documents. Revised 10/17 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 25 7.29 All Work performed pursuant to the Contract Documents shall conform in all respects to the North Carolina State Building Code and all other state, local, and national codes in effect at the time of and applicable to this Work. 7.30 The Contractor shall provide for and maintain necessary safety measures and safety programs for the protection of all persons at the Project site, and shall comply at all times with the requirements of the most current edition of the CAGC Safety and Health Manual [or the AGC Accident Prevention Manual in Construction], or the equivalent requirements of the Contractor's safety program, and shall fully comply with all Federal, State, and local laws, rules, regulations, and building code requirements so as to prevent accidents or injuries to persons on or about the Project site. The Contractor shall clearly mark or post signs warning of existing hazards, and shall barricade excavations, elevator shafts, stairways, and similar hazards. The Contractor shall protect against damage or injury resulting from falling materials, and shall maintain all protective devices and signs throughout the progress of the Work. 7.31 The Contractor shall adhere to the rules, regulations, and interpretations of the North Carolina Department of Labor's Occupational Safety and Health Standards for the Construction Industry (29 CFR Part 1926 as adopted in 13 NCAC 07F.0201, including 29 CFR Part 1910 General Industry Safety and Health Standards applicable to construction) and N.C. Gen. Stat. §95 -126 through 155 (Occupational Safety and Health) as well as all revisions and amendments to such standards or statutes as may occur throughout the performance of the Work. 7.32 Any land disturbing activity performed by the Contractor in connection with the Project shall comply with all erosion control measures set forth in the Contract Documents and any additional measures which may be required in order to ensure that the Project is in full compliance with the Sedimentation Pollution Control Act of 1973, as implemented by Title 15 North Carolina administrative Code, Chapter 4, Sedimentation Control, Subchapters 4A, 4B and 4C, as amended (15 NCAC 4A, 4B, and 4C), and as may be revised or amended in the future. Upon receipt of notice that a land- disturbing activity is in violation of said Act, the Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all steps or actions necessary to bring the Project in compliance with said Act are promptly taken. The Contractor shall be responsible for all penalties assessed pursuant to N.C. Gen. Stat. 113A -64 with respect to its Work, and shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner from all costs and expenses, including attorney's fees and costs of defense arising out of or related to the enforcement of the Act against any party or person described in this Article. 7.33 Any mechanical or electrical work such as sleeves, inserts, chases, etc. located in the Work of the Contractor for general work shall be built in by that Contractor. On multiple prime projects, the mechanical and electrical contractors shall set all sleeves, inserts, and other devices built into the structure in cooperation and under the supervision of the Contractor for general work. The responsibility for exact location of such items shall be that of the mechanical, plumbing, or electrical prime contractor. 7.34 The Contractor shall be responsible for permanently fixed service facilities and systems in use during progress of the Work and shall strictly adhere to the following procedures: a) Prior to acceptance of the Work by the Owner, the Contractor shall remove and replace any part of the permanent building systems damaged through use during construction. Revised 10/17 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 26 b) Temporary filters shall be installed in each of the heating and air conditioning units, return air grilles, and other locations to prevent intrusion of dust, dirt, and debris during construction. Temporary filters shall be removed and replaced with new filters immediately prior to Substantial Completion. c) Extra effort shall be maintained to keep the building clean and under no circumstances shall air systems be operated if finishing operations are creating dust in excess of what would be considered normal if the building were occupied. d) When the permanent lighting system is used during construction, lamps shall be replaced and shall be new on the date of Substantial Completion. ARTICLE 8. OWNER 8.1 The Owner shall issue communications and notices to the Contractor through the Designer to the extent contemplated by the Contract Documents. 8.2 In case of termination of the employment of the Designer, the Owner shall appoint as Designer a qualified person who shall have and assume all rights and duties held by the original Designer. 8.3 The Owner shall have the right to take possession of and use any portion of the Work notwithstanding the fact that the time for completion of such portion of the Work may not have expired, but such taking possession and use shall not be deemed an acceptance of any Work not completed in accordance with the Contract Documents. 8.4 A waiver on the part of the Owner of any breach of any part of the Contractor shall not be held to be a waiver of any other or subsequent breach. 8.5 The Owner shall pay all permanent acreage fees, governmental impact fees, and meter deposits for permanent utilities. ARTICLE 9. CONSTRUCTION MANAGER 9.1 The Owner may employ one or more Construction Managers for the purpose of assisting the Owner, Designer, and Contractor in developing and administering budgets and cost controls, in evaluating constructability and value engineering proposals, in establishing and maintaining a critical path method (CPM) schedule, in coordinating and /or expediting the Work with other projects being constructed by the Owner or others adjacent or near the Work, or for such other purposes as the Owner may deem appropriate. From time to time the Owner may identify such Construction Managers(s) to the Contractor in writing identifying any tasks assigned to such Construction Managers(s). ARTICLE 10. DESIGNER 10.1 The Designer is charged with the responsibility of interpretation of the Contract Documents. The Designer's decisions relating to aesthetic matters shall be final. Revised 10/17 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 27 10.2 All Work completed under the Contract Documents shall be subject to review by the Designer. No Work is to be covered without the Designer's review or prior authorization. Any Work so covered without the Designer's review or prior authorization shall be uncovered at the Contractor's expense. The Contractor shall notify the Designer in writing at least twenty -four (24) hours in advance of covering any Work. 10.3 The Designer shall not be responsible for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, procedures, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, and shall not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, but shall be entitled to enforce any requirements in the Contract Documents specifying particular means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures. 10.4 The Designer shall be an Owner's representative during the construction period. The duties, responsibilities and authority of the Designer as the Owner's representative during construction are as set forth in the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 11. TESTING AND SURVEYING 11.1 Laboratory and field tests to determine compliance of construction with the Contract Documents shall be made by the Owner or testing consultants employed by the Owner except those required elsewhere in the Contract Documents to be paid for by the Contractor. The costs and expenses of providing samples for and assistance in any testing shall be borne by the Contractor and are included in the Contract Price. Any Work in which untested materials are used without approval or written permission of the Designer shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. Work found to be unacceptable or unauthorized will not be paid for and, if directed by the Designer shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. Unless otherwise designated, tests in accordance with the cited standard methods of ASTM or other generally recognized or specifically authorized methods which are current on the date of advertisement for bids shall be made at the expense of the Owner; provided, however, in the event that after such testing any Work is found to be defective or does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents, the costs of retesting such Work and the costs of inspection services shall be paid by the Contractor. Samples shall be taken by a testing laboratory employed by the Owner. All materials being used are subject to inspection, tests, or rejection at any time prior to or during incorporation into the Work. Copies of all Owner test reports will be furnished to the Contractor at his written request. Copies of Contractor test reports shall be furnished to the Designer upon written request. 11.2 The Owner shall have the right to deduct the costs of additional testing as described in paragraph 11.1 from any money due the Contractor; or if no money is due the Contractor, the Owner shall have the right to recover these costs from the Contractor, from its sureties, or from both. 11.3 All layouts and surveying shall be accomplished by properly qualified personnel duly licensed in the State of North Carolina. ARTICLE 12. SEPARATE CONTRACTS 12.1 It is expressly understood that the Owner may deploy the Owner's own employees or engage other separate prime contractors to perform Work as a part of the Project whose work Revised 10/17 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 S will be performed simultaneously and sequentially with the performance of the Work by the Contractor. It shall be necessary for the Contractor to coordinate construction activities with such other contractors, particularly with respect to access to work areas, storage of materials, and use of elevators and other common facilities. The Contractor shall diligently and in good faith cooperate with the Owner, the Designer, and all other contractors with respect to such matters and shall regularly and faithfully attend any and all meetings called by the Owner or the Designer with respect to such matters. Any disputes between the Contractor and any other separate prime contractor with respect to such matters shall be resolved in accordance with the claim and dispute resolution procedures in the Agreement. ARTICLE 13. CONTRACT TIME 13.1 Within fourteen (14) days after receipt of the Construction Contract by the Contractor for signatures, the Project Expediter shall prepare and submit to the Designer and Owner for review and approval a preliminary progress schedule for the Work pursuant to the requirements stated in the Contract Documents. 13.2 Within fourteen (14) days after initial receipt of the Construction Contract for signatures the Contractor shall submit to the Designer a Submittal Register listing all Submittals the Contractor is required to make or proposes to make under the Contract Documents, the dates on which the Contractor proposes to make such Submittals and the dates by which the Contractor reasonably requires a response from the Designer with respect to each Submittal. The dates submitted shall be incorporated into the Contract Construction Schedule as Completion Dates when they have been approved or modified by the Owner. The Designer shall not be required to review any Submittal from the Contractor until a Submittal Register acceptable to and approved by the Owner has been submitted by the Contractor. 13.3 Not later than thirty (30) days following execution and delivery of the Construction Agreement by Owner to Contractor, the Owner shall deliver to the Contractor a Notice to Proceed. The Notice to Proceed shall state a commencement date on which it is expected that the Contractor will begin the Work to be performed under the Agreement. The Contract Time shall be measured from said specified commencement date. The commencement date stated in the Notice to Proceed shall not be earlier than three (3) days after the Notice to Proceed is served on the Contractor. If, other than by mutual agreement, said specified commencement date is more than thirty (30) days after the date of execution and delivery of the Agreement from Owner to Contractor and the Contractor believes said delay justifies an increase in Contract Price and /or an extension of Contract Time, the Contractor may make a claim therefore as provided in Article 14 and /or Article 15. No Work shall be done prior to the date specified in the Notice to Proceed. A final Contract Construction Schedule shall be submitted for approval by the Contractor, Designer, and Owner no later than fourteen (14) days after Notice to Proceed. No payments shall be due the Contractor until this schedule is approved by all parties. 13.4 The Contract Construction Schedule is a Contract Document. The Contractor represents that the Contract Construction Schedule has been reviewed in detail, that the Contractor participated in its preparation, that all of the activities which impact, limit, or otherwise affect the time of completion of the Work are shown in the Contract Construction Schedule and that all of the activities of others which impact, limit, or otherwise affect the start, duration, or completion of Revised 10/17 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 29 the Contractor's activities are also shown. The Contractor further represents that the Contractor can and will complete each activity within the time shown for that activity. Time is of the essence with respect to each such activity and Completion Date. 13.5 If the Contractor submits a construction schedule, progress report, or any other document that indicates or otherwise expresses an intention to achieve completion of the Work prior to any Completion Date required by the Contract Documents or prior to expiration of the Contract Time, no liability of the Owner to the Contractor for any failure of the Contractor to so complete the Work shall be created or implied. 13.6 If the Contractor, for reasons beyond the Contractor's control, is delayed in beginning any activity, the Contractor shall, nevertheless, have the same number of days as is shown in the Contract Construction Schedule for the activity, and the affected activity and any succeeding activity that is dependent upon that activity shall be adjusted accordingly; provided that at any time the Owner, by means of a Change Order, may require the Contractor to work overtime, to increase labor forces or to take any necessary or appropriate action to decrease the time required for any activity, and the Contractor shall be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Price computed in accordance with Article 15 of these General Conditions. 13.7 At any time, the Owner may order the Contractor, on seven (7) days written notice, to begin any activity earlier than the starting date shown on the Contract Construction Schedule. 13.8 Should the Contractor fail to start any activity on the start date shown in the Contract Construction Schedule or as it may have been adjusted in accordance with paragraphs 13.5 or 13.6 above, or become delayed, the Contractor shall, without being entitled to any increase in the Contract Price or other compensation, work overtime, increase labor forces or take such other action as may be necessary or appropriate to complete the activity by the Completion Date shown on the Contract Construction Schedule, or as such Completion Date may have been adjusted. 13.9 The Designer and Owner or his Construction Consultant shall monitor progress of the work at all times and the Contractor shall cooperate with such monitoring and provide any and all information with respect to the progress of the Work and scheduling as the Owner may reasonably require. 13.10 On a monthly basis, the Contractor shall revise the Contract Construction Schedule, showing any adjustments made in accordance with paragraphs 13.5 or 13.6, above, by any Change Order, the progress of the Work, and any days gained or days lost with respect to any activity, and shall furnish copies thereof to the Owner and Designer. 13.11 Should any monthly revision of any Contract Construction Schedule show that the Contractor is behind on any activity, the late completion of which could delay Substantial Completion of the Work, the Owner shall be entitled to withhold from the next Progress Payment due the Contractor an amount not exceeding the amount the Owner would be entitled to in Liquidated Damages, should Substantial Completion be delayed by the same number of days that the Contractor is currently behind schedule. If, subsequently, the Contractor's progress, as shown by any succeeding monthly revision to the Contract Construction Schedule, is such that the anticipated delay no longer exists, the Owner shall pay with the Progress Payment next due to the Contractor such amounts as have been withheld in accordance with this paragraph. Revised 10/17 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 30 13.12 The Owner shall have the right to perform Work, hire and employ labor and craftsmen, rent equipment, subcontract with other parties, or do anything that the Owner deems necessary or appropriate to remedy or cure any delay by the Contractor in the progress of the Work. Such action by the Owner shall not, in any way, affect, void or limit any warranty, guaranty or other responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents. Such action may be taken by the Owner only after three (3) days written notice to the Contractor. All costs incurred by the Owner in taking any such action shall be charged to the Contractor and deducted from any amounts remaining due under the Agreement. 13.13 The Contractor may be entitled to an extension of the Contract Time (but no increase in the Contract Sum) for delays arising from unforeseen causes beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of the Owner, the Contractor or the Contractor's Subcontractors as follows: a) Labor disputes and strikes that directly impact the critical path activities of the Contract Construction Schedule; b) Acts of God, tornado, fire, hurricane, blizzard, earthquake, typhoon, or flood that damage completed Work or stored materials. c) Acts of the public enemy; acts of the State, Federal, or local government in their sovereign capacities. d) Abnormal inclement weather as defined in Article 13.14. 13.14 On any day that the Contractor considers that the Project is delayed by adverse weather conditions, the Contractor shall identify in writing to the Designer and the Owner the adverse weather conditions affecting each activity, the specific nature of the activity affected, the number of hours lost, and the number of and identity (by responsibility or trade) of workers affected and shall obtain from the Designer written recognition of the delay. The time for performance of this Contract includes an allowance for a number of calendar days which may not be suitable for construction Work by reason of adverse weather. The Contract Time will be extended only if the number of calendar days of adverse weather recognized by the Designer exceeds the number of inclement weather days set forth below, and the Contractor demonstrates how this adverse weather impacts activities on the critical path of the Contract Construction Schedule. Month Number of Inclement Weather Days January 10 February 10 March 10 April 9 May 10 June 9 July 11 August 10 September 8 October 7 November 8 December 9 Revised 10/17 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 31 13.15 If the Contractor believes that the progress of the Work has been adversely affected by adverse weather recognized by the Designer during a particular month, the Contractor shall submit a written request for extension of time to the Designer. Such a request for time extension of the Contract Time shall be submitted by the tenth (10th) day of the month following that month in which the adverse weather is encountered. The request shall include, but is not limited to, the following information: a) Detailed description of weather's effect on scheduled activities and its net effect on the critical path of the Project, and b) Weather records from the official weather station nearest the Project site and records of actual observation as contained in daily reports, correspondence, or other documentation. 13.16 The Contractor specifically recognizes that a delay by the Contractor in achieving any Completion Date can have the effect of delaying the Substantial Completion of the Project, that such delay in Substantial Completion of the Project will necessarily cause damages, losses, and expenses to the Owner, including, but not limited to and by way of illustration only, increased capitalized costs and interests for the Project, increased and extended Project overhead, Designer's and Consultant's fees, increased costs of construction, increased and extended operation costs of other facilities, and inefficiency and loss of productivity, and that such damages, losses, and expenses may not be readily identifiable or ascertainable at the time they are incurred or at any time. Therefore, and in recognition of these factors and the likelihood that actual damages from his delay will not be readily ascertainable, the Contractor agrees to pay to the Owner, as Liquidated Damages and not as a penalty, the sum identified in the Contract Documents hereto as the Liquidated Damages per Day, for each day by which the failure to meet any Completion Date shown in the Contract Construction Schedule, adjusted in accordance with this Article, delays the Substantial Completion of the Project. 13.17 The Contractor shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Price or other compensation from the Owner for any delay in the completion of or progress on the Work that is caused by a force majeure condition or is otherwise not caused by the sole and direct act or omission of the Owner and the Owner's employees or agents. 13.18 The sum for Liquidated Damages is the amount stated in the Contract Documents as Liquidated Damages reasonably estimated in advance to cover the losses to be incurred by the Owner by reason of failure of said Contractor(s) to complete the Work within the time specified, such time being in the essence of this contract and a material consideration thereof. ARTICLE 14. CHANGES IN THE WORK 14.1 Without invalidating the Contract Documents, the Owner may, at any time, or from time to time order additions, deletions, or revisions in the Work. Said additions, deletions, or revisions shall be authorized only by written Change Orders, Construction Change Directives or Field Orders. Upon receipt of a Change Order, Construction Change Directive or Field Order, the Contractor shall proceed with the Work involved. All such Work shall be executed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents. If any change causes an increase or decrease in the Contract Price and /or an extension or shortening of the Contract Time, adjustments shall be made as provided in Article 14 and /or Article 15. In order to expedite the Work and avoid or minimize delay in the Work that might affect the Contract Price or Contract Time, the Designer may issue a Change Order in the form of a Construction Change Directive which when signed by the Owner and Designer, directs the Contractor to proceed promptly with the Work involved. Any claim for an adjustment in Contract Price or Time, if not defined in the Construction Change Revised 10/17 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 32 Directive, shall be promptly made in writing in accordance with the procedures defined in Article 15.2. 14.2 The Designer may authorize minor changes or alterations in the Work not involving change in the Contract Price or in the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the overall intent of the Contract Documents. These may be accomplished by a Field Order. Such alterations shall not invalidate the Contract Documents nor release the surety. If the Contractor believes that any minor change or alteration authorized by the Designer entitles him to an increase in the Contract Price and /or an extension of Contract Time, he may make a claim therefore as provided in Article 14 and /or Article 15. 14.3 Except in an emergency endangering life or property, no change shall be made by the Contractor except upon prior written Change Order, Directive or Field Order authorizing such Change. 14.4 Increases in the Contract Price and /or extensions of the Contract Time for additional Work performed by the Contractor shall only be in accordance with a written Change Order signed by the Owner and Designer. The Contractor shall not be entitled to additional time or to additional compensation for any Work performed or material supplied which is claimed to have been authorized or settled by an "oral" change, or by a "constructive" or "implied" change, or by a course of conduct, or by any action or non - action by the Owner, Designer, or any other persons, or by any means whatsoever other than by a written Change Order for such Work or material signed by the Owner and the Designer. 14.5 Changes in the Work resulting from emergency shall not invalidate the Contract Documents nor release the surety. 14.6 Neither the Owner nor the Designer shall be responsible for verbal instructions which have not been confirmed in writing, and in no case shall such instructions be interpreted as permitting a departure from the Contract Documents unless such instruction is confirmed in writing and supported by a proper Change Order, Construction Change Directive or Field Order, whether or not the cost is affected. 14.7 The Owner, in its sole discretion, may require that the Contractor notify the Contractor's sureties of any changes affecting the general scope of the Work or change in the Contract Price, and that the amount of applicable bonds shall be adjusted accordingly. If this requirement is exercised, the Contractor shall furnish proof of such adjustment to the Designer and the Owner. If this requirement is exercised, the Change Orders shall require written consent of the Contractor's surety. At the time of signing a Change Order, the Contractor shall be required to certify as follows: "I certify that all sureties have been notified that my contract has been altered by the amount of this Change Order, and that a copy of the approved Change Order will be mailed to all sureties upon its receipt by me." If this requirement is exercised, no payment to the Contractor on account of any Change Order shall become due or payable until written evidence of the surety's consent to the Change Order has been furnished to the Designer and to the Owner, and the furnishing of such written consent is a condition precedent to such payment. Revised 10/17 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 33 14.8 The Contractor shall support all requests for Change Orders with a detailed cost breakdown showing cost of materials, labor, equipment, transportation, other items, Contractor's overhead and profit, and total cost, in accordance with methods defined in this Article, and, if the request seeks an extension of the Contract Time, with a time - related diagram which demonstrates specifically why an increase in construction time is needed. 14.9 When a request for a Change Order involves a Subcontractor, the Contractor shall provide quotation from same on Subcontractor's letterhead. The Subcontractor's quote shall list materials, equipment, and labor separately, and show overhead and profit in the manner provided in paragraph 14.8. ARTICLE 15. CHANGE OF THE CONTRACT PRICE 15.1 The Contract Price constitutes the total compensation payable to the Contractor for performing all Work under the Contract Documents. All duties, responsibilities, and obligations assigned to or undertaken by the Contractor shall be at his expense without change in the Contract Price. The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order. 15.2 Any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be in writing and written notice of any event, action, or non - action which may become the basis of a claim shall be delivered to the Owner and the Designer within three (3) days of the occurrence of any such event, action or non - action giving rise to the claim. Such written notice is a condition precedent to the making of a claim, and such notice shall describe the basis of the potential claim with reasonable detail and clarity. A claim shall be made in writing and shall be delivered to the Designer and the Owner no later than fourteen (14) days after such notice. The claim shall describe in detail the basis for the claim, with specific reference to any provisions of the Contract Documents, by paragraph, drawing number, or other specific identification, and shall state the amount claimed and how it is calculated. If the Contractor, at the time the claim is made, is unable to state the amount claimed with accuracy, the Contractor shall so state and provide the estimated amount and the basis on which the amount is to be calculated. At the earliest date practicable, but in no event more than thirty (30) days after Contractor's notice of claim, the Contractor shall supplement the claim with an accurate statement of the amount claimed and how it has been calculated. The Contractor shall provide, in writing, in support of the claim all such explanations, arguments, data, receipts, expert opinions, or other documents or information as the Contractor deems appropriate to be considered in support of the claim. A claim may properly be rejected by the Owner by reason of the Contractor's failure to submit adequate or accurate documentation or information, except that within seven (7) days after being given notice that the claim has been rejected on this basis, the Contractor may submit additional documentation or information. No claim for a change of the Contract Price shall be considered or granted (except solely at the discretion of the Owner) unless a claim is so made, nor shall the Contractor be entitled to any increase in the Contract Price unless the Contractor has given notice and made such a written claim within the times required. The Owner shall decide, after obtaining the advice of the Designer, whether an increase in Contract Price is warranted, and the amount of such increase shall be determined as provided in paragraph 15.4 through 15.5, below. Any change in the Contract Price resulting from any such claim shall be incorporated in a Change Order. Revised 10/17 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 34 The Owner shall advise the Contractor of its decision with respect to the claim within fourteen (14) days of its receipt, or of the receipt of additional documentation or information if the absence of such has previously been the basis of rejection of the claim; provided, however, that if, in its sole discretion, the Owner deems that review or consideration of any part of the claim or any matter related thereto by its governing Board is necessary or appropriate, it shall so advise the Contractor and shall provide its decision to the Contractor within seven (7) days after such Board consideration, review or action. Any claim on which the Owner has not provided its decision to the Contractor within the applicable time period shall be deemed denied. If the Contractor is not satisfied with the decision of the Owner, the Contractor may within seven (7) days of receipt of the Owner's decision initiate the mediation process as described in Appendix A to the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. 15.3 In determining the amount of a Contract Price adjustment, the parties shall apply the following methods, as appropriate: (A) Change in Work: The Owner and Contractor shall negotiate in good faith and attempt to agree upon the value of any change (extra or decrease) in Work prior to the issuance of a Change Order covering said Work. Such Change Order shall set forth the corresponding adjustment to the Contract Price. In the event the Owner and the Contractor are unable to agree, the Owner shall grant an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price. (B) Emergency Work: In the event of emergency endangering life or property, the Contractor may be directed by the Designer to proceed on a time and material basis, whereupon the Contractor shall so proceed and keep accurately, in such form as may be required by the Designer, a correct account of costs together with all proper invoices, payrolls, and supporting data therefore. 15.4 Where the Contract Price is to be adjusted, the following limitations shall apply in determining the amount of adjustment: (A) In the case of extra or emergency work, the Contract Price shall not be increased by more than the reasonable, actual, and documented net cost of the extra or emergency work plus ten percent (10 %) of such net cost on Work performed by the Contractor and five percent (5 %) thereof on any subcontracted Work for overhead and profit combined. (B) In the case of a decrease in Work, the Contract Price shall not be decreased by less than the net cost of the deleted Work plus five percent (5 %) of such direct net cost for profit and overhead. The term 'net cost' as used herein shall include, as applicable, and shall be limited to, all direct labor, direct material, direct equipment, labor burden, sales taxes, shipping and handling charges, permits and fees, and insurance and bond premium adjustments, if any, attributable to the change. All other items of cost shall be considered as overhead and covered by the percentages allowed in sections A and B of this paragraph. The Contractor shall provide worksheets or tabulations describing the method by which the direct net cost was calculated, and shall provide all data needed to support the calculation of the direct net cost, all in a form acceptable to the Owner. Revised 10/17 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 35 15.5 Where the Contract Price is to be adjusted by negotiation, the Owner may authorize and designate the Designer to negotiate with the Contractor on behalf of the Owner; provided, however, any agreement reached between the Contractor and Designer shall be subject to approval by the Owner. ARTICLE 16. UNFORESEEN CONDITIONS 16.1 Should the Contractor encounter unforeseen conditions at the Project site materially differing from those shown on the Drawings or indicated in the Specifications or differing materially from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in this Agreement, the Contractor shall immediately, and in no event more than three days later, give notice to the Owner of such conditions before they are disturbed. The Owner and the Designer shall thereupon promptly investigate the conditions and if they find that they materially differ from those shown on the Drawings or indicated in the Specifications, they shall at once make such changes in the Drawings and /or Specifications as they may find necessary. Any increase or decrease in the Contract Price resulting from such changes shall be adjusted in the manner provided herein for adjustments as to extra and /or additional Work and changes. However, neither the Owner nor the Designer shall be liable or responsible for additional work, costs, or changes to the Work that could have been reasonably determined from any reports, surveys, and analyses made available for the Contractor's review or that could have been discovered by the Contractor through the performance of its obligations pursuant to the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 17. CORRECTION OF WORK BEFORE FINAL PAYMENT 17.1 The Owner has the authority to stop or suspend work, and the Designer has the authority to order Work removed or to order corrections of defective Work or Work not in compliance with the Contract Documents where such action may be necessary to ensure successful completion of the Work. Any work, materials, fabricated items, or other parts of the Work which have been found by the Designer to be defective or not in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be condemned and shall be removed from the Project by the Contractor, and immediately replaced by new Work in accordance with the Contract Documents at no additional cost to the Owner. Work or property of the Owner or others damaged or destroyed by virtue of such condemned Work shall be made good at the expense of the Contractor. Correction of condemned Work described above shall be commenced by the Contractor within twenty -four (24) hours after notice from the Designer or the Owner and shall be pursued to completion. Should the Contractor fail to proceed reasonably with the abovementioned corrections, the Owner may, three (3) days after the notice specified in the preceding sentence, proceed with correction, paying the cost, including costs of uncovering such condemned Work, of such corrections from amounts due or to become due to the Contractor. Condemned Work removed shall be the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the Project by him within ten (10) days after notice to remove it, and if not then removed, thereafter may be disposed of by the Owner without compensation to the Contractor and the Revised 10/17 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 36 cost of such disposal shall be deducted from amounts due or to become due to the Contractor. Should the cost of correction of the Work and, if applicable, disposal of the condemned Work by the Owner exceed amounts due or to become due the Contractor, then the Contractor and the Contractor's sureties shall be liable for and shall pay to the Owner the amount of such excess. ARTICLE 18. CORRECTION OF WORK AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION; WARRANTIES AND GUARANTIES 18.1 Neither the final certificate, Final Payment, occupation of the premises by the Owner, nor any provision of the Contract Documents, nor any other act or instrument of the Owner or the Designer shall relieve the Contractor from responsibility for negligence, defective material or workmanship, or failure to comply with the Contract Documents. 18.2 The Contractor shall, at the Contractor's sole cost and expense, make all necessary repairs, replacements, and corrections of any nature or description, interior or exterior, structural or non - structural, that shall become necessary by reason of defective workmanship or materials which appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of Substantial Completion; provided, however that notwithstanding the preceding, if any longer guarantee period is specified for any particular materials or workmanship under the Contract Documents, or under any subcontract, or in connection with any manufactured unit which is installed in the Project, or under the laws of the State of North Carolina, the longer guarantee period shall govern. 18.3 If, within any guarantee period, repairs or changes are required in connection with the Work, which are rendered necessary as the result of the use of materials, equipment, or workmanship which are inferior, defective, or not in accordance with the terms of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall, promptly upon receipt of notice from the Designer and without expense to the Owner: a) Completely repair or replace the Work so that it conforms to the Contract Documents; b) Correct all defects therein; c) Make good all damage which, in the opinion of the Designer, is the result of the use of materials, equipment, or workmanship which are inferior, defective, or not in accordance with the terms of the Contract Documents; and d) Make good any Work or material, or any equipment or contents disturbed in fulfilling any such guarantee. If, in fulfilling the requirements of the Contract Documents or of any guarantee embraced therein or required thereby, the Contractor disturbs any work, facility, premises, or construction belonging to the Owner, the Contractor shall restore such disturbed work to a condition satisfactory to the Owner, and shall guarantee such restored work to the same extent as if it were Work under the Contract Documents. If the Contractor, after notice, fails to proceed promptly to comply with the terms of the guarantee, the Owner may have the defects corrected, and the Contractor and the Contractor's Revised 10/17 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 37 ureties shall be liable for all expenses incurred. "Promptly" is defined as within twenty -four (24) hours for systems necessary to normal operation of the building and within seventy -two (72) hours for all other items. All special guarantees applicable to definite parts of the Work that may be shown in or required by Contract Documents shall be subject to the terms of this paragraph during the first year of the life of such special guarantee. Manufacturer's standard guarantees or warranties which do not comply with the time limit specified herein shall be extended by the Contractor automatically without further action on the part of the Owner or the Designer. 18.4 In the eleventh calendar month after the date of Substantial Completion, and at the request of the Owner, the Contractor, the Owner and the Designer shall make an inspection of the Work for the purpose of identifying defective workmanship and /or materials. If the Contractor, having been requested to do so by the Owner, fails to participate in such inspection, the Contractor shall be conclusively bound by any decision or ruling by the Designer as to any defective workmanship or material and as to the Contractor's responsibility for its repair or replacement. ARTICLE 19. OWNER'S RIGHT TO DO WORK 19.1 If, during the progress of the Work or during any period of guarantee, the Contractor fails to prosecute the Work properly or to perform any provision of the Contract Documents, the Owner, after three (3) days written notice to the Contractor from the Designer, or from the Owner after Final Payment, may perform or have performed that portion of the Work and may deduct the cost thereof from any amounts due or to become due the Contractor. Notwithstanding any action by the Owner under this paragraph, all warranties and bonds given or to be given by the Contractor shall remain in effect or shall be given by the Contractor. 19.2 Should the cost of such action by the Owner exceed the amount due or to become due the Contractor, the Contractor and his sureties shall be liable for and shall pay to the Owner the amount of such excess. ARTICLE 20. PARTIAL PAYMENTS 20.1 Within thirty (30) days after his initial receipt of the Construction Contract for signatures, the Contractor shall submit to the Designer a Schedule of Values. The Schedule of Values shall indicate the value of the Work, including applicable overhead and profit, for each Division and section of the Project Specifications. The Designer and Owner shall be provided with the Contractor's estimate papers, Subcontractor agreements, supplier quotes, or other documents substantiating these values if so requested in writing by the Designer. The Contractor shall provide the requested documentation within seven (7) days after receipt of the Designer's written request. The Schedule of Values shall be subject to approval by the Owner, and if the Owner and the Contractor cannot agree upon the Schedule of Values, the Designer shall prepare it, and the Schedule of Values as prepared by the Designer shall be binding on the Owner and the Contractor. No Request for Payment shall be certified by the Designer until the Designer has issued approval of said Schedule of Values. 20.2 Not later than the fifth (5th) day of each calendar month the Contractor shall submit to the Designer a Request for Payment for Work done during the previous calendar month. The Request for Payment shall be in form of AIA Document G702 (latest edition) and shall show substantially the value of Work done (including the value of material delivered to the Project or stored by the Contractor at another site, subject to the conditions hereinafter set forth) during Revised 10/17 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 S the previous calendar month, and shall sum up the financial status of the Work with the following information: a) Total Contract Price, including any adjustment thereto made pursuant to the Contract Documents. b) Value of Work completed and materials properly stored to date. c) Less amount retained. d) Less previous payments. e) Current amount due. f) Balance remaining. The Contractor, upon request of the Designer, shall substantiate the request with invoices, vouchers, payrolls, or other evidence. 20.3 When payment is requested or made on an account of stored materials, such materials must be stored on the Owner's property at such places and in such a manner as may be designated by the Designer. However, in the sole discretion of the Owner, with permission in writing from the Designer and Owner and under such circumstances as may be determined by the Owner, such materials may be stored in a bonded warehouse. The location and conditions for storage of such materials away from the Owner's property in a bonded warehouse shall be within the sole discretion of the Owner. Requests for Payment on account of stored materials shall be accompanied by paid invoices, bills of sale, warehouse receipts, or other documentary evidence establishing Owner's title to such materials, evidence that the stored materials are insured against loss and damage, and such other documentation as required by the Designer. Responsibility for the quantity, quality, and condition of such stored materials, whether stored on the Owner's property or away from the Owner's property, shall remain with the Contractor regardless of ownership or title. No payment shall be made on account of materials stored in a bonded warehouse unless the Contractor has acquired written permission from the Designer for such storage of materials and has complied with all conditions set forth in such permission regarding such storage of materials in a bonded warehouse. 20.4 Any Request for Payment received by the Designer on or before the fifth (5th) of the calendar month shall be certified for payment or returned for re- submission to the Contractor on or before the fifteenth (15th) of the calendar month. The Designer's certification shall be for the amount which was requested or that which the Designer has decided was justly due, and shall state in writing to the Contractor and Owner the reasons for withholding payment of any or all of the amount requested. 20.5 The Designer may fail to certify all or part of any payment requested for any of the following reasons: a) Defective Work not corrected. Revised 10/17 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 39 b) Suits, actions, or claims of any character filed against the Contractor, or due to the operations of the Contractor, or information or notice that a suit, action, or claim will be filed or has been made. c) Information or notice that a Subcontractor or a supplier has not received payment. d) The balance unpaid of the Contract Price is insufficient to complete the Work in the judgment of the Designer or Owner. e) Damage to the Owner or another contractor. f) Inability of the Contractor to meet a Completion Date, including an anticipated failure to meet a Completion Date entitling the Owner to withhold anticipated Liquidated Damages in accordance with paragraphs 13.15 and 13.17 hereof. g) Failure to furnish Submittal as required by the Contract Documents on a timely basis in accordance with the Submittal Register. h) Such other reason as to the Designer may appear prudent, proper, or equitable. When grounds for withholding certification have been corrected, the Designer shall so certify to the Owner and the Owner shall make any payment due with respect to such certification as a part of his next payment after such certification. 20.6 No certificate issued or progress payment made shall constitute an acceptance of the Work or any part thereof. 20.7 The amount certified by the Designer for payment shall be ninety -five percent (95 %) of the value of Work completed and materials stored since the Designer's last certification as shown on the Request for Payment, less any amounts not certified in accordance with paragraph 20.4, and this amount shall be paid by the Owner on or before the last business day of the month, but payment shall not be past due until not paid within fifteen (15) days thereafter. 20.8 After certification by the Designer that the Work is fifty percent (50 %) complete, based on a determination that the Contractor's gross project invoices, excluding the value of materials stored off -site, equal or exceed fifty percent (50 %) of the value of the Contract, (except the value of materials stored on -site shall not exceed twenty percent (20 %) of the Contractor's gross project invoices for the purpose of determining whether the Project is fifty percent (50 %) complete) and the Contractor has provided to the Owner the written consent of its sureties to the cessation of further percentage retention, the amount certified for payment with respect to subsequent Requests for Payment shall be one hundred percent (100 %) of the value of Work completed and materials stored since the Designer's last certification as shown on the Request for Payment, less any amounts not certified in accordance with paragraphs 20.4 and 20.5; provided, however, that the aggregate of periodic payments shall not exceed ninety -seven and one half percent (97.5 %) of the Contract Price. If the Owner determines that the Contractor's performance under the Contract is unsatisfactory, the Owner may resume withholding percentage retention from each subsequent periodic payment application up to the maximum amount of five percent (5 %) of the Contract Price. Revised 10/17 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 all ARTICLE 21. FINAL PAYMENT 21.1 If the Work of the Contractor is limited to demolition, pilings, caissons and /or structural steel, the remaining unpaid balance of the Contractor's Contract Price, less a sum equal to five - tenths percent (0.5 %) of the Contract Price, shall be paid within sixty days following receipt of the following documents, all of which must be received before payment shall become due: (i) request for payment from the Contractor; (ii) receipt of consent from the Contractor's surety to the payment; and (iii) approval or certification from the Designer that the work performed by the Contractor is acceptable and in accordance with the Contract Documents. 21.2 Except as set forth in paragraph 21.1, within forty five days after Substantial Completion of the Project, the remaining unpaid balance of the Contract Price shall be paid to the Contractor, less an amount equal to two and one -half times the value of punch list work or other work remaining to be completed or corrected, as reasonably estimated by the Owner. 21.3 Upon Substantial Completion, the Designer shall prepare and submit to the Contractor a deficiency list identifying all portions of the Work which are known by the Designer at that time to be incomplete or defective. Within thirty (30) days of receipt of this deficiency list, the Contractor shall complete and correct all items on that list along with all other Work required to achieve Final Completion of the Work. At any time prior to completion of the period of warranty, the Designer may submit to the Contractor a supplemental deficiency list, in which case the Contractor shall complete or correct any and all new items identified on the supplemental deficiency list within the time period stipulated in paragraph 18.3. 21.4 Final Payment of any remaining balance of the Contract Price shall not be due to the Contractor until the Contractor achieves Final Completion of the Project. 21.5 The making and acceptance of Final Payment shall constitute a waiver of all claims by the Owner except: a) Claims arising from unsettled liens or claims against the Contractor. b) Defective Work or materials appearing after Final Payment. c) Failure of the Contractor to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. d) As conditioned in the Performance Bond. e) Claims made prior to Final Payment which remain unsettled. f) Amounts due arising under Articles 18 and 28. g) Claims for recovery of overpayment based upon incorrect measurement, estimate, or certificate. 21.6 The making and acceptance of Final Payment shall constitute a waiver of all claims by the Contractor except those claims previously made in writing pursuant to paragraph 15.2 and not finally resolved. Revised 10/17 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 a 21.7 The Designer shall not authorize Final Payment until all of the Work under the Contract Documents has been certified by the Designer as completed, proper and suitable for occupancy and use, and has been approved by all federal, state and local agencies having jurisdiction. 21.8 The final Request for Payment shall be identified on its face as such and shall be presented by the Contractor to the Designer within thirty (30) days of completion of the Work. Final payment of the retained amount due the Contractor shall be made by the Owner within thirty (30) days after the later of (i) full and Final Completion of all Work required by the Contract Documents, and certification of such Work in accordance with paragraph 20.4; (ii) submission of the affidavits of other documentation required by Article 22; (iii) submission by the Contractor of a Request for Payment identified on its face as final and including the Designer's certification. ARTICLE 22. CONTRACTOR, SUBCONTRACTOR AND SUPPLIER AFFIDAVIT 22.1 The Final Payment due the Contractor on account of the Contract Documents shall not become due until the Contractor has furnished to the Owner through the Designer: (A) an affidavit by the Contractor signed, sworn, and notarized to the effect that all payments for materials, services, or for any other reason in connection with the Work or performance of the Contract Documents have been satisfied and that no claims or liens exist against the Contractor in connection with the same; (B) affidavits from each Subcontractor and supplier signed, sworn, and notarized to the effect that (i) each such Subcontractor or supplier has been paid in full by the Contractor for all Work performed and /or materials supplied by him in connection with the Project, and (ii) that all payments for materials, services, and for any other reason in connection with the subcontract or supply contract have been satisfied and that no claims or liens exist against the Subcontractor or supplier in connection therewith; and (C) the written consent of the Contractor's sureties to Final Payment. In the event that the Contractor cannot obtain an affidavit, as required above, from any Subcontractor or supplier, the Contractor shall state in the Contractor's affidavit that no claims or liens exist against such Subcontractor or supplier to the best of the Contractor's knowledge, and that if any appear afterwards, the Contractor shall save the Owner harmless for all costs and expenses, including attorneys' fees, on account thereof. ARTICLE 23. ASSIGNMENTS AND SUBCONTRACTS 23.1 The Contractor shall not assign any portion of this Agreement nor subcontract the Work in its entirety without the prior written consent of the Owner. Except as may be required under terms of the bonds required by the Contract Documents, no funds or sums of money due or to become due to the Contractor under the Contract Documents may be assigned. ARTICLE 24. MEASUREMENTS 24.1 Before ordering material or doing Work which is dependent for proper size or installation upon coordination with building conditions, the Contractor shall verify all dimensions and shall be responsible for the correctness of same. No consideration will be given for any claim based on differences between the actual dimensions and those indicated in the Contract Documents. Any discrepancies between the Contract Documents and the existing conditions shall be referred to the Designer for adjustment before any Work affected thereby is begun. Revised 10/17 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 M ARTICLE 25. CONTRACTOR AND SUBCONTRACTOR RELATIONSHIPS 25.1 Within thirty (30) days after initial receipt of the Construction Contract for signatures the Contractor shall submit to the Designer and Owner for acceptance a current list of the names of Subcontractors and such other persons and organizations (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for any and all portions of the Work. The Contractor shall provide this list at this time even if the Contractor was required to submit a list of proposed Subcontractors with the Contractor's bid. The Designer shall promptly reply to the Contractor in writing stating whether or not the Owner or the Designer, after due investigation, has objection to any such proposed person or entity or if it needs additional information to evaluate the persons on the list. Failure of the Designer to reply within ten (10) days after the Contractor has furnished all required information shall constitute notice of no objection. The Contractor shall not contract with any such proposed person or entity to whom the Owner or the Designer has made reasonable objection. If the Designer or Owner has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity, the Contractor shall submit a substitute to whom the Owner and the Designer have no reasonable objection. The Contractor shall make no substitution for any Subcontractor, person, or entity previously allowed without first notifying the Designer and Owner in writing and no substitution may be made if the Owner or Designer makes a reasonable objection to such substitution. 25.2 The Contractor agrees that the terms of the Contract Documents, including all portions thereof, shall apply to all Subcontractors of the Contractor as if they were the Contractor, and that the Subcontractors of the Contractor shall, by means of their subcontracts, be bound by all the terms of the Contract Documents including, but not limited to, Article 26 of these General Conditions. 25.3 Payments to Subcontractors shall be made in accordance with the provisions of N.C. Gen. Stat. §143- 134.1. ARTICLE 26. USE OF PREMISES 26.1 The Contractor shall confine apparatus, the storage of materials, the operations of workers, and the disposal of material to limits indicated by law, ordinances, permits, and directions of the Designer, if any. 26.2 The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the Work to be loaded with a weight that will endanger its safety, intended performance, or configuration. 26.3 The Contractor shall enforce all of the Designer's instructions, including, but not limited to, those regarding signs, advertisements, fires, and smoking. ARTICLE 27. CUTTING, PATCHING AND FITTING 27.1 The Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work that may be required to make its several parts come together properly and fit it to receive or to be received by Work shown in or which can be reasonably implied from the Contract Documents. Revised 10/17 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 W ARTICLE 28. DISPUTE RESOLUTION 28.1 The laws of the State of North Carolina shall apply to the interpretation and enforcement of this Agreement. Any and all suits or actions to enforce, interpret, or seek damages with respect to any provision of, or the performance or nonperformance of, this Agreement shall be brought in the General Court of Justice of North Carolina sitting in Orange County, North Carolina, and it is agreed by the parties that no other court shall have jurisdiction or venue with respect to such suits or actions. In any dispute arising pursuant to the terms of this Agreement the Parties shall follow and abide by the Rules and Procedures for Orange County Design, Building Construction, Renovation, and Repair Projects. The policy is incorporated herein by reference and may be viewed at http: / /www.orangecountync.gov /departments /purchasing division /contracts.php). Regardless of the outcome of any dispute each Party shall be responsible for its own legal costs including reasonable attorneys' fees. 28.2 Any person or firm that expressly or impliedly agrees to perform labor or services or to provide material, supplies, equipment, work, performance or payment bonds, insurance or indemnification for the construction of the Project or the Work shall be deemed a party to this Agreement solely for the purpose of this Article 28. The Contractor, by means of its subcontracts, shall specifically require its Subcontractors to be bound by this Article. ARTICLE 29. TAXES 29.1 The Contractor has included in the Contract Price and shall pay all taxes assessed by any authority on the Work or the labor and materials used therein. The Contractor shall maintain all tax records during the life of the Project and furnish the Owner with a complete listing of all taxes paid by taxing authority, invoice number, date, amount, etc. in a form acceptable to the Owner. The Contractor is required to maintain a file showing taxes paid on the Project for three (3) years after Final Payment or turn said documents over to the Owner for his files. 29.2 The following is a list of requirements to be followed by the Contractor in maintaining proper records and reporting the North Carolina Sales and Use Tax and Local Sales and Use Tax. The Contractor shall comply fully with the requirements outlined below, in order that the Owner may recover the amount of the tax permitted under the law. a) It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to furnish the Owner documentary evidence showing the materials used and sales and use tax paid by the Contractor and each of his Subcontractors. Such evidence shall be transmitted to the Owner with each pay request regardless of whether taxes were paid in that period. b) The documentary evidence shall consist of a certified statement by the Contractor and each of the Contractor's Subcontractors individually, showing total purchases of materials from each separate vendor and total sales and use taxes paid to each vendor. Certified statements must show the invoice number, or numbers, covered, and inclusive dates of such invoices. c) Materials used from Contractor's or Subcontractor's warehouse stock shall be shown in a certified statement at warehouse stock prices. d) The Contractor shall not be required to certify the Subcontractor's statements. Revised 10/17 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 G. ARTICLE 30. OPERATION OF OWNER'S FACILITIES 30.1 The Contractor agrees that all Work done under the Contract Documents shall be carried on in such a manner so as to ensure the regular and continuous operation of the adjoining or adjacent facilities. The Contractor further agrees that the sequence of operations under the Contract Documents shall be scheduled and carried out so as to ensure said regular and continuous operation. The Contractor shall not close any areas of construction until so authorized by the Designer. The Contractor shall control operations to assure the least inconvenience to the public. Under all circumstances, safety shall be the most important consideration. ARTICLE 31. THIRD PARTY BENEFICIARY CLAUSE 31.1 It is specifically agreed between the parties executing the Agreement that, with the specific exception set forth paragraph 7.24 hereof, and that exception only, the Contract Documents and the provisions therein are not intended to make the public, or any member thereof, a third -party beneficiary of the Agreement, or to authorize anyone not a party to the Contract Documents to maintain a suit for personal injuries or property damage pursuant to the terms of provisions of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 32. MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES 32.1 All Work completed under the Contract Documents shall be measured by the Contractor using United States customary units of measurement. The method of measurement and computations to be used in determination of quantities of material furnished and of Work performed under the Contract Documents shall be those methods set forth in the Contract Documents or, if not specifically set forth therein, the method generally recognized as conforming to good engineering practice. ARTICLE 33. TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE 33.1 If the Contractor fails to begin or complete the Work under the Contract Documents within the time specified, or fails to perform the Work with sufficient labor and equipment or with sufficient materials to insure the prompt completion of said Work, or shall perform the Work unsuitably or shall discontinue the prosecution of the Work for three (3) days, or if the Contractor shall become insolvent, be declared bankrupt, commit any act of bankruptcy or insolvency, allow any final judgment to stand against the Contractor or its affiliated companies unsatisfied for a period of forty -eight (48) hours, make an assignment for the benefit of creditors, or for any other cause whatsoever shall not carry on the Work in an acceptable manner, the Owner may give notice in writing to the Contractor and the Contractor's sureties of such delay, neglect, or default, specifying the same, and if the Contractor within a period of three (3) days after such notice shall not proceed in good faith and with reasonable speed to correct such delay, neglect, or default in accordance with such notice, the Owner shall have full power and authority, to the extent permitted by law, without violating the Contract Documents, to take the prosecution of the Work out of the hands of the Contractor, to appropriate or use any or all materials and equipment at the Project as may be suitable and acceptable, and may enter into an agreement for the completion of the Work or pursue such other methods as in the Owner's opinion shall be necessary or appropriate for the completion of the Work in an acceptable Revised 10/17 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 W manner. All costs and charges incurred by the Owner in proceeding in accordance with the preceding sentence, including attorney's fees, and all costs incurred by the Owner in completing the Work shall be deducted from any money due or which becomes due the Contractor. If such costs and expenses incurred by the Owner shall be less than the sum which would have been payable under Contract Documents if it had been completed by the Contractor, then the Contractor shall be entitled to receive the difference, but if such costs and expenses shall exceed the sum which would have been payable under the Contract Documents, the Contractor and the Contractor's surety shall be liable to the Owner for and shall pay to the Owner the amount of such excess. ARTICLE 34. TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE 34.1 The Owner may, without cause, order the Contractor to terminate, suspend, delay, or interrupt the Work in whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine. 34.2 If the Contractor is subsequently ordered by the Owner to resume the Work, any cost or expenses to which the Contractor may be entitled by reason of the suspension, delay, or interruption shall be recovered by means of a Change Order in accordance with Articles 13 and 14 hereof and the Contract Construction Schedule shall be adjusted in accordance with Article 13 hereof. 34.3 In the event of termination by the Owner under this Article, the Contractor shall be entitled to receive the reasonable and documented direct costs incurred prior to termination, including the cost of materials purchased for the Work which purchases cannot be canceled or which material cannot reasonably be used by the Contractor on other work, and the cost of closing down the Project in a safe and efficient manner, plus ten percent (10 %) thereof for overhead and profit, subject to the following conditions: a) When the Contract is terminated before completion of all items of Work, payment shall be made for the actual number of units or items of Work completed at the applicable contract prices, or as mutually agreed for items of Work partially complete. If a mutual agreement cannot be reached, the Owner shall have the authority to make such equitable adjustment as it deems warranted and the Final Payment shall be made accordingly. b) Reimbursement for organization of any Work and moving equipment to and from the job shall be considered when not otherwise provided for in the Contract Documents where the volume of completed Work is too small to compensate the Contractor for those expenses under unit prices. If a mutual agreement cannot be reached, the Owner will have the authority to make such equitable adjustments as it deems warranted and the Final Payment will be made accordingly. c) Materials obtained by the Contractor for the Work that have been inspected and accepted by the Designer and that are not incorporated in the Work shall, at the request of the Contractor, be purchased from the Contractor at the Contractor's actual cost as shown by receipted bills and actual costs records at such points of delivery as may be determined by the Owner. d) No payment shall be made by Owner to Contractor except as herein above provided. No claim for loss of anticipated profits shall be considered or allowed. Revised 10/17 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 M. e) Termination of the Contract shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities for any completed portion of the Work nor shall it relieve his sureties of their obligation for and concerning any just claims arising out of the Work performed. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any other compensation, including compensation for lost profit, lost opportunity, or any other direct or consequential cost, loss, or damage. ARTICLE 35 MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRISE PROGRAM 35.1 The Contractor shall at all times comply with the Orange County Minority Business Enterprise Policy. All documentation substantiating compliance with the requirements of this program shall be delivered to the Owner as stipulated in the Contract Documents. A copy of the Orange County Minority Business Enterprise Policy is included in the Project Manual. ARTICLE 36 E- VERIFY AND DIGITAL SIGNATURES 36.1 By executing the Agreement Contractor affirms Contractor, its agents and subcontractors, are and shall remain in compliance with Article 2 of Chapter 64 of the North Carolina General Statutes. 36.2 This Agreement together with any amendments or modifications may be executed electronically. All electronic signatures affixed hereto evidence the consent of the Parties to utilize electronic signatures and intent of the Parties to comply with Article 11A and Article 40 of North Carolina General Statute Chapter 66. 36.3 By executing the Agreement Contractor certifies that Contractor has not been identified, and has not utilized the services of any agent or subcontractor identified, on the list created by the State Treasurer pursuant to G.S. 147 - 86.58. 36.4 By executing the Agreement Contractor certifies that Contractor has not been identified, and has not utilized the services of any agent or subcontractor identified, on the list created by the State Treasurer pursuant to G.S. 147 - 86.81. ARTICLE 37 GENERAL 37.1 If any provision of the Agreement shall be declared invalid or unenforceable, the remainder of the Agreement shall continue in full force and effect. 37.2 The titles to Articles herein are for convenience only, are not substantive parts of the General Conditions, and are not to be considered in interpreting the Contract Documents. END OF GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - EXHIBIT 1 Revised 10/17 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 /1 1 1 2 V 3 4 LEGEND A CEILING SUPPLY DIFFUSER, TYPE AND CFM INDICATED 275 F CEILING RETURN GRILLE, TYPE AND CFM INDICATED 450 E CEILING EXHAUST GRILLE, TYPE AND CFM INDICATED 95 TYPE CEILING RETURN GRILLE, TYPE AND CFM INDICATED G" IU -5 CONCEALED DUCTED INDOOR UNIT IU 1 I CEILING CASSETTE INDOOR UNIT C CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING R REFRIGERANT PIPING 24X12 RECTANGULAR DUCT, WIDTH x DEPTH ROUND OR SPIRAL DUCT, DIAMETER DUCT BALANCE DAMPER DUCT TRANSITION DUCT TAKEOFF AT 45 DEGREES(TYPICAL) DUCT SQUARE ELBOW WITH TURNING VANES SD DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR (FURNISHED BY E.C. AND INSTALLED BY M.C.) UC UNDERCUT DOOR OT WALL MOUNTED THERMOSTAT / CONTROLLER FLEXIBL CONNECTION GENERAL MECHANICAL DUCTWORK NOTES CFM 1. THE DRAWINGS SHOW THE LOCATION AND ARRANGEMENT OF PIPING, DUCTS, AND EQUIPMENT, TOGETHER 50 WITH DETAILS OF CONNECTIONS OF CERTAIN PRINCIPAL ITEMS. THE LAYOUT SHOWN SHALL BE FOLLOWED A AS CLOSELY AS CIRCUMSTANCES WILL PERMIT, BUT THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL, 50 0 o STRUCTURAL, PLUMBING, AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS AND SHALL COOPERATE FULLY WITH OTHER 50 CONTRACTORS AND TRADES WHILE INSTALLING DUCTS, PIPING, AND OTHER EQUIPMENT BECAUSE OF CLOSE 50 =II I SPACE LIMITS. IN CASE OF CONFLICT, NOTIFY DESIGNER BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH INSTALLATION. REFER 40 TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR EXACT BUILDING DIMENSIONS AND LOCATIONS OF PARTITION WALLS, 40 DOORS, CHASES, CASEWORK, ETC. DO NOT SCALE MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR SUCH DIMENSIONS. 35 IU -1 -09 20 Cn m 2. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL ALL OFFSETS, FITTINGS, AND ACCESSORIES THAT MAY BE 40 v REQUIRED FOR A COMPLETE AND PROPER INSTALLATION, OR RECOMMENDED BY THE EQUIPMENT WHETHER OR NOT THEY ARE SPECIFICALLY SHOWN OR SPECIFIED. 20 IU -1 -12 IMANUFACTURER, IU -1 -13 c� 3. DUCTWORK SIZES INDICATED ON DRAWINGS ARE FREE INSIDE DIMENSIONS. IU -1 -14 4. MAXIMUM LENGTH OF FLEXIBLE DUCT IS SIX FEET (6). IU -1 -15 ra IU -1 -16 5. ALL VALVES, DAMPERS, CONTROLS, AND OTHER ITEMS REQUIRED FOR OPERATION OR MAINTENANCE ARE TO IU -1 -17 BE ACCESSIBLE. I IU -1 -18 20 B 6. ALL SLEEVES, OUTLET BOXES, AND OTHER ROUGH -INS FOR SUCH ITEMS AS FIRE DAMPERS, PIPE IU -1 -20 PENETRATIONS, LOUVERS, AND CONTROL ITEMS SHALL BE INSTALLED AS THE BUILDING CONSTRUCTION IU -1 -21 PROGRESSES. ALL FLOOR /ROOF /PLATFORM PENETRATIONS TO BE CAST IN PLACE SLEEVES. IU -1 -22 7. PROVIDE AND INSTALL VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS AT ALL SUPPLY MAIN AND BRANCH DUCT TAKE -OFFS. IU -1 -23 8. PROVIDE AND INSTALL DUCT ACCESS DOORS AT ALL SMOKE DAMPERS, FIRE DAMPERS, AND DUCT SMOKE IU -1 -24 DETECTORS. REFER TO MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR LOCATIONS. IU -1 -25 N IU -1 -26 9. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL TAKE FIELD MEASUREMENTS BEFORE FABRICATING ANY DUCTS TO ENSURE THAT IU -1 -27 10 DUCT SIZES SHOWN WILL FIT INTO AVAILABLE SPACE. IN CASE OF CONFLICT, NOTIFY THE DESIGNER BEFORE PROCEEDING. _ 0 i 10. ALL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. =II 11. COORDINATE LOCATIONS OF ALL FLOOR DRAINS WITH PLUMBING CONTRACTOR, PRIOR TO SLABS BEING POURED. C N o 12. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION FOR ALL CEILING DIFFUSERS /GRILLES WITH ARCHITECTURAL REFLECTED �? CEILING PLAN AND ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR'S LIGHTING LAYOUT. �m 13. ALL EMS SENSORS AND OTHER FIELD DEVICES MOUNTED ON WALLS TO BE PROTECTED FROM DAMAGE AS REQUIRED - INSTALL LEXAN COVERS, WIRE GUARDS, OR SIMILAR AS REQUIRED. COORDINATE CONDITIONS IN �t THE FIELD. �N 14. THE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING TO THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR Io THE QUANTITY, SIZE AND LOCATIONS OF ALL ACCESS DOORS IN WALLS, DRYWALL CEILINGS, ETC. FOR ACCESS TO VALVES, BALANCE DAMPERS OR OTHER EQUIPMENT AS REQUIRED. COORDINATE THIS WORK WITH THE REFLECTED CEILING PLANS. ALL VALVES OR OTHER DEVICES LOCATED ABOVE THE CEILING SHALL BE LOCATED IN ACCESSIBLE CEILINGS WHEREVER POSSIBLE. VERIFY LOCATION OF ALL VALVES IN INACCESSIBLE CEILINGS OR CHASES WITH THE ARCHITECT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. 15. COORDINATE EXACT SIZE, LOCATION, APPURTENANCES, ETC. FOR ALL ROOF OPENINGS. _ 16. REFER TO MANUFACTURER'S DETAILS FOR PERMISSIBLE LOCATIONS AND METHODS FOR HANGING DUCTWORK FROM STRUCTURE. ALL DUCTWORK HANGERS TO BE WITHIN 6" OF PANEL POINTS OF JOISTS. DO D =� NOT WELD DUCT HANGERS /SUPPORTS TO STRUCTURE WITHOUT PRIOR APPROVAL FROM THE ENGINEER AND o GENERAL CONTRACTOR. 17. COORDINATE EXACT SIZES REQUIRED FOR ALL OPENING FOR DUCTWORK AND PIPING WITH SPACE to REQUIREMENTS AND EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIOR TO FRAMING FOR THE PENETRATIONS. N � 2 ■ GENERAL MECHANICAL PIPING NOTES 1. CONTRACTOR TO SLOPE ALL CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING ABOVE CEILINGS, UNDER SLAB, AND BELOW GRADE -1/8" PER FOOT (MINIMUM). 2. IN MECHANICAL ROOMS AND ON MECHANICAL PLATFORMS, ROUTE ALL A/H UNIT CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING TO CLOSEST FLOOR OR HUB DRAIN UNLESS SHOWN OTHERWISE. 3. REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS AND DETAILS FOR PERMISSIBLE LOCATIONS AND METHODS FOR HANGING PIPING FROM STRUCTURE. ALL PIPE HANGERS TO BE WITHIN 6" OF PANEL POINTS OF JOISTS. DO NOT WELD E PIPE HANGERS /SUPPORTS TO STRUCTURE WITHOUT PRIOR APPROVAL FROM THE ENGINEER. REFRIGERANT PIPING / POWER AND CONTROL WIRING NOTES: 1. VRV SYSTEM PIPING AND ALL POWER / CONTROL WIRING AND CONDUIT NOT SHOWN ON THESE PLANS. EACH VRV HP MANUFACTURER HAS DIFFERENT PIPING REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE WITH SPECIFIC EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER / VENDOR IN REGARDS TO EXACT REFRIGERANT PIPING ROUTING, QUANTITY, AND SIZING, AS WELL AS ACCESSORIES (REFNET JOINTS, ELBOWS, HEADERS, BRANCH SELECTOR BOXES, EXPANSION LOOPS, ETC.) AS TO QUANTITIES AND LOCATIONS. EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER / VENDOR TO FURNISH TO THE CONTRACTOR (PRIOR TO BIDDING) COMPLETE EQUIPMENT, REFRIGERANT PIPING, AND POWER / CONTROL WIRING AND CONDUIT LAYOUT DRAWINGS; COMPLETE SUBMITTALS OF ALL EQUIPMENT, ACCESSORIES, DEVICES, ETC.; COMPLETE LIST OF ALL REQUIRED MATERIALS (TAKE -OFFS) SUCH AS REFRIGERANT PIPING (AMOUNT AND SIZE), REFNET JOINTS, ELBOWS, HEADERS, BRANCH SELECTOR BOXES, ETC.. INFORMATION TO BE SUFFICIENT FOR CONTRACTOR TO PERFORM DETAILED TAKE -OFFS FOR BIDDING AND INSTALLATION. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL COSTS ASSOCIATED WITH PROVIDING A COMPLETE AND FUNCTIONAL SYSTEM. DRAWINGS TO SHOW LOCATIONS, PROPOSED ROUTING, F SIZES, FITTINGS, ACCESSORIES, ETC.. DRAWING PACKAGE TO BE FURNISHED AS PART OF SUBMITTAL PACKAGE (BY SUCCESSFUL VENDOR). 2. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL GENERALLY BE REQUIRED TO FURNISH AND INSTALL POWER WIRING / CONDUIT FOR INDOOR UNITS AND BRANCH SELECTOR BOXES (WHERE APPLICABLE). E.C. TO FURNISH A JUNCTION BOX WITH POWER WIRING FROM PANEL IN THE VICINITY OF EACH INDOOR FAN COIL UNIT. E.C. TO FURNISH A 2 -POLE, FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH (FUSED PER MFG'S RECOMMENDATIONS) AT EACH INDOOR FAN COIL UNIT AND BRANCH SELECTOR BOX. THIS CONTRACTOR TO FURNISH AND INSTALL POWER WIRING AND CONDUIT (SIZED PER NEC, ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS, AND MFG RECOMMENDATIONS) FROM EACH JUNCTION BOX TO EACH FAN COIL UNIT (AND, WHERE APPLICABLE, THE ASSOCIATED BRANCH SELECTOR BOX). M.C. CABLE MAY BE UTILIZED WHERE ALLOWED PER THE ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS. ROUTE THROUGH DISCONNECT TO EQUIPMENT - BY THIS CONTRACTOR. SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS AND MECHANICAL DETAILS. 3. THIS CONTRACTOR TO FURNISH AND INSTALL ALL CONTROL CONDUIT, WIRING, CABLES (LOW VOLTAGE AND OTHERWISE). 4. E.C. TO FURNISH AND INSTALL FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCHES FOR ALL INDOOR FAN COIL UNITS, BRANCH G SELECTOR BOXES, AND OUTDOOR UNITS. THIS CONTRACTOR TO SUPPLY FUSES (SIZED PER MFG'S RECOMMENDATIONS). 5. THIS CONTRACTOR TO FURNISH AND INSTALL ALL REFRIGERANT PIPING, ALONG WITH ASSOCIATED FITTINGS, DEVICES, CONTROLS, ETC. FOR A COMPLETE SYSTEM PER THE VRV MANUFACTURER'S SUGGESTIONS. 6. BASIS OF DESIGN IS DAIKIN. DEMOLITION NOTES 1. ALL DEMOLITION WORK OF EXISTING HVAC SYSTEM TO BE BY OWNER, WITH THE EXCEPTION OF THE EXISTING CONDENSING UNITS ON THE ROOF. THIS CONTRACTOR TO BE RESPONSIBLE FOR REMOVING H EXISTING CONDENSING UNITS (WHILE CRANE IS AVAILABLE TO SET NEW OUTDOOR UNITS). 2. M.C. TO REMOVE EXISTING WINDOW THAT WILL BE REPLACED WITH AN O/A INTAKE LOUVER. 3 4 LEGEND A CEILING SUPPLY DIFFUSER, TYPE AND CFM INDICATED 275 F CEILING RETURN GRILLE, TYPE AND CFM INDICATED 450 E CEILING EXHAUST GRILLE, TYPE AND CFM INDICATED 95 TYPE CEILING RETURN GRILLE, TYPE AND CFM INDICATED G" IU -5 CONCEALED DUCTED INDOOR UNIT IU 1 I CEILING CASSETTE INDOOR UNIT C CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING R REFRIGERANT PIPING 24X12 RECTANGULAR DUCT, WIDTH x DEPTH ROUND OR SPIRAL DUCT, DIAMETER DUCT BALANCE DAMPER DUCT TRANSITION DUCT TAKEOFF AT 45 DEGREES(TYPICAL) DUCT SQUARE ELBOW WITH TURNING VANES SD DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR (FURNISHED BY E.C. AND INSTALLED BY M.C.) UC UNDERCUT DOOR OT WALL MOUNTED THERMOSTAT / CONTROLLER FLEXIBL CONNECTION RETURN 1 01111! 5 FLEXIBLE CONNECTION 3/4" COND. DRAIN AND AUXILIARY DRAIN PAN WITH 3/4" AUX. PAN DRAIN TO FLOAT SWITCH UNDER A/H OR P CONTR'S DRAIN OR PUMP. UNIT BY THIS CONTRACTOR OUTSIDE AIR SCHEDULE A/H UNIT MOUNTED IN HORIZONTAL POSITION CFM IU -1 -01 50 IU -1 -02 50 IU -1 -03 50 5 FLEXIBLE CONNECTION 3/4" COND. DRAIN AND AUXILIARY DRAIN PAN WITH 3/4" AUX. PAN DRAIN TO FLOAT SWITCH UNDER A/H OR P CONTR'S DRAIN OR PUMP. UNIT BY THIS CONTRACTOR OUTSIDE AIR SCHEDULE UNIT CFM IU -1 -01 50 IU -1 -02 50 IU -1 -03 50 IU -1 -04 50 IU -1 -05 50 IU -1 -06 40 IU -1 -07 40 IU -1 -08 35 IU -1 -09 20 IU -1 -10 40 IU -1 -11 20 IU -1 -12 20 IU -1 -13 10 IU -1 -14 45 IU -1 -15 175 IU -1 -16 175 IU -1 -17 15 IU -1 -18 20 IU -1 -19 20 IU -1 -20 10 IU -1 -21 10 IU -1 -22 25 IU -1 -23 10 IU -1 -24 10 IU -1 -25 40 IU -1 -26 15 IU -1 -27 10 TYPICAL A/H UNIT DETAIL 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 NOT TO SCALE 5 0 7 E-1 MECHANICAL SUMMARY - MECHANICAL SYSTEMS, SERVICE SYSTEMS, AND EQUIPMENT THERMALZONE 4A WINTER DRY BULB 16 °F SUMMER DRY BULB 93 °F INTERIOR DESIGN CONDITIONS WINTER DRY BULB 70 °F SUMMER DRY BULB 75 °F RELATIVE HUMIDITY 50% BUILDING HEATING LOAD 179,000 BTUH BUILDING COOLING LOAD 20 TONS MECHANICAL SPACING CONDITIONING SYSTEM UNITARY DESCRIPTION OF UNIT HEATING EFFICIENCY REFER TO EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES FOR EFFICIENCIES COOLING EFFICIENCY SIZE CATEGORY OF UNIT BOILER TOTAL BOILER OUTPUT. IF OVERSIZED STATE REASON N/A CHILLER TOTAL CHILLER CAPACITY. IF OVERSIZED STATE REASON N / A LIST EQUIPMENT EFFICIENCIES I REFER TO EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES FOR EFFICIENCIES GRILLE & DIFFUSER SCHEDULE SYMBOL TYPE LOCATION MANUFACTURER SIZE CFM REMARKS MODEL A SUPPLY CEILING PRICE 10 "0 OFF -WHITE FINISH, SQUARE TO ROUND LAY -IN SCD 2424 400 TRANSITION AS REQUIRED B RETURN/ CEILING PRICE 6x6 100 OFF -WHITE FINISH EXHAUST LAY -IN PDDR 24x24 C RETURN/ CEILING PRICE 8x8 220 OFF -WHITE FINISH EXHAUST LAY -IN PDDR 24x24 RETURN/ CEILING PRICE 10x10 D EXHAUST LAY -IN PDDR 350 OFF-WHITE FINISH 24x24 RETURN/ CEILING PRICE 16x16 E EXHAUST LAY -IN PDDR 600 OFF-WHITE FINISH 2 4x24 NOTES: 1. ALL GRILLES / DIFFUSERS SERVING LOCKERS, KITCHEN, TOILETS AND JAN. CLOSETS TO HAVE ALUMINUM CONSTRUCTION. 2. ALL GRILLE DESIGNATIONS MAY NOT BE UTILIZED ON THIS PROJECT. 3. BASIS OF DESIGN - PRICE; EQUIVALENT PRODUCTS BY: CARNES, TITUS, AND KRUEGER. HOOD / LOUVER SCHEDULE SYMBOL TYPE LOCATION MANUFACTURER SIZE CFM REMARKS MODEL INTAKE WALL RUSKIN 48x72 1055 1, 2, 3, 4 LOUVER ELF -375DX REMARKS: 1. BIRD SCREEN 2. BAKED ENAMEL FINISH - COLOR BY OWNER. 3. COMPARABLE PRODUCTS BY ARROW, CESCO, AMERICAN WARMING & VENTILATING, EMPCO, & DOWCO 4. COORDINATE DIMENSIONS WITH EXISTING WINDOW DIMENSIONS PRIOR TO ORDERING. FAN SCHEDULE FAN # TYPE LOCATION CFM S.P. RPM HP VOLT -PH. MFG. & MODEL SONES ROOF OPG. REMARKS EF -1 EXHAUST ROOF 450 .5" 1620 1/10 120 -1 GREENHECK 7.1 10.5x10.5 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 #G- 075 -VG EF -2 EXHAUST ROOF 400 .5" 1620 1/10 120 -1 GREENHECK 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 #G- 075 -VG 0 NOTE: BASIS OF DESIGN - GREENHECK; EQUIVALENT PRODUCTS BY CARNES, COOK, & PENN REMARKS: 1. DISCONNECT SWITCH 2. BACKDRAFT DAMPER 3. PRE - FABRICATED ROOF CURB. COORDINATE WITH ROOF TYPE AND SLOPE. 4. ON PROGRAM CONTROL WITH LOCAL AHU ZONE TO RUN WHEN BLDG. IS OCCUPIED. 5. BIRD SCREEN 7 E-' A 0 C N C F G H WA AA R Kli =ENGINEERS Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 94 Main Street Canton, North Carolina 28716 PHONE: 828 - 492 -0677 FAX: 828 - 492 -1054 MAIL @RNM - ENGINEERS. COM WWW.RNM- ENGINEERS.COM NC CERT. N0. C -0149 (C 2018 SEALS: m Z W J }} }}i]If7f1l o = ¢� CAR 0 U W `1� ` oneoav /f, ��JW ZNU O �.o7 cno OW SEAL _ - 0uiU-0 O w ?i u- ui m L i i --5 a Q N W f� , ° °�'ci;[n,4 K]. = V) U) z O F_ U Wz 0 W F_ LL Q 00. � Q _j Z W D 0 Z o m W 0 75 m F_ ::D J z W O c) U � W = V z U OW 0 REVISIONS /SU BM ISSIONS NO DATE ISSUED FOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SHEET TITLE: MECHANICAL SUMMARY AND SCHEDULES ISSUED FOR: CONSTRUCTION DRAWN BY: DJM DRAWING NO. APPROVED BY: MRM PROJECT #: 2017108 0 .1 DATE: 05/07/2018 OF 8 SHEETS GRILLE & DIFFUSER SCHEDULE SYMBOL TYPE LOCATION MANUFACTURER SIZE CFM REMARKS MODEL A SUPPLY CEILING PRICE 10 "0 OFF -WHITE FINISH, SQUARE TO ROUND LAY -IN SCD 2424 400 TRANSITION AS REQUIRED B RETURN/ CEILING PRICE 6x6 100 OFF -WHITE FINISH EXHAUST LAY -IN PDDR 24x24 C RETURN/ CEILING PRICE 8x8 220 OFF -WHITE FINISH EXHAUST LAY -IN PDDR 24x24 RETURN/ CEILING PRICE 10x10 D EXHAUST LAY -IN PDDR 350 OFF-WHITE FINISH 24x24 RETURN/ CEILING PRICE 16x16 E EXHAUST LAY -IN PDDR 600 OFF-WHITE FINISH 2 4x24 NOTES: 1. ALL GRILLES / DIFFUSERS SERVING LOCKERS, KITCHEN, TOILETS AND JAN. CLOSETS TO HAVE ALUMINUM CONSTRUCTION. 2. ALL GRILLE DESIGNATIONS MAY NOT BE UTILIZED ON THIS PROJECT. 3. BASIS OF DESIGN - PRICE; EQUIVALENT PRODUCTS BY: CARNES, TITUS, AND KRUEGER. HOOD / LOUVER SCHEDULE SYMBOL TYPE LOCATION MANUFACTURER SIZE CFM REMARKS MODEL INTAKE WALL RUSKIN 48x72 1055 1, 2, 3, 4 LOUVER ELF -375DX REMARKS: 1. BIRD SCREEN 2. BAKED ENAMEL FINISH - COLOR BY OWNER. 3. COMPARABLE PRODUCTS BY ARROW, CESCO, AMERICAN WARMING & VENTILATING, EMPCO, & DOWCO 4. COORDINATE DIMENSIONS WITH EXISTING WINDOW DIMENSIONS PRIOR TO ORDERING. FAN SCHEDULE FAN # TYPE LOCATION CFM S.P. RPM HP VOLT -PH. MFG. & MODEL SONES ROOF OPG. REMARKS EF -1 EXHAUST ROOF 450 .5" 1620 1/10 120 -1 GREENHECK 7.1 10.5x10.5 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 #G- 075 -VG EF -2 EXHAUST ROOF 400 .5" 1620 1/10 120 -1 GREENHECK 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 #G- 075 -VG 0 NOTE: BASIS OF DESIGN - GREENHECK; EQUIVALENT PRODUCTS BY CARNES, COOK, & PENN REMARKS: 1. DISCONNECT SWITCH 2. BACKDRAFT DAMPER 3. PRE - FABRICATED ROOF CURB. COORDINATE WITH ROOF TYPE AND SLOPE. 4. ON PROGRAM CONTROL WITH LOCAL AHU ZONE TO RUN WHEN BLDG. IS OCCUPIED. 5. BIRD SCREEN 7 E-' A 0 C N C F G H WA AA R Kli =ENGINEERS Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 94 Main Street Canton, North Carolina 28716 PHONE: 828 - 492 -0677 FAX: 828 - 492 -1054 MAIL @RNM - ENGINEERS. COM WWW.RNM- ENGINEERS.COM NC CERT. N0. C -0149 (C 2018 SEALS: m Z W J }} }}i]If7f1l o = ¢� CAR 0 U W `1� ` oneoav /f, ��JW ZNU O �.o7 cno OW SEAL _ - 0uiU-0 O w ?i u- ui m L i i --5 a Q N W f� , ° °�'ci;[n,4 K]. = V) U) z O F_ U Wz 0 W F_ LL Q 00. � Q _j Z W D 0 Z o m W 0 75 m F_ ::D J z W O c) U � W = V z U OW 0 REVISIONS /SU BM ISSIONS NO DATE ISSUED FOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SHEET TITLE: MECHANICAL SUMMARY AND SCHEDULES ISSUED FOR: CONSTRUCTION DRAWN BY: DJM DRAWING NO. APPROVED BY: MRM PROJECT #: 2017108 0 .1 DATE: 05/07/2018 OF 8 SHEETS NOTES: 1. ALL GRILLES / DIFFUSERS SERVING LOCKERS, KITCHEN, TOILETS AND JAN. CLOSETS TO HAVE ALUMINUM CONSTRUCTION. 2. ALL GRILLE DESIGNATIONS MAY NOT BE UTILIZED ON THIS PROJECT. 3. BASIS OF DESIGN - PRICE; EQUIVALENT PRODUCTS BY: CARNES, TITUS, AND KRUEGER. HOOD / LOUVER SCHEDULE SYMBOL TYPE LOCATION MANUFACTURER SIZE CFM REMARKS MODEL INTAKE WALL RUSKIN 48x72 1055 1, 2, 3, 4 LOUVER ELF -375DX REMARKS: 1. BIRD SCREEN 2. BAKED ENAMEL FINISH - COLOR BY OWNER. 3. COMPARABLE PRODUCTS BY ARROW, CESCO, AMERICAN WARMING & VENTILATING, EMPCO, & DOWCO 4. COORDINATE DIMENSIONS WITH EXISTING WINDOW DIMENSIONS PRIOR TO ORDERING. FAN SCHEDULE FAN # TYPE LOCATION CFM S.P. RPM HP VOLT -PH. MFG. & MODEL SONES ROOF OPG. REMARKS EF -1 EXHAUST ROOF 450 .5" 1620 1/10 120 -1 GREENHECK 7.1 10.5x10.5 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 #G- 075 -VG EF -2 EXHAUST ROOF 400 .5" 1620 1/10 120 -1 GREENHECK 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 #G- 075 -VG 0 NOTE: BASIS OF DESIGN - GREENHECK; EQUIVALENT PRODUCTS BY CARNES, COOK, & PENN REMARKS: 1. DISCONNECT SWITCH 2. BACKDRAFT DAMPER 3. PRE - FABRICATED ROOF CURB. COORDINATE WITH ROOF TYPE AND SLOPE. 4. ON PROGRAM CONTROL WITH LOCAL AHU ZONE TO RUN WHEN BLDG. IS OCCUPIED. 5. BIRD SCREEN 7 E-' A 0 C N C F G H WA AA R Kli =ENGINEERS Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 94 Main Street Canton, North Carolina 28716 PHONE: 828 - 492 -0677 FAX: 828 - 492 -1054 MAIL @RNM - ENGINEERS. COM WWW.RNM- ENGINEERS.COM NC CERT. N0. C -0149 (C 2018 SEALS: m Z W J }} }}i]If7f1l o = ¢� CAR 0 U W `1� ` oneoav /f, ��JW ZNU O �.o7 cno OW SEAL _ - 0uiU-0 O w ?i u- ui m L i i --5 a Q N W f� , ° °�'ci;[n,4 K]. = V) U) z O F_ U Wz 0 W F_ LL Q 00. � Q _j Z W D 0 Z o m W 0 75 m F_ ::D J z W O c) U � W = V z U OW 0 REVISIONS /SU BM ISSIONS NO DATE ISSUED FOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SHEET TITLE: MECHANICAL SUMMARY AND SCHEDULES ISSUED FOR: CONSTRUCTION DRAWN BY: DJM DRAWING NO. APPROVED BY: MRM PROJECT #: 2017108 0 .1 DATE: 05/07/2018 OF 8 SHEETS REMARKS: 1. BIRD SCREEN 2. BAKED ENAMEL FINISH - COLOR BY OWNER. 3. COMPARABLE PRODUCTS BY ARROW, CESCO, AMERICAN WARMING & VENTILATING, EMPCO, & DOWCO 4. COORDINATE DIMENSIONS WITH EXISTING WINDOW DIMENSIONS PRIOR TO ORDERING. FAN SCHEDULE FAN # TYPE LOCATION CFM S.P. RPM HP VOLT -PH. MFG. & MODEL SONES ROOF OPG. REMARKS EF -1 EXHAUST ROOF 450 .5" 1620 1/10 120 -1 GREENHECK 7.1 10.5x10.5 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 #G- 075 -VG EF -2 EXHAUST ROOF 400 .5" 1620 1/10 120 -1 GREENHECK 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 #G- 075 -VG 0 NOTE: BASIS OF DESIGN - GREENHECK; EQUIVALENT PRODUCTS BY CARNES, COOK, & PENN REMARKS: 1. DISCONNECT SWITCH 2. BACKDRAFT DAMPER 3. PRE - FABRICATED ROOF CURB. COORDINATE WITH ROOF TYPE AND SLOPE. 4. ON PROGRAM CONTROL WITH LOCAL AHU ZONE TO RUN WHEN BLDG. IS OCCUPIED. 5. BIRD SCREEN 7 E-' A 0 C N C F G H WA AA R Kli =ENGINEERS Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 94 Main Street Canton, North Carolina 28716 PHONE: 828 - 492 -0677 FAX: 828 - 492 -1054 MAIL @RNM - ENGINEERS. COM WWW.RNM- ENGINEERS.COM NC CERT. N0. C -0149 (C 2018 SEALS: m Z W J }} }}i]If7f1l o = ¢� CAR 0 U W `1� ` oneoav /f, ��JW ZNU O �.o7 cno OW SEAL _ - 0uiU-0 O w ?i u- ui m L i i --5 a Q N W f� , ° °�'ci;[n,4 K]. = V) U) z O F_ U Wz 0 W F_ LL Q 00. � Q _j Z W D 0 Z o m W 0 75 m F_ ::D J z W O c) U � W = V z U OW 0 REVISIONS /SU BM ISSIONS NO DATE ISSUED FOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SHEET TITLE: MECHANICAL SUMMARY AND SCHEDULES ISSUED FOR: CONSTRUCTION DRAWN BY: DJM DRAWING NO. APPROVED BY: MRM PROJECT #: 2017108 0 .1 DATE: 05/07/2018 OF 8 SHEETS 0 NOTE: BASIS OF DESIGN - GREENHECK; EQUIVALENT PRODUCTS BY CARNES, COOK, & PENN REMARKS: 1. DISCONNECT SWITCH 2. BACKDRAFT DAMPER 3. PRE - FABRICATED ROOF CURB. COORDINATE WITH ROOF TYPE AND SLOPE. 4. ON PROGRAM CONTROL WITH LOCAL AHU ZONE TO RUN WHEN BLDG. IS OCCUPIED. 5. BIRD SCREEN 7 E-' A 0 C N C F G H WA AA R Kli =ENGINEERS Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 94 Main Street Canton, North Carolina 28716 PHONE: 828 - 492 -0677 FAX: 828 - 492 -1054 MAIL @RNM - ENGINEERS. COM WWW.RNM- ENGINEERS.COM NC CERT. N0. C -0149 (C 2018 SEALS: m Z W J }} }}i]If7f1l o = ¢� CAR 0 U W `1� ` oneoav /f, ��JW ZNU O �.o7 cno OW SEAL _ - 0uiU-0 O w ?i u- ui m L i i --5 a Q N W f� , ° °�'ci;[n,4 K]. = V) U) z O F_ U Wz 0 W F_ LL Q 00. � Q _j Z W D 0 Z o m W 0 75 m F_ ::D J z W O c) U � W = V z U OW 0 REVISIONS /SU BM ISSIONS NO DATE ISSUED FOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SHEET TITLE: MECHANICAL SUMMARY AND SCHEDULES ISSUED FOR: CONSTRUCTION DRAWN BY: DJM DRAWING NO. APPROVED BY: MRM PROJECT #: 2017108 0 .1 DATE: 05/07/2018 OF 8 SHEETS flnr.wginn Fn % /PlnnP in. 9R9Fir.nA i- d(,.39- d9Cf1- AdCC- nC.9RARAR7rF7 WA AA R Kli =ENGINEERS Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 94 Main Street Canton, North Carolina 28716 PHONE: 828 - 492 -0677 FAX: 828 - 492 -1054 MAIL @RNM - ENGINEERS. COM WWW.RNM- ENGINEERS.COM NC CERT. N0. C -0149 (C 2018 SEALS: M Z W J Lu W }}}}i]If7f1l CAS J J ZNU00 -- cn 0 0 ui - � W `` Z(r�N W SEAL 0 0 ap-° �° ui = V) U) z O F- U uw z -j O wF- LL < 00. � � z w �rT- _ Q D 0 Z o m w o 75 m z =:)w O U � w= CD z Q rr U OW C) O rr rl REVISIONS /SUBMISSIONS NO DATE ISSUED FOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SHEET TITLE: VRV SYSTEM SCHEDULES ISSUED FOR: CONSTRUCTION DRAWN BY: DJM DRAWING NO. APPROVED BY: MRM PROJECT #: 2017108 MO.2 DATE: 05/07/2018 OF 8 SHEETS nnaiGinn Fnvalnna in. 9RgFi('ni.,i -d( "fig- A9Cf)- AA(,.(,.- n(,.9RARAR7(.F7 AM AA R K14 =ENGINEERS Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 94 Main Street Canton, North Carolina 28716 PHONE: 828 - 492 -0677 FAX: 828 - 492 -1054 MAIL @RNM - ENGINEERS. COM WWW.RNM- ENGfNEERS.COM NC CERT. N0. C -0149 © 2018 SEALS: m z w � O ° 27- U W ��ttt�irrrrr ,• CAR I"/ `�., • Qpvo9v Q fJJ Lu uj Oz U e �a� (~ O (n 0 (f' o Lw W L` O (� = Z SEAL ° ° �F NLJ Z � � �i LE (n � W f � as � ° rQ D W O C � Q o frI >� �''� M c Cn = Cn Of t- � V J z O F- C) wz —j O w� LL < 00, 0 J z W rr � _ Q I— @ Oz O m w o m F— Z z C3 ::Dw 0c) U � w= CD z Q oC O W -) O Of Cl- REVISIONS /SUBMISSIONS NO DATE ISSUED FOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SHEET TITLE: VR V SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS ISSUED FOR: CONSTRUCTION DRAWN BY: DJM DRAWING NO. APPROVED BY: MRM PROJECT #: 2017108 0 DATE: 05/07/2018 OF 8 SHEETS nnaiGinn Fnvalnna in. 9RgFi('ni.,i -d( "fig- A9Cf)- AA(,.(,.- n(,.9RARAR7(.F7 AM AA R K14 =ENGINEERS Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 94 Main Street Canton, North Carolina 28716 PHONE: 828 - 492 -0677 FAX: 828 - 492 -1054 MAIL @RNM - ENGINEERS. COM WWW.RNM- ENGfNEERS.COM NC CERT. N0. C -0149 © 2018 SEALS: m z w � O ° 27- U W ��ttt�irrrrr ,• CAR I"/ `�., • Qpvo9v Q fJJ Lu uj Oz U e �a� (~ O (n 0 (f' o Lw W L` O (� = Z SEAL ° ° �F NLJ Z � � �i LE (n � W f � as � ° rQ D W O C � Q o frI >� �''� M c Cn = Cn Of t- � V J z O F- C) wz —j O w� LL < 00, 0 J z W rr � _ Q I— @ Oz O m w o m F— Z z C3 ::Dw 0c) U � w= CD z Q oC O W -) O Of Cl- REVISIONS /SUBMISSIONS NO DATE ISSUED FOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SHEET TITLE: VRV SYSTEM PIPING DIAGRAMS ISSUED FOR: CONSTRUCTION DRAWN BY: DJM DRAWING NO. APPROVED BY: MRM PROJECT #: 2017108 MO.4 DATE: 05/07/2018 OF 8 SHEETS DocuSign Envelope ID 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 A I C I E F G H 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 a WWW.RNM- ENGfNEERS.COM NC CERT. N0. C -0149 (D 2018 SEALS: co Z W J • 0 o Lu OZ U 4" O/A UP TO ATTIC IT ROOM (~ O (nocn0w vWL`O (� = Z Ld e SEAL ° o 02 5 Z O Of �i2(nC�W f as a00° 15 C = Cn =II I1 m 4" 0/A UP TO ATTIC IU -1 -01 IU -1 -17 I❑I — V ) N I m O 6" O/A UP TO ATTIC - I❑I I❑I IU -1 -18 C) wz U IOFFICE LU — O 0 O 0 —J z W rr ry— _ D Oz O W ww O G m \ UC UC z C3 I 0c) O T i W = N z \ Ow -) O Of Cl- REVISIONS /SUBMISSIONS NO DATE ISSUED FOR INOTE: \ 2 o 3 I UNDERCUT DOORS SHOWN ON ALL SPACES LESS THAN 4,038 CUBIC FEET. 4 I M.C. TO VERIFY EACH DOOR IS 1/2 INCH MINIMUM UNDERCUT (TYPICAL). \ \ 6 7 8 / I SHEET TITLE: FIRST FLOOR MECHANICAL PLAN ISSUED FOR: CONSTRUCTION DRAWN BY: N DRAWING NO. A A / / 6" 0/A UP TO ATTIC 275 275 / MRM PROJECT #: 2017108 mi . 1 DATE: 05/07/2018 / I ❑I IU -1 -19 OF 8 SHEETS 19 0/A UP TO ATTIC CD IU-1-02 /4" I❑I / .II \ 1 I T I — 10" S/A UP TO ATTIC / N \ ^� T C-) �m \ TO IU -1 -16 IU -1 -20 I❑I 01 D I� 110E TYPICAL CEILING 3 1 N 1 4 SUPPLY DIFFUSER A A D N. 275 275 n ,o I PRECINCT MEETING 4" 0/A UP TO ATTIC STORAGE FOYER T) CEILING EXHAUST GRILLE. 10x10 / EXHAUST DUCT UP TO ATTIC. 1 26 135 A A T / 275 275 TYPICAL BRANCH c SELECTOR BOX. �, O/A 0 0 C) 4" UP TO ATTIC 22 TYPE 10" S/A UP TO ATTIC BS -3 IU -1 -06 I❑I � I❑I "C.. / � IU -1 -07 1❑1 IU -1 -21 \ III // / N \ � TYPICAL 1341-Al' CE DAMPER. / RESTROOM \ / REFER TO OUTSIDE AIR A A VOTING (WOMEN) SCHEDUL FOR VALUES. 275 275 B OFFICE \� to MACHINE I / m 925 1 12 N STORAGE 16x16 R/A UP TO ATTIC U �^ U ■o / 8x8 TO IU 1 15 / � / TYPE , TYPICAL CEILING RETURN GRILLE "C" BREAK ROOM IU -1 -03 ❑ 8 "O 6 "!7� 6 "!7 D UC / UC B 25 925 4" O/A UP TO ATTIC " /A UP TO ATTIC T RESTROOM — 6" O/A UP TO ATTIC o I I IU -1 -22 106 o TRANSITION DUCTWORK 6x6 E/A UP TO ATTIC ` T TYPICAL BRANCH TO O/A INLET (TYPICAL). OFFICE OFFICE E D p 1 Og 1 08 B E 6x 225 225 BS 1 � SELECTOR BOX. — 75 T 10x10 IU -1 -10 I■I IU -1 -27 1❑1 C CORRIDOR f 190 — — - - (SOUTH) TRANSFER GRILLES (TYPICAL) 1 0 4" O/A UP oX 1 OOD IU 1 11 I■I IU-1-12 I■I TO ATTIC CEILING EXHAUST GRILLES. 8x8 p 225 T CORRIDOR OFFICE 0 FFI C E EXHAUST DUCT UP TO ATTIC. OFFICE (CENTRAL) 107 104A 137 100A E 103B 4" 0/A UP TO ATTIC IU -1 -13 C11 UP _ C TYPICAL BRANCH 135 SELECTOR BOX. I�I IU -1 -23 0 D UC UC UC � BS -2 T T RESTROOM T O CORRIDOR 4" O/A UP (MEN) H 1 04 TO ATTIC � 122 uc � � c 8x8 TYPE g IU -1 -26 I�I 6" O/A UP TO ATTIC 1 1 7 B , C„ CEILING EXHAUST GRILLE. 1 10 6" O/A UP TO ATTIC EXHAUST DUCT UP TO ATTIC. - p T D T 225 T T L C-) IU -1 -04 1 1 _ _ 0 22 UC TYPE TYPICAL TRANSFER GRILLE ❑ 4" 0/A UP TO ATTIC _ � � - T _ TYPICAL BALANCE DAMPER. — IU -1 -14 1❑1 T — / ■ REFER TO OUTSIDE AIR I■I 1❑1 IU -1 -24 IU 1 08 1 I IU 1 09 / 6" O/A UP T ATTIC SCHEDULE FOR VALUES. OFFICE T — / — — 101 / UC `r FOYER (EAST) CONDENSATE PUMPED TO OFFICE / OkPLY 6 "QJ 4 „0 LOT 1 36 NEAREST HUB DRAIN - TYPICAL. TYPICAL WALL MOUNTED 1 03 STORAGE STORAGE CONTROLLER (THERMOSAT). 117A 117 TYPICAL DUCT TRANSITION 6” O/A UP TO ATTIC 6" O/A UP TO ATTIC \ IU -1 -25 0-0 OFFICE IU -1 -05 1 ❑1 TYPICAL 2x2 CEILINC CAr SETTE El 02 FIRST FLOOR MECHANICAL PLAN z SCALE: 1/4" = 1' -0" 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 n 0 C m E F G H i R K14 =ENGINEERS Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 94 Main Street Canton, North Carolina 28716 PHONE: 828 - 492 -0677 FAX: 828 - 492 -1054 MAIL @RNM - ENGINEERS. COM WWW.RNM- ENGfNEERS.COM NC CERT. N0. C -0149 (D 2018 SEALS: co Z W J }111i1117ffr Lu OZ U e �a� (~ O (nocn0w vWL`O (� = Z Ld e SEAL ° o 02 5 Z O Of �i2(nC�W f as a00° Q C = Cn V ) z O F- C) wz -j O LU LL Q O 0 O 0 —J z W rr ry— _ D Oz O W ww O G m z C3 Lu 0c) U \� W = V z Q Ow -) O Of Cl- REVISIONS /SUBMISSIONS NO DATE ISSUED FOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SHEET TITLE: FIRST FLOOR MECHANICAL PLAN ISSUED FOR: CONSTRUCTION DRAWN BY: DJM DRAWING NO. APPROVED BY: MRM PROJECT #: 2017108 mi . 1 DATE: 05/07/2018 OF 8 SHEETS DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 A I C 11 E F G H 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 a WWW.RNM- ENGINEERS.COM NC CERT. N0. C -0149 (C 2018 SEALS: m Z W J O = � }} }}i]If7f1l 14j�\ C A ��JW :z (n cno OW — 0uiU-0 Z(r�Nw SEAL 4 "0 0/A DOWN 0 0 = V) TO IU -1 -17 =11 z O F_ U uw z 0 W F_ LL Q � 00. C Lu Im Oz 0 m W 0 75 m J J z Cn O c) U � W = V z U 2 I U OW C) 0 REVISIONS /SU BM ISSIONS NO DATE ISSUED FOR 1 "0 "0 c� 6 0/A DOWN 4 4 0/A DOWN 5 TO I U -1 -01 TO I U -1 -18 7 8 SHEET TITLE: ATTIC LEVEL MECHANICAL PLAN I O CONSTRUCTION DRAWN BY: DJM P zo APPROVED BY: MRM PROJECT #: 2017108 zo DATE: 05/07/2018 TYPICAL BALANCE DAMPER. OF 8 SHEETS REFER TO OUTSIDE AIR SCHEDULE FOR VALUES. l J r � C 6 "0 N 4" A DOWN 0 i o TO IU -1 -19 all 6 "0 0/A DOWN O/A INTAKE LOUVER - APPROX. 4'x6'. M.C. TO REMOVE 10' S/A DOWN TO CEILING a TO IU -1 -02 EXISTING WINDOW COMPLETELY, REPLACE WITH SUPPLY DIFUSERS TYPICAL BALANCE DAMPER. LOUVER, AND SEAL WEATHER- TIGHT. COORDINATE REFER TO OUTSIDE AI TO MATCH EXISTING WINDOW DIMENSIONS, SCHEDULE FOR VALUES. N O V m ' a TRANSITION DUCTWORK TO FULL SIZE OF LOUVER (TYPICAL). �0 4 "0 O/A DOWN N TO I U -1 -20 zo x 10 "0 1 0x1 0 E/A DOWN TYPICAL CONCEALED _ TO FIRST FLOOR TRANSITION DUCTWORK TO UNIT (TYPICAL). 10' S/A DOWN TO CEILING SUPPLY DIFUSERS DUCTED UNIT o I DOAS UNIT SUSPENDED IN ATTIC. =II w o a o IU -2 -01 m m Uo U o 16x16 R/A DOWN CEILING GRILLE IU -1 16 0/A DOWN 14"0 o TO IU-1-21 N 1 0 v o IU -1 24x10 15 0 10x12 16x12 SD N • SD C C "0 8"0 12 "10,10 12"0 AIR DUCTED 6 "0 8 "0 10 � P 6 0/A DOWN TO IU -1 -03 TO INDOOR UNITS. 8.10 4 "0 O/A DOWN TO I U -1 -27 6x6 E/A DOWN TO 4 "0 0/A DOWN FIRST FLOOR TO IU -1 -22 12x12 E/A DOWN UP TO EF -1 ON ROOF. 1 12x12 E/A DOWN UP TO EF -2 ON ROOF. co C co 16x16 R/A DOWN NEW FAN TO REPLACE EXISTING. NEW FAN TO REPLACE EXISTING. CEILING GRILLE COORDINATE WITH EXISTING CONDITIONS. COORDINATE WITH EXISTING CONDITIONS. 10x10 OUTSIDE AIR DUCTED TO INDOOR UNITS. 8x8 E/A DOWN TO FIRST FLOOR co OUTDOOR UNITS ON FLAT SECTION OF ROOF. OU 1 \ M.0 TO BE RESPONSIBLE FOR REMOVING o DN 60 EXISTING CONDENSING UNITS TO MAKE ROOM ox FOR NEW OUTDOOR UNITS. MODIFY EXISTING L _ J OR ADD NEW EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS BY PORTABLE PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS. /A DOWN OU -2 �/ �� TO 10 C 6" O/A DOWN TO FIR 3T FLOOR 4 "0 0/A DOWN 1 0x1 0 E/A DOWN TO IU -1 -26 TO FIRST FLOOR C 6 "0 P 60 6 "0 O/A DOWN TO I U -1 -04 C 6 "0 4"0 DOWN TO I U-1 -24 U -1 6" O/A DOWN TO P FIRST FLOOR c U 6 "0 O/A DOWN 6 "0 O/A DOWN TO IU -1 -25 TO I U -1 -05 ATTIC LEVEL MECHANICAL PLAN z SCALE: 1/4" = V -0" 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A 0 C N C F G H R Kli =ENGINEERS Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 94 Main Street Canton, North Carolina 28716 PHONE: 828 - 492 -0677 FAX: 828 - 492 -1054 MAIL @RNM - ENGINEERS. COM WWW.RNM- ENGINEERS.COM NC CERT. N0. C -0149 (C 2018 SEALS: m Z W J O = � }} }}i]If7f1l 14j�\ C A ��JW :z (n cno OW — 0uiU-0 Z(r�Nw SEAL Lo' Ewd Of Q N� W ui = V) U) z O F_ U uw z 0 W F_ LL Q � 00. Q _j Z Lu D Oz 0 m W 0 75 m J J z W O c) U � W = V z U OW C) 0 REVISIONS /SU BM ISSIONS NO DATE ISSUED FOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SHEET TITLE: ATTIC LEVEL MECHANICAL PLAN ISSUED FOR: CONSTRUCTION DRAWN BY: DJM DRAWING NO. APPROVED BY: MRM PROJECT #: 2017108 M1.2 DATE: 05/07/2018 OF 8 SHEETS DocuSign Envelope ID 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 A 1 C 1 E F G H 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 a WWW.RNM- ENGfNEERS.COM NC CERT. N0. C -0149 © 2018 0 o co Z W J CLEAN -OUT IT ROOM 1 15 � UJ OZ U III Im (~ (n 0 0 Lu �O w` = z CLEAN -OUT Z � � �i 0 (n � W a ow0Q� Q a- o CO IU -1 -01 — IU-1-17 I ❑I _ CO — = Cn N Im I❑I I ❑I IU -1 -18 U IOFFIG z — T1 F_ w wz 6 3/4" CONDENSATE DRAIN - TYPIC AL � 00, 3/4" CONDENSATE DRAIN - TYPICAL UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 0 J z W rr ry– _ UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. Oz 0 N G m Z 0 Lu 0c) U \� W = 3/4" z Ow NOTES: REVISIONS /SUBMISSIONS NO DATE 1. REFER TO MANUFACTURE'S VRV SYSTEM PIPING _ 1 DIAGRAM ON SHEET MO.4 FOR REFRIGERANT PIPING. I❑I IU -1 -19 3 2. TYPICAL REFRIGERANT PIPING TO BE ROUTED IN ATTIC. 3/4" CD N IU-1-02 a t 5 I - 3/4" II n 7 1.. 8 SHEET TITLE: 0 MECHANICAL 3/4" ISSUED FOR: CONSTRUCTION U_ DJM IU -1 -20 APPROVED BY: �m PROJECT #: 01 M1 . 3 1� 05/07/2018 110E I❑I 0 OF 8 SHEETS N �o 1 4 D N. `, 3/4" PRECINCT MEETING TYPICAL STORAGE FOYER T) CONCEALED 1 26 1 1 0 DUCTED UNIT HD 135 _ TYPICAL BRANCH 0 � SELECTOR BOX (IN ATTIC). �\ INSTALL NEW HUB DRAIN ABOVE CEILING. CD — — CONNECT TO EXISTING WASTE PIPING (TYPICAL). IU -1 -06 I■I C]I IU 1 07 BS 3 — — — I❑I IU -1 -21 �II N RESTROOM 'L VOTING (WOMEN) IU 1 16 3/4" OFFICE to MACHINE 125 3/4" 112 N STORAGE U �^ IU -1 -15 ■ C9 ■ o 1" 3/4" BREAK ROOM IU -1 -03 I ❑I 1 05 3/4" 14" 3/4" FURNISH AND INSTALL RESTROOM UXILARY DRAIN PAN WITH FLOAT SWITCH I❑I IU -1 -22 1 06 \ BENEATH DUCTED UNITS — HUB DRAIN \ #IU1 -15 AND IU1 -16. OFFICE OFFIC- A _ 314" TYPICAL BRANCH IU IU -1 -10 -1 -27 SELECTOR BOX _ 1 09 1 08 — BS 1 (IN ATTIC). 1 ❑ 1 3/4 101 CLEAN -OUT CORRIDOR CLEAN -OUT — 3/4" HD — (SOUTH) 3/4" IU -1 -11 I ❑I IU -1 -12 I❑I CLE N -0 T ICO 11/4" CORRIDOR 3/4" 3/4" OF ICE 3 /4„ OFFICE L314" (CENTRAL) 3/4" OFFICE 7 104A 103B 137 COI 100A 1" Tup- I❑I IU -1 -13 _ HD -a* TYPICAL BRANCH — SELECTOR BOX (IN ATTIC). I❑I IU-1-23 BS -2 CORRIDOR INSTALL NEW HUB DRAIN ABOVE CEILING. ESTROOM 1" 3/4" EN) H - 1 04 CONNECT TO EXISTING WASTE PIPING (TYPICAL). 1 2 CLEAN -OUT — 314" 3/4" 3/4" � � I ❑I IU -1 -26 CO — 3/4" IU -1 -04 I❑I 0 0 314" 3/4.. 3/4° 0 0 — — IU -1 -14 I■I — IU 1 08 I■I IU -1 -09 I❑I OFFICE I❑I IU -1 -24 1 01 314" FOYER (EAST) CONDENSATE PUMPED TO OFFICE EARLY VOTING BALLOT 1 36 NEAREST HUB DRAIN - TYPICAL. 1 03 STORAGE STORAGE 117A 117 \CO 3/4" \_ IU -1 -25 I❑I CLEAN OUT OFFICE 1 02 IU 1 05 El I TYPICAL 2x2 CEILING CASS TTE FIRST FLOOR MECHANICAL PIPING PLAN z SCALE: 1/4" = 1' -0" 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 n 0 C E F G H i R K14 =ENGINEERS Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 94 Main Street Canton, North Carolina 28716 PHONE: 828 - 492 -0677 FAX: 828 - 492 -1054 MAIL @RNM - ENGINEERS. COM WWW.RNM- ENGfNEERS.COM NC CERT. N0. C -0149 © 2018 SEALS: co Z W J }111i1117ffr UJ OZ U (~ (n 0 0 Lu �O w` = z SEAL ° o 0 5 Z � � �i 0 (n � W a ow0Q� Q a- o f °� �''' R. = Cn V ) z O F_ U wz 0 LU � 00, 0 J z W rr ry– _ Oz 0 m ww 0 G m Z z C3 Lu 0c) U \� W = V z Ow -D O Of Cl- REVISIONS /SUBMISSIONS NO DATE ISSUED FOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SHEET TITLE: FIRST FLOOR MECHANICAL PIPING PLAN ISSUED FOR: CONSTRUCTION DRAWN BY: DJM DRAWING NO. APPROVED BY: MRM PROJECT #: 2017108 M1 . 3 DATE: 05/07/2018 OF 8 SHEETS flnr.wginn Fn % /PlnnP in. 9R9Fir.nA i- d(,.39- d9Cf1- AdCC- nC.9RARAR7rF7 WA AA R Kli =ENGINEERS Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 94 Main Street Canton, North Carolina 28716 PHONE: 828 - 492 -0677 FAX: 828 - 492 -1054 MAIL @RNM - ENGINEERS. COM WWW.RNM- ENGINEERS.COM NC CERT. N0. C -0149 (C 2018 SEALS: M Z W J Lu W }}}}i]If7f1l CAS J J ZNU00 -- cn 0 0 ui - � W `` W SEAL 0 0 Z(r�N ap-° �° ui = V) U) z O F- U uw z -j O wF- LL < 00. � � z w �rT- _ Q D 0 Z o m w o 75 m z =:)w O U � w= CD z Q rr U OW C) O rr rl REVISIONS /SUBMISSIONS NO DATE ISSUED FOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SHEET TITLE: MECHANICAL DETAILS ISSUED FOR: CONSTRUCTION DRAWN BY: DJM DRAWING NO. APPROVED BY: MRM PROJECT #: 2017108 M2.1 DATE: 05/07/2018 OF 8 SHEETS DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 ri 1 0 is C 0 E F G W o �o I RII ico C IO U CD t N I O N O I =II N O U �o ' N �o 9 O I II O o N to ■ ■ O ■o 2 GENERAL ELECTRICAL NOTES 3 1. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE WITH ALL OTHER CONTRACTORS AND TRADES TO LOCATE HIS WORK TO AVOID CONFLICTS. 2. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL NOT UTILIZE "THRU TYPE OUTLET BOXES WHERE DEVICES ARE SHOWN BACK TO BACK IN SOUND INSULATED OR SOUND SECURE AREAS, TYPICAL. 3. SMOKE DETECTORS FOR AIR HANDLING UNITS SHALL BE LOCATED IN AIR DUCTS OBSERVING ALL APPLICABLE CODES AND ORDINANCES. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE THE EXACT LOCATION AND REQUIREMENTS OF INSTALLATION WITH MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO CUTTING DUCTWORK. LOCATE THE DETECTOR INDICATOR /RESET DEVICE IN AN ACCESSIBLE LOCATION AS DIRECTED BY THE ARCHITECT AND LABEL AS TO AREA AND ROOFTOP UNIT SERVED, TYPICAL. 4. MOUNTING HEIGHTS GIVEN ARE TO TOP OF OUTLET BOX, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. HEIGHTS MAY BE ADJUSTED TO MATCH MASONRY JOINTS, AND MUST COMPLY WITH NORTH CAROLINA STATE BUILDING CODE VOLUME 1 -C. 5. ALL CONDUITS AND RACEWAYS ARE TO BE CONCEALED UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED OR APPROVED BY THE DESIGNER. 6. ALL CONDUITS, SLEEVES, INSERTS, OUTLET BOXES, AND OTHER ROUGH -IN MATERIALS SHALL BE INSTALLED AS BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PROGRESSES. 7. ALL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. 8. IN RECEIVING AND OTHER AREAS WHERE ITEMS SUCH AS EXIT SIGN, FIRE ALARM DEVICES, ETC., ARE SUBJECT TO DAMAGE, PROVIDE AND INSTALL GUARDS AS RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER. 9. THE SYMBOL " " DENOTED GROUNDING CONDUCTOR, TYPICAL UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, ALL CONDUITS SHALL BE 3/4" MINIMUM. 10. ALL PANEL DIRECTORIES SHALL BE TYPED AS TO THE LOAD SERVED AND USING THE OWNER'S NUMBERING SYSTEM. 11. ALL WIRING TROUGHS SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 8" DEEP. 12. ALL ELECTRICAL PANELS TO BE LABELED WITH PHENOLIC LABELS. GENERAL NOTES FOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION 1. LIGHTING, POWER, DATA, INTERCOM, SECURITY - CONTRACTOR MAY REUSE EXISTING CONDUIT & WIRING TO THE EXTENT POSSIBLE IN PROVIDING A COMPLETE & OPERABLE SYSTEM. CONTRACTOR IS TO PROVIDE ALL LABOR & MATERIALS, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO DEVICES, BOXES, CONDUIT, & WIRING FROM ALL DEVICES TO APPROPRIATE DISTRIBUTION /CONTROL PANEL IN ORDER TO PROVIDE A COMPLETE & OPERABLE SYSTEM. CONTRACTOR TO FIELD VERIFY ALL EXISTING QUANTITIES & LOCATIONS & COORDINATE CLOSELY WITH OWNER. 2. E.C. TO TAKE CARE IN REMOVING, TAGGING, & STORING DEVICES DURING DEMO PHASE, & REPLACING DEVICES TO BE REUSED DURING NEW CONSTRUCTION PHASE. EXISTING CEILING MOUNTED DEVICES TO BE REINSTALLED AS CLOSE AS POSSIBLE TO ORIGINAL LOCATION. PROVIDE MATERIAL & LABOR FOR EXTENDING CONDUIT & WIRING, AS REQUIRED, FOR REINSTALLATION. ENSURE PROPER OPERATION AFTER CONSTRUCTION. 3, WHERE RECEPTACLES ARE REMOVED, ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO REMOVE EXISTING RECEPTACLE DEVICE, BOX, CONDUIT & WIRING BACK TO IT'S SOURCE. WHERE CIRCUIT FEEDING RECEPTACLE TO BE REMOVED ALSO FEEDS RECEPTACLES THAT ARE TO REMAIN, ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE CONDUIT, WIRING & BOXES AS REQUIRED TO RE -FEED EXISTING RECEPTACLES, AS REQUIRED, FOR PROPER OPERATION. EXISTING BUILDING NOTES 1. WHERE NOTED, REMOVE ALL CONDUIT, WIRING, & ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT, INCLUDING PREVIOUSLY ABANDONED, RENDERED USELESS BY CONSTRUCTION. 2. ALL MATERIALS REMOVED & NOT TO BE REUSED ARE TO BE DISPOSED OF PER OWNER'S INSTRUCTIONS. 3. EXISTING WIRING & RACEWAYS TO BE REUSED WHERE POSSIBLE OR PRACTICAL, & EXISTING WIRING IS FOUND TO BE IN GOOD CONDITION; REPLACE ANY EXISTING WIRING FOUND TO BE IN POOR CONDITION. ALL NEW INSTALLATIONS SHALL USE NEW WIRE, TYPICAL. 4. EXISTING WIRING, DEVICES, ELECTRICAL PANELS, ETC. ARE SHOWN LIGHTER & DASHED. 4 1 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS IT IS THE INTENT OF THESE SPECIFICATION FOR THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO FURNISH A COMPLETE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM, FULLY ADJUSTED, & READY FOR USE. ALL ELECTRICAL WORK TO BE DONE IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH THE LATEST EDITION OF THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE OBSERVING ALL STATE AND LOCAL CODES. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL GIVE ALL NECESSARY NOTICES, OBTAIN ALL PERMITS & PAY ALL SALES TAXES, UTILITY COMPANY CHARGES FOR SERVICE, PERMITS, FEES, & OTHER COSTS IN CONNECTION WITH HIS WORK. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO ENSURE THAT ALL MATERIAL & EQUIPMENT FURNISHED FOR THIS PROJECT SHALL BE U.L. LISTED. THE MATERIAL & EQUIPMENT HAS BEEN CAREFULLY SELECTED FOR THIS PROJECT & THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR IS EXPECTED TO PROVIDE ALL ITEMS AS CLOSELY AS POSSIBLE TO THE SPECIFICATIONS & AS CALLED FOR ON THE DRAWINGS. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT THREE (3) SETS OF EQUIPMENT DATA SHOP DRAWINGS TO THE ENGINEER FOR ALL ITEMS TO BE FURNISHED & INSTALLED FOR APPROVAL. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL INCLUDE IN THE WORK WITHOUT EXTRA COST TO THE OWNER ANY LABOR MATERIALS SERVICES, APPARATUS, DRAWINGS, INCIDENTAL CONSTRUCTION WORK, ETC., IN ORDER TO COMPLY WITH ALL APPLICABLE LAWS, ORDINANCES, & REGULATIONS, WHETHER. OR NOT SHOWN ON DRAWINGS AND /OR SPECIFIED. NO CLAIM FOR EXTRAS WILL BE APPROVED WITHOUT PRIOR COORDINATION FOR CONFLICTS BY CONTRACTOR, & WRITTEN REQUEST & APPROVAL PRIOR TO PERFORMING WORK. ALL WORK & EQUIPMENT TO BE GUARANTEED BY CONTRACTOR FOR ONE (1) YEAR. UPON COMPLETION OF ALL WORK & ALL TESTS, ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTRUCT THE OWNER OR HIS REPRESENTATIVE FULLY IN THE OPERATIONS, ADJUSTMENTS, & MAINTENANCE OF EQUIPMENT FURNISHED. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE OWNER WITH MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE FOR THE PRINCIPAL ITEMS OF EQUIPMENT FURNISHED. MANUFACTURER'S ADVERTISING LITERATURE OR CATALOGS WILL NOT BE ACCEPTABLE. ALL MATERIALS & EQUIPMENT TO BE INSTALLED PER MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS & GOOD RECOMMENDED PRACTICES. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL GIVE FULL COOPERATION TO OTHER TRADES. WHERE THE WORK OF ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR WILL BE INSTALLED IN CLOSE PROXIMITY TO, OR WILL INTERFERE WITH WORK OF OTHER TRADES, HE SHALL ASSIST IN WORKING OUT SPACE CONDITIONS TO MAKE SATISFACTORY ADJUSTMENTS. IF ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR INSTALLS HIS WORK BEFORE COORDINATING WITH OTHER. TRADES, HE SHALL MAKE THE NECESSARY CHANGES IN HIS WORK TO CORRECT THE CONDITION WITHOUT EXTRA CHARGE. THE DRAWINGS ARE DIAGRAMMATIC & INDICATE THE GENERAL ARRANGEMENTS OF SYSTEMS & WORK INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT. THE DRAWINGS ARE NOT TO BE SCALED. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY EXACT LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT, ROUTING PIPE, ETC., & WORK CLOSELY WITH OTHER TRADES TO AVOID CONFLICTS. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO LOCATE & INSTALL ELECTRICAL CONTROL PANELS IN SUITABLE LOCATION WITH APPROPRIATE CLEARANCES & OVERLOAD PROTECTION FOR ALL ITEMS REQUIRED. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR MAY COMBINE CONDUITS WHERE APPLICABLE, BUT MUST HOOK UP ITEMS TO PROPER CIRCUITS AS SHOWN. THE OWNER., ARCHITECT & ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE FOR PROPER CUTOUT HOLES, ALL STUB -UPS & JUNCTION BOXES, & TO VERIFY LOCATIONS. ALL CONDUCTORS TO BE COPPER WITH TYPE THHW OR XHHW INSULATION UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. WHERE ALUMINUM CONDUCTORS ARE UTILIZED THEY SHALL BE TERMINATED WITH BURNDY HY -PLUG, HYDRAULIC COMPRESSION TERMINATORS. EXTERIOR MOUNTED BOXES SHALL HAVE APPROVED WEATHERPROOF PLATES &/OR COVERS. ALL SURFACE INSTALLED BOXES SHALL HAVE NYLON DEVICE PLATES. ALL DEVICE OUTLETS SHALL BE FLUSH MOUNTED UNLESS SPECIFICALLY NOTED. ALL FIXED ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INCLUDING RECEPTACLES SHALL BE LABELED WITH A REFERENCE TO THE CIRCUIT & PANEL OF ORIGIN. ALL PANELS SHALL BE LABELED WITH PANEL NAME & SOURCE OF SUPPLY. ALL PANEL DIRECTORIES SHALL USE ROOM IDENTIFICATIONS TO BE SUPPLIED BY THE OWNER, NOT THE ROOM NAMES & NUMBERS ON THE DRAWINGS. ALL LABELS REFERRING TO EMERGENCY POWER SHALL BE PER FACILITIES CURRENT COLOR CODE. CONDUIT, WIRING, & ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT & DEVICES CAUSED TO BE ABANDONED OR RENDERED USELESS BY CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE REMOVED BACK TO THE SOURCE. IN ADDITION, CONDUIT, WIRING, ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT & DEVICES DISCOVERED ABANDONED WITHIN THE LIMITS OF CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE REMOVED BACK TO THE SOURCE, EVEN IF THIS SHOULD INVOLVE REMOVAL OUTSIDE THE LIMITS OF CONSTRUCTION. SUPPLEMENTAL ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ALL PENETRATIONS OF RATED PARTITIONS, FLOOR SLABS BY EITHER NEW OR EXISTING CONDUITS SHALL BE FIRE CAULKED OR CLOSED BY APPROVED U.L. METHODS BY THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO MAINTAIN A COMPLETE SET OF CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS WITH AS -BUILT CONDITIONS & TURN OVER TO THE OWNER. ALL No. 10 & No. 12 CONDUCTORS FOR RECEPTACLES & LIGHTING CIRCUITS SHALL BE STRANDED COPPER. ALL TERMINATIONS SHALL BE NUMBERED AND LABELED. ALL CONDUCTORS SHALL BE MARKED WITH CIRCUIT NUMBER WHEN TERMINATING AT THE PANELBOARD. ALL 15A, 20A, & 30 AMPERE HOME RUN CONDUCTORS EXCEEDING 150' SHALL BE INCREASED ONE WIRE SIZE TO COMPENSATE FOR VOLTAGE DROP. ADJUST CONDUIT SIZE ACCORDINGLY. ALL CONDUIT COUPLINGS AND CONNECTORS SHALL BE "T &B" INSULATED THROAT COMPRESSION TYPE. NO "INDENTER" OR SET SCREW DEVICES WILL BE ALLOWED, TYPICAL. ALL PENETRATIONS THROUGH FLOOR SLAB OR RATED ASSEMBLIES SHALL BE APPROVED BY THE OWNER, ARCHITECT & STRUCTURAL ENGINEER PRIOR TO CUTTING OR BORING. ALL PENETRATIONS SHALL BE SLEEVED, FIRE CAULKED & FINISHED WITH COLLAR ON BOTH SIDES. ANY PENETRATION NOT COORDINATED WILL RESULT IN CONTRACTOR BEARING ALL COSTS ASSOCIATED WITH PATCHING, REPAIRING & REFINISHING AREA TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE OWNER & ENGINEER. ALL ELECTRICAL "TIE -INS" & "SHUT- DOWNS" SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH THE OWNER PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF WORK. CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY OWNER A MINIMUM OF 72 HOURS PRIOR TO ANY SUCH WORK. ALL EXISTING EQUIPMENT, CONDUIT, WIRING, BOXES ETC. RENDERED UNUSED, SHALL BE REMOVED & DISPOSED OF AS DIRECTED BY THE OWNER. 0 7 ELECTRICAL SYMBOL SCHEDULE ABBREVIATIONS ACT ..............ABOVE NOTE: EXISTING DEVICES SHOWN LIGHTER AND WITH DASHED LINES. ATS ..............AUTOMATIC ALL SYMBOLS MAY NOT BE USED AFF ..............ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR A COMPLETE LISTING OF MFG'S SYMBOL DESCRIPTION MOUNTING S Switch, single pole, 20 amp, commercial duty, Bryant #4901 Leviton #1221 120/277 4' -0" AFF t Top SEALS: or volt rated. or as noted EWC .............ELECTRIC Receptacle, industrial grade, duplex, Bryant #5252 EWH .............ELECTRIC WALL HEATER Leviton #5252, 15 ampere rated, grounding type, 1' -6" AFF GC ...............GENERAL 2 pole, 3 wire, 125 volts. GWH .............GAS WALL HEATER Receptacle, same as above except mounting height. 0' -6" ACT or as noted MCCB ........... Double Duplex Receptacle, (2) Bryant #5252 or 1' -6" AFF -FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH (2) Leviton #5252, 15 ampere rated, grounding type. unless noted RTU ..............ROOFTOP Receptacle, same as above except mounting height. 0' -6" ACT or as noted UNDERGROUND Ground fault circuit interrupting receptacle, 15 amp, 1' -6" AFF XFMR ........... feed -thru type, standard duty, Bryant #GFR52FT. ®z O m ww o Receptacle, same as above except mounting height. 0' -6" ACT or as noted VVP Receptacle, same as above with Weather Proof cover. V-6" n or as noted as 0c) Receptacle, industrial grade, duplex, Bryant #5362 :1&20A Leviton #5362, 20 ampere rated, grounding type, 1'4' AFF 2 pole, 3 wire, 125 volts. U OW -Cr-20A Receptacle, same as above except mounting height. 0' -6" ACT or as noted 30A Receptacle, Locking, 125 volt rated, 30 amp, 2 pole, 3 wire, 1' -6" AFF Bryant #70530 -FR with mating plug and cord. as noted 30A Receptacle, 250 volt rated, 30 amp, 3 pole, 4 wire, 1' -6" AFF Bryant #9430 -FR with mating plug and cord. as noted New conduit/wiring - - - -- Home run to panelboard. Arrowheads indicate number of As Required circuits. 7 Disconnect switch, 600V. Where exposed to weather shall As Required, be NEMA 3R. Square " T safety switch or equal. no higher than ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS, SPECIFICATIONS & 6' -6" AFF ■ Junction box (JB) as manufactured by RACO, Steel City, or As required JWC Universal. Size as applicable or required. APPROVED BY: I Fs-s Surge Suppresser Mnt, on Service E1.0 See specifications. Distribution Eq. Electrical panelboard, see panel schedule for description. 6-6" to top SD Duct - Mounted Smoke Detector. Match existing. Connect to D existing Fire Alarm system. ABBREVIATIONS ACT ..............ABOVE COUNTER TOP ATS ..............AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH AFF ..............ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR AHU .............AIR HANDLER UNIT AFG ..............ABOVE FINISHED GRADE BCT ..............BELOW COUNTER TOP CLG ..............CEILING SEALS: EC ................ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR EWC .............ELECTRIC WATER COOLER EWH .............ELECTRIC WALL HEATER FDS ..............FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH GC ...............GENERAL CONTRACTOR GWH .............GAS WALL HEATER MC ...............MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR MCCB ........... MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER NFD .............NON -FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH PC ............... PLUMBING CONTRACTOR RTU ..............ROOFTOP UNIT UG ............... UNDERGROUND WCP .............WATER CIRCULATION PUMP XFMR ........... TRANSFORMER f 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 11 1.1 C I E F G 2 RK14 MILSICISILILUS Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 94 Main Street Canton, North Carolina 28716 PHONE: 828 - 492 -0677 FAX: 828 - 492 -1054 MAIL@RNM- ENGMEERS.COM WW W.RNM- ENGINEERS.COM NC CERT. N0. C -0149 (D 2018 SEALS: M Z LZ J O of Z }lllil9lf+JJ ��� °4 CA,RO, /�Ji oOf aUjz Z(nU�O cn 0 0 Uj — U W� U c� = z cnw _ EAL _ v c — �y /fC'ry ° QONOw Of M p rf�✓} J 0 v N v G` o ❑ r�'� ��Q_ C/) Z O U W Z O W� LL U 00, 0 _ z LU r _ D ®z O m ww o G m J Z J z0 LU 0c) U � W = V Z U OW 0 W Q_ REVISIONS /SUBMISSIONS NO DATE ISSUED FOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SHEET TITLE: ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS, SPECIFICATIONS & NOTES ISSUED FOR: CONSTRUCTION DRAWN BY: JWC DRAWING NO. APPROVED BY: I JSD PROJECT #: 2017108 E1.0 DATE: 05/07/2018 OF 2 SHEETS DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 • Kq ENGINEERS Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 94 Main Street Canton, North Carolina 28716 PHONE: 828 - 492 -0677 FAX: 828 - 492 -1054 MAIL@RNM- ENGINEERS . COM WWW.RNM- ENGINEERS.COM NC CERT. N0. C -0149 © 2018 SEALS: m O Z w �E1tirr��rrir �w CARS Lu �ony� ojeJ x (nU Z U O cnONOW of (/7 W c C EAL p G _ e Z O 'w Q``N ° Of o � v any ,rr a° J e r/ /f O U V) rry J � tl Cl) z O U wz J O wF= LL < 00, � 0 1 z w rr _ Q D 077 O m w o m z0 =Dw O C) U � w= CD z Q er U OW O tr tl REVISIONS /SUBMISSIONS NO DATE ISSUED FOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SHEET TITLE: ELECTRICAL PLANS ISSUED FOR: CONSTRUCTION DRAWN BY: JVVC DRAWING NO. APPROVED BY: JSD PROJECT #: 2017108 E2.0 DATE: 05/07/2018 OF 2 SHEETS DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 236000 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. General provisions. 2. Scope. 3. Permits and Fees. 4. Visit to Job Site. 5. Workmanship. 6. Drawings and Specifications. 7. Tests. 8. Allowance for added work. 9. Incidental construction work. 10. Access Doors. 11. Supervision. 12. Electrical work by others. 13. Adaptation of work to existing conditions. 14. Submittal procedures. 15. Product requirements. 16. Closeout procedures. 17. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 18. As -built Documents. 19. Demonstration and Training. 20. Warranty. 21. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 22. Dielectric fittings. 23. Mechanical sleeve seals. 24. Sleeves. 25. Escutcheons. 26. Grout. 27. Roof pipe and equipment supports. 28. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 29. Concrete bases. 30. HVAC system use during construction. PART 2 - NOT APPLICABLE PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS A. This Contractor's attention is directed to the requirements of Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions as bound in the specifications which apply in full to the HVAC work. B. Where the requirements of this Division conflict with other articles in these Specifications, the Contractor shall utilize the more stringent method. 3.2 SCOPE A. Provide all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and transportation, and perform all operations necessary for and reasonably incidental to proper execution and completion of all "HVAC" work, whether specifically mentioned or not, all as indicated, specified herein, and /or implied thereby to carry out the apparent intent thereof. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 236000-1 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 236000 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC B. These drawings may be superseded by later revised or detailed drawings, specifications, or sketches prepared by the Designer, as needed for clarification, and this Contractor shall conform to all reasonable coordination requests. C. All items not specifically mentioned in the specifications or noted on the drawings, but which obviously are required to make the working installation complete, shall be included automatically. D. For projects which are bid or awarded as Single Prime contracts, organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections, and articles, and arrangement of the Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be done by any trade, unless specifically shown or noted otherwise. 3.3 PERMITS AND FEES A. This Contractor shall secure all permits required for the completion of this contract. He shall obtain and deliver to the Owner all certificates of inspection issued by the authorities having jurisdiction. 3.4 VISIT TO JOB SITE A. Before submitting a bid, this Contractor shall visit the job site for the purpose of thoroughly examining the site and conditions under which the work must be performed. B. The submission of a bona fide bid will be construed to mean that this Contractor understands and is satisfied with conditions under which the contract must be fulfilled. C. No extra compensation will be allowed for situations arising from failure of this Contractor to be thoroughly familiar with site conditions, including charges and requirements for connection to utilities as shown for this project. 3.5 WORKMANSHIP A. Workmanship in the fabrication, preparation, and installation of materials and equipment shall conform to the best standards of practice of the trades involved. B. Work shall be performed by experienced and skilled mechanics under the supervision of a competent foreman. C. Substandard workmanship will be cause for rejection of work and replacement by Contractor. D. The Contractor shall reimburse the Designer for all costs incurred by the Designer due to Contractor's substandard or non - conforming work. 3.6 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. The drawings show the location and arrangement of fixtures, piping, and equipment, together with details of connections of certain principal items. B. The layout shown shall be followed as closely as circumstances will permit, but this Contractor shall lay out his work so as to avoid conflict with other Contractors and trades, and to avoid any unnecessary cutting or damage to walls, floors, and supporting structural members. C. This Contractor shall carefully and accurately locate all sleeves and install at the proper time all necessary hangers, inserts, etc., which will be required for the completion of his work, and shall be solely responsible for the accurate and proper location of above items. D. This Contractor shall refer to all drawings and shall cooperate fully with other Contractors and trades while installing piping, fixtures, and other equipment because of close space limits. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 236000-2 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 236000 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC In case of conflict, notify Designer before proceeding with installation. Refer to architectural drawings for exact building dimensions and location of partition walls, doors, chases, etc. HVAC drawings are not to be scaled for such dimensions. E. The drawings and specifications complement each other and together are intended to give a complete description of the work. 1. Any item of equipment or note of work to be done as shown on plans and not mentioned in the specifications, or mentioned in specifications and not shown in plans, shall be furnished the same as if mentioned or shown in both places. 2. If conflicts exist, then the most stringent method shown or described shall apply. F. Any switches, controls, or equipment included in this contract work (drawings and /or specifications) that are not specifically shown on drawings shall be located for convenient use and access. G. Contractor shall coordinate all equipment arrangement and lay -out in field prior to beginning any actual installation of his work. H. If Contractor notes any discrepancy, omission, or conflict found in plans or specifications, he shall call to the immediate attention of the Designer, prior to receipt of bids. I. It is the intention that piping, air ducts and light fixtures are designed and laid out to clear each other. 1. It shall be the responsibility of this Contractor to coordinate his work with that of other trades to avoid any such conflicts. 2. Any conflicts that occur after work of one trade is installed and was not prior coordinated shall be relocated or rearranged at the total expense of this Contractor, as directed by Designer. 3. Any conflicts that cannot be corrected in field by relocation or elevation changes shall be reported to the Designer in writing prior to any installation. The drawings are not intended to show each and every complete or accurate detail. 1. The figures and writing on drawings shall be taken instead of scaling. 2. It is this Contractor's responsibility to comply with the evident intent for centering and symmetric arrangement. 3. This Contractor shall take and be responsible for all field measurements. 4. Exact locations and relations are to be defined in the field and shall be satisfactory to the Designer. K. Because of the small scale of HVAC drawings it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, and accessories which may be required. 1. Investigate structural and finish conditions affecting this work and arrange work accordingly, providing such fittings and accessories that may be required to meet the conditions. Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations: In all cases, items shall be installed per the manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. Where manufacturer's instructions or recommendations conflict with the Contract Documents, notify the Designer prior to proceeding. 3.7 TESTS A. The Designer reserves the right to conduct acceptance tests of all equipment, piping, or any other work furnished under these specifications to determine the fulfillment of special requirements. 1. Such tests shall be conducted in the presence of authorized representatives of the Contractor, Owner, Engineer, and Architect at such time as the Designer may designate. 2. This Contractor shall perform all tests, bear cost of same and make adjustments of equipment and wiring as may be deemed necessary by the Designer. 3.8 ALLOWANCE FOR ADDED WORK A. Before proceeding with any work for which compensation may be claimed or the Owner may claim credit, a detailed estimate shall first be submitted and approved in writing. 1. No claim for addition to the contract sum will be valid unless so ordered and approved by the Owner and Designer, prior to start of work. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 236000-3 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 236000 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC Any conflicts corrected by relocation or elevation changes do not constitute extra work. 3.9 INCIDENTAL CONSTRUCTION WORK A. All blocking for openings for piping in concrete floors, masonry walls or partitions shall be provided by this Contractor. 1. This Contractor shall do all cutting and fitting of his work and of other work that may be required to make the several parts come together properly and to fit his work to receive or be received by the work of other Contractors as shown upon, or reasonably implied by the drawings and specifications. 2. He shall properly complete and finish up his work after other Contractors have finished as the Designer may direct. B. All excavating required for the installation of this system shall be done by this Contractor. 1. Backfill shall be accomplished as specified in appropriate section of specifications. C. Chases are prohibited in masonry walls which are not to be plastered or paneled. 1. Set piping, blocking, carriers, etc. indicated to be concealed before walls are constructed in order that walls may be constructed around them. 2. This Contractor shall furnish all sleeves in floors, beams, walls, etc., for each such penetration as needed for installing his work and installation of sleeves by General Contractor. D. Unless otherwise noted, the General Contractor will provide openings and lintels as new construction progresses, but this Contractor shall fully designate his requirements prior to construction. 1. Failure to furnish his requirements prior to building construction and failure to coordinate his work with the building construction shall make this Contractor responsible for removing, replacing and painting building construction as required for installation of his work. 3.10 ACCESS DOORS A. Provide and install access doors in walls, ceilings, etc. as required for access to valves, dampers, fire dampers, controls, and other devices requiring access in ceilings, chases, soffits, etc. B. Access doors in non -fire rated walls or ceilings shall be as follows: 1. Nominal 24" x 24" minimum size. 2. 16 -gage steel frame with 14 -gage door panel and galvanized steel drywall bead. 3. Flush style with provision to conceal flange with drywall cement. 4. Double- acting concealed spring hinges to allow opening to 175 degrees. 5. Flush, Allen -head operated with steel cam. 6. Gray prime - painted steel, for painting to match adjacent finished surfaces. 7. Basis of Design: Milcor Style DW; Comparable Products by Karp, Elmdor, Acudor. C. Access doors in fire -rated walls or ceilings shall be as follows: 1. Nominal 24" x 24" minimum size. 2. UL 1 -1/2 hour, Class B fire rating. 3. Prime - painted stainless steel: 16 -gage frame with 20 -gage door panel, for painting to match adjacent finished surfaces. 4. 2" mineral fiber insulation between inner and outer panel. 5. Continuous hinge, steel with stainless steel pin. 6. Self- closing and self - latching panel closer. 7. Flush mounted paddle latch and locking system with flush, key- operated cylinder lock with two keys. 8. Basis of Design: Milcor Style UFR; Comparable Products by Karp, Elmdor, Acudor. 3.11 SUPERVISION A. This Contractor shall have in charge of the work at all times during construction a thoroughly competent foreman with extensive experience in the work to be performed under this contract. 1. Anyone deemed not capable by the Designer shall be replaced immediately upon request, and after satisfactory foreman has been assigned, he shall not be withdrawn without the written consent of the Designer. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 236000-4 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 236000 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 3.12 ELECTRICAL WORK BY OTHERS A. Refer to the drawings for the details of locations of circuit breakers, junction boxes, disconnect switches, conduits and slack wire required where this contractor's electrical work terminates and electrical work by others begins. B. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install all power circuits for equipment furnished by others. C. In Mechanical Rooms the wiring by the Electrical Contractor shall generally terminate in a power wiring gutter, line side of disconnect switches or starters, junction box, or electrical panel. 1. From these points power wiring to the equipment furnished by the HVAC Contractor shall generally be by the HVAC Contractor. 2. Power wiring to mechanical equipment outside equipment rooms will generally be run by the Electrical Contractor to line side of a disconnect switch or junction box in the vicinity (within 3' -0 ") of the HVAC equipment. 3. Power wiring from that point to the equipment will be by the HVAC Contractor. D. HVAC Contractor is to refer to the drawings for location and type of service connections to be provided under the electrical contract. 1. Where service disconnect switches are required and not furnished as part of the equipment, they shall be furnished and installed by contractor that furnishes the equipment, unless indicated otherwise. 2. Other Contractors shall furnish and install conduit, boxes, wiring and all items of control for equipment they furnish or Owner furnished equipment, unless specifically shown on electrical drawings. 3.13 ADAPTATION OF WORK TO EXISTING CONDITIONS A. It is reasonably implied that this Contractor shall furnish all labor and materials to provide Owner with a new and satisfactory system in these facilities. 1. Contractor is to include necessary work for adaptation of equipment to conditions that may be found to produce conflicts during construction. 2. When any such conditions are encountered, this Contractor is to consult with Designer and then modify installation as directed without additional costs, and to include any incidental materials required. 3.14 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. 3. Designer reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. B. Contractor approval: Affix review stamp to cover sheet, with initials and date of Contractor's approval of submittals. 1. By submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals, this Contractor represents that the Contractor has determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria and details related thereto, or will do so, and has checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work, the Contract Documents and the Work of other trades. C. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Sections for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities. D. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. 1. Time for review shall commence on Designer's receipt of submittal. 2. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 3. Allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal. a. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 236000-5 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 236000 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC b. Designer will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal. E. Identification: Identify submittals as required in Division 01 sections. F. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. 1. Summarize deviations on transmittal or List of Deviations included with submittal. G. Coordinate first paragraph and subparagraph below with office policy. Marking numerous copies of submittals can be time consuming. H. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. 1. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. 2. Designer will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor. I. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked "Furnish as Submitted" or "Furnish as Corrected." 4. Where submittals contain specific questions or comments, provide a separate sheet with specific answers to each question or comment. J. At Contractor's written request, copies of Designer's CAD files will be provided to Contractor for Contractor's use in connection with Project, subject to the following conditions: 1. Allow 21 days from Designer's receipt of written request for CAD files for delivery of files 2. Files will be delivered via email or compact disc. 3. Files will be delivered without RN &M Title Blocks, standard details, schedules, etc. 4. CAD files provided for Contractor's use are not to be construed as the Contract Documents. Use of CAD files for submittals or other uses are at the Contractor's risk. K. Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections. 1. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 2. Number of Copies: Submit at least eight copies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated. a. Designer will return all but three copies. b. Retain or duplicate sufficient copies for inclusion in Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 3. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project- specific information, drawn accurately to scale. a. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless submittal of Designer's CAD Drawings is otherwise permitted. 4. Revise subparagraph below to establish a standard sheet size and format. 5. Sheet Size: At least 8 -1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than size of project drawings. 6. Subparagraph below assumes Architect and Contractor will make copies from opaque print. 7. Number of Copies: Two opaque (bond) copies of each submittal. Designer will return one copy. 8. Manufacturers and Materials Suppliers List: Submit three copies of manufacturers and materials suppliers list within 20 days of Contract Award, unless otherwise indicated. Designer will return two copies. 9. If needed, combine subcontract list in paragraph below with product list above. Subcontract list is required by AIA Document A201 to be submitted as soon as practical after award of the Contract. 10. Subcontract List: Submit within 20 days of Contract Award three copies of list of proposed subcontractors. Designer will return two copies. Subcontract list to include all tiers of subcontractors. Contractor's Review and Approval: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. 1. Note corrections and field dimensions. 2. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Designer. M. Designer's Action: Designer will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. 1. Designer will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 236000-6 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 236000 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC Designer will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows: a. Furnish as Submitted b. Furnish as Corrected: Incorporate comments marked on or attached to submittal. C. Revise and Resubmit: Major items of the submittal do not comply, requiring a resubmittal. N. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review. O. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded. P. The Contractor is responsible for compliance with the Contract Documents, dimensions, details, coordination, and satisfactory performance of materials and equipment provided and installed. 3.15 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Basis -of- Design Product: Item identified by manufacturer's product name, make, and model number, used to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in- service performance, physical properties, dimensions, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers. 2. Comparable Product: Product that is listed in the Contract Documents, or added by Addendum, and demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in- service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified or basis -of- design product. 3. Owner- preferred Alternate Product: Product that is listed in the Contract Documents, and for which an Alternate Bid price is submitted. When an Alternate Bid item is accepted in the Contract, no substitutions will be allowed. 4. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor after award of Contract. 5. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility, except that products consisting of recycled- content materials are allowed, unless explicitly stated otherwise. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. B. Comparable Product Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration, at least 10 days prior to receipt of bids, for products not listed in the Contract Documents. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for Comparable Products and the following, as applicable: a. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed product. b. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. C. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. 2. Designer's Action: If necessary, Designer will request additional information or documentation for evaluation. Designer will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request. a. Form of Approval: Addition of the item to the list of Comparable Products by Addendum, prior to receipt of bids. b. Use product specified if Designer cannot make a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. C. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, features, options, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect, and as required or recommended by Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 236000-7 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 236000 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC the manufacturer for a complete installation, whether or not specifically indicated on the drawings or specifications. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Designer will make selection. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish "salient characteristics" of products. D. Product Selection Procedures: 1. Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. 2. Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. 3. Basis -of- Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. E. Responsibility of the Contractor: The responsibility for determining dimensions, utility requirements, fitting of work with other trades, sequencing and coordination of work, for Product Substitutions and Comparable Products rests solely with the Contractor. Manufacturer's Warranties: Where specifications require manufacturer's warranties, the provisions of the Contract Documents take precedence over any manufacturer's "standard" warranty provisions, exclusions, etc. 3.16 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Substantial Completion: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. 1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Complete startup testing of systems. 3. Submit test records. 4. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 5. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 6. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. 7. Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Designer will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. 8. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 9. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. B. Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following: 1. Submit certified copy of Designer's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list). The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 2. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Submit documentation of training. 3. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Designer will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. 4. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. C. Cleaning: This Contractor shall provide all systems and equipment in a new and clean condition. 1. Clean all items furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Provide instruction to Owner in proper cleaning of all items provided as part of this Division. 3. Cooperate with General Contractor in cleaning of building. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 236000-8 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 236000 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 3.17 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Submit four complete copies of Operation and Maintenance Manuals to Designer for review prior to request for inspection for Substantial Completion. B. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain a title page, table of contents, and manual contents. C. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information: 1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor. 6. Name and address of Architect. 7. Name and address of Engineer. D. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross - referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. E. List of Material Suppliers and Subcontractors: List contact information for each material supplier and subcontractor. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. 1. Binders: Heavy -duty, 3 -ring, vinyl- covered, loose -leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8- 1/2 -by -11 -inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. a. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple - volume sets. 2. Dividers: Heavy -paper dividers with plastic- covered tabs for each section. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross- referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual. 3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment. 4. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts. b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations. G. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below. H. Descriptions: Include the following: Product name and model number, Manufacturer's name, Equipment identification with serial number of each component, Equipment function, Operating characteristics, Limiting conditions, Performance curves, Engineering data and tests, complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. I. Include start -up, break -in, and control procedures; stopping and normal shutdown instructions; routine, normal, seasonal, and weekend operating instructions; and required sequences for electric or electronic systems. J. Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 236000-9 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 236000 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC K. List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross - reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. Provide manufacturers' maintenance documentation including maintenance instructions, drawings and diagrams for maintenance, nomenclature of parts and components, and recommended spare parts for each component part or piece of equipment: M. Include test and inspection instructions, troubleshooting guide, disassembly instructions, and adjusting instructions that detail essential maintenance procedures: N. Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment. O. Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross - referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services. P. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. Q. Provide complete approved submittal data with all annotations. R. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 3.18 AS -BUILT DOCUMENTS A. As -built Marked Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black -line white prints of the Contract Drawings. 1. Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. 2. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked -up As -built Marked Prints. 3. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. 4. Record data as soon as possible after installation. 5. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. 6. Indicate dimensions to locate underground and concealed conduits and lines from fixed reference points. 7. Indicate burial depth for underground lines. 8. Indicate location of all valves and cross - reference to valve tag list. 9. Mark the Contract Drawings completely and accurately. a. Mark record sets with erasable, red - colored pencil. b. Note Addendum numbers, Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. 10. Maintain As -built Marked Prints in a clean, legible, up -to -date condition in the project office, and available to the Designer for inspection upon request throughout construction. 11. 12. In first paragraph and subparagraphs below, architects may want to delete titleblock information from CAD files provided to Contractor. See Evaluations. Consult Owner for format required. B. Record Specifications: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Note related Change Orders and As -built Marked Prints where applicable. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 236000-10 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 236000 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 3.19 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. B. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice. C. Warranty service: Train Owner in repair and troubleshooting during each warranty service call. D. For each training session, submit on letterhead name of trainer, date of training, names of Owner's personnel trained, and systems /equipment trained on. E. For factory training, documentation to be on letterhead of organization conducting training. 3.20 WARRANTY A. This Contractor shall guarantee all materials, equipment, workmanship and each and every piece of apparatus which he furnished and which he installs under this contract against defects and failures of any nature for a period of one year from date on which the system is accepted. B. Apparatus furnished by this Contractor shall be guaranteed to be satisfactory when operated under rated conditions in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and to be of size, function, and capacity specified on drawings or in the specifications. C. Equipment manufacturers shall warrant equipment furnished for this project for same time span as installing contractors warranty period as set above and elsewhere in these specifications. 1. Warranty start date shall be as established by the Designer. Refer to General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and Division 1 specifications for establishment of warranty start dates. 2. The provisions of the Contract Documents supersede and override any manufacturer's standard warranty provisions. 3. Use of equipment during construction does not relieve the contractor, subcontractors, manufacturers, or suppliers of their D. Upon notice from the Designer or Owner, Contractor shall immediately check system, make necessary repairs or adjustments as required; due to faulty workmanship, materials, faults, operation or equipment, without cost to the Owner, and instruct Owner in proper operation, adjustment, and care of systems. E. The Contractor shall submit service call tickets, reports, or other documentation of each warranty service call to the Designer. 3.21 Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as closely as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved prior to installation. C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 236000-11 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 236000 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, but no higher than 3' above finished ceilings to allow for convenient access for servicing. F. Install piping to permit valve servicing. G. Install piping at indicated slopes. H. Install piping free of sags and bends. I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. J. Install piping to allow application of insulation. K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. M. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum -board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs. N. Aboveground, Exterior -Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1 -inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter. 2. Install cast -iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter. 3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. O. Underground, Exterior -Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast -iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1 -inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. P. Fire- Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 23 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for materials. Q. Verify final equipment locations for roughing -in. R. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing -in requirements. 3.22 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder - joint, plain, or weld -neck end connections that match piping system materials. B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. C. Dielectric Unions: Factory- fabricated, union assembly, for 250 -psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F. D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory- fabricated, companion - flange assembly, for 150- or 300 -psig minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures. E. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized -steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300 -psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 236000-12 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 236000 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC F. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300 -psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F. G. Bronze ball valves may be used in lieu of dielectric fittings. 3.23 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve. B. Sealing Elements: EPDM or NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. C. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element. D. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion - resistant coating of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element. 3.24 SLEEVES A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends. B. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile -iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated. C. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast -iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing. 1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws. 3.25 ESCUTCHEONS A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening. B. One - Piece, Cast -Brass Type: With set screw. 1. Finish: Polished chrome - plated and rough brass. 3.26 GROUT A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic- cement grout. 1. Characteristics: Post - hardening, volume- adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications. 2. Design Mix: 5000 -psi, 28 -day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. B. Mix and install grout for HVAC equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors. C. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout. D. Provide forms as required for placement of grout. E. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout. F. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 236000-13 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 236000 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC G. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment. H. Place grout around anchors. Cure placed grout. 3.27 ROOF EQUIPMENT AND PIPE SUPPORTS A. Equipment and Pipe Supports: Provide metal equipment /pipe supports, internally reinforced and capable of supporting superimposed live and dead loads, including equipment loads and other construction to be supported. Fabricate with welded or sealed mechanical corner joints, with stepped integral metal cant raised the thickness of roof insulation and integral formed mounting flange at perimeter bottom. Coordinate dimensions with rough -in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported. 1. Available Manufacturers: As shown on Drawings. 2. Load Requirements: As required for equipment/piping being supported. 3. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form flange at perimeter bottom to conform to roof profile. 4. Fabricate units to minimum height of 12 inches above finished roof, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Sloping Roofs: Where slope of roof deck exceeds 1:48, fabricate curb units with water diverter or cricket and with height tapered to match slope to level tops of units. 3.28 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated. B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated. C. Install HVAC equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations. D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope. 3.29 CONCRETE BASES A. Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project. 1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit. 2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18 -inch centers around the full perimeter of the base. 3. Install epoxy- coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor. 4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor -bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Use 3000 -psi, 28 -day compressive- strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 03. Cc �c i i) _ C 1 �GI i �9'6� r � 1 � l �) ;9 � �1 � 17 I i • [ e Z K � P► 6� r 3 � I � � [ � A. Comply with "SMACNA IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings under Construction." B. If Owner authorizes use of permanent heating, cooling, and ventilating systems during construction period, install filter media having a MERV 8 according to ASHRAE 52.2 at each return -air inlet / grille and in air handling units for the air - handling system used during construction. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 236000-14 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 236000 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC C. Replace all air filters at least weekly and as required during operation to maintain air handling systems and equipment in clean condition, and immediately prior to occupancy. D. Clean air handling systems (ducts, air handling units, coils, etc.) as required prior to occupancy. Ducts, air handling units, coils, etc. shall have no dust or construction debris prior to occupancy. At the Architect, Engineer, or Owner's discretion (prior to occupancy or after occupancy if conditions were "concealed" and later found), ductwork, air handling units, coils, etc. shall be cleaned at the contractor's expense. If ductwork is found to be dirty, a certified, independent duct cleaning service shall be utilized by the contractor to clean ductwork. The building permanent HVAC system is designed to provide comfort conditions in a fully occupied building, under normal occupied conditions. Equipment and systems may not be adequate for construction operations such as drying out floor slabs or maintaining temperature /relative humidity in a partially completed building. Such use is for the contractor's convenience and at the contractor's risk. The use of permanent HVAC systems during construction in no way relieves the contractor, subcontractors, or manufacturers /suppliers of their responsibilities to provide full warranties from the warranty start date established in the Contract Documents. END OF SECTION 236000 Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 236000-15 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 237000 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes through - penetration firestop systems for penetrations through fire- resistance- rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: For penetrations through fire - resistance -rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items, provide through- penetration firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire- resistance rating of construction penetrated. B. Rated Systems: Provide through - penetration firestop systems with the following ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479: 1. F -Rated Systems: Provide through - penetration firestop systems with F- ratings indicated, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire- resistance rating of constructions penetrated. 2. T -Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide through- penetration firestop systems with T- ratings indicated, as well as F- ratings, where systems protect penetrating items exposed to potential contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas: a. Penetrations located outside wall cavities. b. Penetrations located outside fire- resistance -rated shaft enclosures. C. For through - penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products that, after curing, do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions both during and after construction. 1. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches in width and exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting floor loads involved, either by installing floor plates or by other means. D. For through - penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame - spread and smoke - developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For each through - penetration firestop system, submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency, showing each type of construction condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and type of penetrating item. 1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular through - penetration firestop condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by through - penetration firestop system manufacturer's fire - protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire- resistance -rated assembly. C. Qualification Data: For Installer. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 237000-1 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 237000 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Provide through - penetration firestop systems that comply with the following requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article: 1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL, or another agency performing testing and follow -up inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Through - penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Part 1 Performance Requirements" Article. Provide rated systems bearing classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency. B. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through- penetration firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements. C. Do not cover up through - penetration firestop system installations that will become concealed behind other construction until each installation has been examined by Owner's inspecting agency and building inspector, if required by authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the through - penetration firestop systems indicated for each application on Drawings or that are produced by one of the following manufacturers: 1. Grace, W. R. & Co. - Conn. 2. Hilti, Inc. 3. Johns Manville. 4. Nelson Firestop Products. 5. 3M; Fire Protection Products Division. 6. Tremco; Sealant/Weatherproofing Division. 7. USG Corporation. 2.2 FIRESTOPPING A. Compatibility: Provide through- penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one another; with the substrates forming openings; and with the items, if any, penetrating through- penetration firestop systems, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by through - penetration firestop system manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Accessories: Provide components for each through - penetration firestop system that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by through- penetration firestop system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 237000-2 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 237000 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 THROUGH - PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. General: Install through - penetration firestop systems to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article and with firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. B. Install forming/damming /backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross - sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems. C. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire - resistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace through- penetration firestop systems so they comply with requirements. B. Proceed with enclosing through- penetration firestop systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and firestop installations comply with requirements. END OF SECTION 237000 Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 237000-3 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 237530 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes general requirements for single -phase and polyphase, general - purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel -cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation. 1.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following: 1. Motor controllers. 2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. 3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. 4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in HVAC equipment schedules or Sections. B. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above sea level. B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor. 2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor. B. Efficiency: Premium efficiency, as defined in NEMA MG 1. C. Service Factor: 1.15. D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque. 1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding. 2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed. E. Rotor: Random - wound, squirrel cage. F. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading. G. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 237530-1 NOrange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 237530 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT H. Insulation: Class F. Code Letter Designation: 1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G. 2. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame sizes smaller than 324T. 2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. Motors Used with Reduced - Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control method. B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer. 1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture - resistant insulation varnish, designed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by pulse -width modulated inverters. 2. Energy- and Premium - Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation. 3. Inverter -Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation. 4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected motors. 2.5 SINGLE -PHASE MOTORS A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application: 1. Permanent -split capacitor. 2. Split phase. 3. Capacitor start, inductor run. 4. Capacitor start, capacitor run. B. Multispeed Motors: Variable- torque, permanent - split- capacitor type. C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading. D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded -pole type. E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal - protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 237530 Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 237530-2 NOrange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 237690 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Steel pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 3. Metal framing systems. 4. Thermal- hanger shield inserts. 5. Fastener systems. 6. Equipment supports. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP -90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports." 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design supports for multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water. B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. C. Design seismic - restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Steel pipe hangers and supports. 2. Thermal- hanger shield inserts. 3. Powder - actuated fastener systems. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following: 1. Trapeze pipe hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Metal framing systems. Include Product Data for components. 3. Equipment supports. C. Welding certificates. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 237690-1 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 237690 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Description: MSS SP -58, Types 1 through 58, factory- fabricated components. Refer to Part 3 "Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types. B. Available Manufacturers: 1. B -Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc. 3. Grinnell Corp. C. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped. D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. E. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of bearing surface of piping. 2.3 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS A. Description: MSS SP -69, Type 59, shop- or field- fabricated pipe - support assembly made from structural -steel shapes with MSS SP -58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U- bolts. 2.4 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Description: MFMA -3, shop- or field- fabricated pipe - support assembly made of steel channels and other components. B. Available Manufacturers: 1. B -Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2. Power -Strut Div.; Tyco International, Ltd. 3. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 4. Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd. C. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated. D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. 2.5 THERMAL - HANGER SHIELD INSERTS A. Description: 100 -psig- minimum, compressive- strength insulation insert encased in sheet metal shield. B. Available Manufacturers: 1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. 2. ERICO /Michigan Hanger Co. 3. PHS Industries, Inc. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 237690-2 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 237690 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT C. Insulation - Insert Material for Cold Piping: Water - repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate or ASTM C 552, Type 11 cellular glass with vapor barrier. D. Insulation - Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water - repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass. E. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe. F. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe. G. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature. 2.6 FASTENER SYSTEMS A. Powder - Actuated Fasteners: Threaded -steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull -out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Hilti, Inc. b. ITW Ramset /Red Head. C. Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc. d. MKT Fastening, LLC. e. Powers Fasteners. B. Mechanical- Expansion Anchors: Insert- wedge -type zinc - coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull -out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. B -Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. b. Empire Industries, Inc. C. Hilti, Inc. d. ITW Ramset /Red Head. e. MKT Fastening, LLC. f. Powers Fasteners. 2.7 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Description: Welded, shop- or field- fabricated equipment support made from structural -steel shapes. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory -mixed and - packaged, dry, hydraulic- cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications. 1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000 -psi, 28 -day compressive strength. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 237690-3 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 237690 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT B. Comply with MSS SP -69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field - applied finish. D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing. E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching. F. Horizontal- Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 2. Yoke -Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 16, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation. 3. Carbon- or Alloy - Steel, Double -Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation. 4. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. 5. U -Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 6. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast -iron floor flange. 7. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30, from 2 rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur. 8. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42, if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary. G. Vertical- Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20. 2. Carbon- or Alloy -Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps. H. Hanger -Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. I. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling. 2. Top -Beam C- Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar -joist construction to attach to top flange of structural shape. 3. Side -Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles. 4. Center -Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large. 6. C- Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 7. Welded -Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads: a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. C. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb. 8. Side -Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 9. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required. J. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 237690-4 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 237690 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 1. Steel Pipe- Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation. 3. Thermal- Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe. K. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1 -1/4 inches. 2. Spring- Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with springs. 3. Variable- Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from base support. L. Comply with MSS SP -69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. M. Comply with MFMA -102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. N. Use powder- actuated fasteners or mechanical- expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction. 3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP -69 and MSS SP -89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure. B. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP -69 and MSS SP -89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field- fabricated trapeze pipe hangers. 1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers. 2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1. C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support together on field - assembled metal framing systems. D. Thermal- Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping. E. Fastener System Installation: 1. Install powder- actuated fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder- actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder- actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual. 2. Install mechanical- expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories. G. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded - structural -steel shapes. H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 237690-5 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 237690 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT J. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2 -1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. K. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. L. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.1 (for power piping) and ASME B31.9 (for building services piping) are not exceeded. M. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following: 1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping. a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation. b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal- hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert. C. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.1 for power piping and ASME B31.9 for building services piping. 2. Install MSS SP -58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 3. Install MSS SP -58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees. 4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3 -1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. C. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick. e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick. 5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood inserts. 6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield. 7. Thermal- Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation. 3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Fabricate structural -steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor. B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface. C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports. 3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports. B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 237690-6 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 237690 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe. 3.6 PAINTING A. Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC -PA 1 requirements for touching up field - painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing - repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 237690 Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 237690-7 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 237700 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes performance requirements for delegated design of vibration and seismic controls. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic - Restraint Loading: Refer to Structural Drawings for Seismic Design Category, Building Use Group, and Seismic design parameters. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For all products provided. B. Delegated- Design Submittal: For vibration isolation and seismic - restraint calculations and details indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C. Welding certificates. D. Qualification Data: For professional engineer. E. Field quality - control test reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with seismic - restraint requirements in the North Carolina Building Code unless requirements in this Section are more stringent. In addition to design and installation requirements in the North Carolina Building Code, this contractor is responsible for furnishing all Special Inspections (as required) for Seismic elements installed under this contract. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." C. Seismic - restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproved by ICC -ES, or preapproved by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic - restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic - restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Products shall be selected by engineer providing delegated design services. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 237700-1 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 237700 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATIONS A. Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Delegated Design Drawings to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces. C. Strength of Support and Seismic - Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits. 3.2 VIBRATION- CONTROL AND SEISMIC - RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION A. Equipment Restraints: 1. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inches. 2. Install seismic - restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component. B. Piping Restraints: 1. Comply with requirements in MSS SP -127. C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure. D. Install seismic - restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component. E. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor- mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base. F. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members. G. Drilled -in Anchors: 1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines. 2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength. 3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy -duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened. 4. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench. 5. Install zinc - coated steel anchors for interior and stainless steel anchors for exterior applications. 3.3 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION A. Install flexible connections in piping where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where the connections terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting the connections as they approach equipment. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for piping flexible connections. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 237700-2 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 237700 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to restrained component (unless postconnection testing has been approved), and with at least seven days' advance notice. 3. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary load - spreading members. 4. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by Architect. 5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device. 6. Measure isolator restraint clearance. 7. Measure isolator deflection. 8. If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until satisfactory results are achieved. C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. D. Prepare test and inspection reports, certified by Professional Engineer who provided Delegated Design. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight. B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation. C. Adjust active height of spring isolators. D. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation. END OF SECTION 237700 Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 237700-3 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 237800 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Equipment labels. 2. Warning signs and labels. 3. Pipe labels. 4. Duct labels. 1.2 SUBMITTAL A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS A. Metal Labels for Equipment: 1. Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032 -inch, Stainless steel, 0.025 -inch, Aluminum, 0.032 -inch or anodized aluminum, 0.032 -inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware. 2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2 -1/2 by 3/4 inch. 3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two- thirds to three - fourths the size of principal lettering. 4. Fasteners: Stainless -steel rivets or self- tapping screws. 5. Adhesive: Contact -type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. B. Plastic Labels for Equipment: 1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. 2. Letter Color: White. 3. Background Color: Black. 4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. 5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2 -1/2 by 3/4 inch. 6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two - thirds to three - fourths the size of principal lettering. 7. Fasteners: Stainless -steel rivets or self- tapping screws. 8. Adhesive: Contact -type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. C. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. D. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8- 1/2 -by -11 -inch bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 237800-1 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 237800 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. B. Letter Color: Red. C. Background Color: White. D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2 -1/2 by 3/4 inch. F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two - thirds to three - fourths the size of principal lettering. G. Fasteners: Stainless -steel rivets or self- tapping screws. H. Adhesive: Contact -type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification instructions. 2.3 PIPE LABELS A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color- coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction. B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive. C. Self- Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact -type, permanent- adhesive backing. D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction. 1. Flow- Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction. 2. Lettering Size: At least 1 -1/2 inches high. 2.4 DUCT LABELS A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. B. Letter Color: White. C. Background Color: Black. D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2 -1/2 by 3/4 inch. F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two - thirds to three - fourths the size of principal lettering. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 237800-2 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 237800 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT G. Fasteners: Stainless -steel rivets or self- tapping screws. H. Adhesive: Contact -type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. Duct Label Contents: Include identification of duct service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, duct size, and an arrow indicating flow direction. 1. Flow- Direction Arrows: Integral with duct system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each duct label to indicate flow direction. 2. Lettering Size: At least 1 -1/2 inches high. 2.5 STENCILLED PAINTED LABELS A. Material: Spray paint suitable for application on piping, ducts, and equipment, both insulated and uninsulated. B. Letter color: Black or other color contrasting with background surface. C. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content. D. Minimum Letter Size: At least 1 -1/2 inches high. E. Contents: As described in this section for piping, ducts, and equipment. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants. 3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment. B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible. 3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION A. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows: 1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels. 3.4 DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION A. Install self- adhesive duct labels with permanent adhesive or stenciled painted labels on air ducts. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 237800-3 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 237800 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT B. Locate labels near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 50 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system. END OF SECTION 237800 Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 237800-4 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 238000 — TEST AND BALANCE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes TAB to produce design objectives for the following: 1. Air Systems: a. Constant - volume air systems. 2. Hydronic Piping Systems: a. Constant -flow systems. b. Variable flow systems. 3. HVAC and other equipment quantitative - performance settings, including cooling towers, boilers, water heaters, air handling units, DX units, heat pumps, pumps, etc. 4. Kitchen hood airflow balancing. 5. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly. 6. Reporting results of activities and procedures specified in this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. LEED Submittal: 1. Air - Balance Report for LEED Prerequisite EQ 1: Documentation of work performed for ASHRAE 62.1 -2004, Section 7.2.2, "Air Balancing." B. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 30 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 4 copies of TAB strategies and step -by -step procedures as specified in Part 3 "Preparation" Article. Include a complete set of report forms intended for use on this Project. C. Daily Field Data reports: During testing and balancing operations, submit actual field data reports to Engineer daily via fax or email. Daily reports should include actual readings taken and any problems encountered during that day. D. Certified TAB Reports: Submit four copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on approved forms certified by TAB firm. E. Warranties specified in this Section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. TAB Firm Qualifications: Engage a TAB firm certified by AABC or NEBB. B. Certification of TAB Reports: Certify TAB field data reports. This certification includes the following: 1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports. 2. Certify that TAB team complied with approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification. C. TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems " or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems." 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations. B. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations. C. TAB will be conducted as a separate contract under the Owner. Refer to Project HVAC Specifications and Drawings for requirements of General Contractor /HVAC Contractor to support TAB operations. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the efforts of factory- authorized service representatives for systems and equipment, HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to support and assist TAB activities. B. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed. C. Convene and conduct a TAB coordination meeting, no more than two weeks prior to starting TAB activities on site. Attendees shall include Owner's representative, Engineer, General Contractor, HVAC subcontractor, controls installer, and any others necessary to support TAB activities. Agenda shall include: schedule for TAB activities, support and coordination required, status of deficiencies noted in TAB inspections specified in this Section, and any other items necessary to complete testing and balancing in accordance with this section. 1.6 WARRANTY A. National Project Performance Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems" forms stating that AABC will assist in completing requirements of the Contract Documents if TAB firm fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee includes the following provisions: 1. The certified TAB firm has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract Documents. 2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation limits. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 238000-1 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 238000 — TEST AND BALANCE B. Special Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on NEBB forms stating that NEBB will assist in completing requirements of the Contract Documents if TAB firm fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee shall include the following provisions: 1. The certified TAB firm has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract Documents. 2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation limits. C. Adjustments: For one year after Owner occupancy, provide the services of a qualified TAB technician upon request of the Designer to take readings and make adjustments as necessary and directed by Designer for comfort conditions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS/VENDORS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE TAB CONTRACTORS A. The following TAB agents are acceptable to Owner and Designer for providing TAB services: 1. Palmetto Air and Water Balance, Inc. (Asheville, Charlotte, Raleigh NC and Greenville, SC) 2. Watts Services (Morganton, NC) 3. Hall Technology, Inc. (Leesville, SC) 4. Test and Balance Corporation (Winston - Salem, NC) 5. The Phoenix Agency (Winston - Salem, NC) B. The Designer will consider other TAB agents as acceptable under the following conditions: 1. Request to consider another TAB agent is received from a Prime Bidder or HVAC Contractor intending to bid the project. 2. Request to consider another TAB agent is submitted at least 10 days prior to receipt of bids. 3. Proposed TAB agent is certified per this specification. 4. Approval for a proposed TAB agent to bid the project will be communicated via Addendum prior to receipt of bids. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment. 1. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow - control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are required by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation. B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment. C. Examine Project Record Documents described in Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents." D. Examine design data, including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls. E. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate system effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from those presented when the equipment was performance tested at the factory. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - -Duct Design," Sections 5 and 6. Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions. F. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Sections have been performed. G. Examine system and equipment test reports. H. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow - control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and that their locations are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation. I. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and balancing. J. Examine HVAC equipment to ensure that clean filters have been installed, bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation. K. Examine terminal units, such as variable- air - volume boxes, to verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning. L. Examine plenum ceilings used for supply air to verify that they are airtight. Verify that pipe penetrations and other holes are sealed. M. Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations. N. Examine three -way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or mixing fluid flows. O. Examine heat - transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins. P. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 238000-2 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 238000 - TEST AND BALANCE Q. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls. R. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following: 1. Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices are operated by the intended controller. 2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller. 3. Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully closed and fully open positions. This includes dampers in multizone units, mixing boxes, and variable -air- volume terminals. 4. Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including two -way valves and three -way mixing and diverting valves, are properly connected. 5. Thermostats and humidistats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts, and cold walls. 6. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions. 7. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents. 8. Controller set points are set at indicated values. 9. Interlocked systems are operating. 10. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to indicated values. S. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step -by -step procedures. B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following: 1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete. 2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, water treatment conducted, and free of air. 3. Automatic temperature - control systems are operational. 4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. 5. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open. 6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational. 7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air - pattern adjustments are required and access to balancing devices is provided. 8. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be met. 9. Systems and equipment are labeled per Project Specifications. 3.3 INSPECTIONS DURING CONSTRUCTION /INSTALLATION A. SIXTY PERCENT DUCTWORK INSPECTION 1. Notify Designer of inspection schedule at least one week prior to inspection. 2. Inspect installation of HVAC systems when sixty percent of ductwork is installed. 3. Verify general installation of HVAC system, including piping, ducts, valves, dampers, control devices, etc. 4. Verify access to control and balancing devices, including installation of access doors, panels, etc. 5. Report deficiencies in writing within one week of inspection to HVAC contractor, general contractor, and Designer. B. NINETY PERCENT SYSTEM INSPECTION 1. Notify Designer of inspection schedule at least one week prior to inspection. 2. Inspect installation of HVAC systems when ninety percent of HVAC system is installed. 3. Verify general installation of HVAC system, including piping, ducts, valves, dampers, control devices, etc. 4. Verify access to control and balancing devices, including installation of access doors, panels, etc. 5. Report deficiencies in writing within one week of inspection to HVAC contractor, general contractor, and Designer. 3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems" or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" and this Section. B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to insulation Specifications for this Project. C. Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material, including damper - control positions, valve position indicators, fan - speed - control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings. D. During TAB operations, submit field data to Engineer daily via fax or email. List systems /equipment tested, problems encountered, and deficiencies noted. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 238000-3 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 3.5 A. B. C. D. E. 3.6 A. B. Ar C SECTION 238000 — TEST AND BALANCE Witness start -up and tests for all major HVAC equipment. Include copies of test reports, including manufacturer's start -up check lists included in manufacturer's installation instructions, in the Test - and- Balance report. GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as- built" duct layouts. For variable- air - volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements. Check airflow patterns from the outside -air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust -air dampers, through the supply -fan discharge and mixing dampers. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path. Check for airflow blockages. Check condensate drains for proper connections, trap depth, and functioning. Check for proper sealing of air - handling unit components. Check for proper sealing of air duct system. PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT - VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer. 1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows: a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions. b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. C. Measure inlet static pressure of single -inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct restrictions. d. Measure inlet static pressure of double -inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan. 2. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air - handling unit, rooftop unit, and other air - handling and - treating equipment. a. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance personnel must change filters. 3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps, heat recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions. 4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend corrective action to align design and actual conditions. 5. Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connections to accommodate fan -speed changes. 6. Do not make fan -speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan -speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan -motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling, full heating, economizer, and any other operating modes to determine the maximum required brake horsepower. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances. 1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved. a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot -tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone. 2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances. Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments. 1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct - reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at air terminals. 1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents. 2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 238000-4 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 3.7 3.8 W* A. B. C. A. B. C. D. E. F. G. A. 3.10 A. A 3.11 A. SECTION 238000 — TEST AND BALANCE GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS Prepare test reports with pertinent design data and number in sequence starting at pump to end of system. Check the sum of branch - circuit flows against approved pump flow rate. Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as- built" piping layouts. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the general preparation procedures specified above: 1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow. 2. Check expansion tank liquid level. 3. Check makeup- water - station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent. 4. Check flow - control valves for specified sequence of operation and set at indicated flow. 5. Set differential - pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at fully closed position when pump is positive - displacement type unless several terminal valves are kept open. 6. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers. 7. Check pump -motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow - balancing device so motor nameplate rating is not exceeded. 8. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated. PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS Measure water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures, except for positive - displacement pumps: 1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Read pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heights. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size. 2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the pump and mark pump manufacturer's head - capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve until indicated water flow is achieved. 3. Verify pump -motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the system based on pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage. 4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 5 percent of design. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance. 1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow - pressure -drop relationship may be used as a flow- indicating device. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is 5 percent greater than indicated flow. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows: 1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated flow. 2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over indicated flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over indicated flow. 3. Record settings and mark balancing devices. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures including outdoor -air temperature. Measure the differential - pressure control valve settings existing at the conclusions of balancing. PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE -FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS Balance systems with automatic two- and three -way control valves by setting systems at maximum flow through heat - exchange terminals and proceed as specified above for hydronic systems. PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data: 1. Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers. 2. Motor horsepower rating. 3. Motor rpm. 4. Efficiency rating. 5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase. 6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase. 7. Starter thermal - protection - element rating. Motors Driven by Variable- Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass for the controller to prove proper operation. Record observations, including controller manufacturer, model and serial numbers, and nameplate data. PROCEDURES FOR COOLING TOWERS Shut off makeup water for the duration of the test, and verify that makeup and blowdown systems are fully operational after tests and before leaving the equipment. Perform the following tests and record the results: Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 238000-5 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 238000 - TEST AND BALANCE 1. Measure condenser -water flow to each cell of the cooling tower. 2. Measure entering- and leaving -water temperatures. 3. Measure wet- and dry -bulb temperatures of entering air. 4. Measure wet- and dry -bulb temperatures of leaving air. 5. Measure condenser -water flow rate recirculating through the cooling tower. 6. Measure cooling tower pump discharge pressure. 7. Adjust water level and feed rate of makeup -water system. 3.12 PROCEDURES FOR CONDENSING UNITS A. Verify proper rotation of fans. B. Measure entering- and leaving -air temperatures. C. Record compressor data. 3.13 PROCEDURES FOR BOILERS, WATER HEATERS, AND OTHER FUEL FIRED EQUIPMENT A. If hydronic, measure entering- and leaving -water temperatures and water flow. B. If steam, measure entering -water temperature and flow and leaving steam pressure, temperature, and flow. C. Record the following data: 1. Equipment drawing designation; 2. Equipment manufacturer, model number, and serial number; 3. Rated input and output; 4. Type of fuel and heat value (calorific value); 5. Other data from the nameplate of the equipment. D. Record the following measurements: 1. Percent carbon dioxide 2. Stack temperature (flue gas temperature at equipment outlet) 3. Ambient temperature 4. Over -fire draft (inches WG) 5. Gas burner manifold pressure 6. Fuel meter reading (see below) 7. Boiler jacket temperature E. Fuel meter readings shall be determined as follows: 1. Natural Gas: The objective of this test is to determine gross MBH input. a. Time the gas meter under each firing rate to determine the CFH (cubic feet per hour) delivered. CFH shall be calculated by the equation: CFH equals U value of timing dial for one rotation times 36,000 divided by time in seconds for one rotation of timing dial. b. Measure or determine the gas pressure at the gas meter and apply the proper correction factor to the delivered CFH that was measured to determine the equivalent CFH at the rated gas pressure. This shall be determined by the following equations: F = (UPa + PgO) /(Pa + Pr) Where F = Correction Factor; Pa = Atmospheric pressure (psi); Pg = Gas pressure at meter (psi); Pr = Rated gas pressure And Rated CFH = Measured CFH x Correction Factor 2. Oil Fired: The oil pressure at the pump shall be measured and recorded. Oil flow rate shall be determined from manufacturer's data and nozzles installed. 3. LP Gas Fired: The burner manifold pressure shall be measured and pressure read at tank, before and after each regulator under system full load conditioning for all gas fired equipment simultaneously. Gas flow rate shall be determined using manufacturers data as applicable. F. If burners have other than one firing rate, combustion tests shall be made in the following manner: 1. If step- firing (High -Low), readings shall be taken at each step. 2. If modulating, reading shall be taken at high, at low, and at 50 percent firing rate. G. The following calculations shall be made from the measured data and recorded on the report: 1. Gross Input 2. Net Stack Temperature 3. Percent Excess Air 4. Percent Flue Gas Loss 5. Combustion Efficiency 6. Gross Output (MBH) = Gross Input - Flue Gas Loss H. Flue gas loss shall be calculated from measured data using industry accepted methods. 3.14 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT - TRANSFER COILS A. Water Coils: Measure the following data for each coil: 1. Entering- and leaving -water temperature. 2. Water flow rate. 3. Water pressure drop. 4. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 5. Wet -bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cooling coils. 6. Airflow. 7. Air pressure drop. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 238000-6 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 238000 — TEST AND BALANCE 8. For coils with 3 -way control valves, adjust bypass ball valve so that flow in bypass mode is the same as flow through the coil. B. Electric- Heating Coils: Measure the following data for each coil: 1. Nameplate data. 2. Airflow. 3. Entering- and leaving -air temperature at full load. 4. Voltage and amperage input of each phase at full load and at each incremental stage. 5. Calculated kilowatt at full load. 6. Fuse or circuit - breaker rating for overload protection. C. Refrigerant Coils: Measure the following data for each coil: 1. Dry -bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 2. Wet -bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 3. Airflow. 4. Air pressure drop. 5. Refrigerant suction pressure and temperature. 3.15 PROCEDURES FOR TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENTS A. During TAB, report the need for adjustment in temperature regulation within the automatic temperature - control system. B. Measure indoor wet- and dry -bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of two successive eight -hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final temperature settings. Measure when the building or zone is occupied. C. Measure outside -air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures. 3.16 PROCEDURES FOR SOUND LEVEL TESTING A. Conduct AABC standard sound tests for all air handlers and fans, and include test results in the Test - and- Balance report. If sound levels are above these listed, adjustments shall be made to bring the sound level within the range set forth. B. If this cannot be done with the equipment as installed, recommendation shall be made by the Engineer to correct the sound level to within specified range. Additions of sound traps, insulation, isolation mounts, or dampers shall be made by the Mechanical Contractor under the direction of the Engineer at no extra cost. C. Acceptable maximum sound levels are as follows: 1. Halls and corridor areas: NC30 (40 dba on Scale A) 2. Auditoriums, classrooms and offices NC -25, (35 dba on Scale A) 3. Shop, gymnasium, and multipurpose areas NC40 (50 dba on Scale A). 3.17 PROCEDURES FOR COMMERCIAL KITCHEN HOODS A. Measure, adjust, and record the airflow of each kitchen hood. For kitchen hoods designed with integral makeup air, measure and adjust the exhaust and makeup airflow. Measure airflow by duct Pitot -tube traverse. If a duct Pitot -tube traverse is not possible, provide an explanation in the report of the reason(s) why and also the reason why the method used was chosen. 1. Install welded test ports in the sides of the exhaust duct for the duct Pitot -tube traverse. Install each test port with a threaded cap that is liquid tight. B. After balancing is complete, do the following: 1. Measure and record the static pressure at the hood exhaust -duct connection. 2. Measure and record the hood face velocity. Make measurements at multiple points across the face of the hood. Perform measurements at a maximum of 12 inches between points and between any point and the perimeter. Calculate the average of the measurements recorded. Verify that the hood average face velocity complies with the Contract Documents and governing codes. 3. Check the hood for capture and containment of smoke using a smoke emitting device. Observe the smoke pattern. Make adjustments to room airflow patterns to achieve optimum results. C. Visually inspect the hood exhaust duct throughout its entire length in compliance with authorities having jurisdiction. Begin at the hood connection and end at the point it discharges outdoors. Report findings. 1. Check duct slopes as required. 2. Verify that duct access is installed as required. 3. Verify that point of termination is as required. 4. Verify that duct air velocity is within the range required. 5. Verify that duct is within a fire -rated enclosure. D. Report deficiencies. 3.18 TEMPERATURE - CONTROL VERIFICATION A. Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned. B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect control functions. C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements. D. Check the operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low- temperature controllers). Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 238000-7 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 238000 - TEST AND BALANCE E. Check free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve operators. F. Check the sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device positions and correlate with airflow and water flow measurements. Note the speed of response to input changes. G. Check the interaction of electrically operated switch transducers. H. Check the interaction of interlock and lockout systems. I. Check main control supply -air pressure and observe compressor and dryer operations. J. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine whether the system operates on a grounded or nongrounded power supply. K. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail -safe operations. 3.19 TOLERANCES A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances: 1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent. 3. Heating -Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 10 percent. 4. Cooling -Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 5 percent. 3.20 FINAL REPORT A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter - quality font, on standard bond paper, in three - ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems. B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer. 1. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration. C. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field report data, include the following: 1. Pump curves. 2. Fan curves. 3. Manufacturers' test data. 4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 5. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include Shop Drawings and Product Data. D. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data in the final report, as applicable: 1. Title page. 2. Name and address of TAB firm. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Architect's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of TAB firm who certifies the report. 10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. Number each page in the report. 11. Summary of contents including the following: a. Indicated versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. C. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents. 12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings. 14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports varies from indicated values. 15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following: a. Settings for outside -, return -, and exhaust -air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. C. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils. e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. f. Inlet vane settings for variable- air - volume systems. g. Settings for supply -air, static - pressure controller. h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance. E. System Diagrams: Include a copy of the design drawings, marked to note as- built /as- installed conditions, indicating the following: 1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows. 2. Water and steam flow rates. 3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. 4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations. 5. Terminal units. 6. Balancing stations. 7. Location and position of balancing devices. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 238000-8 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 238000 — TEST AND BALANCE 8. Actual airflows measured at each grille /diff user. 9. Inlet and outlet static pressures measured at each air handling unit. 10. Pump inlet and outlet pressures and flow rates. 11. Identification on system diagrams to be cross - referenced to tabulated data. 3.21 ADDITIONAL TESTS A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional testing and balancing to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions. B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near -peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional testing, inspecting, and adjusting during near -peak summer and winter conditions. C. Opposite season testing: Perform additional testing, inspecting, and adjusting during the opposite season in which initial TAB procedures were performed. D. In all cases, notify Designer in advance of performing additional tests. END OF SECTION 238000 Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 238000-9 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 238100 - HVAC INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This section includes insulation specifications for heating, ventilating and air conditioning piping, ductwork and equipment. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger. 2. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation. 3. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of insulation. 4. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access panels. 5. Detail application of field - applied jackets. 6. Detail application at linkages of control devices. 7. Detail field application for each equipment type. C. Field quality - control reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire - test - response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame- spread index of 25 or less, and smoke - developed index of 50 or less. 2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame- spread index of 75 or less, and smoke - developed index of 150 or less. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Materials or accessories containing asbestos will not be accepted. B. Use composite insulation systems (insulation, jackets, sealants, mastics, and adhesives) that have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and smoke developed rating of 50 or less, with the following exceptions: 1. Pipe insulation which is not located in an air plenum may have a flame spread rating not over 25 and a smoke developed rating no higher than 150. 2.2 INSULATION AND JACKETS A. Manufacturers: Armacell, Certainteed, Manson, Childers, Dow, Extol, Fibrex, Halstead, H.B. Fuller, Imcoa, Johns Manville, Knauf, Owens - Corning, Partek, Pittsburgh Corning, Rubatex or approved equal. B. Insulating materials shall be fire retardant, moisture and mildew resistant, and vermin proof. Insulation shall be suitable to receive jackets, adhesives and coatings as indicated. 2.3 FLEXIBLE FIBERGLASS INSULATION: A. Minimum nominal density of 0.75 lbs. per cu. ft., and thermal conductivity of not more than 0.3 at 75 degrees F, rated for service to 250 degrees F. B. Foil- scrim -kraft vapor barrier jacket, factory applied to insulation, maximum permeance of .02 perms. 2.4 RIGID FIBERGLASS INSULATION: A. Minimum nominal density of 3 lbs. per cu. ft., and thermal conductivity of not more than 0.23 at 75 degrees F, minimum compressive strength of 25 PSF at 10% deformation, rated for service to 450 degrees F. B. Piping: White kraft reinforced foil vapor barrier all service jacket, factory applied to insulation with a self - sealing pressure sensitive adhesive lap, maximum permeance of .02 perms and minimum beach puncture resistance of 50 units. C. Ductwork: Foil- scrim -kraft vapor barrier jacket, factory applied to insulation, maximum permeance of .02 perms. 2.5 SEMI -RIGID FIBERGLASS INSULATION: A. Minimum nominal density of 3 lbs. per cu. ft., thermal conductivity of not more than 0.28 at 75 degrees F, minimum compressive strength of 125 PSF at 10% deformation, rated for service to 450 degrees F. Insulation fibers perpendicular to jacket and scored for wrapping cylindrical surfaces. B. White kraft reinforced foil vapor barrier all service jacket, factory applied to insulation with a maximum permeance of .02 perms and minimum beach puncture resistance of 50 units. 2.6 CALCIUM SILICATE INSULATION: A. Rigid hydrous calcium silicate, ASTM C533, Type I, minimum dry density of 12.5 lbs. per cu. ft., thermal conductivity of not more than 0.44 at 300 degrees F, maximum water absorption of 90% by volume, minimum compressive strength 140 psi at 5% deformation, rated for service range of 0 degrees F to 1,200 degrees F,. Material to be visually coded or marked to indicate it is asbestos free. 2.7 ELASTOMERIC INSULATION: A. Flexible closed cell, minimum nominal density of 5.5 lbs. per cu. ft., thermal conductivity of not more than 0.27 at 75 degrees F, minimum compressive strength of 4.5 psi at 25% deformation, maximum Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 238100-1 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 2.8 A. 2.9 A. B. 2.10 A. 2.11 A. 2.12 A. 2.13 A. 2.14 A. B. 2.15 A. 2.16 A. 2.17 A. 2.18 A. B. C SECTION 238100 - HVAC INSULATION water vapor permeability of 0.17 perm inch, maximum water absorption of 6% by weight, rated for service range of -20 degrees F to 220 degrees F on piping and 180 degrees F where adhered to equipment. POLYOLEFIN INSULATION: Flexible closed cell, minimum nominal density of 1.5 lbs. per cu. ft., thermal conductivity of not more than 0.24 at 75 degrees F, minimum compressive strength of 5 psi at 25% deformation, maximum water vapor permeability of 0.0 perm inch, maximum water absorption of 0% by weight and volume, rated for service range of -165 degrees F to 210 degrees F. PHENOLIC INSULATION: Rigid closed cell, minimum nominal density of 2.2 lbs. per cu. ft., thermal conductivity of not more than 0.13 at 75 degrees F, minimum compressive strength of 31 psi parrallel and 18 psi perpendicular, maximum water vapor permeability 0.117 perm inch, maximum water absorption of .5% by volume, rated for service range of -290 degrees F to 250 degrees F. Kraft reinforced foil vapor barrier laminate all service jacket, factory applied to insulation with a self - sealing pressure sensitive adhesive lap, maximum permeance of .02 perms and minimum beach puncture resistance of 50 units. EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE INSULATION: Rigid closed cell, minimum nominal density of 1.6 lbs. per cu. ft., thermal conductivity of not more than 0.285 at 75 degrees F, minimum compressive strength of 20 psi, maximum water vapor permeability of 1.5 perm inch, maximum water absorption of .5 % by volume, rated for service range of -290 degrees F to 165 degrees F. POLYISOCYANURATE INSULATION: Rigid closed cell polyisocya nu rate, minimum nominal density of 2.0 (3.0. 4.0, 6.0)Ibs. per cu. ft., thermal conductivity of not more than 0.19 at 75 degrees F aged 180 days, minimum compressive strength of 24 (50, 80, 140)psi parallel and 13 (40, 65, 130)psi perpendicular, maximum water vapor permeability of 4 perm inch, maximum water absorption of 2% by volume, rated for service range of - 290 degrees F to 300 degrees F. CELLULAR GLASS INSULATION: Rigid closed cell, minimum nominal density of 8.5 lbs. per cu. ft., thermal conductivity of not more than 0.36 at 50 degrees F, minimum compressive strength of 100 psi, maximum water vapor permeability of 0.0 perm inch, maximum water absorption of .2% by volume, rated for service range of -450 degrees F to 900 degrees F. MINERAL WOOL INSULATION: Rigid preformed mineral fiber, minimum nominal density of 8 lbs. per cu. ft., thermal conductivity of not more than 0.29 at 200 degrees F, minimum compressive strength of 3 psi, maximum wicking of 1 %, maximum water adsorption of 1 % by volume, rated for service of -120 degrees F to 1200 degrees F. FIREPROOFING INSULATION: Mineral fiber with nominal density of 8 lbs. per cu. ft., flame spread index of 25, fuel contribution index of 0, and smoke developed index of 0, thermal conductivity of not more than 0.23 at 75 degrees F, rated for service of -120 degrees F to 1200 degrees F. Use rigid or semi -rigid board for duct insulations. Foil- scrim - polyethylene vapor barrier jacket, factory applied to insulation, maximum permeance of .02 perms. PVC FITTING COVERS AND JACKETS: White PVC film, gloss finish one side, semi -gloss other side, FS LP -535D, Composition A, Type II, Grade GU. Ultraviolet inhibited indoor /outdoor grade to be used where exposed to high humidity, ultraviolet radiation, in kitchens or food processing areas or installed outdoors. Jacket thickness to be minimum .02" indoors /.03 "outdoors for piping 12" and smaller, .03" indoors /.04" outdoors for piping 15" and larger. METAL JACKETS: .016 inch thick aluminum or .010 inch thick stainless steel with safety edge. SELF - ADHERING JACKETS: Self- adhering waterproofing membrane consisting of laminated reflective high density aluminum foil, high density waterproof polymer films and 40 mil rubberized adhesive asphalt waterproofing compound with release paper. INSULATION INSERTS AND PIPE SHIELDS: Manufacturers: B -Line, Pipe Shields, Value Engineered Products Construct inserts with calcium silicate or polyisocyanu rate (service temperatures below 300 degrees F only), minimum 140 psi compressive strength. Piping 12" and larger, supplement with high density 600 psi structural calcium silicate insert. Provide galvanized steel shield. Insert and shield to be minimum 180 degree coverage on bottom supported piping and full 360 degree coverage on clamped piping. On roller mounted piping and piping designed to slide on support, provide additional load distribution steel plate. Where contractor proposes shop /site fabricated inserts and shields, submit schedule of materials, thicknesses, gauges and lengths for each pipe size to demonstrate equivalency to preengi neered/preman ufactu red product described above. On low temperature systems, high density Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 238100-2 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 238100 - HVAC INSULATION rigid polyisocyan u rate may be substituted for calcium silicate provided insert and shield length and shield gauge are increased to compensate for lower insulation compressive strength. D. Precompressed 20# density molded fiberglass blocks, Hamfab or equal, of the same thickness as adjacent insulation may be substituted for calcium silicate inserts with one 1 "x6" block for piping through 2 -1/2" and three 1 "x6" blocks for piping through 4 ". Submit shield schedule to demonstrate equivalency to preeng ineered/preman ufactu red product described above. E. Wood blocks will not be accepted. 2.19 ACCESSORIES A. All products shall be compatible with surfaces and materials on which they are applied, and be suitable for use at operating temperatures of the systems to which they are applied. B. Adhesives, sealants, and protective finishes shall be as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications specified. C. Insulation bands to be 3/4 inch wide, constructed of aluminum or stainless steel. Minimum thickness to be .015 inch for aluminum and .010 inch for stainless steel. D. Tack fasteners to be stainless steel ring grooved shank tacks. E. Staples to be clinch style. F. Insulating cement to be ANSI /ASTM C195, hydraulic setting mineral wool. G. Finishing cement to be ASTM C449. H. Fibrous glass or canvas fabric reinforcing shall have a minimum untreated weight of 6 oz. /sq. yd. I. Bedding compounds to be non- shrinking and permanently flexible. J. Vapor barrier coatings and tapes to have maximum applied water vapor permeance of .05 perms. K. Fungicidal water base coating (Foster 40 -20 or equal) to be compatible with vapor barrier coating. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install insulation, jackets and accessories in accordance with manufacturers instructions and under ambient temperatures and conditions recommended by manufacturer. Surfaces to be insulated must be clean and dry. B. Do not insulate systems or equipment which are specified to be pressure tested or inspected, until testing, inspection and any necessary repairs have been successfully completed. C. Install insulation with smooth and even surfaces. Poorly fitted joints or use of filler in voids will not be accepted. Provide neatly beveled and coated terminations at all nameplates, uninsulated fittings, or at other locations where insulation terminates. D. Install fabric reinforcing without wrinkles. Overlap seams a minimum of 2 inches. E. Use full length material (as delivered from manufacturer) wherever possible. Scrap piecing of insulation or pieces cut undersize and stretched to fit will not be accepted. F. Insulation shall be continuous through sleeves and openings except where fire rated penetration materials require interruption of insulation. Vapor barriers shall be maintained continuous through all penetrations. G. Provide a complete vapor barrier for insulation on the following systems: 1. Insulated Duct 2. Equipment or piping with a surface temperature below 65 degrees F 3.2 PIPE INSULATION: A. General: 1. Install insulation with butt joints and longitudinal seams closed tightly. Provide minimum 2" lap on jacket seams and 2" tape on butt joints, firmly cemented with lap adhesive. Additionally secure with staples along seams and butt joints. Coat staples, longitudinal and transverse seams with vapor barrier mastic on systems requiring vapor barrier. 2. Install insulation continuous through pipe hangers and supports with hangers and supports on the exterior of insulation. Where a vapor barrier is not required or where roller hangers are not being used, hangers and supports may be attached directly to piping with insulation completely covering hanger or support and jacket sealed at support rod penetration. Where riser clamps are required to be attached directly to piping requiring vapor barrier, extend insulation and vapor barrier jacketing /coating around riser clamp. 3. Fully insulate all reheat coil piping, fittings and valves (with the exeption of unions) up to coil connection to prevent condensation when coil is inactive during cooling season. B. Insulation Inserts and Pipe Shields: Provide insulation inserts and pipe shields at all hanger and support locations. Inserts may be omitted on 3/4" and smaller copper piping provided 12" long 22 gauge pipe shields are used. C. Fittings and Valves: Fittings, valves, unions, flanges, couplings and specialties may be insulated with factory molded or built up insulation of the same thickness as adjoining insulation. Cover insulation with fabric reinforcing and mastic or where temperatures do not exceed 150 degrees, PVC fitting covers. Secure PVC fitting covers with tack fasteners and 1 -1/2" band of mastic over ends, throat, seams and penetrations. On systems requiring vapor barrier, use vapor barrier mastic. D. Mineral Fiber: Secure each 3' section with three stainless steel bands or five 16 gauge stainless steel or annealed copper tie wires evenly spaced and at ends. Twist wire ends, snip off excess and turn ends over into insulation. Stagger joints where more than one layer is used. E. Elastomeric and Polyolefin: Where practical, slip insulation on piping during pipe installation when pipe ends are open. Miter cut fittings allowing sufficient length to prevent stretching. Completely seal Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 238100-3 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 G. Service Types SECTION 238100 - HVAC INSULATION seams and joints for vapor tight installation. For elastomeric insulation, apply full bed of adhesive to both surfaces. For polyeolefin, seal factory preglued seams with roller and field seams and joints with full bed of hot melt polyolefin glue to both surfaces. Cover elastomeric insulation on systems operating below 40 degrees F with vapor barrier mastic. EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE AND POLYISOCYANURATE: Secure insulation sections with two wraps of nylon filament tape 9 " -12" on center. On single insulation layer systems and on the outer layer of double insulation layer systems, apply a thin coat of elastomeric joint sealant rated for system operating temperatures to all longitudinal and butt insulation joints covering entire face of joint. Allow sealant to fully cure before applying protective covering. For piping service below 0 °F, use two layers of insulation with inner and outer butt and longitudinal joints staggered and offset 90 degrees. Where two layers of insulation are used, do not use sealant on the inner layer or adhere the inner layer to the outer layer. Fill voids in factory molded or built -up valve and fitting insulation with foamed in place urethane insulation. Apply vapor stop bead of joint sealant between pipe and insulation on both sides of valves, expansion /contraction joints, flanges, thermometers /gauges, attached vent and drain lines. Insulate attached non - circulated lines, control lines, vents, etc. for a minimum distance of 6" from pipe. Cover insulation with a protective covering of 2 coats of vapor barrier mastic with fabric reinforcing. Do not penetrate protective covering or insulation with mechanical fasteners. PIPE INSULATION SCHEDULE: 1. Provide insulation on new and existing remodeled piping as indicated in the following schedule: Insulation Insulation Thickness by Pipe Size Refrigerant Elastomeric (Both Discharge and Suction) Copper Condensate Elastomeric 1" and 1 -1/4" 2 -1/2" 5" to 6" 8" and smaller to 2" to 4" larger 1" 1" 1" 1" 1" 1" 1" 1" 3.3 DUCT INSULATION A. General: 1. Secure flexible duct insulation on sides and bottom of ductwork over 24" wide and all rigid duct insulation with weld pins or speed clips. Space fasteners 18" on center or less as required to prevent sagging for flexible duct insulation. Space fasteners not less than 3" from edge or corner and 12" on center or less for rigid duct insulation. Install weld pins without damage to the interior galvanized surface of the duct. Clip pins back to washer and cover penetrations with tape of same material as jacket. Firmly butt seams and joints and cover with 4" tape of same material as jacket. Seal tape with plastic applicator and secure with staples. All joints, seams, edges and penetrations to be fully vapor sealed. 2. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow operation without disturbing insulation or jacket material. 3. External supply duct insulation is not required where ductwork contains continuous 1" acoustical liner. Provide 4" overlap of external insulation over ends of acoustically lined sections. B. GREASE DUCTS: Strictly adhere to manufacturer's installation instructions and rating requirements for application of fire -stop insulation. Cover all exhaust ducts serving Type I kitchen hoods with fire - stop insulation from a point prior to penetration of ceiling, wall, floor or concealment through building to termination at outside of building. Extend fire -stop insulation through roof curbs. C. Duct Insulation Schedule: 1. Provide duct insulation on new and existing remodeled ductwork in the following schedule: Service Insulation Type Insulation Thickness Outside air ducts (to hru's and ahu's) Flex. / Rigid Fiberglass 2" Mixed air ducts Flex. / Rigid Fiberglass 2" Exposed supply ducts* Flex. / Rigid Fiberglass 2" Concealed supply / return ducts Flex. / Rigid Fiberglass 2" Exhaust and relief ducts downstream (uninsulated) of motorized backdraft dampers All ducts exposed to weather Rigid Fiberglass 3" Exhaust ducts to / from Flex. / Rigid Fiberglass 2" (from 20' from unit only) of heat recovery units and dessicant dryers Grease ducts serving Type I Fire -Stop As Req'd. for Specified Kitchen hoods Hourly Rating Exposed supply main and branch ducts located in the space they are serving do not require insulation. Ex- posed supply main ducts running through spaces they serve shall be insulated as exposed supply ducts scheduled above. 3.4 EQUIPMENT INSULATION A. GENERAL:Do not insulate over equipment access manholes, fittings, nameplates or ASME stamps. Bevel and seal insulation at these locations. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 238100-4 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 238100 - HVAC INSULATION B. Semi -Rigid Fiberglass: Apply insulation to equipment shells using weld pins, bonding adhesive, banded and wired in place. Fill all joints, seams and depressions with insulating cement to a smooth, even surface. Cover with reinforcing fabric and 2 coats of mastic. Use vapor barrier mastic on systems requiring a vapor barrier. C. Elastomeric /Polyolefin: Apply full cover coat of adhesive to surface to be insulated, insulation and edge butt joints. Place insulation with edge joints firmly butted pressing to surface for full adhesion. Seal seams and joints vapor tight. D. Equipment Insulation Schedule: Provide equipment insulation as follows: Equipment Insulation Thickness Type Air Handling Unit Casings or attached Rigid Fiberglass 2" component sections not factory insulated Condenser shell only needs to be insulated when condenser is city, lake, or river water cooled or when "free cooling" is used. E. Insulate air handling unit casings, chambers, or plenums (filters, mixing chambers, sound attenuators, etc.) in accordance with requirements of adjacent duct insulation. END OF SECTION 238100 Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 238100-5 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 238147 – DEDICATED OUTDOOR AIR SYSTEM PART 1: GENERAL Note: All equipment described below, along with all equipment accessories, controls, base refrigerant charge, equipment / parts warranty, etc. shall be owner - furnished (also refer to drawings). This contrac- tor shall install owner - furnished systems complete. Contractor to furnish all material, devices, items, piping, wiring, additional refrigerant charge, factory startup and factory / owner training, warranty sup- port, etc. as required for a complete functional system. 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Packaged Rooftop air conditioners 1.02 REFERENCES A. AFBMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. B. AMCA 99— Standards Handbook C. AMCA 210 — Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes D. AMCA 500 —Test Methods for Louver, Dampers, and Shutters. E. AHRI 340/360 - Unitary Large Equipment F. NEMA MG1— Motors and Generators G. National Electrical Code. H. NFPA 70— National Fire Protection Agency. I. SMACNA —HVAC Duct Construction Standards —Metal and Flexible. J. UL 900 —Test Performance of Air Filter Units. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly, unit dimensions, weight loading, required clearances, con- struction details, field connection details, electrical characteristics and connection requirements. B. Product Data: 1. Provide literature that indicates dimensions, weights, capacities, ratings, fan performance, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements. 2. Provide computer generated fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted. 3. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions. 1.04 OPERATION AND MAINTANENCE DATA A. Maintenance Data: Provide instructions for installation, maintenance and service 1.05 QUALIFICAITONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience, who issues complete catalog data on total product. B. Startup must be done by trained personnel experienced with rooftop equipment. C. Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean, filters and remote controls are in place, bearings lubricated, and manufacturers' installation instructions have been followed. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site. B. Accept products on site and inspect for damage. C. Store in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design: Daikin Applied, approved equals by Carrier, Trane, York, or approved equiva- lent. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 238147-1 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 238147 — DEDICATED OUTDOOR AIR SYSTEM 1. No equal exists. [Deducts for alternative equipment will be considered.] 2.02 GENERAL DESCRIPTION A. Furnish as shown on plans, Daikin Applied Rebel Single zone Heating and Cooling Unit(s) model DIPS. Unit performance and electrical characteristics shall be per the job schedule. B. Configuration: Fabricate as detailed on prints and drawings: 1. Return plenum / economizer section 2. Filter section 3. Cooling coil section 4. Supply fan section 5. Condensing unit section C. The complete unit shall be cETLus listed. D. The unit shall be ASHRAE 90.1 -2016 compliant and labeled. E. Each unit shall be specifically designed for outdoor rooftop application and include a weatherproof cabinet. Each unit shall be completely factory assembled and shipped in one piece. Packaged units shall be shipped fully charged with R -410 Refrigerant and oil. F. The unit shall undergo a complete factory run test prior to shipment. The factory test shall include a refrigeration circuit run test, a unit control system operations checkout, a unit refrigerant leak test and a final unit inspection. G. All units shall have decals and tags to indicate caution areas and aid unit service. Unit name- plates shall be fixed to the main control panel door. Electrical wiring diagrams shall be attached to the control panels. Installation, operating and maintenance bulletins and start -up forms shall be sup- plied with each unit. H. Performance: All scheduled EER, IEER, capacities and face areas are minimum accepted values. All scheduled amps, kW, and HP are maximum accepted values that allow scheduled capacity to be met. I. Warranty: The manufacturer shall provide 12 -month parts only warranty. Defective parts shall be repaired or replaced during the warranty period at no charge. The warranty period shall commence at startup or six months after shipment, whichever occurs first. 2.03 CABINET, CASING, AND FRAME A. Panel construction shall be double -wall construction for all panels. All floor panels shall have a solid galvanized steel inner liner on the air stream side of the unit to protect insulation during service and maintenance. Insulation shall be a minimum of 1" thick with an R -value of 7.0, and shall be 2 part injected foam. Panel design shall include no exposed insulation edges. Unit cabinet shall be designed to operate at total static pressures up to 5.0 inches w.g. B. Exterior surfaces shall be constructed of pre - painted galvanized steel for aesthetics and long term durability. Paint finish to include a base primer with a high quality, polyester resin topcoat of a neutral beige color. Finished panel surfaces to withstand a minimum 750 -hour salt spray test in accordance with ASTM B117 standard for salt spray resistance. C. Service doors shall be provided on the fan section, filter section, control panel section, and heat- ing vestibule in order to provide user access to unit components. All service access doors shall be mounted on multiple, stainless steel hinges and shall be secured by a latch system. Removable service panels secured by multiple mechanical fasteners are not acceptable. D. The unit base shall overhang the roof curb for positive water runoff and shall seat on the roof curb gasket to provide a positive, weathertight seal. Lifting brackets shall be provided on the unit base to accept cable or chain hooks for rigging the equipment. 2.04 OUTDOOR /RETURN AIR SECTION A. Unit shall be provided with a 100% outdoor air hood. The 100 % outdoor air hood shall allow out- door air to enter from the back of the unit, at the draw - through filter section. The outdoor air hood shall be factory installed and constructed from galvanized steel finished with the same durable paint finish as the main unit. The hood shall include a bird screen to prevent infiltration of foreign materi- als and a rain lip to drain water away from the entering air stream. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 238147-2 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 238147 — DEDICATED OUTDOOR AIR SYSTEM B. Daikin Applied UltraSeal low leak dampers shall be provided. Damper blades shall be fully gas - keted and side sealed and arranged vertically in the hood. Damper leakage shall be less than 1.5 CFM /Sq. Ft. of damper area at 1.0 inch static pressure differential. Leakage rate to be tested in ac- cordance with AMCA Standard 500. Damper blades shall be operated from multiple sets of linkages mounted on the leaving face of the dampers. Control of the dampers shall be from a factory installed actuator. C. Control of the outdoor dampers shall be by a factory installed actuator. Damper actuator shall be of the modulating type. Damper to open when when supply fan starts, and close when supply fan stops. 2.05 ENERGY RECOVERY A. The rooftop unit shall be provided with an AHRI certified rotary wheel air -to -air heat exchanger in a cassette frame complete with seals, drive motor and drive belt. The energy recovery wheel shall be an integral part of the rooftop unit with unitary construction and does not require field assembly. Bolt -on energy recovery units that require field assembly and section to section gasketing and seal- ing are not acceptable. B. The wheel capacity, air pressure drop and effectiveness shall be AHRI certified per AHRI Stand- ard 1060. Thermal performance shall be certified by the manufacturer in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 84, Method of Testing Air -to -Air Heat Exchangers and AHRI Standard 1060, Rating Air -to- Air Heat Exchangers For Energy Recovery Ventilation Equipment. C. The rooftop unit shall be designed with a track so the entire energy recovery wheel cassette can slide out from the rooftop unit to facilitate cleaning. D. The unit shall have 2" Mery 7 filters for the outdoor air before the wheel to help keep the wheel clean and reduce maintenance. Filter access shall be by a hinged access door with '/4 turn latches. E. The matrix design shall have channels to reduce cross contamination between the outdoor air and the exhaust air. The layers shall be effectively captured in aluminum and stainless steel segment frames that provide a rigid and self- supporting matrix. All diameter and perimeter seals shall be pro- vided as part of the cassette assembly and shall be factory set. Drive belt(s) of stretch urethane shall be provided for wheel rim drive without the need for external tensioners or adjustment. F. The total energy recovery wheel shall be coated with silica gel desiccant permanently bonded without the use of binders or adhesives, which may degrade desiccant performance. The substrate shall be lightweight polymer and shall not degrade nor require additional coatings for application in marine or coastal environments. Coated segments shall be washable with detergent or alkaline coil cleaner and water. Desiccant shall not dissolve nor deliquesce in the presence of water or high hu- midity. G. Wheels shall be provided with removable energy transfer matrix. Wheel frame construction shall be a welded hub, spoke and rim assembly of stainless, plated and /or coated steel and shall be self - supporting without matrix segments in place. Segments shall be removable without the use of tools to facilitate maintenance and cleaning. H. Wheel bearings shall be selected to provide an L -10 life in excess of 400,000 hours. Rim shall be continuous rolled stainless steel. Wheels shall be connected to the shaft by means of taper lock hubs. I. The exhaust air fan shall be a direct drive SWSI plenum fan. The exhaust fan shall be sized for the airflow requirements per the construction schedule. The unit controller shall control the exhaust fan to maintain building pressure. A VFD shall be provided for the exhaust fan motor or the exhaust fan motor shall be an ECM motor.The rooftop unit shall have single point electrical power connection and shall be ETL listed. J. The control of the energy recovery wheel shall be an integral part of the rooftop unit's DDC con- troller. The DDC controller shall have visibility of the outdoor air temperature, leaving wheel temper- ature, return air temperature, and exhaust air temperature. These temperatures shall be displayed at the rooftop units DDC controller LCD display. All of these temperatures shall be made available through the BACnet interface. K. The rooftop unit with the energy recovery wheel shall incorporate the economizer operation. The energy recovery wheel shall have a bypass damper. When the unit is in the economizer mode of operation the energy recovery wheel shall stop and the bypass dampers shall be opened. The out- Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 238147-3 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 238147 — DEDICATED OUTDOOR AIR SYSTEM door air shall be drawn through the bypass dampers to reduce the pressure drop of the outdoor air- stream. L. The rooftop unit DDC controller shall provide frost control for the energy recovery wheel. When a frost condition is encountered the unit controller shall stop the wheel. When in the frost control mode the wheel shall be jogged periodically and not be allowed to stay in the stationary position. 2.06 EXHAUST FAN A. Exhaust fan shall be a single width, single inlet (SWSI) airfoil centrifugal fan. The fan wheel shall be Class II construction with aluminum fan blades that are continuously welded to the hub plate and end rim. The exhaust fan shall be a direct drive fan mounted to the motor shaft. Belts and sheaves are not acceptable due to the additional maintenance. B. The fan motor shall be a totally enclosed EC motor that is speed controlled by the rooftop unit controller. The motor shall include thermal overload protection and protect the motor in the case of excessive motor temperatures. The motor shall have phase failure protection and prevent the motor from operation in the event of a loss of phase. Motors shall be premium efficiency. C. The unit DDC controller shall provide building static pressure control. The unit controller shall pro- vide proportional control of the exhaust fans from 25% to 100% of the supply air fan designed airflow to maintain the adjustable building pressure setpoint. The field shall mount the required sensing tub- ing from the building to the factory mounted building static pressure sensor. 2.07 FILTERS A. Unit shall be provided with a draw - through filter section. The filter rack shall be designed to ac- cept a 2" prefilter and a 4" final filter. The unit design shall have a hinged access door for the filter section. The manufacturer shall ship the rooftop unit with 2" MERV 8 construction filters. The con- tractor shall furnish and install, at building occupancy, the final set of filters per the contract docu- ments. 2.08 COOLING COIL A. The indoor coil section shall be installed in a draw through configuration, upstream of the supply air fan. The coil section shall be complete with a factory piped cooling coil and an ASHRAE 62.1 compliant double sloped drain pan. B. The direct expansion (DX) cooling coils shall be fabricated of seamless high efficiency copper tub- ing that is mechanically expanded into high efficiency aluminum plate fins. Coils shall be a multi - row, staggered tube design with a minimum of 3 rows. All cooling coils shall have an interlaced coil circuiting that keeps the full coil face active at all load conditions. All coils shall be factory leak tested with high pressure air under water. C. The cooling coil shall have an electronic controlled expansion valve. The unit controller shall con- trol the expansion valve to maintain liquid subcooling and the superheat of the refrigerant system. D. The refrigerant suction lines shall be fully insulated from the expansion valve to the compressors. E. The drain pan shall be stainless steel and positively sloped. The slope of the drain pan shall be in two directions and comply with ASHRAE Standard 62.1. The drain pan shall have a minimum slope of 1/8" per foot to provide positive draining. The drain pan shall extend beyond the leaving side of the coil. The drain pan shall have a threaded drain connection extending through the unit base. 2.09 HOT GAS REHEAT A. Unit shall be equipped with a fully modulating hot gas reheat coil with hot gas coming from the unit condenser B. Hot gas reheat coil shall be a Micro Channel design. The aluminum tube shall be a micro channel design with high efficiency aluminum fins. Fins shall be brazed to the tubing for a direct bond. The capacity of the reheat coil shall allow for a 20 °F temperature rise at all operating conditions. C. The modulating hot gas reheat systems shall allow for independent control of the cooling coil leaving air temperature and the reheat coil leaving air temperature. The cooling coil and reheat coil leaving air temperature setpoints shall be adjustable through the unit controller. During the dehumid- ification cycle the unit shall be capable of 100% of the cooling capacity. The hot gas reheat coil shall provide discharge temperature control within +/- 2 °F. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 238147-4 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 238147 — DEDICATED OUTDOOR AIR SYSTEM D. Each coil shall be factory leak tested with high - pressure air under water. 2.010 SUPPLY FAN A. Supply fan shall be a single width, single inlet (SWSI) airfoil centrifugal fan. The fan wheel shall be Class II construction with fan blades that are continuously welded to the hub plate and end rim. The supply fan shall be a direct drive fan mounted to the motor shaft. Belts and sheaves are not ac- ceptable due to the additonal maintenance. B. All fan assemblies shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory, including a final trim balance, prior to shipment. C. Supply fan and motor assembly combinations larger than 8 hp or 22" diameter shall be internally isolated on 1" deflection, spring isolators and include removable shipping tie downs. D. The fan motor shall be a totally enclosed EC motor that is speed controlled by the rooftop unit controller. The motor shall include thermal overload protection and protect the motor in the case of excessive motor temperatures. The motor shall have phase failure protection and prevent the motor from operation in the event of a loss of phase. Motors shall be premium efficiency. E. The supply fan shall be capable of airflow modulation from 30% to 100% of the scheduled de- signed airflow. The fan shall not operate in a state of surge at any point within the modulation range. 2.011 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME CONTROL A. The unit controller shall proportionally control the Electronically Commutated Motors (ECM) on the supply and exhaust fans. The supply fan shall be controlled to maintain an adjustable duct pres- sure setpoint. A duct static pressure sensor shall be factory mounted in the control panel. The field shall furnish and install the pneumatic tubing for the duct static pressure sensor and the building pressure sensor. The field shall furnish and install the outdoor air pressure sensor. 2.012 HEATING SECTION A. The rooftop unit shall include an electrical resistance heating coil section. Staged electric heating coil modules shall be factory installed downstream of the supply air fan in the heating section of the rooftop unit. Heating coils shall be constructed of a low watt density, nickel - chromium alloy re- sistance wire with intermediate supports that include ceramic bushings. The electrical contactors shall be of the full line- breaking type with all the electrical power legs being disconnected when the contactors are not energized. All electrical circuit wiring shall be designed with copper conductors, aluminum wires are not acceptable. Heating element branch circuits shall be individually fused to a maximum of 48 Amps per NEC requirements. The power supply for the electric heater shall be fac- tory wired into the units main power block or disconnect switch. B. The heating modules shall have an automatic reset, high temperature limit safety protection. A secondary high limit protection shall also be provided that requires a manual reset. An airflow switch shall be provided with the heating module to prevent the electric heater from operating in the event of no airflow. C. The electric heat elements shall be controlled by the factory installed DDC unit control system. The heater shall have proportional SCR control. The unit controller shall modulate the electric heat- er to maintain the discharge air temperature setpoint. D. Field installed heating modules shall require a field ETL certification. Duct heaters mounted with- in the rooftop unit in the field shall not be acceptable. The manufacturer's rooftop unit ETL certifica- tion shall cover the complete unit including the electric heating modules 2.013 CONDENSING SECTION A. Outdoor coils shall be cast aluminum, micro - channel coils. Plate fins shall be protected and brazed between adjoining flat tubes such that they shall not extend outside the tubes. A sub - cooling coil shall be an integral part of the main outdoor air coil. Each outdoor air coil shall be factory leak tested with high - pressure air under water. B. Outdoor air coils shall be protected from incidental contact to coil fins by a coil guard. Coil guard shall be constructed of cross wire welded steel with PVC coating. C. Fan motors shall be an ECM type motor for proportional control. The unit controller shall propor- tionally control the speed of the condenser fan motors to maintain the head pressure of the refriger- Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 238147-5 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 238147 — DEDICATED OUTDOOR AIR SYSTEM ant circuit from ambient condition of 0- -120 °F. Mechanical cooling shall be provided to 25° F. The motor shall include thermal overload protection and protect the motor in the case of excessive motor temperatures. The motor shall have phase failure protection and prevent the motor from operation in the event of a loss of phase. D. The condenser fan shall be low noise blade design. Fan blade design shall be a dynamic profile for low tip speed. Fan blade shall be of a composite material. E. The unit shall have scroll compressors. One of the compressors shall be an inverter compressor providing proportional control. The unit controller shall control the speed of the compressor to main- tain the discharge air temperature. The inverter compressor shall have a separate oil pump and an oil separator for each compressor that routes oil back to the compressor instead of through the dis- charge line. F. Pressure transducers shall be provided for the suction pressure and head pressure. Temperature sensor shall be provided for the suction temperature and the refrigerant discharge temperature of the compressors. All of the above devices shall be an input to the unit controller and the values be dis- played at the unit controller. G. Refrigerant circuit shall have a bypass valve between the suction and discharge refrigerant lines for low head pressure compressor starting and increased compressor reliability. When there is a call for mechanical cooling the bypass valve shall open to equalizing the suction and discharge pres- sures. When pressures are equalized the bypass valve shall close and the compressor shall be al- lowed to start. H. Each circuit shall be dehydrated and factory charged with R-41 OA Refrigerant and oil. 2.014 ELECTRICAL A. Unit wiring shall comply with NEC requirements and with all applicable UL standards. All electrical components shall be UL recognized where applicable. All wiring and electrical components provided with the unit shall be number and color -coded and labeled according to the electrical diagram pro- vided for easy identification. The unit shall be provided with a factory wired weatherproof control panel. Unit shall have a single point power terminal block for main power connection. A terminal board shall be provided for low voltage control wiring. Branch short circuit protection, 115 -volt control circuit transformer and fuse, system switches, and a high temperature sensor shall also be provided with the unit. Each compressor and condenser fan motor shall be furnished with contactors and in- herent thermal overload protection. Supply fan motors shall have contactors and external overload protection. Knockouts shall be provided in the bottom of the main control panels for field wiring en- trance. B. A single non -fused disconnect switch shall be provided for disconnecting electrical power at the unit. Disconnect switches shall be mounted internally to the control panel and operated by an exter- nally mounted handle. 2.015 CONTROLS A. Provide a complete integrated microprocessor based Direct Digital Control (DDC) system to con- trol all unit functions including temperature control, scheduling, monitoring, unit safety protection, in- cluding compressor minimum run and minimum off times, and diagnostics. This system shall consist of all required temperature sensors, pressure sensors, controller and keypad /display operator inter- face, programming / sequence, etc.. All MCBs and sensors shall be factory mounted, wired and test- ed. B. The stand -alone DDC controllers shall not be dependent on communications with any on -site or remote PC or master control panel for proper unit operation. The microprocessor shall maintain ex- isting set points and operate stand alone if the unit loses either direct connect or network communi- cations. The microprocessor memory shall be protected from voltage fluctuations as well as any ex- tended power failures. All factory and user set schedules and control points shall be maintained in nonvolatile memory. No settings shall be lost, even during extended power shutdowns. C. The DDC control system shall permit starting and stopping of the unit locally or remotely. The control system shall be capable of providing a remote alarm indication. The unit control system shall provide for outside air damper actuation, emergency shutdown, remote heat enable /disable, remote cool enable /disable, heat indication, cool indication, and fan operation. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 238147-6 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 238147 — DEDICATED OUTDOOR AIR SYSTEM D. Interface control module to new building Energy Management System to be furnished and mounted by rooftop unit manufacturer. Through this interface module, all Energy Management func- tions (specified in Energy Management Section) shall be integrated to the ems and performed through the ems. The interface is to be connected to ems for this project. All points shall be inte- grated to ems to provide full monitoring, setpoint adjustment (temp., economizer, etc.), operating schedule adjustment (on /off), etc. Fully functionality shall be possible via ems or via local control. Provide all ems interface modules, parts, etc. as required for a complete installation. Interface shall be Bacnet compatible. E. All digital inputs and outputs shall be protected against damage from transients or incorrect volt- ages. All field wiring shall be terminated at a separate, clearly marked terminal strip. F. The DDC controller shall have a built -in time schedule. The schedule shall be programmable from the unit keypad interface. The schedule shall be maintained in nonvolatile memory to insure that it is not lost during a power failure. There shall be one start /stop per day and a separate holiday sched- ule. The controller shall accept up to sixteen holidays each with up to a 5 -day duration. Each unit shall also have the ability to accept a time schedule via BAS network communications. G. The keypad interface shall allow convenient navigation and access to all control functions. The unit keypad /display character format shall be 4 lines x 20 characters. All control settings shall be password protected against unauthorized changes. For ease of service, the display format shall be English language readout. Coded formats with look -up tables will not be accepted. The user interac- tion with the display shall provide the following information as a minimum: 1. Return air temperature. 2. Discharge air temperature. 3. Outdoor air temperature. 4. Space air temperature. 5. Outdoor enthalpy, high /low. 6. Compressor suction temperature and pressure 7. Compressor head pressure and temperature 8. Expansion valve position 9. Condenser fan speed 10. Inverter compressor speed 11. Dirty filter indication. 12. Airflow verification. 13. Cooling status. 14. Control temperature (Changeover). 15. VAV box output status. 16. Cooling status /capacity. 17. Unit status. 18. All time schedules. 19. Active alarms with time and date. 20. Previous alarms with time and date. 21. Optimal start 22. Supply fan and exhaust fan speed. 23. System operating hours. a. Fan b. Exhaust fan c. Cooling d. Inndividual compressor e. Heating f. Economizer g. Tenant override H. The user interaction with the keypad shall provide the following: 1. Controls mode Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 238147-7 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 238147 — DEDICATED OUTDOOR AIR SYSTEM a. Off manual b. Auto c. Heat /Cool d. Cool only e. Heat only f. Fan only 2. Occupancy mode a. Auto b. Occupied c. Unoccupied d. Tenant override 3. Unit operation changeover control a. Return air temperature b. Space temperature c. Network signal 4. Cooling and heating change -over temperature with deadband 5. Cooling discharge air temperature (DAT) 6. Supply reset options a. Return air temperature b. Outdoor air temperature c. Space temperature d. Airflow (VAV) e. Network signal f. External (0 -10 vdc) g. External (0 -20 mA) 7. Temperature alarm limits a. High supply air temperature b. Low supply air temperature c. High return air temperature 8. Lockout control for compressors. 9. Compressor interstage timers 10. Night setback and setup space temperature. 11. Building static pressure. 12. Economizer changeover a. Enthalpy b. Drybulb temperature 13. Currently time and date 14. Tenant override time 15. Occupied /unoccupied time schedule 16. One event schedule 17. Holiday dates and duration 18. Adjustable set points 19. Service mode a. Timers normal (all time delays normal) b. Timers fast (all time delays 20 sec) I. If the unit is to be programmed with a night setback or setup function, an optional space sensor shall be provided. Space sensors shall be available to support field selectable features. Sensor op- tions shall include: 1. Zone sensor with tenant override switch 2. Zone sensor with tenant override switch plus heating and cooling set point adjustment. (Space Comfort Control systems only) Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 238147-8 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 238147 — DEDICATED OUTDOOR AIR SYSTEM J. To increase the efficiency of the cooling system the DDC controller shall include a discharge air temperature reset program for part load operating conditions. The discharge air temperature shall be controlled between a minimum and a maximum discharge air temperature (DAT) based on one of the following inputs: 1. Airflow 2. Outside air temperature 3. Space temperature 4. Return air temperature 5. External signal of 1 -5 vdc 6. External signal of 0 -20 mA 7. Network signal 2.016 ROOF CURB A. A prefabricated heavy gauge galvanized steel, mounting curb shall be provided for field assembly on the roof decking prior to unit shipment. The roof curb shall be a full perimeter type with complete perimeter support of the air handling section and condensing section. The curb shall be a minimum of 14" high and include a nominal 2" x 4" wood nailing strip. Gasket shall be provided for field mount- ing between the unit base and roof curb. END OF SECTION 239700 Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 238147-9 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 238500 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC Generally all equipment to be furnished with packaged, standalone controls per schedules and information on draw- ings (programmable thermostats / sensors, control dampers, packaged interface equipment / modules, packaged programmers / keyboard managers, etc.). Packaged equipment to generally be for standalone operation (i.e. no in- terface to a building energy management system at this time). However, all controls shall include BACNET interface modules / cards, software, and all other accessories necessary for a complete integration to owner's existing energy management system in the future. Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for setup and programming of all con- trols per manufacturer's recommendations. In addition to packaged controllers, t'stats / sensors, etc. at all equip- ment, BACNET cards / devices / software shall be supplied by the equipment supplier - for integration of all equip- ment to owner's energy management system (see below). Note: Refer to other sections of specs. and drawings for equipment to be furnished by the owner and installed by this contractor. Local Packaged Controls Systems to be accessed via factory packaged keypads, or interface devices — coordinate mounting locations / access with owner. Packaged controls to be by Daikin, or approved equals by Carrier / Toshiba, Mitsibishi, or Trane. All pack- aged controls, devices, etc. to be full programmed by this contractor. Occupancy schedules to be coordinated with the Owner. System to be web -based for owner access, giving the following functions: schedule / setpoint changes, alarms, status of equipment, etc.. System shall include access to all mechanical equipment. Sys- tem shall be graphical — based, allowing user - friendly access to systems via a floor -plan penetration scheme (via point and click of a graphical floorplan on the screen — to access individual units, etc.). Web -based sys- tem shall not require accessing separate websites for each "mechanical system ", however, one central web page, with links to each system is acceptable (everything shall be accessible on the main web page). Units shall be furnished with packaged control equipment. Wire in strict accordance with manufacturers recommenda- tions, providing any and all wiring and conduit required to connect the various components together. System shall meet all N.C. Energy Code and ASHRAE 90 -89 requirements. Packaged heat recovery units and rooftop heat pump units to be furnished with complete, packaged control system. Unit to include all integral safety control devices as required. Supply and exhaust fans shall be "on" at all times when associated areas are in "occupied" mode. Furnish and install a complete system of electric temperature controls as specified herein. Controls shall generally be packaged, programmable controls with the ability to interface with facility ems in the future (i.e. BacNet cards or Bac- Net Thermostats (where applicable) shall be included for full unit integration of all control / programming / monitoring "points" in the future). Replacement parts for all control components shall be kept in stock locally. Provide solid state heating - cooling auto - changeover, 7 -day programmable thermostats for space temperature con- trol for fan coil split systems. Thermostats to have dual setpoints (heating / cooling). Thermostats shall be equipped with switches to provide for continuous fan operation, or Auto fan operation and sys- tem Off - Heat -Cool -Auto, and be compatible with equipment furnished. Fan shall run continuously for all rtu's during "occupied" periods. Program control for designated toilet exhaust fans to be via associated zone programmable thermostat (wired — in at auxiliary contact(s)). Packaged digital controllers to be provided for all miscellaneous exhaust systems, and all other equipment as re- quired. Any control devices shall be located for convenient access and function if not specifically located on drawings, includ- ing all conduit and wiring required to be furnished and installed by this contractor. All thermostat and operable con- trols devices shall be located not higher than 48" AFF. Furnish a complete control wiring diagram including written description and sequence of operation; train in operation and adjustment. All control wiring shall be in accordance with electrical specifications. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 238500-1 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 238500 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC The system shall be complete in all respects including all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary, and shall be installed by personnel regularly engaged in this type of work. The system shall include all appurtenances whether or not specifically implied or expressed herein or on the contract drawings. All electrical signal wiring together with all field control wiring whether a part of the automation system or not shall be provided for all equipment in the mechanical section as a part of the work of this section. Controls shall be installed, connected, checked out, and calibrated by this contractor, complete in all respects Units shall be furnished with packaged control equipment. Wire in strict accordance with manufacturers recommenda- tions, providing any and all wiring and conduit required to connect the various components together. System shall meet all N.C. Energy Code and ASHRAE 90 -89 requirements. Equipment to include all integral safety control devices as required. Supply and exhaust fans shall be "on" at all times when associated areas are in "occupied" mode. Furnish a complete control wiring diagram from the manufacturer including written description and sequence of oper- ation; train in operation and adjustment. All control wiring shall be in accordance with electrical specifications and NEC The system shall be complete in all respects including all labor, materials, equipment, auxiliary relays, power trans- formers, and services necessary, and shall be installed by personnel regularly engaged in this type of work. The sys- tem shall include all appurtenances whether or not specifically implied or expressed herein or on the contract draw- ings. All electrical signal wiring together with all field control wiring whether a part of the automation system or not shall be provided for all equipment in the mechanical section as a part of the work of this section. AHU's and split system units, shall be furnished with packaged control equipment as provided by the manufacturer; and field installed equipment / components, as required. Wire in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommenda- tions, providing any and all wiring and conduit required to connect the various components together. Installation, Submittals and Warranty: Any control devices shall be located for convenient access and function if not specifically located on drawings, includ- ing all conduit and wiring required to be furnished and installed by this contractor. All thermostat and operable con- trols devices shall be located not higher than 48" AFF. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 238500-2 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 Clay County Schools — New Primary School The system shall be complete in all respects including all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary, and shall be installed by personnel regularly engaged in this type of work. The system shall include all appurte- nances whether or not specifically implied or expressed herein or on the contract drawings. All electrical signal wiring together with all field control wiring whether a part of the automation system or not shall be provided for all equipment in the mechanical section as a part of the work of this section. System offered as substitute to that used for design shall have suitable performance and final approval will be reserved pending satisfactory performance on the job. Replacement parts for all control components shall be kept in stock locally. Furnish a complete control wiring diagram including written description and sequence of operation. The system shall be complete in all respects including: proper application, materials, equipment, auxiliary re- lays, power transformers, and services necessary, and shall be installed by personnel regularly engaged in this type of work. The system shall include all appurtenances whether or not specifically implied or expressed here- in or on the contract drawings, and be installed complete in full accordance with manufacturer's recommenda- tions. All controls to be adjustable and exact setpoints determined and adjusted in building conditions in field. The Mechanical Contractor shall include in his bid the services of the Controls system manufacturers factory trained field representative to check -out, start-up, calibrate, and adjust system. As part of the check -out and start-up service, field representative shall prepare a complete zone list of all devices and also a list of all set- tings. This information shall be included in contractor's operation and maintenance manuals. Field representa- tive shall instruct Owner's representative completely in system operation. Field representative shall certify in letter form to the Engineer that all devices have been completely checked, calibrated and adjusted, and that all devices are functioning properly, and installed per manufacturer's installation instructions. Include in letter to Engineer name of Owner's personnel instructed in system operation. The controls installer shall submit a complete wiring, logic, and schematic diagram for approval before installa- tion. A written sequence of operation and flow diagram shall be included with control and wiring diagram show- ing all controls, functions, interlocks, wiring, etc., for approval; submittal shall be on sepia, if drawings are over 11" x 17" in size. Upon completion of control installation, 1 sepia of control diagrams shall be sent to the Engineer, the control manufacturer shall thoroughly check and calibrate the control system and place it in working order as specified and to the Engineer's satisfaction. The contractor shall include in his contract complete instructions and neces- sary control data to the maintenance personnel on the installed control system. The control manufacturer shall then certify in letter form to the Engineer and Architect that all control requirements have been met and that all control components are calibrated and in working operation as specified and names of Owner's personnel in- structed. All control settings shall be appropriately marked inconspicuously beside dampers, knobs, and ad- justments, permanently. All relays to visually indicate energized /de- energized position or contain integral pilots. Post at each panel up -to -date, as installed, reduced control drawings; see previous section of specifications concerning instruction and parts manuals, warranties, service, etc. Service and Warranty: After installation, system start-up shall be performed. All controls and related components will be ad- justed. The equipment being controlled by the system controls shall be in operation and fully inspected. The control system herein specified shall be free from defects in workmanship and material under normal use and service. If within 12 months from date of acceptance by owner /engineer, any of the equipment herein described is proved to be defective in workmanship or material, it will be repaired, adjusted or replaced free of charge by the installing contractor. After completion and check of system, provide a minimum of (1) day training program for Owner's representa- tive which shall stress operation of complete control system. During this period, log all temperatures, and tem- perature drops /rises across equipment hourly, stabilizing set down 51, stabilize set up 101 stabilize, reset to orig- inal setpoint, stabilize and log. Thermostats are to be enclosed in lockable clear lexan guards or wire guards where requested by the owner — coordinate prior to submittals / ordering and installation. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 238500-3 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239000 - METAL DUCTS GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Rectangular ducts and fittings. 2. Round ducts and fittings. 3. Sheet metal materials. 4. Sealants and gaskets. 5. Hangers and supports. 6. Seismic - restraint devices. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound - control devices, duct - mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Construct all ductwork to be free from vibration, chatter, objectionable pulsations and leakage under specified operating conditions. B. Use material, weight, thickness, gauge, construction and installation methods as outlined in the following SMACNA publications, unless noted otherwise: 1. HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible, 2nd Edition, 1995 2. HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual, 1 st Edition, 1985 3. HVAC Systems - Duct Design, 3rd Edition, 1990 4. Rectangular Industrial Duct Construction Standard, 1st Edition, 1980 5. Round Industrial Duct Construction Standards, 2nd Edition, 1999 6. Thermoplastic Duct (PVC) Construction Manual, 2nd Edition, 1995 7. Round Industrial Duct Construction Standards, 2nd Edition, 1999 8. Rectangular Industrial Duct Construction Standards, 1st Edition, 1980 C. Use products which conform to NFPA 90A, possessing a flame spread rating of not over 25 and a smoke developed rating no higher than 50. 3.2 SUBMITTALS A. Include manufacturer's data and /or Contractor data for the following: 1. Schedule of duct systems including material of construction, gauge, pressure class, system class, method of reinforcement, joint construction, fitting construction, and support methods, all with details as appropriate. 2. Duct sealant and gasket material. 3. Duct liner including data on thermal conductivity, air friction correction factor, and limitation on temperature and velocity. A. Welding certificates. 7.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.101.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports. 2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum," for aluminum supports. 3. AWS D9.1 M /D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding. PRODUCTS 9.2 GENERAL A. All sheet metal used for construction of duct shall be 24 gauge or heavier except for round and spiral ductwork and spiral duct take -offs 12" and below may be 26 gauge where allowed in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible, 2nd Edition, 1995. B. Duct sizes indicated on plans are net inside dimensions; where duct liner is specified, dimensions are net, inside of liner. 9.3 DUCTWORK PRESSURE CLASS A. Minimum acceptable duct pressure class, for all ductwork except transfer ductwork, is 2 inch W.G. positive or negative, depending on the application. Transfer ductwork minimum acceptable duct pressure class is 1 inch W.G. positive or negative, depending on the application. Duct system pressure classes not indicated on the drawings to be as follows: Transfer ducts 'h " -1" S.P. 1" pressure class Exhaust ducts 1%2" S.P. 2" pressure class Return ducts 1 " -2" S.P. 2" pressure class Relief ducts 1"-2" S.P. 2" pressure class Constant Volume AHU Supply 1 %2" S.P. 2" pressure class Grease Hood Exhaust 2 %3" S.P. 3" pressure class * *Smoke Exhaust System 3 %4" S.P. 4" pressure class * *Note: All ductwork that serves a dual function (i.e. return / relief and smoke exhaust (for example)) shall be constructed to the highest pressure requirement. All ductwork that is part of the smoke ex- Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239000-1 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 9.4 9.5 A. B. C. D. E. F A. B. D. E. F. G. 9.6 A. B. C. D. E. SECTION 239000 - METAL DUCTS haust system shall be constructed to the listed classification for smoke exhaust ductwork. Care should be taken in this determination to avoid field replacement of duct sections. MATERIALS Galvanized Steel Sheet: Use ASTM A 653 galvanized steel sheet of lock forming quality. Galvanized coating to be 1.25 ounces per square foot, both sides of sheet, G90 in accordance with ASTM A90. Uncoated Black Steel Sheet: First quality, soft steel sheet capable of welding or double seaming without fracture. Aluminum Sheet: Use ANSI /ASTM B209 aluminum sheet, alloy 3003H -14, capable of double seaming without fracture. Stainless Steel Sheet: Use ASTM A167, Type 304 or 316 stainless steel sheet as specified, 316L if welded ductwork, with No. 2B finish for concealed work and No. 3 finish for exposed work. Polyvinylchloride Coated Steel Sheet: Use hot - dipped galvanized steel sheet with prime coat and a polyvinyl chloride film on both sides. Thickness of coating to be a minimum of 4 mils on each side. United Sheet Metal Uni -Coat, made by United McGill Co., may be used at contractor's option. 1. Where any duct surface is scratched, marred, or otherwise damaged, paint with PVC aerosol spray. 2. All couplings shall be slip -joint construction with a minimum 2 inches insertion length. Seal all couplings with sealants as specified. PREFABRICATED GREASE DUCTS: Dual wall construction with stainless steel inner liner, insulation and stainless steel (for exposed locations) or aluminized steel (for concealed locations) shell. Furnish all items which form a part of the assembly, including, tee sections, straight sections, elbows, end caps, cleanouts, expansion joints, fan /hood transitions, supports, flashing, counter flashing, and insulated roof thimble where required. Each section shall bear the factory applied Underwriters Laboratories Label. HIGH PRESSURE DUCTWORK (Pressure class 3 inch and over) Manufacturers: Ajax, Semco, United Sheet Metal, or approved equal. Machine formed round and /or flat oval spiral lock seam duct constructed of galvanized steel. Rectangular high pressure duct using a transverse joint system as manufactured by Ductmate, Nexus, TDC, TDF, or approved equal, may be used at contractor's option. Duct to be flanged, gasketed and sealed. Contractor fabricated ductwork meeting specified construction standards is acceptable with prior approval of Arch itect/Engineer. Submit construction details, a description of materials to be used, type of service, reinforcing methods, and sealing procedures. Use a perforated inner liner on double wall high - pressure duct. Annular space between inner liner and outer duct to be filled with 1 inch glass fiber insulation. Use cemented slip joints with 2 inch minimum overlap, flanged connections, or welded /brazed connections, unless noted otherwise for special applications. Prime coat welded joints. Provide standard 90 degree conical tee takeoffs except for exhaust at velocities over 2000 feet per minute, use 45° lateral connections; straight taps or bullhead tees are not acceptable. Internal bracing will not be accepted on ductwork below 48 inches. Use turning vanes as specified in Section 23 33 12. Provide bellmouth fittings or expanded fittings at each duct connection to air plenums. Provide pressure relief fittings as indicated on the plans and /or details. Transform duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence and 30 degrees convergence. LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK (Maximum 2 inch pressure class) Fabricate and install ductwork in sizes indicated on the drawings and in accordance with SMACNA recommendations, except as modified below. Construct so that all interior surfaces are smooth. Use slip and drive or flanged and bolted construction when fabricating rectangular ductwork. Use spiral lock seam construction when fabricating round spiral ductwork. Sheet metal screws may be used on duct hangers, transverse joints and other SMACNA approved locations if the screw does not extend more than 1/2 inch into the duct. Use elbows and tees with a center line radius to width or diameter ratio of 1.5 wherever space permits. When a shorter radius must be used due to limited space, install single wall sheet metal splitter vanes in accordance with SMACNA publications, Type RE 3. Where space will not allow and the C value of the radius elbow, as given in SMACNA publications, exceeds 0.31, use rectangular elbows with turning vanes as specified in Section 23 33 00. Square throat - radius heel elbows will not be acceptable. Straight taps or bullhead tees are not acceptable. Where rectangular elbows are used, provide turning vanes in accordance with Section 23 33 00. Provide expanded take -offs or 45 degree entry fittings for branch duct connections with branch ductwork airflow velocities greater than 700 fpm. Square edge 90- degree take -off fittings or straight taps will not be accepted. Button punch snaplock construction will not be accepted on aluminum ductwork. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239000-2 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239000 - METAL DUCTS G. Round ducts may be substituted for rectangular ducts if sized in accordance with ASHRAE table of equivalent rectangular and round ducts, with approval of Engineer. No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by written permission of the Architect /Engineer. H. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible. Divergence upstream of equipment shall not exceed 30 degrees; convergence downstream shall not exceed 45 degrees. 9.7 KITCHEN HOOD EXHAUST DUCT CONSTRUCTION A. In concealed locations use minimum 16 gauge black steel or minimum 18 gauge stainless steel with all joints welded liquid tight or prefabricated grease duct, Underwriters Laboratory, Inc listed with aluminized steel shell B. Note: Factory prefabricated duct may still require a 2 -hr fire rated enclosure or fire stop insulation where concealed and serving a Type I hood (grease vapors or smoke). As of the date of the updated version of this specification section, grease duct manufacturers do not have a product that is UL listed for grease vapor and smoke application. C. In exposed areas, use 18 gauge or heavier stainless steel with a number 3 finish and with all joints welded liquid tight or prefabricated Underwriters Laboratory, Inc listed duct with stainless steel shell. Grind and polish all welded joints and seams to a number 3 finish. D. Provide expanded take -offs for branch duct connections or 45 degree entry fittings. Square edge 90 degree take -off fittings or straight taps will not be accepted. E. Use elbows and tees with a center line radius to width or diameter ratio of 1.5 wherever space permits shall be used wherever possible. Shorter radius elbows may be used in areas with limited space with prior approval of the Architect /Engineer. F. No turning vanes may be used in kitchen exhaust duct. G. Supporting steel and hangers shall not be lighter than the duct gauge. 9.8 DISHWASHER EXHAUST DUCT CONSTRUCTION A. Fabricate and install ductwork in sizes indicated on the drawings and in accordance with SMACNA recommendations, except as indicated below. B. Use 18 gauge or heavier stainless steel with all seams and joints welded and ground smooth. In exposed areas, joints and seams to be polished to a #3 finish (minimum). C. Use elbows and tees as specified for the appropriate duct pressure class. D. Provide expanded take -offs for branch duct connections or 45 degree entry fittings. Square edge 90 degree take -off fittings or straight taps will not be accepted. 9.9 FUME EXHAUST DUCT CONSTRUCTION A. Use PVC coated steel or stainless steel duct and fittings. Use stainless steel for all exposed installations below suspended ceilings. B. Use 316 stainless steel for flanged gasketed connections. C. Use 18 gauge or heavier 316L stainless steel sheet for externally welded ductwork. Grind and polish joints and seams to a #3 finish minimum. 9.10 DUCT SEALANT A. Manufacturer: 3M 800, 3M 900, H.B. Fuller /Foster, Hardcast, Hardcast Peal & Seal, Lockformer cold sealant, Mon -Eco Industries, United Sheet Metal, or approved equal. Silicone sealants are not allowed in any type of ductwork installation. B. Install sealants in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, paying special attention to temperature limitations. Allow sealant to fully cure before pressure testing of ductwork, or before startup of air handling systems. 9.11 GASKETS A. 2 inch pressure class and lower: Soft neoprene or butyl gaskets in combination with duct sealant for flanged joints. B. 3 inch pressure class and higher: Butyl gaskets. C. FUME HOOD EXHAUST; Butyl gaskets. EXECUTION 9.12 DUCT INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air - handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved by Designer prior to fabrication. B. Take field measurements to verify duct routing and coordination with all trades prior to fabrication. C. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated. D. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths. E. Install ducts with fewest possible joints. F. Install factory- or shop- fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections. G. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239000-3 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239000 - METAL DUCTS H. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. I. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness. J. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures. K. Where ducts pass through non - fire -rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1 -1/2 inches. L. Where ducts pass through fire -rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers. M. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials. Comply with SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines." All ductwork open ends to be capped during the course of construction. N. Owner and / or owner's representative shall be notified a minimum of 24 hours in advance of any duct pressure testing. Results of duct pressure testing shall be forwarded to the owner / engineer for approval and included in the final test and balance report. All ductwork shall be pressure tested per recommendations in SMACNA. 10.2 ADDITIONAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMERCIAL KITCHEN HOOD EXHAUST DUCT A. Install commercial kitchen hood exhaust ducts without dips and traps that may hold grease, and sloped a minimum of 2 percent to drain grease back to the hood. B. Install fire -rated access panel assemblies at each change in direction and at maximum intervals of as allowed by NC Building Code in horizontal ducts, and at every floor for vertical ducts, or as indicated on Drawings. Locate access panel on top or sides of duct a minimum of 1 -1/2 inches from bottom of duct. C. Do not penetrate fire -rated assemblies except as allowed by applicable building codes and authorities having jurisdiction. 11.2 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING A. Seal duct seams and joints for duct static - pressure and leakage classes specified in "Performance Requirements" Article, according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 1 -2, "Standard Duct Sealing Requirements," unless otherwise indicated. B. Seal Classes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 1 -2, "Standard Duct Sealing Requirements." 12.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Hangers and Supports." A. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder- actuated fasteners, or structural -steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached. 1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. 2. Install powder- actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. 3. Use powder- actuated concrete fasteners for standard - weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches thick. 4. Do not use powder- actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight- aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. 1. Do not use powder- actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints. B. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 4 -1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4 -2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection. C. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports. D. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet. E. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull -out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 14.2 SEISMIC - RESTRAINT - DEVICE INSTALLATION A. Install ducts with hangers and braces designed to support the duct and to restrain against seismic forces required by applicable building codes. Comply with SMACNA's "Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems" and requirements of Delegated Design in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC." 15.1 CONNECTIONS A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239000-4 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239000 - METAL DUCTS 16.2 DUCT SCHEDULE A. Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel except as follows: 1. Fume Hood Exhaust Ducts: a. Type 304, stainless -steel sheet (or other as required / listed on drawings). b. Exposed to View: No. 4 finish. C. Concealed: No. 2D finish. d. Welded seams and flanged joints with watertight EPDM gaskets. 2. Moist Environment Ducts: Aluminum. 3. Commercial Kitchen Hood Exhaust Ducts: Comply with NFPA 96. a. Exposed to View: Type 304, stainless -steel sheet, No. 4 finish. b. Concealed: Type 304, stainless -steel sheet, No. 2D finish. C. Welded seams and joints. 4. Dishwasher Hood Exhaust Ducts: a. Type 304, stainless -steel sheet. b. Exposed to View: No. 4 finish. C. Concealed: No. 2D finish. d. Welded seams and flanged joints with watertight EPDM gaskets. B. Intermediate Reinforcement: 1. Galvanized -Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel. 2. Stainless -Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel. 3. Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized sheet steel coated with zinc chromate. C. Elbow Configuration: 1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2 -2, "Rectangular Elbows." a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius -to- diameter ratio. 2) Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes. b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.0 radius -to- diameter ratio. 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius -to- diameter ratio and two vanes. 3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2 -3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 2 -4, "Vane Support in Elbows." C. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius -to- diameter ratio. 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius -to- diameter ratio and two vanes. 3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2 -3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 2 -4, "Vane Support in Elbows." 2. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3 -3, "Round Duct Elbows." a. Minimum Radius -to- Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3 -1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90- degree change of direction have proportionately fewer segments. 1) Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 0.5 radius -to- diameter ratio and three segments for 90- degree elbow. 2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1.0 radius -to- diameter ratio and four segments for 90- degree elbow. 3) Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1.5 radius -to- diameter ratio and five segments for 90- degree elbow. b. Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated. C. Round Elbows, 14 Inches and Larger in Diameter: Standing seam or Welded. D. Branch Configuration: 1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2 -6, "Branch Connections." a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45- degree entry. b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in. 2. Round: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3 -4, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3 -5, "Conical Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct. a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90- degree tap. b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Conical tap. C. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 45- degree lateral. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239000-5 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239000 - METAL DUCTS E. Exposed Rectangular, Round, or Oval Ductwork: Unless shown otherwise (i.e. fabric ductwork), exposed main supply ductwork routed through spaces not served and spaces served shall be same as listed above for high pressure construction (i.e. United McGill Acousti -k27, double -wall insulated with inner liner, or equivalent, complete with all fittings, collars, etc.. as required for a complete assembly without field cutting or modifications — ready for installation and grille installation. Coordinate finish with owner / Architect (i.e. furnish paint grip finish, primer coat and two coats — color by Arch. as required). See drawings — generally this duct system to be installed for supply for Auditorium, Gyms, Music Rooms, Music / Arts Classrooms, etc. END OF SECTION 239000 Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239000-6 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239116 — NON -METAL DUCTS Note: Fabric duct system to be furnished complete with all accessories as required for a complete in- stallation — to include but not limited to: factory designed air outlet devices (slots / holes), hanging hardware and devices, zipper systems, etc...). Fabric duct system to be furnished by DuctSox, Eu- roAire, or FlexAire. PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of non -metal ductwork is indicated on drawings and by requirements of this section. B. Types of non -metal ductwork required for this project include the following: 1. Textile Air Dispersion Products. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Building Codes and Standards: 1. Product must be Classified by Underwriter's Laboratories in accordance with the 25/50 flame spread / smoke developed requirements of NFPA 90 -A and UL 2518. Also Classified by UL -C (Canada) S102.2, BS 5867 Part 2, 1980; GB8624 -2006. 2. All product sections must be labeled with the logo and classification marking of Underwriter's Laboratories. B. Design & Quality Control 1. Manufacturer must have documented design support information including duct sizing; vent, orifice, and /or nozzle location; vent, orifice, and /or nozzle sizing; length; and suspension. Pa- rameters for design, including maximum air temperature, velocity, pressure and textile per- meability, shall be considered and documented. 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications on materials and manufactured products used for work of this section. B. Building Code Data: Submit UL file number under which product is Classified by Underwriter's Labora- tories for both NFPA 90 -A and UL 2518. C. Provide detailed drawings confirming configuration of Fabric Tensioning System (components, sup- port locations, segment lengths) and Textile Dispersion System (diameter, lengths, airflow, pressure, and textile permeability). D. Provide detailed installation instructions for components to be installed. E. Provide warranty and maintenance documentation. 1.4 WARRANTY: A. Manufacturer must provide a 15 Year Product Warranty for products supplied for the fabric portion of this system as well as a Design and Performance Warranty. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Protect textile air dispersion system and SkeleCore FTS components from damage during shipping, storage, and handling. B. Where possible, store products inside and protect from weather. Where necessary to store outside, store above grade and enclose with a vented waterproof wrapping. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER: Subject to compliance with requirements, choose one of the following: A. DuctSox® Corporation Phone: (866) DUCTSOX or (563) 588 -5300 FAX: (866) 398 -1646 or (563) 588 -5330 www.DuctSox.com 2.2 TEXTILE AIR DISPERSION SYSTEM: A. SkeleCore FTS (Fabric Tensioning System): Air diffusers shall be constructed with internal tensioning frame. 1. System shall cylindrically tension textile along the entire length of textile duct, including all fit - tings(crosses, elbows, reducers and tees). 2. Tensioning system shall include full 360 degree tensioning and intermediate rings with quick connection spacer tubes concealed inside the fabric system. 3. Interior structure to include multiple mechanically adjustable tension devices. To provide proper textile tensioning, structural and textile system shall be configured in segments of no more than 45 feet. 4. Textile components supported solely by metal cylindrical rings. 5. Each cylindrical ring shall require a vertical metal to metal cable safety attachment. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239116-1 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239116 — NON -METAL DUCTS a. Vertical supports are Galvanized steel with available lengths of 5'(standard), 10', 15', & 30'. 6. Available for diameters from 8" — 84 ". 7. Not available for natatorium applications. B. TEXTILE 1. Verona a. Textile Construction: Filament /filament twill polyester, fire retardant in accordance with UL 2518. b. Air Permeability: 2 ( +2/ -1) CFM /ft2 per ASTM D737, Frazier c. Weight: 6.8 oz. /yd2 per ASTM D3776 d. Warranty: 15 years with standard inlet velocity. 2. Textile Color (by Owner/ Architect) a. Standard: blue, white, tan, red, green, silver, black b. Custom C. SOUND ATTENUATOR(OPTIONAL) 1. Test reports: The laboratory method used in conduction these tests in accordance with ASTM Standard E477 -2013. Sound pressure level data obtained using a Bruel and Kjar Pulse Ana- lyzer. 2. Acoustical performance data must be submitted for both dynamic insertion loss and generat- ed noise values for octave band frequencies from 63Hz to 8000Hz. 3. All sound testing to be completed by a NVLAP acoustical testing service accredited third party laboratory. 4. Material meets the flame and smoke development of NFPA 90 -A of < than 25 flame and <50 smoke development when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 5. System shall include full 360 degree tension rings with quick connection spacer tubes con- cealed inside the fabric attenuator. 6. Cylindrical ring on each side shall require a vertical metal to metal cable safety attachment. 7. Available for diameters from 12" — 30 ". 8. Attenuator to have a 5 year warranty. 9. Shop drawings to include thickness, pressure losses, and connection details. 10. Available with and without a bullet. 11. Fabric on outer shell of attenuator to match DuctSox. 12. With a bullet. Based on a 24" diameter by 52" length with bullet, the minimum acoustical data must be met: minimum data for DIL and maximum for GN. a. Performance 1. Direction: Forward Flow ( +) 2. Dynamic Insertion Loss 3. Generated Noise PERFORMANCE Direction: Forward Flow ( +} Dynamic Insertion Loss (dB) Z7 — 62 yLL � r Generated Noise L. (dB; 10-Y2 Watts) FPM Static Pressure Drop 1500 0.14 iwg O a 750 0.03 iwg 7 Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz) — 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 1500 750 Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz) 13. Without a bullet. Based on a a 24" diameter by 52" length without a bullet, the minumum acoustical data must be met: minimum data for DIL and maximum for GN. a. Performance 1. Direction: Forward Flow ( +) 2. Dynamic Insertion Loss Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239116-2 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 PERFORMANCE Direction: Forward Flow ( +) Dynamic Insertion Loss (dB) 3. Generated Noise ix ca m � Generated (Noise L . (dB; 10-12 Watts) r FPM Static Pressure Drop 0 $ 1500 0.03 iA�g p a 750 0.01 iwg 7 v SECTION 239116 — NON -METAL DUCTS Octane Band Center Frequency (Hz) 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 15()o 750 Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz) D. TEXTILE SYSTEM FABRICATION REQUIREMENTS: 1. Textile system to be constructed in modular lengths (zippered) with proper radial securing clips (inlets, endcaps, and mid - sections) and top access zippers for vertical cable safety at- tachment. 2. Integrated air dispersion shall be specified and approved by manufacturer. (select only those that apply) a. Linear Vents (Note: Utilize Linear Vents unless notes otherwise on drawings) 1. Air dispersion accomplished by linear vent and permeable fabric. Linear vents must be sized in 1 CFM per linear foot increments (based on .5" SP), starting a 1 CFM through 90 CFM per linear foot. Linear vent is to consist of an array of open orifices rather than a mesh style vent to reduce mainte- nance requirements of mesh style vents. Linear vents should also be de- signed to minimize dusting on fabric surface. 2. Size of vent openings and location of linear vents to be specified and ap- proved by manufacturer. b. Orifices — 2" & 3" SG's (Sewn -in Grommets) 1. Air dispersion and extended throws are accomplished by reinforced orifices and permeable fabric. Reinforced orifices are to be installed to keep the in- tegrity of opening and withstand laundry processes. 2. Diameter, quantity, and location of reinforced orifices to be specified and approved by manufacturer. c. Fixed Nozzles 1. Air dispersion accomplished by using conical aerodynamic nozzles and permeable fabric. Diameter of nozzles height to be minimum' /2 ". Due to exact requirements of throw and maximum level of noise alternative flow models are not acceptable. 2. Color of nozzles must match color of fabric. Unless otherwise specifically mentioned on drawings or otherwise in this specification, suppliers standard table is used for selection of color. 3. Location and number of nozzles to be specified and approved by manufacturer. d. Adjustable Nozzles 1. Air dispersion accomplished by adjustable ball nozzles and permeable fab- ric. Adjustable ball nozzles to have multiaxial rotation to redirect airflow to desired area. Adjustable ball nozzles are able to completely close off air- flow without adding caps or plugs. Adjustable ball nozzles should lock into place once set, preventing constant adjustment. Adjustable ball nozzle should have inset design to be a condensation resistant product. 2. Colors of adjustable nozzles available are white and black. With white ma- terial receiving white adjustable nozzles and all other material colors receiv- ing black adjustable nozzles unless otherwise specifically mentioned on drawings or otherwise in the specification. 3. Quantity and location of adjustable ball nozzles to be specified and ap- proved by manufacturer. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239116-3 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239116 — NON -METAL DUCTS Inlet connection to metal duct via fabric draw band with anchor patches as supplied by manu- facturer. Anchor patches to be secured to metal duct via. zip screw fastener — supplied by contractor. Inlet connection includes zipper for easy removal / maintenance. Lengths to include required intermediate zippers as specified by manufacturer. System to include Adjustable Flow Devices to balance turbulence, airflow and distribution as needed. Flow restriction device shall include ability to adjust the airflow resistance from 0.06 — 0.60 in w.g. static pressure. End cap includes zipper for easy maintenance. Each section of the textile shall include identification labels documenting order number, sec- tion diameter, section length, piece number, code certifications and other pertinent infor- mation. E. DESIGN PARAMETERS: 1. Textile air diffusers shall be designed from 0.25' water gage minimum to 3.1" maximum, with 0.5" as the standard. 2. Textile air diffusers shall be limited to design temperatures between 0 degrees F and 180 de- grees F ( -17.8 degrees C and 82 degrees C). 3. System overall design; diameter, length, airflow, operating static pressure and dispersion shall be designed or approved by the manufacturer. 4. Do not use textile diffusers in concealed locations. 5. Use textile air dispersion systems only for positive pressure air distribution components of the mechanical ventilation system. PART 3 — INSTALLATION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF TEXTILE AIR DISPERSION SYSTEM: A. Install chosen suspension system in accordance with the requirements of the manufacturer. Instruc- tions for installation shall be provided by the manufacturer with product. 3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION: A. Clean air handling unit and ductwork prior to the DuctSox system unit -by -unit as it is installed. Clean external surfaces of foreign substance which may cause corrosive deterioration of facing. B. Temporary Closure: At ends of ducts which are not connected to equipment or distribution devices at time of ductwork installation, cover with polyethylene film or other covering which will keep the system clean until installation is completed. C. If DuctSox systems become soiled during installation, they should be removed and cleaned following the manufacturers standard terms of laundry. END OF SECTION 239116 Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239116-4 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239150 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Backdraft and pressure relief dampers. 2. Manual volume dampers. 3. Control dampers. 4. Fire dampers. 5. Smoke dampers. 6. Flange connectors. 7. Turning vanes. 8. Duct - mounted access doors. 9. Flexible connectors. 10. Flexible ducts. 11. Duct accessory hardware. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work. 1. Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction. Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following: a. Special fittings. b. Manual volume damper installations. C. Control damper installations. d. Fire - damper and smoke - damper installations, including sleeves; and duct - mounted access doors. e. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. C. Operation and maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." B. Comply with AMCA 500 -D testing for damper rating. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: Ruskin, Vent Products, Air Balance, or approved equal. B. Dampers must be constructed in accordance with SMACNA Fig. 2 -12, Fig. 2 -13, and notes relating to these figures, except as modified below. C. Reinforce all blades to prevent vibration, flutter, or other noise. Construct dampers in multiple sections with mullions where width is over 48 inches. Use rivets or tack welds to secure individual components; sheet metal screws will not be accepted. Provide operators with locking devices and damper position indicators for each damper; use an elevated platform on insulated ducts. Provide end bearings or bushings for all volume damper rods penetrating ductwork constructed to a 3" w.c. pressure class or above. 2.2 TURNING VANES A. Manufacturers: Aero Dyne, Anemostat, Barber - Colman, Hart & Cooley, or approved equal. B. Construct turning vanes and runners for square elbows in accordance with SMACNA Fig. 2 -3 and Fig. 2 -4 except use only airfoil type vanes. Construct turning vanes for short radius elbows and elbows where one dimension changes in the turn in accordance with SMACNA Fig. 2 -5 and Fig. 2 -6. 2.3 FIRE DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: Air Balance, Advanced Air, American Warming and Ventilating, Greenheck, Phillips - Aire, Prefco, Ruskin, Safe -Air or approved equal. B. STATIC FIRE DAMPERS 1. Static fire damper assemblies must be UL 555 (6t" edition) listed and labeled for static applications (where air systems do not operate during a fire) and meet requirements of NFPA 90A. Damper must be type B curtain type with blades out of the air stream; dampers with blades in the air stream will not be accepted. Damper fire rating to be compatible with the rating of the building assembly in which the damper is used. C. DYNAMIC FIRE DAMPERS 1. Dynamic fire damper assemblies must be UL 555 (6th edition) listed and labeled for dynamic applications (where air systems operate during a fire) and meet requirements of NFPA 90A. Dampers must be type B curtain type with curtain 100% out of air stream. Dampers larger than 30" by 30" or with velocity rating requirements of 3000 fpm or higher, may be multiblade type with blades located in the airstream. Velocity ratings and static pressure ratings as Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239150-1 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239150 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES indicated on the drawings. Damper fire rating to be compatible with the rating of the building assembly in which the damper is used. 2.4 ACCESS DOORS A. Access door to be designed and constructed for the pressure class of the duct in which the door is to be installed. Doors in exposed areas shall be hinged type with cam sash lock. Hinges shall be steel full length continuous piano type. Doors in concealed spaces may be secured in place with cam sash latches. For both hinged and non hinged doors provide sufficient number of camp sash latches to provide air tight seal when door is closed. Do not use hinged doors in concealed spaces if this will restrict access. Use minimum 1" deep 24 gauge galvanized steel double wall access doors with minimum 24 gauge galvanized steel frames. For non - galvanized ductwork, use minimum 1" deep double wall access door with frame that shall use materials of construction identical to adjacent ductwork. Provide double neoprene gasket that shall provide seals from the frame to the door and frame to the duct. When access doors are installed in insulated ductwork or equipment provide insulated doors with insulation equivalent to what is provided for adjacent ductwork or equipment. Access doors constructed with sheet metal screw fasteners will not be accepted. B. Use insulated, 1 -1/2 hour UL 555 listed and labeled access doors in kitchen exhaust ducts. 2.5 FLEXIBLE DUCT A. Manufacturers: Anco Products, Clevaflex, Thermaflex, Flexmaster or approved equal. B. Factory fabricated , UL 181 listed as a class 1 duct, and having a flame spread of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or under in accordance with NFPA 90A. C. Suitable for pressures and temperatures involved but not less than a 180 °F service temperature and ±2 inch pressure class, depending on the application. D. Duct to be composed of polyester film, aluminum laminate or woven and coated fiberglass fabric bonded permanently to corrosion resistant coated steel wire helix. Two -ply, laminated, and corrugated aluminum construction may also be used. E. Where duct is specified to be insulated, provide a minimum 1 inch fiberglass insulation blanket with maximum thermal conductance of 0.23 K (75 degrees F.) and vapor barrier jacket of polyethylene or metalized reinforced film laminate. Maximum perm rating of vapor barrier jacket to be 0.1 perm. 2.6 DUCT FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS A. Material to be fire retardant, be UL 214 listed, and meet the requirements of NFPA 90A. B. Connections to be a minimum of 3 inches wide, crimped into metal edging strip, and air tight. Connections to have adequate flexibility and width to allow for thermal expansion /contraction, vibration of connected equipment, and other movement. C. Use coated glass fiber fabric for all applications. Material for inside applications other than corrosive environments, fume exhaust, or kitchen exhaust to be double coated with neoprene, air and water tight, suitable for temperatures between -10 °F and 200 °F, and have a nominal weight of 30 ounces per square yard. Material used for outdoor applications other than corrosive environments, fume exhaust, or kitchen exhaust to be double coated with HypalonZ,air and water tight, suitable for temperatures between -10 °F and 250 °F, and have a nominal wight of 26 ounces per square yard. D. For corrosive environments or fume exhaust applications indoors or outdoors, use a material coated with Teflon that is air and water tight, suitable for temperatures between -20 °F and 500 °F, and has a nominal weight of 14 ounces per square yard. 2.7 SOUND ATTENUATORS A. Manufacturers: Industrial Acoustics Company, Environmental Elements Corporation, Semco, Dynasonics, United McGill, Rink, or approved equal. B. Construct of a 22 gauge galvanized steel outer casing, and 26 gauge galvanized, perforated steel inner liner. Seams and joints of outer casing to be air tight. C. Fill annular space between outer casing and inner liner with acoustic fill that is inert, inorganic, and of a density sufficient to obtain the specified acoustic performance. Material must meet requirements of NFPA 90A with a flame spread index of 25 or less and smoke developed rating of 50 or less. D. Acoustical and aerodynamic performance is indicated on schedules on the drawings. 2.8 HOODS FOR INTAKE AND EXHAUST A. Manufacturers: Acme, Ammerman, Carnes, Cook, Greenheck, Louvers and Dampers, Penn, or approved equal. B. Use low silhouette type hoods or louvered penthouse type hoods with drainable blade louvers, as shown on drawings. C. Construct hoods of aluminum (mill finish) or galvanized steel with a baked enamel finish; color to be selected by the Architect during the submittal stage. D. For hoods and louvered penthouses maintain minimum 30 inches from bottom of air intake to finished roof. E. Provide accessories as shown on drawings. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239150-2 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239150 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 2.9 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct - insulation thickness. B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous -glass ducts. B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized -steel accessories in galvanized -steel and fibrous -glass ducts, stainless -steel accessories in stainless -steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts. C. Install backdraft dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust fan unless otherwise indicated. D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel. 1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts. 2. Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts. E. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing. F. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated. G. Install fire and smoke dampers according to UL listing. H. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and equipment at the following locations: 1. On both sides of duct coils. 2. Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, and equipment. 3. Adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke dampers, to reset or reinstall fusible links. Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible links shall be pressure relief access doors; and shall be outward operation for access doors installed upstream from dampers and inward operation for access doors installed downstream from dampers. 4. At each change in direction and at maximum 50 -foot spacing. 5. Upstream of turning vanes. 6. Elsewhere as indicated. I. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure. J. Access Door Sizes: 1. One -Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches. 2. Two -Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches. 3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches. 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches. 5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches. 6. Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches. K. Label access doors according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door. L. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment. M. For fans developing static pressures of 5 -inch wg and more, cover flexible connectors with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps. N. Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly or with maximum 12 -inch lengths of flexible duct. Do not use flexible ducts to change directions. O. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low- pressure ducts directly or with maximum 60 -inch lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place. P. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with adhesive plus sheet metal screws. Q. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes. R. Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on both sides of equipment. Attach thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4 -inch movement during start and stop of fans. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: 1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement. 2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be performed. 3. Operate fire and smoke dampers to verify full range of movement and verify that proper heat - response device is installed. 4. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation. END OF SECTION 239150 Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239150-3 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239300 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Centrifugal roof ventilators. 2. Centrifugal wall ventilators. 3. Ceiling- mounting ventilators. 4. In -line centrifugal fans. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of product indicated and include the following: B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. C. Field quality- control test reports. D. Operation and maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards. C. UL Standard: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS A. Products: Basis of Design and Comparable Products as shown on Drawings. B. Description: Direct- or belt - driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, curb base, and accessories. C. Housing: Removable, spun - aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; square, one - piece, aluminum base with venturi inlet cone. 1. Hinged Subbase: Galvanized -steel hinged arrangement permitting service and maintenance. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239300-1 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239300 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 2. Camlock fasteners at subbase. D. Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward- inclined blades. E. Belt- Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to housing, with the following features: 1. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub. 2. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self - aligning ball bearings. 3. Pulleys: Cast -iron, adjustable -pitch motor pulley. 4. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream. F. Accessories: 1. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal- overload protection mounted inside fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit. 2. Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2 -inch mesh, aluminum or brass wire. 3. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel- blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb base; factory set to close when fan stops. 4. Motorized Dampers: Parallel -blade dampers mounted in curb base with electric actuator; wired to close when fan stops. G. Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 1 -1/2 -inch- thick, rigid, fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 1 -1/2 -inch wood nailer. Size as required to suit roof opening and fan base. 1. Minimum Height: 12 inches. 2. Sound Curb: Curb with sound - absorbing insulation matrix. 3. Pitch Mounting: Manufacture curb for roof slope. 4. Metal Liner: Galvanized steel. 5. Mounting Pedestal: Galvanized steel with removable access panel. 6. Vented Curb: Unlined with louvered vents in vertical sides. 2.2 CENTRIFUGAL WALL VENTILATORS A. Products: Basis of Design and Comparable Products as shown on Drawings. B. Description: Direct- or belt - driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, and accessories. C. Housing: Heavy -gage, removable, spun - aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; venturi inlet cone. D. Fan Wheel: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward- inclined blades. E. Belt- Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to housing, with the following features: 1. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub. 2. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self - aligning ball bearings. 3. Pulleys: Cast -iron, adjustable -pitch motor pulley. 4. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream. F. Accessories: 1. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal- overload protection mounted inside fan housing, factory wired through internal aluminum conduit. 2. Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2-inch mesh, aluminum or brass wire. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239300-2 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239300 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 3. Wall Grille: Ring type for flush mounting. 4. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel- blade, backdraft dampers mounted in wall sleeve; factory set to close when fan stops. 5. Motorized Dampers: Parallel -blade dampers mounted in curb base with electric actuator; wired to close when fan stops. 2.3 CEILING - MOUNTING VENTILATORS A. Products: Basis of Design and Comparable Products as shown on Drawings. B. Description: Centrifugal fans designed for installing in ceiling or wall or for concealed in- line applications. C. Housing: Steel, lined with acoustical insulation. D. Fan Wheel: Centrifugal wheels directly mounted on motor shaft. Fan shrouds, motor, and fan wheel shall be removable for service. E. Grille: Plastic, louvered grille with flange on intake and thumbscrew attachment to fan housing. F. Electrical Requirements: Junction box for electrical connection on housing and receptacle for motor plug -in. G. Accessories: 1. Manual Starter Switch: Single -pole rocker switch assembly with cover and pilot light. 2. Time -Delay Switch: Assembly with single -pole rocker switch, timer, and cover plate. 3. Motion Sensor: Motion detector with adjustable shutoff timer. 4. Ceiling Radiation Damper: Fire -rated assembly with ceramic blanket, stainless -steel springs, and fusible link. 5. Filter: Washable aluminum to fit between fan and grille. 6. Isolation: Rubber -in -shear vibration isolators. 7. Manufacturer's standard roof jack or wall cap, and transition fittings. 2.4 IN -LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS A. Product: Basis of Design and Comparable Products as shown on Drawings. B. Description: In -line, direct or belt - driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, outlet guide vanes, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, mounting brackets, and accessories. C. Housing: Split, spun aluminum with aluminum straightening vanes, inlet and outlet flanges, and support bracket adaptable to floor, side wall, or ceiling mounting. D. Direct- Driven Units: Motor mounted in airstream, factory wired to disconnect switch located on outside of fan housing; with wheel, inlet cone, and motor on swing -out service door. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239300-3 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239300 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS E. Belt- Driven Units: Motor mounted on adjustable base, with adjustable sheaves, enclosure around belts within fan housing, and lubricating tubes from fan bearings extended to outside of fan housing. F. Fan Wheels: Aluminum, airfoil blades welded to aluminum hub. G. Accessories: 1. Volume - Control Damper: Manually operated with quadrant lock, located in fan outlet. 2. Companion Flanges: For inlet and outlet duct connections. 3. Fan Guards: 1/2- by 1 -inch mesh of galvanized steel in removable frame. Provide guard for inlet or outlet for units not connected to ductwork. 4. Motor and Drive Cover (Belt Guard): Epoxy- coated steel. 2.5 MOTORS A. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." B. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install power ventilators level and plumb. B. Vibration- and seismic - control devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." 1. Secure vibration and seismic controls to concrete bases using anchor bolts cast in concrete base. C. Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure; use steel wire or metal straps. D. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods. Vibration - control devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." E. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance. F. Label units according to requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment." G. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." H. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance. I. Ground equipment and connect wiring according to Division 16 Sections. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239300-4 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239300 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal - overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches. 3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. 4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards. 5. Adjust belt tension. 6. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. 7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. 8. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in connected ductwork systems are in fully open position. 9. Disable automatic temperature - control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage. 10. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature- control operators. 11. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. B. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. END OF SECTION 239300 Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239300-5 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239400 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Round ceiling diffusers. 2. Rectangular and square ceiling diffusers. 3. Louver face diffusers. 4. Linear bar diffusers. 5. Linear slot diffusers. 6. Adjustable bar registers and grilles. 7. Fixed face registers and grilles. 8. Linear bar grilles. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 23 Section "Louvers and Vents" for fixed and whether or not they are connected to ducts. 2. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles. 1.2 SUBMITTALS adjustable louvers and wall vents, smoke dampers and volume - control A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following: 1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data including throw and drop, static - pressure drop, and noise ratings. 2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, if requested. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL: Basis of Design and Comparable Products as shown on Drawings. 2.2 CEILING DIFFUSERS A. Round Ceiling Diffuser: 1. Devices shall be specifically designed for variable- air - volume flows. 2. Material: Steel or Aluminum. 3. Finish: Baked enamel, white. 4. Face Style: Three cone. 5. Mounting: Duct connection. 6. Pattern: Fixed. 7. Dampers: Radial opposed blade. B. Rectangular and Square Ceiling Diffusers: 1. Devices shall be specifically designed for variable- air - volume flows. 2. Material: Steel or Aluminum. 3. Finish: Baked enamel, white. 4. Face Size: As shown on Drawings. 5. Face Style: Three cone. 6. Mounting: As required by ceiling type. Refer to Reflected Ceiling Plans. 7. Pattern: Fixed. 8. Dampers: Radial opposed blade. a. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239400-1 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239400 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES C. Louver Face Diffuser: 1. Devices shall be specifically designed for variable- air - volume flows. 2. Material: Steel or Aluminum. 3. Finish: Baked enamel, white. 4. Face Size: As shown on Drawings. 5. Mounting: As required by ceiling type. Refer to Reflected Ceiling Plans. 6. Pattern: Four -way core style. 7. Dampers: Radial opposed blade. 8. Accessories: a. Square to round neck adaptor. 2.3 CEILING LINEAR SLOT OUTLETS A. Linear Bar Diffuser: 1. Devices shall be specifically designed for variable- air - volume flows. 2. Material: Steel or Aluminum. 3. Finish: Baked enamel, white. 4. Core Design - See Grille / Diffuser Schedule. 5. Two -Way Deflection Vanes: Extruded construction fixed louvers with removable core. 6. Frame: See Grille / Diffuser Schedule 7. Mounting Frame: See Grille / Diffuser Schedule. 8. Mounting: See Grille / Diffuser Schedule. 9. Damper Type: Adjustable opposed -blade assembly. 10. Accessories: See Grille / Diffuser Schedule. B. Linear Slot Diffuser: 1. Devices shall be specifically designed for variable- air - volume flows. 2. Material -Shell: Steel or Aluminum, insulated. 3. Material - Pattern Controller and Tees: Aluminum. 4. Finish - Face and Shell: Baked enamel, black. 5. Finish - Pattern Controller: Baked enamel, black. 6. Finish - Tees: Baked enamel, white. 7. Slot Width: See Grille / Diffuser Schedule. 8. Number of Slots: See Grille / Diffuser Schedule. 9. Length: See Grille / Diffuser Schedule. 10. Accessories: See Grille / Diffuser Schedule. 2.4 REGISTERS AND GRILLES A. Adjustable Bar Register 1. Material: Steel or Aluminum. 2. Finish: Baked enamel, white. 3. Face Blade Arrangement: See Grille / Diffuser Schedule. 4. Core Construction: Integral. 5. Rear -Blade Arrangement: See Grille / Diffuser Schedule 6. Frame: See Grille / Diffuser Schedule. 7. Mounting Frame: See Grille / Diffuser Schedule. 8. Mounting: See Grille / Diffuser Schedule. 9. Damper Type: Adjustable opposed blade. 10. Accessories: a. See Grille / Diffuser Schedule. B. Adjustable Bar Grille: 1. Material: Steel or Aluminum. 2. Finish: Baked enamel, white. 3. Face Blade Arrangement: See Grille / Diffuser Schedule. 4. Core Construction: Integral. 5. Rear -Blade Arrangement: See Grille / Diffuser Schedule 6. Frame: See Grille / Diffuser Schedule. 7. Mounting Frame: See Grille / Diffuser Schedule. 8. Mounting: See Grille / Diffuser Schedule. 9. Damper Type: Adjustable opposed blade. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239400-2 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239400 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 10. Accessories: a. See Grille / Diffuser Schedule. C. Fixed Face Register: 1. Material: Steel or Aluminum. 2. Finish: Baked enamel, white. 3. Face Blade Arrangement: See Grille / Diffuser Schedule. 4. Core Construction: Integral. 5. Rear -Blade Arrangement: See Grille / Diffuser Schedule 6. Frame: See Grille / Diffuser Schedule. 7. Mounting Frame: See Grille / Diffuser Schedule. 8. Mounting: See Grille / Diffuser Schedule. 9. Damper Type: Adjustable opposed blade. 10. Accessories: a. See Grille / Diffuser Schedule. D. Fixed Face Grille: 1. Material: Steel or Aluminum. 2. Finish: Baked enamel, white. 3. Face Blade Arrangement: See Grille / Diffuser Schedule. 4. Core Construction: Integral. 5. Rear -Blade Arrangement: See Grille / Diffuser Schedule 6. Frame: See Grille / Diffuser Schedule. 7. Mounting Frame: See Grille / Diffuser Schedule. 8. Mounting: See Grille / Diffuser Schedule. 9. Damper Type: Adjustable opposed blade. 10. Accessories: a. See Grille / Diffuser Schedule. E. Linear Bar Grille: 1. Material: Steel or Aluminum. 2. Finish: Baked enamel, white. 3. Face Blade Arrangement: See Grille / Diffuser Schedule. 4. Core Construction: Integral. 5. Rear -Blade Arrangement: See Grille / Diffuser Schedule 6. Frame: See Grille / Diffuser Schedule. 7. Mounting Frame: See Grille / Diffuser Schedule. 8. Mounting: See Grille / Diffuser Schedule. 9. Damper Type: Adjustable opposed blade. 10. Accessories: a. See Grille / Diffuser Schedule. 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb. B. Ceiling- Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay -in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Designer for a determination of final location. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239400-3 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239400 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing. END OF SECTION 239400 Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239400-4 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 — MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM Note: All equipment described below, along with all equipment accessories, controls, base refrigerant charge, equipment I parts warranty, etc. shall be owner - furnished (also refer to drawings). This contractor shall install owner - furnished systems complete. Contractor to furnish all material, devices, items, piping, wiring, additional refrigerant charge, factory startup and factory / owner training, warranty support, etc. as required for a complete functional system. NOTE: SYSTEM TO BE INSTALLED BY FACTORY CERTIFIED I TRAINED CONTRACTORS (ONLY). SYSTEM TO BE INCLUDED WITH COMPLETE FACTORY START -UP AND 6 YEAR STANDARD WARRANTY. Note: Prior to installation Contractor shall be factory certified and trained by Daikin, Carrier/ Toshiba, Mitsubishi (or approved equal) to install this system. Contractor shall furnish proof of certification with submittals. Also, submittals shall include factory piping, wiring, and control schematic diagrams indicating that layout of all power wiring, control wiring, refrigerant piping, control addressing, control devices, etc. have been furnished and/or approved by Daikin, Carrier /Toshiba, Mitsibishi or approved equal (otherwise, submittals will be rejected) — coordinate re- quirements with owner (since equipment is owner - furnished) and factory or factory representative as required. Note: SYSTEMS TO BE BY Daikin, Carrier/ Toshiba, MITSUBISHI OR APPROVED EQUAL. Daikin is the Basis of Design. FOR PROPOSED EQUIVALENT PRODUCTS or products that are not the basis of design, Equipment Supplier /Rep./ Factory SHALL FURNISH COMPLETE PACKAGE INCLUDING: EQUIPMENT SELECTIONS, EQUIPMENT CUT SHEETS, LAYOUT DRAWINGS (SHOWING ROUTING EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS, REFRIGERANT PIPING ROUTING, ETC.), CONTROL DIAGRAMS, ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS, REFRIGERANT PIPING SCHEMATICS/ SIZES, ETC., AS WELL AS, A COMPREHENSIVE LIST /DESCRIPTION OFALL DEVIATIONS BETWEEN THE PROPOSED EQUIVALENT PRODUCTS/ SYSTEM AND THE SYSTEM SPECIFIED (IN TERMS OF UNIT TYPES /QUANTITY, UTILITYREQUIREMENTS, PIPING REQUIREMENTS, CONTROLS, ETC.). PACKAGE SHALL BE REVIEWED BY THE ENGINEER TO DETERMINE IF PROPOSED PRODUCTS ARE "APPROVED EQUAL" TO BID. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS FOR MORE DETAILS. "APPROVED EQUAL" to bid does not relieve the contractor's from responsibility for meeting the specifications, coordinating system requirements and providing utilities to systems, etc.. See later sections for more requirements and details (below) A. VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME (VRV III) AIR CONDITIONING SPECIFICATION - Heat PumD Size Range: 6 to 34 Tons Nominal Daikin AC Model Number: RXYQ72TYDN RXYQ96TYDN RXYQ120TYDN RXYQ144TYDN RXYQ168TYDN RXYQ192TYDN (1x RXYQ120TYDN + 1x RXYQ72TYDN) RXYQ216TYDN (1x RXYQ120TYDN + 1x RXYQ96TYDN) RXYQ240TYDN (2x RXYQ120TYDN) RXYQ264TYDN (1x RXYQ144TYDN + 1x RXYQ120TYDN) Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-1 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM RXYQ288TYDN (2x RXYQ144TYDN) RXYQ312TYDN (1x RXYQ168TYDN + 1x RXYQ144TYDN) RXYQ336TYDN (2x RXYQ168TYDN) RXYQ360TYDN (3x RXYQ120TYDN) RXYQ384TYDN (1x RXYQ168TYDN + 1x RXYQ120TYDN + 1x RXYQ96TYDN) RXYQ408TYDN (1x RXYQ168TYDN + 1x RXYQ144TYDN + 1x RXYQ96TYDN) Part 1 - GENERAL VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME (VRV IV) AIR CONDITIONING SPECIFICATION - Heat Pump 1.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The variable capacity, heat pump air conditioning system shall be a Daikin Variable Re- frigerant Volume Series (heat or cool model) system as specified. The system shall consist of multiple evaporators using PID control, REFNET'M joints and headers, a two - pipe refrigeration distribution system and Daikin VRV" condenser unit. The condenser shall be a direct expansion (DX), air - cooled heat pump, multi -zone air- conditioning sys- tem with variable speed inverter driven compressors using R-41 OA refrigerant. The condensing unit may connect an indoor evaporator capacity up to 200% of the condens- ing unit capacity. All zones are each capable of operating separately with individual temperature control. The Daikin condensing unit shall be interconnected to indoor unit models FXFQ, FXHQ, FXMQ, FXLQ, FXNQ, FXTQ, FXDQ, FXZQ, FXAQ and FXMQ -MF, and shall range in capacity from 7,500 Btu /h to 96,000 Btu /h in accordance with Daikin's engineering data book detailing each available indoor unit. The indoor units shall be connected to the condensing unit utilizing Daikin's REFNET" specified piping joints and headers to en- sure correct refrigerant flow and balancing. T style joints are not acceptable for a varia- ble refrigerant system. 2 3 Operation of the system shall permit either cooling or heating of all of the indoor units simultaneously. Each indoor unit or group of indoor units shall be able to provide set temperature independently via a local remote controller, an Intelligent Manager Control- ler or a BMS interface. 4 The RXYQ condensing unit model numbers and the associated number of connectable indoor units per RXYQ condensing unit is indicated in the following table. Each indoor unit or group of indoor units shall be independently controlled. Model Number Nominal Capaci- Maximum Num- ty (Tons) ber of Indoor Units RXYQ72TYDN 6 12 RXYQ96TYDN 8 16 RXYQ120TYDN 10 20 RXYQ144TYDN 12 25 Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-2 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM RXYQ168TYDN 14 29 RXYQ192TYDN 16 33 RXYQ216TYDN 18 37 RXYQ240TYDN 20 41 RXYQ264TYDN 22 45 RXYQ288TYDN 24 49 RXYQ312TYDN 26 54 RXYQ336TYDN 28 58 RXYQ360TYDN 30 62 RXYQ384TYDN 32 64 RXYQ408TYDN 34 64 4.01 VRV IV FEATURES AND BENEFITS A. Voltage Platform - Heat pump condensing units shall be available with a 460V/3/60 power supply. B. Advanced Zoning - A single system shall provide for up to 64 zones. C. Independent Control - Each indoor unit shall use a dedicated electronic expansion valve with 2000 positions for independent control. D. VFD Inverter Control and Variable Refrigerant Temperature - Each condensing unit shall use high efficiency, variable speed all "inverter" compressor(s) coupled with in- verter fan motors to optimize part load performance. The system capacity and refrig- erant temperatures shall be modulated automatically to set suction and condensing pressures while varying the refrigerant volume for the needs of the cooling or heating loads. The control will be automatic and customizable depending on load and weath- er conditions E. Indoor units shall use PID to control superheat to deliver a comfortable room tem- perature condition and optimize efficiency. F. Configurator software - Each system shall be available with configurator software package to allow for remote configuration of operational settings and also for as- sessment of operational data and error codes. G. Autocharging - Each system shall have a refrigerant auto - charging function H. Flexible Design - 1 . Systems shall be capable of up to 540ft (640ft equivalent) of linear piping be- tween the condensing unit and furthest located indoor unit. 2. Systems shall be capable of up to 3,280ft total `one -way" piping in the piping network. 3. Systems shall have a vertical (height) separation of up to 295ft between the condensing unit and the indoor units 4. Systems shall be capable of up to 295ft from the first REFNETT" / branch point. 5. The condensing unit shall have the ability to connect an indoor unit evapora- tor capacity of up to 200% of the condensing unit capacity. 6. Systems shall be capable of 1 00f vertical separation between indoor units. 7. Condensing units shall be supported with a fan motor ESP up to 0.32" WG as standard to allow connection of discharge ductwork and to prevent discharge air short circuiting. I. Oil Return - Each system shall be furnished with a centrifugal oil separator and ac- tive oil recovery cycle J. Simple Wiring - Systems shall use 16/18 AWG, 2 wire, multi- stranded, non - shielded and non - polarized daisy chain control wiring. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-3 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM K. Space Saving - Each system shall have a condensing unit module footprint as small as 36- 11/16" x 30- 3/16" and no larger than 48 -7/8 x 30 -3/16 L. Advanced Diagnostics - Systems shall include a self- diagnostic, auto -check function to detect a malfunction and display the type and location. M. Each condensing unit shall incorporate contacts for electrical demand shedding with optional 3 stage demand control with 12 customizable demand settings N. Advanced Controls - Each system shall have at least one remote controller capable of controlling up to 16 indoor units. O. Each system shall be capable of integrating with open protocol BACnet and Lon - Works building management systems. P. Low Sound Levels - Each system shall use indoor and condensing units with quiet operation as low as 27 dB(A). 4.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The units shall be tested by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL), in accordance with ANSI /UL 1995 - Heating and Cooling Equipment and bear the Listed Mark. B. All wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electric Code (NEC). C. The system will be produced in an ISO 9001 and ISO 14001 facility, which are standards set by the International Standard Organization (ISO). The system shall be factory tested for safety and function. D. Mechanical equipment for wind -born debris regions shall be designed in accordance with ASCE 7 -2010 and installed to resist the wind pressures on the equipment and the supports. E. The condensing unit will be factory charged with R41 OA. 4.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Unit shall be stored and handled according to the manufacturer's recommenda- tions. Part 2 - WARRANTY 2.01 STANDARD LIMITED WARRANTY Daikin North America LLC warrants original owner of the non - residential building, multi- family residence or residence in which the Daikin products are installed that under nor- mal use and maintenance for comfort cooling and conditioning applications such prod- ucts (the "Products ") will be free from defects in material and workmanship. This war- ranty applies to compressor and all parts and is limited in duration to ten (10) years starting from the "installation date" which is one of the two dates below: a. The installation date is the date that the unit is originally commissioned, but no later than 18 months after the manufacture date noted on the unit's rating plate. b. If the date the unit is originally commissioned cannot be verified, the instal- lation date is three months after the manufacture date. Complete warranty details available from your local Daikin representative or at www.daikincomfort.com — Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-4 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM Part 3 - PERFORMANCE 3.01 The VRV IV RXYQ_T system shall perform as indicated below. Model Number System COP @47F full load - ducted System COP @47F full load - non - ducted RXYQ72TYDN 3.58 4.21 RXYQ96TYDN 3.99 4.59 RXYQ120TYDN 3.46 3.79 RXYQ144TYDN 3.72 4.1 RXYQ168TYDN 3.49 3.74 RXYQ192TYDN 3.60 3.8 RXYQ216TYDN 3.65 3.83 RXYQ240TYDN 3.55 3.63 RXYQ264TYDN 3.35 3.33 RXYQ288TYDN 3.31 3.25 RXYQ312TYDN 3.26 3.30 RXYQ336TYDN 3.20 3.22 RXYQ360TYDN 3.25 3.46 RXYQ384TYDN 3.26 3.30 RXYQ408TYDN 3.24 3.24 Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-5 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM Model Number System COP @17F full load - ducted System COP @17F full load - non - ducted RXYQ72TYDN 2.25 2.49 RXYQ96TYDN 2.61 2.86 RXYQ120TYDN 2.58 2.61 RXYQ144TYDN 2.20 2.33 RXYQ168TYDN 2.27 2.34 RXYQ192TYDN 2.40 2.27 RXYQ216TYDN 2.48 2.62 RXYQ240TYDN 2.43 2.62 RXYQ264TYDN 2.30 2.43 RXYQ288TYDN 2.13 2.07 RXYQ312TYDN 2.20 2.32 RXYQ336TYDN 2.27 2.38 RXYQ360TYDN 2.41 2.41 RXYQ384TYDN 2.28 2.28 RXYQ408TYDN 2.10 2.18 Performance Conditions: Cooling: indoor temp. of 80 °F DB, 67 °F WB and outdoor temp. of 95 °F DB. Heating: indoor temp. of 70 °F DB and outdoor temp. of 47 °F DB, 43 °F WB. Equivalent piping length: 25ft 3.02 OPERATING RANGE The operating range in cooling will be 23 °F DB - 122 °F DB. Cooling operation may be extended down to 10 °F DB when the system is designed with the fol- lowing limitations: a. The system must be a single - module outdoor unit: (RXYQ72/96/120/144/168T). b. The smallest capacity indoor unit connected to the system must be 12,000 Btu /h. c. The system must run continuously in cooling operation with a minimum of 1.5 tons of indoor units in operation. The operating range in heating will be 0 °F DB - 77 °F DB / -4 °F WB - 60 °F WB. Cooling mode indoor room temperature range will be 57 °F -77 °F WB. Heating mode indoor room temperature range will be 59 °F -80 °F DB. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-6 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM 3.03 REFRIGERANT PIPING The system shall be capable of refrigerant piping up to 540 actual feet or 620 equivalent feet from the condensing unit to the furthest indoor unit, a total combined liquid line length of 3,280 feet of piping between the condensing and indoor units with 295 feet maximum vertical differ- ence, without any oil traps or additional components. REFNET'' piping joints and headers shall be used to ensure proper refrigerant balance and flow for optimum system capacity and performance. T style joints shall not be acceptable as this will negatively impact proper refrigerant balance and flow for optimum system capacity and perfor- mance. 3.04 DESIGN BASIS The HVAC equipment basis of design is Daikin North America. All bidders shall furnish the min- imum system standards as defined by the base bid model numbers, model families or as other- wise specified herein (see Key General Specifications Alternate Supplier Checklist). In any event, the contractor shall be responsible for all specified items and intents of this document without further compensation. Part 4 - PRODUCTS 4.01 CONDENSING UNIT A. General: The condensing unit is designed specifically for use with VRV se- ries components. 1. The condensing unit shall be factory assembled in the USA and pre -wired with all necessary electronic and refrigerant controls. The refrigeration circuit of the condensing unit shall consist of Daikin inverter scroll com- pressors, motors, fans, condenser coil, electronic expansion valves, sole- noid valves, 4 -way valve, distribution headers, capillaries, filters, shut off valves, oil separators, service ports and refrigerant accumulator. Liquid and suction lines must be individually insulated between the condensing and in- door units. 2. The condensing unit can be wired and piped with access from the left, right, rear or bottom. 3. The connection ratio of indoor units to condensing unit shall be permitted up to 200 %. 4. Each condensing system shall be able to support the connection of up to 64 indoor units dependent on the model of the condensing unit. 5. The sound pressure level standard shall be that value as listed in the Dai- kin engineering manual for the specified models at 3 feet from the front of the unit. The condensing unit shall be capable of operating automatically at further reduced noise during night time or via an external input 6. The system will automatically restart operation after a power failure and will not cause any settings to be lost, thus eliminating the need for repro- gramming. 7. The unit shall incorporate an auto - charging feature to ensure optimum performance. Manual changing should be support with a minimum of 2 hours of system operation data to ensure correct operation 8. The condensing unit shall be modular in design and should allow for side - by -side installation with minimum spacing. 9. The following safety devices shall be included on the condensing unit; high pressure sensor and switch, low pressure switch, control circuit fus- Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-7 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM es, crankcase heaters, fusible plug, overload relay, inverter overload pro- tector, thermal protectors for compressor and fan motors, over current protection for the inverter and anti - recycling timers. 10. To ensure the liquid refrigerant does not flash when supplying to the vari- ous indoor units, the circuit shall be provided with a sub - cooling feature. 11. Oil recovery cycle shall be automatic occurring 2 hours after start of oper- ation and then every 8 hours of operation 12. The condensing unit shall be capable of heating operation at 0 °F dry bulb ambient temperature without additional low ambient controls or an auxilia- ry heat source. Unit Cabinet: 1. The condensing unit shall be completely weatherproof and corrosion re- sistant. The unit shall be constructed from rust - proofed mild steel panels coated with a baked enamel finish. C. Fan: 1. The condensing unit shall consist of one or more propeller type, direct - drive 350 or 750 W fan motors that have multiple speed operation via a DC (digitally commutating) inverter. Model Number Fan Motor Output W & Quantity RXYQ72TYDN 750 x 1 RXYQ96TYDN 350 x 2 RXYQ120TYDN 350 x 2 RXYQ144TYDN 750 x 2 RXYQ168TYDN 750 x 2 RXYQ192TYDN 350 x 2 + 750 x 1 RXYQ216TYDN 350 x 2 + 350 x 2 RXYQ240TYDN 350 x 2 + 350 x 2 RXYQ264TYDN 350 x 2 + 750 x 2 RXYQ288TYDN 750 x 2 + 750 x 2 RXYQ312TYDN 750 x 2 + 750 x 2 RXYQ336TYDN 750 x 2 + 750 x 2 RXYQ360TYDN 350 x 2) + 350 x 2) + 350 x 2 RXYQ384TYDN 350 x 2) + 350 x 2) + 750 x 2 RXYQ408TYDN (350 x 2) + (750 x 2) + (750 x 2) The condensing unit fan motor shall have multiple speed operation of the DC (digitally commutating) inverter type, and be of high external static pressure and shall be factory set as standard at 0.12 in. WG. A field set- ting switch to a maximum 0.32 in. WG pressure is available to accommo- date field applied duct for indoor mounting of condensing units. The fan shall be a vertical discharge configuration with a nominal airflow maximum range of 5,544 CFM to 22,283 CFM dependent on model specified. 4. Nominal sound pressure levels shall be as shown below. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-8 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM Model Number Sound Pressure Level dB (A) RXYQ72TYDN 58 RXYQ96TYDN 61 RXYQ120TYDN 61 RXYQ144TYDN 64 RXYQ168TYDN 65 RXYQ192TYDN 63 RXYQ216TYDN 64 RXYQ240TYDN 64 RXYQ264TYDN 66 RXYQ288TYDN 67 RXYQ312TYDN 68 RXYQ336TYDN 68 RXYQ360TYDN 66 RXYQ384TYDN 68 RXYQ408TYDN 68 5. The fan motor shall have inherent protection and permanently lubricated bearings and be mounted. 6. The fan motor shall be provided with a fan guard to prevent contact with moving parts. 7. Night setback control of the fan motor for low noise operation by way of automatically limiting the maximum speed shall be a standard feature. Operation sound level shall be selectable from 3 steps. D. Condenser Coil: 1. The condenser coil shall be manufactured from copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond. 2. The heat exchanger coil shall be of a waffle louver fin and rifled bore tube design to ensure high efficiency performance. 3. The heat exchanger on the condensing units shall be manufactured from Hi -X seamless copper tube with N -shape internal grooves mechanically bonded on to aluminum fins to an a -Pass Design. 4. The fins are to be covered with an anti - corrosion Ulta Gold coating as standard with a salt spray test rating of 1000hr(ASTM 13117), Acetic acid salt spray test: 500hr(ASTM G85) 5. The pipe plates shall be treated with powdered polyester resin for corro- sion prevention. 6. The condensing unit shall be factory equipped with condenser coil guards on all sides. Compressor: 1. The Daikin inverter scroll compressors shall be variable speed (PVM in- verter) controlled which is capable of changing the speed to follow the variations in total cooling and heating load as determined by the suction gas pressure as measured in the condensing unit. The target suction pressure should be capable of automatic reset based on outdoor temper- ature and system load to improve efficiency. In addition, samplings of evaporator and condenser temperatures shall be made so that the high /low pressures detected are read every 20 seconds and calculated. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-9 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM With each reading, the compressor capacity (INV frequency) shall be con- trolled to eliminate deviation from target value. 2. The inverter driven compressors in the condensing unit shall be of highly efficient reluctance DC (digitally commutating), hermetically sealed scroll "G- type" or "J- type ". 3. Neodymium magnets shall be adopted in the rotor construction to yield a higher torque and efficiency in the compressor instead of the normal fer- rite magnet type. At complete stop of the compressor, the neodymium magnets will position the rotor into the optimum position for a low torque start. 4. The capacity control range shall be as low as 10% to 100 %. 5. Each compressor shall be equipped with a crankcase heater, high pres- sure safety switch, and internal thermal overload protector. 6. Oil separators shall be standard with the equipment together with an intel- ligent oil management system. 7. The compressor shall be spring mounted to avoid the transmission of vi- bration eliminating the standard need for spring insolation 8. Compressor configurations Tonnage Number of Compressors Compressor Types 6 1 Inverter controlled 8 1 Inverter controlled 10 1 Inverter controlled 12 2 All inverter controlled 14 2 All inverter controlled 16 2 All inverter controlled 18 2 All inverter controlled 20 2 All inverter controlled 22 3 All inverter controlled 24 4 All inverter controlled 26 4 All inverter controlled 28 4 All inverter controlled 30 3 All inverter controlled 32 4 All inverter controlled 34 5 All inverter controlled 9. In the event of compressor failure the remaining compressors shall con- tinue to operate and provide heating or cooling as required at a propor- tionally reduced capacity. The microprocessor and associated controls shall be designed to specifically address this condition for single module and manifolded systems 10. In the case of multiple condenser modules, conjoined operation hours of the compressors shall be balanced by means of the Duty Cycling Func- tion, ensuring sequential starting of each module at each start /stop cycle, completion of oil return, completion of defrost or every 8 hours. When connected to a central control system sequential start is activated for all system on each DIII network F. Electrical: Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-10 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM 1. The power supply to the condensing unit shall be 460 volts, 3 phase, 60 hertz +/- 10 %. Power Supply Voltage Voltage Range 460V/3/60 416V -508V Model MCA MOP Compressor RLA RXYQ72TYDN 12.3 20 7.1 RXYQ96TYDN 20.6 25 10,2 RXYQ120TYDN 36.3 45 26.2 RXYQ144TYDN 55.1 60 16.7 +16.7 RXYQ168TYDN 55.1 60 18.8 +18.8 RXYQ192TYDN 27.6+36.3 35 +45 15.7 +26.2 RXYQ216TYDN 36.3+36.3 45 +45 23.8 +26.2 RXYQ240TYDN 36.3+36.3 45 +45 26.2 +26.2 RXYQ264TYDN 36.3+55.1 45 +60 26.2 +16.7 +16.7 RXYQ288TYDN 55.1 +55.1 60 +60 16.7 +16.7 x 2 RXYQ312TYDN 55.1 +55.41 60 +60 16.7 +16.7 +18.8 +18.8 RXYQ336TYDN 55.1 + 55.1 60 +60 18.8 +18.8 x 2 RXYQ360TYDN 36.3 + 36.3 + 36.3 45 +45 +45 26.2 +26.2 +26.2 RXYQ384TYDN 36.3 + 36.3 + 55.1 45 +45 +60 23.8 +26.2 +18.8 +18.8 RXYQ408TYDN 36.3+55.2+55.1 45 +60 +60 23.8 +16.7 +16.7 +18.8 +18.8 2. The control voltage between the indoor and condensing unit shall be 16VDC non - shielded, stranded 2 conductor cable. 3. The control wiring shall be a two -wire multiplex transmission system, making it possible to connect multiple indoor units to one condensing unit with one 2 -cable wire, thus simplifying the wiring installation 4. The control wiring maximum lengths shall be as shown below. - Formatted Table Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-11 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 Condenser to In- door Unit Condenser to Central Controller Indoor Unit to Re- mote Control Control Wiring Length 6,665 ft 3,330 ft 1,665 ft Wire Type 16/18 AWG, 2 wire, non-polarity, non - shielded, stranded - Formatted Table Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-11 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM 4.02 VRV INDOOR UNITS * INSERT INDOOR UNITS AS REQUIRED B. VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME (VRV III) AIR CONDITIONING SPECIFICATION - Three Pipe Heat Recovery PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Variable refrigerant volume HVAC system includes: 1. Outdoor /Condensing unit(s): a. Size Range: 6 to 38 Tons Nominal b. Daikin Model Numbers: REYQ72TAYD* REYQ96TAYD* REYQ120TAYD* REYQ144TAYD* REYQ168TAYD* REYQ192TAYD* (REYQ120TAYD* + REYQ72TAYD*) REYQ216TAYD* (REYQ120TAYD *+ REYQ96TAYD *) REYQ240TAYD* (REYQ96TAYD *+ REYQ144TAYD *) REYQ264TAYD* (REYQ 1 44TAYD* + REYQ 1 20TAYD*) REYQ288TAYD* (REYQ144TAYD *+ REYQ144TAYD *) REYQ312TAYD* (REYQ 1 68TAYD* + REYQ 1 44TAYD*) REYQ336TAYD* (REYQ 1 68TAYD* + REYQ 1 68TAYD*) REYQ360TAYD* (REYQ 1 20TAYD* + REYQ 1 20TAYD* + REYQ 1 20TAYD*) REYQ384TAYD* (REYQ168TAYD *+ REYQ120TAYD *+ REYQ96TAYD *) REYQ408TAYD* (REYQ168TAYD* + REYQ144TAYD* + REYQ96TAYD *) REYQ432TAYD* (REYQ 1 44TAYD* + REYQ 1 44TAYD* + REYQ 1 44TAYD*) REYQ456TAYD* (REYQ 1 44TAYD* + REYQ 1 44TAYD* + REYQ 1 68TAYD*) 2. Branch Selector Boxes a. *Input information as required 3. Indoor Units a. *Input information as required 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. N/A 1.03 REFERENCES A. N/A Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-12 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 — MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. N/A 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. MANUFACTURER QUALIFICATIONS: 1. The units shall be tested by a National Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL), in ac- cordance with ANSI /UL 1995 — Heating and Cooling Equipment and bear the Listed Mark. 2. All wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electric Code (NEC). 3. The system will be produced in an ISO 9001 and ISO 14001 facility, which are standards set by the International Standard Organization (ISO). The system shall be factory tested for safety and function. 4. The condensing unit will be factory charged with R410A. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Unit shall be stored and handled according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-13 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 — MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM 1.07 WARRANTY A. STANDARD LIMITED WARRANTY 1. Complete warranty details available from your local Daikin representative or at www.daikincomfort.com. 2. Daikin North America LLC warrants original owner of the non - residential building, multi- family residence or residence in which the Daikin products are installed that under normal use and maintenance for comfort cooling and conditioning applications such products (the "Products ") will be free from defects in material and workmanship. This warranty ap- plies to compressor and all parts and is limited in duration to ten (10) years starting from the "installation date" which is one of the two dates below: a. The installation date is the date that the unit is originally commissioned, but no later than 18 months after the manufacture date noted on the unit's rating plate. b. If the date the unit is originally commissioned cannot be verified, the installation date is three months after the manufacture date. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. DESIGN BASIS: 1. The HVAC equipment basis of design is Daikin North America. All bidders shall furnish the minimum system standards as defined by the base bid model numbers, model fami- lies or as otherwise specified herein (see Appendix A HVAC Equipment Alternate Gen- eral Information). In any event, the contractor shall be responsible for all specified items and intents of this document without further compensation. 2.02 HVAC SYSTEM DESIGN A. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION: 1. The variable capacity heat recovery air conditioning system shall be a Daikin Variable Refrigerant Volume Series (heat or cool model) system as specified. 2. The system shall consist of multiple evaporators, branch selector boxes, REFNET' joints and headers, a three -pipe refrigeration distribution system using PID control and Daikin VRV® condenser unit. 3. The condenser shall be a direct expansion (DX), air - cooled heat recovery, multi -zone air - conditioning system with variable speed inverter driven compressors using R-41 OA re- frigerant. 4. The condensing unit may connect an indoor evaporator capacity up to 200% of the con- densing unit nominal capacity. All zones are each capable of operating separately with individual temperature control. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-14 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 — MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM 5. A dedicated hot gas pipe shall be required to ensure optimum heating operation perfor- mance. a. Two -pipe, heat recovery systems utilizing a lower temperature mixed liquid /gas re- frigerant to perform heat recovery are not acceptable due to reduced heating capa- bilities. 6. The Daikin condensing unit shall be interconnected to indoor unit models FXFQ, FXHQ, FXUQ, FXEQ, FXMQ, FXLQ, FXNQ, FXTQ, FXDQ, FXZQ, FXAQ and FXMQ_MF, and shall range in capacity from 7,500 Btu /h to 96,000 Btu /h in accordance with Daikin's en- gineering data book detailing each available indoor unit. a. The indoor units shall be connected to the condensing unit utilizing Daikin's REFNET'' specified piping joints and headers to ensure correct refrigerant flow and balancing. T style joints are not acceptable for a variable refrigerant system. 7. Operation of the system shall permit either individual cooling or heating of each indoor unit simultaneously or all of the indoor units associated with each branch of the cool /heat selector box (BSQ_T / BS_Q54T). Each indoor unit or group of indoor units shall be able to provide set temperature independently via a local remote controller, an Intelligent Con- troller, an Intelligent Manager or a BMS interface. 8. Branch selector boxes: a. The branch selector boxes shall have the capacity to control up to 290 MBH (cooling) downstream of the branch selector box. b. Each branch of the branch selector box shall consist of three electronic expansion valves, refrigerant control piping and electronics to facilitate communications between the box and main processor and between the box and indoor units. c. The branch selector box shall control the operational mode of the subordinate indoor units. The use of three EEV's ensures continuous heating during defrost (multiple condenser systems), no heating impact during changeover and reduced sound lev- els. d. The use of solenoid valves for changeover and pressure equalization shall not be ac- ceptable due to refrigerant noise. 9. The REYQ_TA condensing unit model numbers and the associated number of connecta- ble indoor units per REYQ_TA condensing unit is indicated in the following table. Each indoor unit or group of indoor units shall be independently controlled. MODEL NUMBER NOMINAL CAPACITY (Tons) MAXIMUM NUMBER OF INDOOR UNITS REYQ72TAYD* 6 12 REYQ96TAYD* 8 16 REYQ120TAYD* 10 20 REYQ144TAYD* 12 25 REYQ168TAYD* 14 29 REYQ192TAYD* 16 33 Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-15 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM REYQ216TAYD* 18 37 REYQ240TAYD* 20 41 REYQ264TAYD* 22 45 REYQ288TAYD* 24 49 REYQ312TAYD* 26 54 REYQ336TAYD* 28 58 REYQ360TAYD* 30 62 REYQ384TAYD* 32 64 REYQ408TAYD* 34 64 REYQ432TAYD* 36 64 REYQ456TAYD* 38 64 B. VRV IV FEATURES AND BENEFITS 1. Voltage Platform - Heat pump condensing units shall be available with a 460V /3ph /6OHz power supply. 2. Advanced Zoning - A single system shall provide for up to 64 zones. 3. Independent Control - Each indoor unit shall use a dedicated electronic expansion valve with 2000 positions for independent control. 4. VFD Inverter Control and Variable Refrigerant Temperature - Each condensing unit shall use high efficiency, variable speed all "inverter" compressor(s) coupled with inverter fan motors to optimize part load performance. The system capacity and refrigerant tempera- tures shall be modulated automatically to set suction and condensing pressures while varying the refrigerant volume for the needs of the cooling or heating loads. The control will be automatic and customizable depending on load and weather conditions. a. Indoor shall use PID to control superheat to deliver a comfortable room temperature condition and optimize efficiency. 5. Configurator software - Each system shall be available with configurator software pack- age to allow for remote configuration of operational settings and also for assessment of operational data and error codes. a. If this software is not provided by an alternate manufacturer, for each individual out- door unit the contractor shall do the settings manually and keep detailed records for future maintenance purposes. 6. Each system shall be capable of seamless integration with Daikin DVS series Dedicated Outside Air System (DOAS). 7. Autocharging - Each system shall have a refrigerant auto - charging function. 8. Defrost Heating - Multiple condenser VRV systems shall maintain continuous heating during defrost operation. Reverse cycle (cooling mode) defrost operation shall not be permitted due to the potential reduction in space temperature. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-16 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 — MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM 9. Oil Return Heating — Multiple condenser VRV systems shall maintain continuous heating during oil return operation. Reverse cycle (cooling mode) oil return during heating opera- tion shall not be permitted due to the potential reduction in space temperature. 10. Low Ambient Cooling - Each system shall be capable of low ambient cooling operation to -4 °F DB (- 20 °CDB). 11. Independent Control - Each indoor unit shall use a dedicated electronic expansion valve for independent control. 12. Flexible Design — a. Systems shall be capable of up to 540ft (165m) [623 ft. (190m) equivalent] of linear piping between the condensing unit and furthest located indoor unit. b. Systems shall be capable of up to 3,280ft (1,000m) total 'one -way" piping in the pip- ing network. c. Systems shall have a vertical (height) separation of up to 295ft between the condens- ing unit and the indoor units. d. Systems shall be capable of up to 295ft (90m) from the first REFNETT" / branch point. e. The condensing unit shall have the ability to connect an indoor unit evaporator ca- pacity of up to 200% of the condensing unit nominal capacity. f. Systems shall be capable of 98ft (30m) vertical separation between indoor units. g. Condensing units shall be supported with a fan motor ESP up to 0.32" WG as stand- ard to allow connection of discharge ductwork and to prevent discharge air short cir- cuiting. 13. Oil return — Each system shall be furnished with a centrifugal oil separator and active oil recovery cycle. 14. Simple wiring — Systems shall use 16/18 AWG, 2 wire, stranded, non - shielded and non - polarized daisy chain control wiring. 15. Outside Air — Systems shall provide outside air capability. 16. Space saving — Each system shall have a condensing unit module footprint no larger than 48 -7/8" x 30- 3/16" (1694mm x 1242mm x 767mm). 17. Advanced diagnostics — Systems shall include a self- diagnostic, auto -check function to detect a malfunction and display the type and location. 18. Each condensing unit shall incorporate contacts for electrical demand shedding with op- tional 3 stage demand control with 12 customizable demand settings. 19. Advanced controls — Each system shall have at least one remote controller capable of controlling up to 16 indoor units. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-17 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4032- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM 20. Each system shall be capable of integrating with open protocol BACnet and LonWorks building management systems. 21. Low sound levels - Each system shall use indoor and condensing units with quiet opera- tion as low as 27 dB(A). C. PERFORMANCE: 1. The VRV IV REYQ_TA system shall perform as indicated below: MODEL NUMBER SYSTEM IEER (Ducted) SYSTEM IEER (Non- Ducted) REYQ72TAYD* 20.9 25.3 REYQ96TAYD* 23.3 29.3 REYQ 120TAYD* 22.6 25.4 REYQ 144TAYD* 21.9 23.7 REYQ168TAYD* 20.7 22.0 REYQ 192TAYD* 21.1 22.9 REYQ216TAYD* 20.8 23.0 REYQ240TAYD* 19.8 21.9 REYQ264TAYD* 18.6 21.6 REYQ288TAYD* 17.9 21.1 REYQ312TAYD* 18.1 20.2 REYQ336TAYD* 17.4 19.0 REYQ360TAYD* 18.9 19.6 REYQ384TAYD* 18.1 18.3 REYQ408TAYD* 17.7 17.2 REYQ432TAYD* 17.3 16.2 REYQ456TAYD* 16.7 16.2 Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-18 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM MODEL NUMBER SYSTEM SCHE (Ducted) SYSTEM SCHE (Non- Ducted) REYQ72TAYD* 21.4 25.6 REYQ96TAYD* 23.0 26.5 REYQ120TAYD* 25.1 27.0 REYQ144TAYD* 23.8 25.5 REYQ168TAYD* 24.8 26.6 REYQ192TAYD* 23.1 26.6 REYQ216TAYD* 22.8 25.6 REYQ240TAYD* 22.7 25.6 REYQ264TAYD* 22.4 24.4 REYQ288TAYD* 21.8 23.3 REYQ312TAYD* 20.7 23.9 REYQ336TAYD* 20.6 23.5 REYQ360TAYD* 20.3 22.7 REYQ384TAYD* 18.7 22.5 REYQ408TAYD* 18.3 22.1 REYQ432TAYD* 18.1 21.6 REYQ456TAYD* 17.9 21.1 MODEL NUMBER SYSTEM EER (Ducted) SYSTEM EER (Non- Ducted) REYQ72TAYD* 12.3 15.3 REYQ96TAYD* 12.6 14.6 REYQ 120TAYD* 12.3 13.1 REYQ144TAYD* 11.9 12.4 REYQ168TAYD* 11.2 11.6 REYQ192TAYD* 12.5 12.5 REYQ216TAYD* 12.4 12.5 REYQ240TAYD* 11.6 12.2 REYQ264TAYD* 10.5 11.8 REYQ288TAYD* 10.5 11.7 REYQ312TAYD* 10.3 11.3 REYQ336TAYD* 9.6 10.7 REYQ360TAYD* 10.9 10.8 REYQ384TAYD* 9.8 9.8 REYQ408TAYD* 9.7 9.8 REYQ432TAYD* 9.7 9.8 REYQ456TAYD* 9.5 9.5 Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-19 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM MODEL NUMBER SYSTEM COP @47 °F (Ducted) SYSTEM COP @47 °F (Non- Ducted) REYQ72TAYD* 3.58 4.31 REYQ96TAYD* 3.67 4.25 REYQ120TAYD* 3.51 4.00 REYQ144TAYD* 3.48 3.81 REYQ168TAYD* 3.21 3.70 REYQ192TAYD* 3.67 3.85 REYQ216TAYD* 3.67 3.74 REYQ240TAYD* 3.51 3.68 REYQ264TAYD* 3.22 3.55 REYQ288TAYD* 3.20 3.51 REYQ312TAYD* 3.20 3.57 REYQ336TAYD* 3.20 3.53 REYQ360TAYD* 3.27 3.52 REYQ384TAYD* 3.20 3.21 REYQ408TAYD* 3.20 3.21 REYQ432TAYD* 3.20 3.21 REYQ456TAYD* 3.20 3.21 MODEL NUMBER SYSTEM COP @17 °F (Ducted) SYSTEM COP @17 °F (Non- Ducted) REYQ72TAYD* 2.43 2.77 REYQ96TAYD* 2.25 2.52 REYQ 120TAYD* 2.25 2.47 REYQ144TAYD* 2.29 2.53 REYQ168TAYD* 2,09 2.23 REYQ192TAYD* 2.26 2.41 REYQ216TAYD* 2.18 2.35 REYQ240TAYD* 2.09 2.28 REYQ264TAYD* 2.09 2.36 REYQ288TAYD* 2.15 2.41 REYQ312TAYD* 2.12 2.39 REYQ336TAYD* 2.05 2.18 REYQ360TAYD* 2.05 2.28 REYQ384TAYD* 2.05 2.22 REYQ408TAYD* 2.05 2.09 REYQ432TAYD* 2.06 2.08 REYQ456TAYD* 2.05 2.07 2. Performance Conditions: a. Cooling: Indoor temperature of 80 °FDB (26.7 °CDB), 67 °FWB (19.5 °CWB) and out- door temperature of 95 °FDB (35 °CDB). b. Heating: Indoor temperature of 70 °FDB (21.1 °CDB) and outdoor temperature of 47 °FDB (8.3 °CDB), 43 °FWB (6.1 °CDB). Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-20 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM c. Equivalent piping length: 25ft (7.5m) 3. Cooling or Cooling Dominant Operation: a. The operating range in cooling or cooling dominant simultaneous cooling /heating will be 23 °FDB ( -5 °CDB) - 110 °FDB (43.3 °CDB). b. Cooling mode indoor room temperature range will be 57 -77 °FWB (13.8 - 25 *CWB). c. Each system as standard shall be capable of onsite reprogramming to allow low am- bient cooling operation down to -4 °FDB ( -20 °CDB). 4. Heating or Heating Dominant Operation: a. The operating range in heating or heating dominant simultaneous cooling /heating will be -22'- 61 °FWB ( -30 - 16 °CWB). 1) If an alternate equipment manufacturer is selected, the mechanical contractor shall provide, at their own risk and cost, all additional material and labor to meet low ambient operating condition and performance b. Heating mode indoor room temperature range will be 59 °FDB - 80 °F DB (15 °CDB - 26.7 °CDB). 2.03 EQUIPMENT A. ELECTRICAL: 1. The power supply to the condensing unit shall be: POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE VOLTAGE RANGE 460V / 3ph / 60 Hz 416V - 508V (t10 %) MODEL MCA MOP COMPRESSOR RLA REYQ72TAYD* 15.2 20 9.4 REYQ96TAYD* 21.1 25 6.2+6.2 REYQ120TAYD* 21.1 25 6.8+6.8 REYQ144TAYD* 31.9 40 7.3+10.3 REYQ168TAYD* 36.1 40 7.9+11.1 REYQ192TAYD* 15.2+21.1 20+25 9.4 + (6.8 + 6.8) REYQ216TAYD* 21.1 + 21.1 25+25 (6.2 + 6.2) + (6.8 + 6.8) REYQ240TAYD* 21.1 +31.9 25+40 (6.2 + 6.2) + (7.3 + 10.3) REYQ264TAYD* 21.1 +31.9 25+40 (6.8 + 6.8) + (7.3 + 10.3) REYQ288TAYD* 31.9+31.9 40+40 (7.3 + 10.3) x 2 REYQ312TAYD* 31.9+36.1 40+40 (7.3 + 10.3) + (7.9 + 11.1) REYQ336TAYD* 31.6+31.6 40+40 (7.9 + 11.1) x 2 REYQ360TAYD* 21.1 + 21.1 + 21.1 25+25+25 (6.8 + 6.8) x 3 REYQ384TAYD* 21.1 + 21.1 + 36.1 25+25+40 (6.2 + 6.2) + (6.8 + 6.8) + (7.9 + 11.1) REYQ408TAYD* 21.1 + 31.9 + 36.1 25+40+40 (6.2 + 6.2) + (7.3 + 10.3) Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-21 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-22 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 + (7,9 + 11.1) REYQ432TAYD* 31.9 + 31.9 + 31.9 40+40+40 (7.3 + 10.3) x 3 (7.3 + 10.3) x 2 REYQ456TAYD* 31.9 + 31.9 + 36.1 40+40+40 + (7.9 + 11.1) Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-22 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 — MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM ►JII�[�[c71 1. The control voltage between the indoor and condensing unit shall be 16VDC non - shielded, stranded 2 conductor cable. 2. The control wiring shall be a two -wire multiplex transmission system, making it possible to connect multiple indoor units to one condensing unit with one 2 -cable wire, thus simpli- fying the wiring installation. 3. The control wiring maximum lengths shall be as shown below: C. REFRIGERANT PIPING: 1. The system shall be capable of refrigerant piping up to 540ft (165m) actual or 623ft (190m) equivalent from the condensing unit to the furthest indoor unit, a total combined liquid line length of 3,280ft (1,000m) of piping between the condensing and indoor units with 295ft (90m) maximum vertical difference, without any oil traps or additional compo- nents. 2. REFNETTm piping joints and headers shall be used to ensure proper refrigerant balance and flow for optimum system capacity and performance. a. T style joints shall not be acceptable as this will negatively impact proper refrigerant balance and flow for optimum system capacity and performance. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-23 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 CONDENSER TO CONDENSER TO INDOOR UNIT TO CENTRAL INDOOR UNIT REMOTE CONTROL CONTROLLER CONTROL WIRING 6,560 ft (2,000 m) 3,280 ft (1,000 m) 1,640 ft (500 m) LENGTH WIRE TYPE 16/18 AWG, 2 wire, non - polarity, non - shielded, stranded C. REFRIGERANT PIPING: 1. The system shall be capable of refrigerant piping up to 540ft (165m) actual or 623ft (190m) equivalent from the condensing unit to the furthest indoor unit, a total combined liquid line length of 3,280ft (1,000m) of piping between the condensing and indoor units with 295ft (90m) maximum vertical difference, without any oil traps or additional compo- nents. 2. REFNETTm piping joints and headers shall be used to ensure proper refrigerant balance and flow for optimum system capacity and performance. a. T style joints shall not be acceptable as this will negatively impact proper refrigerant balance and flow for optimum system capacity and performance. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-23 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 — MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM D. PAINT /CORROSION RESISTANCE: 1. Paint and corrosion resistance shall be at a minimum per the table below: 2.04 OUTDOOR/CONDENSING UNIT A. GENERAL: 1. The condensing unit is designed specifically for use with VRV series components. 2. The condensing unit shall be factory assembled in the USA and pre -wired with all neces- sary electronic and refrigerant controls. 3. The refrigeration circuit of the condensing unit shall consist of Daikin inverter scroll com- pressors, motors, fans, condenser coil, electronic expansion valves, solenoid valves, 4- Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-24 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 VRV IV COATING COMPONENT SURFACE THICKNESS BASE MATERIAL External & Internal TREATMENT Surface EXTERNAL Galvanized steel POLYESTER ?1.5 mils PANELBASE EXTERNAL Galvanized steel POLYESTER > =1.5 mils FRONT PANEL PILLAR Galvanized steel POLYESTER > > =1.5 mils COMPRESSOR ASTM material Resin Paint > = =0. 78 mils COVER FIN GUARD Iron wire Resin Paint ?0. 79 mils FAN GUARD AND Polypropylene No treatment required N/A DRUM FAN Acrylonitrile - glass No treatment required N/A FAN MOTOR Resin No treatment required N/A FRAME FAN MOTOR Carbon steel No treatment required N/A SHAFT FAN MOTOR Galvanized steel POLYESTER > =1.5 mils SUPPORT HEAT Polymer Anti - corrosion Salt Spray 1000 hours, EXCHANGERS Aluminum surface treatment blister rating 10 (FIN ONLY) ELECTRICAL Hot -dip zinc- No treatment required N/A PARTS BOX coated steel Glass cloth / Glass ELECTRICAL nonwoven cloth Insulation Varnish No specific thickness PARTS BOARD material Carbon steel wire High corrosion re- SCREWS > =0. 28 mils rods sistance treatment 2.04 OUTDOOR/CONDENSING UNIT A. GENERAL: 1. The condensing unit is designed specifically for use with VRV series components. 2. The condensing unit shall be factory assembled in the USA and pre -wired with all neces- sary electronic and refrigerant controls. 3. The refrigeration circuit of the condensing unit shall consist of Daikin inverter scroll com- pressors, motors, fans, condenser coil, electronic expansion valves, solenoid valves, 4- Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-24 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 — MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM way valve, distribution headers, capillaries, filters, shut off valves, oil separators, service ports and refrigerant accumulator. 4. Liquid and suction lines must be individually insulated between the condensing and in- door units. 5. The condensing unit can be wired and piped with access from the left, right, rear or bot- tom. 6. The connection ratio of indoor units to condensing unit shall be permitted up to 200% of nominal capacity. 7. Each condensing system shall be able to support the connection of up to 64 indoor units dependent on the model of the condensing unit. 8. The sound pressure level standard shall be that value as listed in the Daikin engineering manual for the specified models at 3 feet from the front of the unit. The condensing unit shall be capable of operating automatically at further reduced noise during night time or via an external input. 9. The system will automatically restart operation after a power failure and will not cause any settings to be lost, thus eliminating the need for reprogramming. 10. The unit shall incorporate an auto - charging feature to ensure optimum performance. Manual changing should be support with a minimum of 2 hours of system operation data to ensure correct operation. 11. The condensing unit shall be modular in design and should allow for side -by -side installa- tion with minimum spacing. 12. The following safety devices shall be included on the condensing unit; high pressure sen- sor and switch, low pressure sensor, control circuit fuses, crankcase heaters, fusible plug, overload relay, inverter overload protector, thermal protectors for compressor and fan motors, over current protection for the inverter and anti - recycling timers. 13. To ensure the liquid refrigerant does not flash when supplying to the various indoor units, the circuit shall be provided with a sub - cooling feature. 14. Oil recovery cycle shall be automatic occurring 2 hours after start of operation and then every 8 hours of operation. Each system shall maintain continuous heating during oil re- turn operation. 15. The condensing unit shall be capable of heating operation at -13 °F ( -25 °C) wet bulb am- bient temperature without additional low ambient controls or an auxiliary heat source. 16. The multiple condenser VRV systems shall continue to provide heat to the indoor units in heating operation while in the defrost mode. B. UNIT CABINET: Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-25 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 — MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM The condensing unit shall be completely weatherproof and corrosion resistant. The unit shall be constructed from rust - proofed galvanized steel panels coated with a baked enamel finish. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-26 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 — MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM 1�21►F 1. The condensing unit shall consist of one or more propeller type, direct -drive 500 or 60OW fan motors that have multiple speed operation via a DC (digitally commutating) inverter. Reference table below. MODEL NUMBER FAN MOTOR OUTPUT (W) & QUANTITY REYQ72TAYD* 500 x 1 REYQ96TAYD* 600 x 600 REYQ120TAYD* 600 x 600 REYQ144TAYD* 600 x 600 REYQ168TAYD* 600 x 600 REYQ192TAYD* (500 x 1) + (600 x 2) REYQ216TAYD* (600 x 2) + (600 x 2) REYQ240TAYD* (600 x 2) + (600 x 2) REYQ264TAYD* (600 x 2) + (600 x 2) REYQ288TAYD* (600 x 2) + (600 x 2) REYQ312TAYD* (600 x 2) + (600 x 2) REYQ336TAYD* (600 x 2) + (600 x 2) REYQ360TAYD* (600 x 2) + (600 x 2) + (600 x 2) REYQ384TAYD* (600 x 2) + (600 x 2) + (600 x 2) REYQ408TAYD* (600 x 2) + (600 x 2) + (600 x 2) REYQ432TAYD* (600 x 2) + (600 x 2) + (600 x 2) REYQ456TAYD* (600 x 2) + (600 x 2) + (600 x 2) 2. The condensing unit fan motor shall have multiple speed operation of the DC (digitally commutating) inverter type, and be of high external static pressure and shall be factory set as standard at 0.12 in. WG. Afield setting switch to a maximum 0.32 in. WG pres- sure is available to accommodate field applied duct for indoor mounting of condensing units. 3. The fan shall be a vertical discharge configuration with a nominal airflow maximum range of 5,544 CFM to 24,684 CFM dependent on model specified. 4. The fan motor shall have inherent protection and permanently lubricated bearings and be mounted. 5. The fan motor shall be provided with a fan guard to prevent contact with moving parts. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-27 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 — MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM D. SOUND: 1. Nominal sound pressure levels shall be as shown below. MODEL NUMBER SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL dB(A) REYQ72TAYD* 58 REYQ96TAYD* 61 REYQ120TAYD* 61 REYQ144TAYD* 65 REYQ168TAYD* 65 REYQ192TAYD* 63 REYQ216TAYD* 64 REYQ240TAYD* 66 REYQ264TAYD* 66 REYQ288TAYD* 68 REYQ312TAYD* 68 REYQ336TAYD* 68 REYQ360TAYD* 66 REYQ384TAYD* 68 REYQ408TAYD* 69 REYQ432TAYD* 70 REYQ456TAYD* 70 2. Night setback control of the fan motor for low noise operation by way of automatically lim- iting the maximum speed shall be a standard feature. Operation sound level shall be se- lectable from 3 steps. OPERATION SOUND dB(A) NIGHT MODE SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL dB(A) APPROX. Level 1 55 Level 2 50 Level 3 45 E. CONDENSER COIL: 1. The condenser coil shall be manufactured from copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond. 2. The heat exchanger coil shall be of a waffle louver fin and rifled bore tube design to en- sure high efficiency performance. 3. The heat exchanger on the condensing units shall be manufactured from Hi -X seamless copper tube with N -shape internal grooves mechanically bonded on to aluminum fins to an a -Pass Design. 4. The fins shall be coated with an anti - corrosion hydrophilic blue coating as standard from factory with a salt spray test rating of 1 000h per ASTM test standards. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-28 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 — MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM 5. The outdoor coil shall have three - circuit heat exchanger design eliminating the need for a drain pan heater. The lower part of the coil shall be used for inverter cooling and be on or off during heating operation enhancing the defrost operation. a. An alternate manufacturer must provide a drain pan heater to enable adequate de- frosting of the unit in defrost operation. 6. The condensing unit shall be factory equipped with condenser coil guards on all sides. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-29 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 — MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM F. COMPRESSOR: 1. The Daikin inverter scroll compressors shall be variable speed (PVM inverter) controlled which is capable of changing the speed to follow the variations in total cooling and heat- ing load as determined by the suction gas pressure as measured in the condensing unit. a. In addition, samplings of evaporator and condenser temperatures shall be made so that the high /low pressures detected are read every 20 seconds and calculated. With each reading, the compressor capacity (INV frequency) shall be controlled to elimi- nate deviation from target value. 1) Non — inverter- driven compressors, which may cause starting motor current to ex- ceed the nominal motor current (RLA) and require larger wire sizing, shall not be allowed. 2. The inverter driven compressors in the condensing unit shall be of highly efficient reluc- tance DC (digitally commutating), hermetically sealed scroll "G- type" or "J- type ". 3. Neodymium magnets shall be adopted in the rotor construction to yield a higher torque and efficiency in the compressor instead of the normal ferrite magnet type. a. At complete stop of the compressor, the neodymium magnets will position the rotor into the optimum position for a low torque start. 4. The capacity control range shall be as low as 3% to 100 %. 5. The compressor's motor shall have a cooling system using discharge gas, to avoid sud- den changes in temperature resulting in significant stresses on winding and bearings. 6. Each compressor shall be equipped with a crankcase heater, high pressure safety switch, and internal thermal overload protector. 7. Oil separators shall be standard with the equipment together with an intelligent oil man- agement system. 8. The compressor shall be spring mounted to avoid the transmission of vibration eliminat- ing the standard need for spring insolation. 9. In the event of compressor failure, the remaining compressors shall continue to operate and provide heating or cooling as required at a proportionally reduced capacity. The mi- croprocessor and associated controls shall be designed to specifically address this condi- tion for single module and manifolded systems. 10. In the case of multiple condenser modules, conjoined operation hours of the compressors shall be balanced by means of the Duty Cycling Function, ensuring sequential starting of each module at each start/stop cycle, completion of oil return, completion of defrost or every 8 hours. When connected to a central control system sequential start is activated for all system on each DIII network. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-30 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM 11. Compressor configurations: Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-31 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 COMPRESSOR MOTOR COMPRESSOR MODELNUMBER QUANTITY OUTPUT(W) TYPES REYQ72TAYD* 3,800 1 Inverter controlled REYQ96TAYD* 2,200 + 2,200 2 All Inverter controlled REYQ120TAYD* 2,700 + 2,700 2 All Inverter controlled REYQ144TAYD* 2,700 + 4,600 2 All inverter controlled REYQ168TAYD* 3,200 + 5,400 2 All inverter controlled REYQ192TAYD* 4,300 + (2,600 + 2,600) 3 All inverter controlled REYQ216TAYD* (2,500 + 2,500) + (2,500 + 2,500) 4 All inverter controlled REYQ240TAYD* (2,500 + 2,500) + (2,500 + 4,300) 4 All inverter controlled REYQ264TAYD* (2,900 + 2,900) + (2,900 + 5,000) 4 All inverter controlled REYQ288TAYD* (2,900 + 5,000) + (2,900 + 5,000) 4 All inverter controlled REYQ312TAYD* (3,200 + 5,400) + (3,200 + 5,400) 4 All inverter controlled REYQ336TAYD* (3,500 + 6,000) + (3,500 + 6,000) 4 All inverter controlled (3,100 + 3,100) + (3,100 + 3,100) + REYQ360TAYD* 6 All inverter controlled (3,100 + 3,100) (3,100 + 3,100) + (3,100 + 3,100) + REYQ384TAYD* 6 All inverter controlled (3,200 + 5,400) (3,100 + 3,100) + (3,100 + 5,300) + REYQ408TAYD* (3,100 + 5,300) 6 All inverter controlled (3,200 + 5,400) + (3,200 + 5,400) + REYQ432TAYD* 6 All inverter controlled (3,200 + 5,400) (3,500 + 6,000) + (3,500 + 6,000) + REYQ456TAYD* 6 All inverter controlled (3,500 + 6,000) Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-31 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 — MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM 2.05 BRANCH SELCTOR UNITS A. GENERAL: 1. The BSQ36TVJ, BSQ60TVJ, BSQ96TVJ, BS4Q54TVJ, BS6Q54TVJ, BS8Q54TVJ, BS10Q54TVJ and BS12Q54TVJ branch selector boxes are designed specifically for use with VRV IV series heat recovery system components. a. These selector boxes shall be factory assembled, wired, and piped. b. These BSQ_T / BS(4/6/8/10/12)Q54T branch controllers must be run tested at the factory. c. These selector boxes must be mounted indoors. d. When simultaneously heating and cooling, the units in heating mode shall energize their subcooling electronic expansion valve. e. The number of connectable indoor units shall be in accordance with the table below: MODEL NUMBER MAXIMUM CONNECTABLE COOLING CAPACITY MAXIMUM NUMBER OF CONNECTABLE INDOOR UNITS PER BRANCH BSQ36TVJ 36,000 Btu /h 4 BSQ60TVJ 60,000 Btu /h 8 BSQ96TVJ 96,000 Btu /h 8 BS4Q54TVJ 144,000 Btu /h 5 BS6Q54TVJ 216,000 Btu /h 5 BS8Q54TVJ 290,000 Btu /h 5 BS10Q54TVJ 290,000 Btu /h 5 BS12Q54TVJ 290,000 Btu /h 5 B. UNIT CABINET 1. These units shall have a galvanized steel plate casing. 2. Each cabinet shall house 3 electronic expansion valves for refrigerant control per branch. 3. The cabinet shall contain one subcooling heat exchanger per branch. 4. The unit shall have sound absorption thermal insulation material made of flame and heat resistant foamed polyethylene. 5. Nominal sound pressure levels must be measured and published on the submittals by the manufacturer. These sound levels must not exceed the values below. a. If an alternative manufacturer is selected, the mechanical contractor shall provide, at their own cost and expense, any additional material and labor to meet the published sound levels above. MODEL NUMBER SOUND LEVEL dB(A) SOUND LEVEL dB(A) OPERATION MAX Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-32 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM BSQ36TVJ 35 40 BSQ60TVJ 41 45 BSQ96TVJ 41 45 BS4Q54TVJ 38 45 BS6Q54TVJ 39 47 BS8Q54TVJ 39 47 BS10Q54TVJ 40 48 BS12Q54TVJ 40 48 Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-33 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 — MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM 6. DIMENSIONS (H x L x W) a. BSQ_T unit shall be no larger than 8 -1/8" x 15 -1/4" x 12- 13/16" (206.4mm x 387.4mm x 325.4mm). b. BS4Q_T shall be no larger than 11 -3/4" x 18- 15/16" x 14- 9/16" (298.5mm x 481mm x 370mm). c. BS(6 /8)Q_T shall be no larger than 11 -3/4" x 22- 13/16" x 18- 15/16" (298.5mm x 579.4mm x 481 mm). d. BS(10 /12)Q_T shall be no larger than 11 -3/4" x 32- 5/16" x 18- 15/16" (298.5mm x 821 mm x 481 mm). 7. REFRIGERANT VALVES: a. The unit shall be furnished with 3 electronic expansion valves per branch to control the direction of refrigerant flow. The use of solenoid valves for changeover and pres- sure equalization shall not be acceptable due to refrigerant noise. b. The refrigerant connections must be of the braze type. c. In multi -port units, each port shall have its own electronic expansion valves. If com- mon expansion /solenoid valves are used, redundancy must be provided. d. Each circuit shall have at least one (36,000 Btu /h indoor unit or smaller for the BSQ36TVJ, 54,000 Btu /h indoor unit or smaller for the BS(4/6/8/10/12)Q54TVJ, 60,000 Btu /h indoor unit or smaller for the BSQ60TVJ and 96,000 Btu /h indoor unit or smaller for the BSQ96TVJ) branch selector box. e. Multiple indoor units may be connected to a branch selector box with the use of a REFNET- joint provided they are within the capacity range of the branch selector. 8. CONDENSTATE REMOVAL: a. The unit shall not require provisions for condensate removal. A safety device or sec- ondary drain pan shall be installed by the mechanical contractor to comply with the applicable mechanical code, if an alternate manufacturer is selected. 9. ELECTRICAL: a. The unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. b. The unit shall be capable of operation within the limits of 187 volts to 255 volts. c. The minimum circuit amps (MCA) shall be 0.1 and the maximum overcurrent protec- tion amps (MOP) shall be 15. d. The control voltage between the indoor and condensing unit shall be 16VDC non - shielded 2 conductor cable. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-34 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM C. VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME (VRV / VRV -S) AIR CONDITIONING SPECIFICATION - Heat Recovery /Heat Pump Indoor Units Size Range: 0.6 to 8 Tons Nominal Daikin Model Number: FXFQ_T INDOOR UNIT - ROUND FLOW SENSING CEILING CASSETTE UNIT FXZQ INDOOR UNIT - 4 WAY CEILING CASSETTE UNIT (2'x2') FXMQ -M INDOOR UNIT - CONCEALED CEILING DUCTED UNIT (Med. Static) FXMQ -P INDOOR UNIT - CONCEALED CEILING DUCTED UNIT (Med. Static) FXDQ INDOOR UNIT - SLIM DUCT CONCEALED CEILING UNIT FXHQ INDOOR UNIT - CEILING SUSPENDED CASSETTE UNIT FXAQ INDOOR UNIT - WALL MOUNTED UNIT FXLQ INDOOR UNIT - FLOOR CONSOLE UNIT FXNQ INDOOR UNIT - FLOOR CONSOLE CONCEALED UNIT FXTQ INDOOR UNIT - VERTICAL AIR HANDLING UNIT FXMQ_MF INDOOR UNIT - OUTSIDE AIR PROCESSING UNIT FXDQ 4 WAY CEILING SUSPENDED CASSETTE UNIT FXEQ ONE WAY BLOW CASSETTE Part 1 - GENERAL VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME (VRV /VRV -S) AIR CONDITIONING SPECIFICATION - Heat Recovery/Heat Pump Indoor Units 4.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE F. The units shall be tested by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL), in accordance with ANSI /UL 1995 /CAN /CSA -C22.2 No. 236 -05 (R2009) - Heating and Cooling Equipment and bear the Listed Mark. G. All wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electric Code (NEC) /Canadian Electrical Code (CEC). H. The system will be produced in an ISO 9001 and ISO 14001 facility, which are standards set by the International Standard Organization (ISO). The system shall be factory tested for safety and function. I. The outdoor unit will be factory charged with R-41 OA. 4.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Unit shall be stored and handled according to the manufacturer's recommenda- tions. Part 2 - WARRANTY STANDARD LIMITED WARRANTY Daikin North America LLC warrants original owner of the non - residential building, multi- family residence or residence in which the Daikin products are installed that under nor- mal use and maintenance for comfort cooling and conditioning applications such prod- ucts (the "Products ") will be free from defects in material and workmanship. This warran- ty applies to compressor and all parts and is limited in duration to ten (10) years starting from the "installation date" which is one of the two dates below: Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-35 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM c. The installation date is the date that the unit is originally commissioned, but no later than 18 months after the manufacture date noted on the unit's rating plate. d. If the date the unit is originally commissioned cannot be verified, the installation date is three months after the manufacture date. Complete warranty details available from your local Daikin representative or at www.daikincomfort.com - Part 3 - PERFORMANCE 3.01 DESIGN BASIS The HVAC equipment basis of design is Daikin. All bidders shall furnish the minimum system standards as defined by the base bid model numbers, model families or as oth- erwise specified herein (see Key General Specifications Alternate Supplier Checklist). In any event the contractor shall be responsible for all specified items and intents of this document without further compensation. Part 4 - PRODUCTS 4.01 FXFQ_T- ROUND FLOW SENSING CEILING CASSETTE UNIT A. General: Daikin indoor unit model FXFQ_T shall be a round flow ceiling cas- sette fan coil unit, operable with R -410A refrigerant, equipped with an elec- tronic expansion valve, direct drive DC (ECM) type fan, for installation into the ceiling cavity equipped with an air panel grill. It shall be available in capaci- ties from 7,500 Btu /h to 48,000 Btu /h. Model numbers are FXFQ07TVJU, FXFQ09TVJU, FXFQ12TVJU, FXFQ15TVJU, FXFQ18TVJU, FXFQ24TVJU, FXFQ30TVJU, FXFQ36TVJU, FXFQ48TVJU to be connected to outdoor unit model RXYQ / RXYMQ / RWEYQ heat pump and REYQ / RWEYQ heat re- covery model. It shall be a round flow air distribution type, fresh white, impact resistant decoration panel, or optional self - cleaning filter panel. The supply air is distributed via four individually motorized louvers. To save energy and optimize occupancy comfort, the indoor unit shall be equipped with built in occupancy sensor and surface temperature sensor. Computerized PID con- trol shall be used to control superheat to deliver a comfortable room tempera- ture condition. The unit shall be equipped with a programmed drying mech- anism that dehumidifies while limiting changes in room temperature when used with Daikin remote control BRC1E72, BRC1E73, BRC2A71 and BRC1 E52137. The indoor units sound pressure shall range from 30 dB(A) to 45 dB(A) at High speed measured at 5 feet below the unit. B. Performance: Each unit's performance is based on nominal operating condi- tions: Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-36 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM Model Number Cooling (Indoor 80 °F DB / 67 °F WB, Outdoor 95 °F DB, 25 ft pipe length) Heating (Indoor 47 °F DB / 43 °F WB, Outdoor 70 °F DB, 25 ft pipe length) FXFQ07TVJU 7,500 8,500 FXFQ09TVJU 9,500 10,500 FXFQ12TVJU 12,000 13,500 FXFQ15TVJU 15,000 16,500 FXFQ18TVJU 18,000 20,000 FXFQ24TVJU 24,000 27,000 FXFQ30TVJU 30,000 34,000 FXFQ36TVJU 36,000 40,000 FXFQ48TVJU 48,000 54,000 C. Indoor Unit: 1. The Daikin indoor unit FXFQ_T shall be completely factory assembled and tested. Included in the unit is factory wiring, piping, electronic propor- tional expansion valve, control circuit board, fan motor thermal protector, flare connections, condensate drain pan, condensate drain pump, con- densate safety shutoff and alarm, self- diagnostics, auto - restart function, 3- minute fused time delay, and test run switch. 2. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes will be charged with dehydrated air prior to shipment from the factory. 3. Both refrigerant lines shall be insulated from the outdoor unit. 4. The round flow supply air flow can be field modified to 23 different airflow patterns to accommodate various installation configurations including corner installations. 5. Return air shall be through the concentric panel, which includes a resin net, mold resistant, antibacterial filter. 6. The indoor units shall be equipped with a condensate pan with antibacte- rial treatment and condensate pump. The condensate pump provides up to 33 -1/2" of lift from bottom of unit to top of drain piping and has a built in safety shutoff and alarm. 7. The indoor units shall be equipped with a return air thermistor. 8. The indoor unit will be separately powered with 208- 230V/1- phase /60Hz. 9. The voltage range will be 253 volts maximum and 187 volts minimum. 10. To save energy and optimize occupancy comfort, the indoor unit shall be equipped with built in occupancy sensor and surface temperature sensor. 11. Supplied air shall be directed automatically by four individually controlled louvers. D. Unit Cabinet: 1. The cabinet shall be space saving and shall be located into the ceiling. 2. Four auto - adjusted louvers shall be available to choose, which include standard, draft prevention and ceiling stain prevention. 3. The airflow of the unit shall have the ability to shut down outlets with mul- tiple patterns allowing for simpler installation in irregular spaces. 4. Fresh air intake shall be possible by way of Daikin's optional fresh air in- take kit. 5. A branch duct knockout shall exist for branch ducting of supply air. 6. The cabinet shall be constructed with sound absorbing foamed polysty- rene and polyethylene insulation. 7. Optional high efficiency air filters are available for each model unit. A. Fan: Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-37 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM 1. The fan shall be direct -drive DC (ECM) type fan, statically and dynamical- ly balanced impeller with three fan speeds available. 2. The fan motor shall operate on 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz with a motor output range from 0.08 to 0.16 HP. 3. The airflow rate shall be available in three manual settings. 4. The DC fan shall be able to automatically adjust the fan speed in 5 speeds based on the space load. 5. The fan motor shall be equipped as standard with adjustable external static pressure (ESP) settings to allow operation with the high efficiency air filter options. 6. The fan motor shall be thermally protected. B. Filter: 1. The return air shall be filtered by means of a washable long -life filter with mildew proof resin and antibacterial treatment. 2. Optional high efficiency disposable air filters shall be available. 3. Optional Self- Cleaning Filter Panel, which performs automatic filter clean- ing up to once a day, with dust collection box that indicates when to be emptied. C. Coil: 1. Coils shall be of the direct expansion type constructed from copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond. 2. The coil shall be of a waffle louver fin and high heat exchange, rifled bore tube design to ensure highly efficient performance. 3. The coil shall be a 2, or 3 -row cross fin copper evaporator coil with up to 21 FPI design completely factory tested. 4. The refrigerant connections shall be flare connections and the conden- sate will be 1 -1/4 inch outside diameter PVC. 5. A condensate pan with antibacterial treatment shall be located under the coil. 6. A thermistor will be located on the liquid and gas line. D. Electrical: 1. A separate power supply will be required of 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. The acceptable voltage range shall be 187 to 253 volts. 2. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor and outdoor unit shall be a maximum of 3,280 feet (total 6,560 feet). 3. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor unit and remote control- ler shall be a maximum distance of 1,640 feet. E. Control: 1. The unit shall have controls provided by Daikin to perform input functions necessary to operate the system. 2. The unit shall be compatible with interfacing with a BMS system via op- tional LonWorks or BACnet gateways. 3. The unit shall be compatible with a Daikin Intelligent Touch Manager ad- vanced multi -zone controller. 4. For the Sensing functions and the optional Self- Cleaning Filter functions, Remote controller BRC1 E73 /BRC1 E52B7 shall be used. Consult with Daikin prior to applying controls. F. Optional Accessories Available: 1. A high efficiency disposable air filter kit 2. Air intake kit Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-38 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM Self- Cleaning Filter Panel, which performs automatic filter cleaning up to once a day, with dust collection box that indicates when to be emptied. Remote "in- room" sensor kit (KRCS01 -4B). i. The Daikin wall mounted, hard wired remote sensor kit is recom- mended for when a NAV controller is not used or when the NAV con- troller is not located in the space that is being controlled. The sensor for detecting the temperature can be placed away from the indoor unit (branch wiring is included in the kit). 4.02 FXZQ -4 WAY CEILING CASSETTE UNIT (2'x2') A. General: Daikin indoor unit model FXZQ shall be a ceiling cassette fan coil unit, operable with R-41 DA refrigerant, equipped with an electronic expansion valve, for installation into the ceiling cavity equipped with an air panel grill. It shall be available in capacities from 7,500 Btu /h to 18,000 Btu /h. Model numbers are FXZQ07MVJU9, FXZQ09MVJU9, FXZQ12MVJU9, FXZQ15MVJU9, FXZQ18MVJU9 to be connected to outdoor unit model RXYQ / RXYMQ / RWEYQ heat pump and REYQ / RWEYQ heat recovery model. It shall be a four -way air distribution type, white (RAL9010), impact resistant with a washable decoration panel. The supply air is distributed via motorized louvers which can be horizontally and vertically adjusted from 0° to 90 °. Computerized PID control shall be used to control superheat to deliver a comfortable room temperature condition. The unit shall be equipped with a programmed drying mechanism that dehumidifies while limiting changes in room temperature when used with Daikin remote control BRC1 E72, BRC1 E73 and BRC2A71. The indoor units sound pressure shall range from 29 dB(A) to 34 dB(A) at low speed measured at 5 feet below the unit. B. Performance: Each unit's performance is based on nominal operating conditions: Model Number Cooling (Indoor 80 °F DB / 67 °F WB, Outdoor 95 °F DB, 25 ft pipe length) Heating (Indoor 47 °F DB / 43 °F W B, Outdoor 70T DB, 25 ft pipe length) FXZQ07MVJU9 7,500 8,700 FXZQ09MVJU9 9,500 11,100 FXZQ12MVJU9 12,000 14,000 FXZQ15MVJU9 15000 17,500 FXZQ18MVJU9 18,000 21,000 C. Indoor Unit: 1. The Daikin indoor unit FXZQ shall be completely factory assembled and tested. Included in the unit is factory wiring, piping, electronic proportional expansion valve, control circuit board, fan motor thermal protector, flare connections, condensate drain pan, condensate drain pump, condensate safety shutoff and alarm, self- diagnostics, auto - restart function, 3- minute fused time delay, and test run switch. 2. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes will be charged with dehydrated air prior to shipment from the factory. 3. Both refrigerant lines shall be insulated from the outdoor unit. 4. The 4 -way supply air flow can be field modified to 3 -way and 2 -way air- flow to accommodate various installation configurations including corner installations. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-39 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM 5. Return air shall be through the concentric panel, which includes a resin net mold resistant filter. 6. The indoor units shall be equipped with a condensate pan and conden- sate pump. The condensate pump provides up to 21" of lift and has a built in safety shutoff and alarm. 7. The indoor units shall be equipped with a return air thermistor. 8. All electrical components are reached through the decoration panel, which reduces the required side service access. 9. The indoor unit will be separately powered with 208- 230V/1- phase /60Hz. 10. The voltage range will be 253 volts maximum and 187 volts minimum. D. Unit Cabinet: 1. The cabinet shall be space saving and shall be located into the ceiling. 2. Three auto -swing positions shall be available to choose, which include standard, draft prevention and ceiling stain prevention. 3. The airflow of the unit shall have the ability to shut down one or two sides allowing for simpler corner installation. 4. Fresh air intake shall be possible by way of direct duct installation to the side of the indoor unit cabinet. 5. The cabinet shall be constructed with sound absorbing foamed polysty- rene and polyethylene insulation. E. Fan: 1. The fan shall be direct -drive turbo fan type with statically and dynamically balanced impeller with high and low fan speeds available. 2. The fan motor shall operate on 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz with a motor output range from 0.06 to 0.12 HP. 3. The airflow rate shall be available in high and low settings. 4. The fan motor shall be thermally protected. F. Filter: 1. The return air shall be filtered by means of a washable long -life filter with mildew proof resin. G. Coil: 1. Coils shall be of the direct expansion type constructed from copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond. 2. The coil shall be of a waffle louver fin and high heat exchange, rifled bore tube design to ensure highly efficient performance. 3. The coil shall be a 2 -row cross fin copper evaporator coil with 17 FPI de- sign completely factory tested. 4. The refrigerant connections shall be flare connections and the conden- sate will be 1 -1/32 inch outside diameter PVC. 5. A condensate pan shall be located under the coil. 6. A condensate pump with a 21 inch lift shall be located below the coil in the condensate pan with a built in safety alarm. 7. A thermistor will be located on the liquid and gas line. H. Electrical: 1. A separate power supply will be required of 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. The acceptable voltage range shall be 187 to 253 volts. 2. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor and outdoor unit shall be a maximum of 3,280 feet (total 6,560 feet). 3. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor unit and remote control- ler shall be a maximum distance of 1,640 feet. I. Control: Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-40 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM 1. The unit shall have controls provided by Daikin to perform input functions necessary to operate the system. 2. The unit shall be compatible with interfacing with a BMS system via op- tional LonWorks or BACnet gateways. 3. The unit shall be compatible with a Daikin Intelligent Touch Manager ad- vanced multi -zone controller. J. Optional Accessories Available: 1. Direct fresh air intake kit (KDDQ44X60). 2. Supply air duct connections. 3. Remote "in- room" sensor kit (KRCS01 -1B). i. The Daikin wall mounted, hard wired remote sensor kit is recom- mended for ceiling- embedded type fan coils, which often result in a difference between set temperature and actual temperature. The sen- sor for detecting the temperature can be placed away from the indoor unit (branch wiring is included in the kit). 4.03 FXMQ -M - CONCEALED CEILING DUCTED UNIT (Med. Static) A. General: Daikin indoor unit FXMQ -M shall be a built -in ceiling concealed fan coil unit, operable with refrigerant R-41 OA, equipped with an electronic ex- pansion valve, for installation into the ceiling cavity. It is constructed of a gal- vanized steel casing. It shall be available in capacities from 72,000 Btu /h to 96,000 Btu /h. Model numbers are FXMQ72MVJU and FXMQ96MVJU to be connected to outdoor unit model RXYQ / RWEYQ heat pump and REYQ / RWEYQ heat recovery model. It shall be a horizontal discharge air with hori- zontal return air configuration. All models feature a low height cabinet mak- ing them applicable to ceiling pockets that tend to be shallow. Computerized PID control shall be used to control superheat to deliver a comfortable room temperature condition. The unit shall be equipped with a programmed drying mechanism that dehumidifies while limiting changes in room temperature when used with Daikin remote control BRC1 E72, BRC1 E73 and BRC2A71. The indoor units sound pressure shall be 48 dB(A) at low speed measured 5 feet below the ducted unit. B. Performance: Each unit's performance is based on nominal operating condi- tions: C. Indoor Unit: 1. The Daikin indoor unit FXMQ -M shall be completely factory assembled and tested. Included in the unit is factory wiring, piping, electronic propor- tional expansion valve, control circuit board, fan motor thermal protector, flare connections, self- diagnostics, auto - restart function, 3- minute fused time delay, and test run switch. The unit shall have an adjustable external static pressure switch. 2. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes will be charged with dehydrated air prior to shipment from the factory. 3. Both refrigerant lines shall be insulated from the outdoor unit. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-41 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 Model Number Cooling Heating (Indoor 80T DB / 67T WB, (Indoor 47T DB / 43T WB, Outdoor 95T DB, 25 ft pipe length) Outdoor 70 °F DB, 25 ft pipe length) FXMQ72MVJU 72,000 96,000 FXMQ96MVJU 96,000 108,000 C. Indoor Unit: 1. The Daikin indoor unit FXMQ -M shall be completely factory assembled and tested. Included in the unit is factory wiring, piping, electronic propor- tional expansion valve, control circuit board, fan motor thermal protector, flare connections, self- diagnostics, auto - restart function, 3- minute fused time delay, and test run switch. The unit shall have an adjustable external static pressure switch. 2. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes will be charged with dehydrated air prior to shipment from the factory. 3. Both refrigerant lines shall be insulated from the outdoor unit. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-41 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM 4. The indoor units shall be equipped with a return air thermistor. 5. The indoor unit will be separately powered with 208- 230V/1- phase /60Hz. 6. The voltage range will be 253 volts maximum and 187 volts minimum. D. Unit Cabinet: 1. The cabinet shall be located into the ceiling and ducted to the supply and return openings. 2. The cabinet shall be constructed with sound absorbing foamed polysty- rene and polyethylene insulation. E. Fan: 1. The fan shall be direct -drive Sirocco type fan, statically and dynamically balanced impeller with high and low fan speeds available. 2. The fan motor shall operate on 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz, with a motor output of 0.51 HP. 3. The airflow rate shall be available in high and low settings. 4. The fan motor shall be thermally protected. 5. The fan motor shall be equipped as standard with adjustable external static pressure (ESP) settings. 6. Fan motor external static pressure for nominal airflow: F. Coil: 1. Coils shall be of the direct expansion type constructed from copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond. 2. The coil shall be of a waffle louver fin and high heat exchange, rifled bore tube design to ensure highly efficient performance. 3. The coil shall be a 3 row cross fin copper evaporator coil with 13 fpi de- sign completely factory tested. 4. The refrigerant connections shall be flare connections and the conden- sate will be 1 -5/16 inch outside diameter PVC. 5. A thermistor will be located on the liquid and gas line. G. Electrical: 1. A separate power supply will be required of 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. The acceptable voltage range shall be 187 to 253 volts. 2. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor and outdoor unit shall be a maximum of 3,280 feet (total 6,560 feet). 3. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor unit and remote control- ler shall be a maximum distance of 1,640 feet. H. Control: 1. The unit shall have controls provided by Daikin to perform input functions necessary to operate the system. 2. The unit shall be compatible with interfacing with a BMS system via op- tional LonWorks or BACnet gateways. 3. The unit shall be compatible with a Daikin Intelligent Touch Manager ad- vanced multi -zone controller. Optional Accessories Available: 1. Remote "in- room" sensor kit KRCS01 -1B (recommended). Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-42 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 Model Number Fan ESP in. WG FXMQ72MVJU 0.95-0.72 FXMQ96MVJU 0.95-0.8 F. Coil: 1. Coils shall be of the direct expansion type constructed from copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond. 2. The coil shall be of a waffle louver fin and high heat exchange, rifled bore tube design to ensure highly efficient performance. 3. The coil shall be a 3 row cross fin copper evaporator coil with 13 fpi de- sign completely factory tested. 4. The refrigerant connections shall be flare connections and the conden- sate will be 1 -5/16 inch outside diameter PVC. 5. A thermistor will be located on the liquid and gas line. G. Electrical: 1. A separate power supply will be required of 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. The acceptable voltage range shall be 187 to 253 volts. 2. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor and outdoor unit shall be a maximum of 3,280 feet (total 6,560 feet). 3. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor unit and remote control- ler shall be a maximum distance of 1,640 feet. H. Control: 1. The unit shall have controls provided by Daikin to perform input functions necessary to operate the system. 2. The unit shall be compatible with interfacing with a BMS system via op- tional LonWorks or BACnet gateways. 3. The unit shall be compatible with a Daikin Intelligent Touch Manager ad- vanced multi -zone controller. Optional Accessories Available: 1. Remote "in- room" sensor kit KRCS01 -1B (recommended). Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-42 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM i. The Daikin wall mounted, hard wired remote sensor kit is recom- mended for ceiling- embedded type fan coils, which often result in a difference between set temperature and actual temperature. The sen- sor for detecting the temperature can be placed away from the indoor unit (branch wiring is included in the kit). 4.04 FXMQ_PA - CONCEALED CEILING DUCTED UNIT (Med. Static) A. General: Daikin indoor unit FXMQ_PA shall be a built -in ceiling concealed fan coil unit, operable with refrigerant R -410A, equipped with an electronic expansion valve, direct -drive DC (ECM) type fan with auto CFM adjustment at commissioning, for installation into the ceiling cavity. It is constructed of a galvanized steel casing. It shall be available in capacities from 7,500 Btu /h to 48,000 Btu /h. Model numbers are FXMQ07PAVJU, FXMQ09PAVJU, FXMQ12PAVJU, FXMQ15PAVJU, FXMQ18PAVJU, FXMQ24PAVJU, FXMQ30PAVJU, FXMQ36PAVJU, FXMQ48PAVJU, and FXMQ54PAVJU to be connected to outdoor unit model RXYQ / RXYMQ / RWEYQ heat pump and REYQ / RWEYQ heat recovery model. It shall be a horizontal discharge air with horizontal return air configuration. All models feature a low height cabinet making them applicable to ceiling pockets that tend to be shallow. Computerized PID control shall be used to control superheat to deliver a comfortable room temperature condition. The unit shall be equipped with a programmed drying mechanism that dehumidifies while limiting changes in room temperature when used with Daikin remote control BRC1 E72, BRC1 E73 and BRC2A71. Included as standard equipment, a condensate drain pan and drain pump kit that pumps to 18 -3/8" from the drain pipe open- ing. The indoor units sound pressure shall range from 29 dB(A) to 43 dB(A) at low speed measured 5 feet below the ducted unit. B. Performance: Each unit's performance is based on nominal operating condi- tions: Model Number Cooling (Indoor 80 °F DB / 67 °F WB, Outdoor 95 °F DB, 25 ft pipe length) Heating (Indoor 47 °F DB / 43 °F W B, Outdoor 70 °F DB, 25 ft pipe length) FXMQ07PAVJU 7,500 8,500 FXMQ09PAVJU 9,500 10.500 FXMQ12PAVJU 12,000 13,500 FXMQ15PAVJU 15,000 16,500 FXMQ18PAVJU 18,000 20,000 FXMQ24PAVJU 24,000 27,000 FXMQ30PAVJU 30,000 34,000 FXMQ36PAVJU 36,000 40,000 FXMQ48PAVJU 48,000 54,000 FXMQ54PAVJU 54,000 60,000 C. Indoor Unit: 1. The Daikin indoor unit FXMQ_PA shall be completely factory assembled and tested. Included in the unit is factory wiring, piping, electronic propor- tional expansion valve, control circuit board, fan motor thermal protector, flare connections, condensate drain pan, condensate drain pump, con- densate safety shutoff and alarm, self- diagnostics, auto - restart function, 3- minute fused time delay, and test run switch. The unit shall be equip- ment with automatically adjusting external static pressure logic that is se- Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-43 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM lectable during commissioning. This adjusts the airflow based on the in- stalled external static pressure. 2. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes will be charged with dehydrated air prior to shipment from the factory. 3. Both refrigerant lines shall be insulated from the outdoor unit. 4. The indoor units shall be equipped with a condensate pan and conden- sate pump. The condensate pump provides up to 18 -3/8" of lift from the center of the drain outlet and has a built in safety shutoff and alarm. 5. The indoor units shall be equipped with a return air thermistor. 6. The indoor unit will be separately powered with 208- 230V/1- phase /60Hz. 7. The voltage range will be 253 volts maximum and 187 volts minimum. D. Unit Cabinet: 1. The cabinet shall be located into the ceiling and ducted to the supply and return openings. 2. The cabinet shall be constructed with sound absorbing foamed polysty- rene and polyethylene insulation. E. Fan: 1. The fan shall be direct -drive DC (ECM) type fan, statically and dynamical- ly balanced impeller with three fan speeds available. 2. The unit shall be equipment with automatically adjusting external static pressure logic selectable during commissioning. 3. The fan motor shall operate on 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz with a motor output range of 0.12 to 0.47 HP respectively. 4. The airflow rate shall be available in three settings. 5. The fan motor shall be thermally protected. 6. The fan motor shall be equipped as standard with adjustable external static pressure (ESP) settings. 7. Fan motor external static pressure range for nominal airflow: Model Number Fan ESP in. WG FXMQ07PAVJU 0.40-0.12 FXMQ09PAVJU 0.40-0.12 FXMQ12PAVJU 0.40-0.12 FXMQ15PAVJU 0.80-0.20 FXMQ18PAVJU 0.80-0.20 FXMQ24PAVJU 0.80-0.20 FXMQ30PAVJU 0.80-0.20 FXMQ36PAVJU 0.80-0.20 FXMQ48PAVJU 0.80-0.20 FXMQ54PAVJU 0.56-0.20 Coil: 1. Coils shall be of the direct expansion type constructed from copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond. 2. The coil shall be of a waffle louver fin and high heat exchange, rifled bore tube design to ensure highly efficient performance. 3. The coil shall be a 3 row cross fin copper evaporator coil with 15 fpi de- sign completely factory tested. 4. The refrigerant connections shall be flare connections and the conden- sate will be 1 -1/4" outside diameter PVC. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-44 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM 5. A condensate pan shall be located under the coil. 6. A condensate pump with an 18 -3/8" lift shall be located below the coil in the condensate pan with a built in safety alarm. 7. A thermistor will be located on the liquid and gas line. G. Electrical: 1. A separate power supply will be required of 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. The acceptable voltage range shall be 187 to 253 volts. 2. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor and outdoor unit shall be a maximum of 3,280 feet (total 6,560 feet). 3. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor unit and remote control- ler shall be a maximum distance of 1,640 feet. H. Control: 1. The unit shall have controls provided by Daikin to perform input functions necessary to operate the system. 2. The unit shall be compatible with interfacing with a BMS system via op- tional LonWorks or BACnet gateways. 3. The unit shall be compatible with a Daikin Intelligent Touch Manager ad- vanced multi -zone controller. I. Optional Accessories Available: 1. Remote "in- room" sensor kit KRCS01 -413 (recommended). i. The Daikin wall mounted, hard wired remote sensor kit is recom- mended for when a NAV controller is not used or when the NAV controller is not located in the space that is being controlled. The sensor for detecting the temperature can be placed away from the indoor unit (branch wiring is included in the kit). 2. MERV 13 Filter kit. Can be configured for right or left access. Filters re- placeable without tools. 3. Air side Economizer designed for connection to the rear of FXMQ30- 54PAVJU. 4.05 FXMQ_PB - CONCEALED CEILING DUCTED UNIT (Med. Static) A. General: Daikin indoor unit FXMQ_PB shall be a built -in ceiling concealed fan coil unit, operable with refrigerant R -410A, equipped with an electronic expansion valve, direct -drive DC (ECM) type fan with auto CFM adjustment at commissioning, for installation into the ceiling cavity. It is constructed of a galvanized steel casing. It shall be available in capacities from 7,500 Btu /h to 48,000 Btu /h. Model numbers are FXMQ07PBVJU, FXMQ09PBVJU, FXMQ12PBVJU, FXMQ15PBVJU, FXMQI8PBVJU, FXMQ24PBVJU, FXMQ30PBVJU, FXMQ36PBVJU, FXMQ48PBVJU, and FXMQ54PBVJU to be connected to outdoor unit model RXYQ / RXYMQ / RWEYQ heat pump and REYQ / RWEYQ heat recovery model. It shall be a horizontal discharge air with horizontal return air configuration. All models feature a low height cabinet making them applicable to ceiling pockets that tend to be shallow. Computerized PID control shall be used to control superheat to deliver a comfortable room temperature condition. The unit shall be equipped with a programmed drying mechanism that dehumidifies while limiting changes in room temperature when used with Daikin remote control BRC1 E72, BRC1 E73 and BRC2A71. Included as standard equipment, a condensate drain pan and drain pump kit that pumps to 18 -3/8" from the drain pipe open- ing. The indoor units sound pressure shall range from 29 dB(A) to 43 dB(A) at low speed measured 5 feet below the ducted unit. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-45 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM B. Performance: Each unit's performance is based on nominal operating condi- tions: Model Number Cooling (Indoor 80 °F DB / 67 °F WB, Outdoor 95 °F DB, 25 ft pipe length) Heating (Indoor 47 °F DB / 43 °F W B, Outdoor 70 °F DB, 25 ft pipe length) FXMQ07PBVJU 7,500 8,500 FXMQ09PBVJU 9,500 10.500 FXMQ12PBVJU 12,000 13,500 FXMQ15PBVJU 15,000 16,500 FXMQ18PBVJU 18,000 20,000 FXMQ24PBVJU 24,000 27,000 FXMQ30PBVJU 30,000 34,000 FXMQ36PBVJU 36,000 40,000 FXMQ48PBVJU 48,000 54,000 FXMQ54PBVJU 54,000 60,000 C. Indoor Unit: 1. The Daikin indoor unit FXMQ_PB shall be completely factory assembled and tested. Included in the unit is factory wiring, piping, electronic propor- tional expansion valve, control circuit board, fan motor thermal protector, flare connections, condensate drain pan, condensate drain pump, con- densate safety shutoff and alarm, self- diagnostics, auto - restart function, 3- minute fused time delay, and test run switch. The unit shall be equip- ment with automatically adjusting external static pressure logic that is se- lectable during commissioning. This adjusts the airflow based on the in- stalled external static pressure. 2. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes will be charged with dehydrated air prior to shipment from the factory. 3. Both refrigerant lines shall be insulated from the outdoor unit. 4. The indoor units shall be equipped with a condensate pan and conden- sate pump. The condensate pump provides up to 18 -3/8" of lift from the center of the drain outlet and has a built in safety shutoff and alarm. 5. The indoor units shall be equipped with a return air thermistor. 6. The indoor unit will be separately powered with 208-230V/1- phase /60Hz. 7. The voltage range will be 253 volts maximum and 187 volts minimum. D. Unit Cabinet: 1. The cabinet shall be located into the ceiling and ducted to the supply and return openings. 2. The cabinet shall be constructed with sound absorbing foamed polysty- rene and polyethylene insulation. E. Fan: 1. The fan shall be direct -drive DC (ECM) type fan, statically and dynamical- ly balanced impeller with three fan speeds available. 2. The unit shall be equipment with automatically adjusting external static pressure logic selectable during commissioning. 3. The fan motor shall operate on 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz with a motor output range of 0.12 to 0.47 HP respectively. 4. The airflow rate shall be available in three settings. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-46 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM 5. The fan motor shall be thermally protected. 6. The fan motor shall be equipped as standard with adjustable external static pressure (ESP) settings. 7. Fan motor external static pressure range for nominal airflow: Model Number Fan ESP in. WG FXMQ07PBVJU 0.40-0.12 FXMQ09PBVJU 0.40-0.12 FXMQ12PBVJU 0.40-0.12 FXMQ15PBVJU 0.80-0.20 FXMQ18PBVJU 0.80-0.20 FXMQ24PBVJU 0.80-0.20 FXMQ30PBVJU 0.80-0.20 FXMQ36PBVJU 0.80-0.20 FXMQ48PBVJU 0.80-0.20 FXMQ54PBVJU 0.56-0.20 F. Coil: 1. Coils shall be of the direct expansion type constructed from copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond. 2. The coil shall be of a waffle louver fin and high heat exchange, rifled bore tube design to ensure highly efficient performance. 3. The coil shall be a 3 row cross fin copper evaporator coil with 15 fpi de- sign completely factory tested. 4. The refrigerant connections shall be flare connections and the conden- sate will be 1 -1/4" outside diameter PVC. 5. A condensate pan shall be located under the coil. 6. A condensate pump with an 18 -3/8" lift shall be located below the coil in the condensate pan with a built in safety alarm. 7. A thermistor will be located on the liquid and gas line. G. Electrical: 1. A separate power supply will be required of 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. The acceptable voltage range shall be 187 to 253 volts. 2. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor and outdoor unit shall be a maximum of 3,280 feet (total 6,560 feet). 3. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor unit and remote control- ler shall be a maximum distance of 1,640 feet. H. Control: 1. The unit shall have controls provided by Daikin to perform input functions necessary to operate the system. 2. The unit shall be compatible with interfacing with a BMS system via op- tional LonWorks or BACnet gateways. 3. The unit shall be compatible with a Daikin Intelligent Touch Manager ad- vanced multi -zone controller. I. Optional Accessories Available: 1. Remote "in- room" sensor kit KRCS01 -4B (recommended). i. The Daikin wall mounted, hard wired remote sensor kit is recom- mended for when a NAV controller is not used or when the NAV controller is not located in the space that is being controlled. The Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-47 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM sensor for detecting the temperature can be placed away from the indoor unit (branch wiring is included in the kit). 2. MERV 13 Filter kit. Can be configured for right or left access. Filters re- placeable without tools. 3. Air side Economizer designed for connection to the rear of FXMQ30- 54PBVJU. 4.06 FXDQ- SLIM DUCT CONCEALED CEILING UNIT A. General: Daikin indoor unit model FXDQ shall be a Slim, built -in ceiling con- cealed fan coil unit, operable with R -410A refrigerant, equipped with an elec- tronic expansion valve, for installation into the ceiling cavity. The unit shall be constructed of a galvanized steel casing. It shall be available in capacities from 7,000 Btu /h to 24,000 Btu /h. Model numbers are FXDQ07MVJU, FXDQ09MVJU, FXDQ12MVJU, FXDQ18MVJU, and FXDQ24MVJU to be connected to outdoor unit model RXYQ / RXYMQ / RWEYQ heat pump and REYQ / RWEYQ heat recovery model. It shall be a horizontal discharge air with horizontal return air or bottom return air configuration. All models feature a very low height (7 -7/8 ") making them applicable to ceiling pockets that tend to be shallow. Computerized PID control shall be used to control superheat to deliver a comfortable room temperature condition. The unit shall be equipped with a programmed drying mechanism that dehumidifies while limit- ing changes in room temperature when used with Daikin remote control BRC1E72, BRC1E73 and BRC2A71. Included as standard equipment, a long -life filter that is mold resistant and a condensate drain pan and drain pump kit that pumps to 23 -5/8" from the drain pipe opening. The indoor units sound pressure level shall range from 29 dB(A) to 32 dB(A) at low speed and 33 dB(A) to 36 dB(A) at high speed 5 feet below the suction grille. B. Performance: Each unit's performance is based on nominal operating condi- tions: Model Number Cooling (Indoor 80T DB / 67T WB, Outdoor 95T DB, 25 ft pipe length) Heating (Indoor 47T DB 143T WB, Outdoor 70T DB, 25 ft pipe length) FXD007MVJU 7,500 8,500 FXDQ09MVJU 9,500 10,500 FXDQ12MVJU 12,000 13,500 FXDQ18MVJU 18,000 20,000 FXDQ24MVJU 24,000 27,000 C. Indoor Unit: 1. The Daikin indoor unit FXDQ shall be completely factory assembled and tested. Included in the unit is factory wiring, piping, electronic proportional expansion valve, control circuit board, fan motor thermal protector, flare connections, condensate drain pan, condensate drain pump, condensate safety shutoff and alarm, self- diagnostics, auto - restart function, 3- minute fused time delay, and test run switch. The unit shall have adjustable ex- ternal static pressure capabilities. 2. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes will be charged with dehydrated air prior to shipment from the factory. 3. Both refrigerant lines shall be insulated from the outdoor unit. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-48 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM 4. Return air shall be through a resin net mold resistant filter. 5. The indoor units shall be equipped with a condensate pan and conden- sate pump. The condensate pump provides up to 23 -5/8" of lift from the center of the drain outlet and has a built in safety shutoff and alarm. 6. The indoor units shall be equipped with a return air thermistor. 7. The indoor unit will be separately powered with 208- 230V/1- phase /60Hz. 8. The voltage range will be 253 volts maximum and 187 volts minimum. 9. Switch box shall be reached from the side or bottom for ease of service and maintenance. D. Unit Cabinet: 1. The cabinet shall be located into the ceiling and ducted to the supply and return openings. 2. The cabinet shall be constructed with sound absorbing foamed polysty- rene and polyethylene insulation. Fan: 1. The fan shall be direct -drive Sirocco type fan, statically and dynamically balanced impeller with high and low fan speeds available. 2. The fan motor shall operate on 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz with a motor output range from 62W to 130W. 3. The airflow rate shall be available in high and low settings. 4. The fan motor shall be thermally protected. 5. The fan motor shall be equipped as standard with adjustable external static pressure (ESP) settings. 6. Fan motor external static pressure range for nominal airflow: Model Number Fan ESP in. WG FXDQ07MVJU 0.12-0.04 FXDQ09MVJU 0.12-0.04 FXDQ12MVJU 0.12-0.04 FXDQ18MVJU 0.17-0.06 FXDQ24MVJU 0.17-0.06 F. Filter: 1. The return air shall be filtered by means of a washable long -life filter with mildew proof resin. G. Coil: 1. Coils shall be of the direct expansion type constructed from copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond. 2. The coil shall be of a waffle louver fin and high heat exchange, rifled bore tube design to ensure highly efficient performance. 3. The coil shall be a 2 or 3 -row cross fin copper evaporator coil with 14 FPI design completely factory tested. 4. The refrigerant connections shall be flare connections and the conden- sate will be 1- 1/32" outside diameter PVC. 5. A condensate pan shall be located under the coil. 6. A condensate pump with a 23 -5/8" lift shall be located below the coil in the condensate pan with a built in safety alarm. 7. A thermistor will be located on the liquid and gas line. H. Electrical: Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-49 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM 1. A separate power supply will be required of 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. The acceptable voltage range shall be 187 to 253 volts. 2. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor and outdoor unit shall be a maximum of 3,280 feet (total 6,560 feet). 3. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor unit and remote control- ler shall be a maximum distance of 1,640 feet. Control: 1. The unit shall have controls provided by Daikin to perform input functions necessary to operate the system. 2. The unit shall be compatible with interfacing with a BMS system via op- tional LonWorks or BACnet gateways. 3. The unit shall be compatible with a Daikin Intelligent Touch Manager ad- vanced multi -zone controller. Model Number Cooling (Indoor 80T DB / 67 °F WB, Outdoor 95 °F DB, 25 ft pipe length) Heating (Indoor 47 °F DB / 43T W B, Outdoor 70 °F DB, 25 ft pipe length) FXHQ12MVJU 12,000 13,500 FXHQ24MVJU 24,000 27,000 FXHQ36MVJU 36,000 40,000 J. Optional Accessories Available: 1. Remote "in- room" sensor kit KRCS01 -1B (recommended). i. The Daikin wall mounted, hard wired remote sensor kit is recom- mended for ceiling- embedded type fan coils, which often result in a difference between set temperature and actual temperature. The sen- sor for detecting the temperature can be placed away from the indoor unit (branch wiring is included in the kit). 4.07 FXHQ- CEILING SUSPENDED CASSETTE UNIT A. General: Daikin indoor unit FXHQ shall be a ceiling suspended fan coil unit, operable with refrigerant R-41 OA, equipped with an electronic expansion valve, for installation onto a wall or ceiling within a conditioned space. This compact design with finished white casing shall be available in capacities from 12,000 Btu /h to 36,000 Btu /h. Model numbers are FXHQ12MVJU, FXHQ24MVJU and FXHQ36MVJU to be connected to outdoor unit model RXYQ / RXYMQ / RWEYQ heat pump and REYQ / RWEYQ heat recovery model. Computerized PID control shall be used to control superheat to deliv- er a comfortable room temperature condition. The unit shall be equipped with a programmed drying mechanism that dehumidifies while limiting changes in room temperature when used with Daikin remote control BRC1 E72, BRC1 E73 and BRC2A71. A mildew - proof, polystyrene condensate drain pan and resin net mold resistant filter shall be included as standard equipment. The indoor units sound pressure shall range from 32 dB(A) to 38 dB(A) at low speed measured at 3.3 feet below and from the unit. B. Performance: Each unit's performance is based on nominal operating condi- tions: Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-50 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM C. Indoor Unit: 1. The Daikin indoor unit FXHQ shall be completely factory assembled and tested. Included in the unit is factory wiring, piping, electronic proportional expansion valve, control circuit board, fan motor thermal protector, flare connections, condensate drain pan, self- diagnostics, auto - restart function, 3- minute fused time delay, and test run switch. The unit shall have an auto - swing louver which ensures efficient air distribution, which closes automati- cally when the unit stops. The remote controller shall be able to set five (5) steps of discharge angle. The front grille shall be easily removed for wash- ing. The discharge angle shall automatically set at the same angle as the previous operation upon restart. The drain pipe can be fitted to from the rear, top or left and right sides of the unit. 2. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes will be charged with dehydrated air prior to shipment from the factory. 3. Both refrigerant lines shall be insulated from the outdoor unit. 4. Return air shall be through a resin net mold resistant filter. 5. The indoor units shall be equipped with a condensate pan. 6. The indoor units shall be equipped with a return air thermistor. 7. The indoor unit will be separately powered with 208-230V/1- phase /60Hz. 8. The voltage range will be 253 volts maximum and 187 volts minimum. D. Unit Cabinet: 1. The cabinet shall be affixed to a factory supplied wall /ceiling hanging brackets and located in the conditioned space. 2. The cabinet shall be constructed with sound absorbing foamed polysty- rene and polyethylene insulation. E. Fan: 1. The fan shall be a direct -drive cross -flow fan, statically and dynamically balanced impeller with high and low fan speeds available. 2. The fan motor shall operate on 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz with a motor output range 62W to 130W. 3. The airflow rate shall be available in high and low settings. 4. The fan motor shall be thermally protected. F. Coil: 1. Coils shall be of the direct expansion type constructed from copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond. 2. The coil shall be of a waffle louver fin and high heat exchange, rifled bore tube design to ensure highly efficient performance. 3. The coil shall be a 2 -row cross fin copper evaporator coil with 15 fpi de- sign completely factory tested. 4. The refrigerant connections shall be flare connections and the conden- sate will be 1 inch outside diameter PVC. 5. A thermistor will be located on the liquid and gas line. 6. A condensate pan shall be located in the unit. G. Electrical: 1. A separate power supply will be required of 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. The acceptable voltage range shall be 187 to 253 volts. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-51 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM 2. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor and outdoor unit shall be a maximum of 3,280 feet (total 6,560 feet). Model Number Cooling (Indoor 80 °F DB / 67 °F WB, Outdoor 95 °F DB, 25 ft pipe length) Heating (Indoor 47 °F DB / 43 °F W B, Outdoor 70 °F DB, 25 ft pipe length) FXAQ07PVJU 7,500 8,500 FXAQ09PVJU 9,500 10,500 FXAQ12PVJU 12,000 13,500 FXAQ18PVJU 18,000 20,000 FXAQ24PVJU 24,000 26,500 3. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor unit and remote control- ler shall be a maximum distance of 1,640 feet. Control: 1. The unit shall have controls provided by Daikin to perform input functions necessary to operate the system. 2. The unit shall be compatible with interfacing with a BMS system via op- tional LonWorks or BACnet gateways. 3. The unit shall be compatible with a Daikin Intelligent Touch Manager ad- vanced multi -zone controller. Optional Accessories Available: 1. Remote "in- room" sensor kit KRCS01 -113. 2. A condensate pump (DACA- CP3 -1). 4.08 FXAQ -WALL MOUNTED UNIT A. General: Daikin indoor unit FXAQ shall be a wall mounted fan coil unit, oper- able with refrigerant R -410A, equipped with an electronic expansion valve, for installation onto a wall within a conditioned space. This compact design with finished white casing shall be available in capacities from 7,500 Btu /h to 24,000 Btu /h. Model numbers are FXAQ07PVJU, FXAQ09PVJU, FXAQ12PVJU, FXAQ18PVJU and FXAQ24PVJU to be connected to outdoor unit model RXYQ / RXYMQ / RWEYQ heat pump and REYQ / RWEYQ heat recovery model. Computerized PID control shall be used to control super- heat to deliver a comfortable room temperature condition. The unit shall be equipped with a programmed drying mechanism that dehumidifies while limit- ing changes in room temperature when used with Daikin remote control BRC1 E72, BRC1 E73 and BRC2A71. A mildew - proof, polystyrene conden- sate drain pan and resin net mold resistant filter shall be included as standard equipment. The indoor units sound pressure shall range from 31 dB(A) to 41 dB(A) at low speed measured at 3.3 feet below and from the unit. B. Performance: Each unit's performance is based on nominal operating condi- tions: Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-52 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM C. Indoor Unit: 1. The Daikin indoor unit FXAQ shall be completely factory assembled and tested. Included in the unit is factory wiring, piping, electronic proportional expansion valve, control circuit board, fan motor thermal protector, flare connections, condensate drain pan, self- diagnostics, auto - restart function, 3- minute fused time delay, and test run switch. The unit shall have an auto - swing louver which ensures efficient air distribution, which closes automati- cally when the unit stops. The remote controller shall be able to set five (5) steps of discharge angle. The front grille shall be easily removed for wash- ing. The discharge angle shall automatically set at the same angle as the previous operation upon restart. The drain pipe can be fitted to from either left or right sides. 2. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes will be charged with dehydrated air prior to shipment from the factory. 3. Both refrigerant lines shall be insulated from the outdoor unit. 4. Return air shall be through a resin net mold resistant filter. 5. The indoor units shall be equipped with a condensate pan. 6. The indoor units shall be equipped with a return air thermistor. 7. The indoor unit will be separately powered with 208- 230V/1- phase /60Hz. 8. The voltage range will be 253 volts maximum and 187 volts minimum. D. Unit Cabinet: 1. The cabinet shall be affixed to a factory supplied wall mounting template and located in the conditioned space. 2. The cabinet shall be constructed with sound absorbing foamed polysty- rene and polyethylene insulation. E. Fan: 1. The fan shall be a direct -drive cross -flow fan, statically and dynamically balanced impeller with high and low fan speeds available. 2. The fan motor shall operate on 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz with a motor output range 0.054 to 0.058 HP. 3. The airflow rate shall be available in high and low settings. 4. The fan motor shall be thermally protected. F. Coil: 1. Coils shall be of the direct expansion type constructed from copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond. 2. The coil shall be of a waffle louver fin and high heat exchange, rifled bore tube design to ensure highly efficient performance. 3. The coil shall be a 2 -row cross fin copper evaporator coil with 14 fpi de- sign completely factory tested. 4. The refrigerant connections shall be flare connections and the conden- sate will be 11/16 inch outside diameter PVC. 5. A thermistor will be located on the liquid and gas line. 6. A condensate pan shall be located in the unit. G. Electrical: 1. A separate power supply will be required of 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. The acceptable voltage range shall be 187 to 253 volts. 2. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor and outdoor unit shall be a maximum of 3,280 feet (total 6,560 feet). 3. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor unit and remote control- ler shall be a maximum distance of 1,640 feet. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-53 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM Control: 1. The unit shall have controls provided by Daikin to perform input functions necessary to operate the system. 2. The unit shall be compatible with interfacing with a BMS system via op- tional LonWorks or BACnet gateways. 3. The unit shall be compatible with a Daikin Intelligent Touch Manager ad- vanced multi -zone controller. Optional Accessories Available: 1. Remote "in- room" sensor kit KRCS01 -113. 2. A condensate pump (DACA- CP3 -1) 4.09 FXLQ - FLOOR CONSOLE UNIT A. General: Daikin indoor unit FXLQ shall be a floor or low wall mounted con- sole fan coil unit, operable with refrigerant R-41 OA, equipped with an elec- tronic expansion valve, for installation within a conditioned space. It shall have a top discharge air grill and resin net mold resistant filtered bottom re- turn air. This compact design with finished ivory white casing shall be availa- ble in capacities from 7,500 Btu /h to 24,000 Btu /h. Model numbers are FXLQ07MVJU9, FXLQ09MVJU9, FXLQ12MVJU9, FXLQ18MVJU9 and FXLQ24MVJU9 to be connected to outdoor unit model RXYQ / RXYMQ / RWEYQ heat pump and REYQ / RWEYQ heat recovery model. The cabinets can be mounted on the floor with refrigerant and condensate lines directed downward or affixed to the wall with horizontal refrigerant and condensate knockouts. Computerized PID control shall be used to control superheat to deliver a comfortable room temperature condition. The unit shall be equipped with a programmed drying mechanism that dehumidifies while limiting chang- es in room temperature when used with Daikin remote control BRC1 E72, BRC1 E73 and BRC2A71. A mold- resistant, resin net air filter shall be includ- ed as standard equipment. The indoor units sound pressure shall range from 35 dB(A) to 40 dB(A) at high speed measured at 5 feet away and 5 feet high. B. Performance: Each unit's performance is based on nominal operating condi- tions: C. Indoor Unit: 1. The Daikin indoor unit FXLQ shall be completely factory assembled and tested. Included in the unit is factory wiring, piping, electronic proportional expansion valve, control circuit board, fan motor thermal protector, flare connections, self- diagnostics, auto - restart function, 3- minute fused time delay, and test run switch. The unit shall have an auto -swing louver which ensures efficient air distribution, which closes automatically when the unit stops. 2. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes will be charged with dehydrated air prior to shipment from the factory. Reece, Nolan Model Number Cooling (Indoor 80 °F DB / 67 °F WB, Outdoor 95T DB, 25 ft pipe length) Heating (Indoor 4TF DB / 43T W B, Outdoor 70T DB, 25 ft pipe length) FXLQ07MVJU9 7,500 8,500 FXLQ09MVJU9 9,500 10,500 P A120rP2MIQAJU9 12,000239500 -54 13,500 Orange Co FXLQ18MVJU9 18,000 20,000 FXLQ24MVJU9 24,000 27,000 my Board of Elections Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM 3. Both refrigerant lines shall be insulated from the outdoor unit. 4. Return air shall be through a resin net mold resistant filter. 5. Condensate draining shall be made via gravity or external condensate pump. 6. The indoor units shall be equipped with a return air thermistor. 7. The indoor unit will be separately powered with 208- 230V/1- phase /60Hz. 8. The voltage range will be 253 volts maximum and 187 volts minimum. D. Unit Cabinet: 1. The cabinet shall be affixed to a factory supplied wall mounting template and located in the conditioned space. 2. The cabinet shall be constructed with sound absorbing fiberglass ure- thane foam insulation. 3. Maintenance access shall be a minimum of % inch in the rear, 4 inches on the right and left sides. E. Fan: 1. The fan shall be a direct -drive Sirocco type fan, statically and dynamically balanced impeller with high and low fan speeds available. 2. The fan motor shall operate on 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz with a motor output range 0.034 to 0.047 HP. 3. The airflow rate shall be available in high and low settings. 4. The fan motor shall be thermally protected. F. Filter: 1. The return air shall be filtered by means of a washable long -life filter with mildew proof resin. G. Coil: 1. Coils shall be of the direct expansion type constructed from copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond. 2. The coil shall be of a waffle louver fin and high heat exchange, rifled bore tube design to ensure highly efficient performance. 3. The coil shall be a 3 -row cross fin copper evaporator coil with 17 fpi de- sign completely factory tested. 4. The refrigerant connections shall be flare connections and the conden- sate will be 27/32 inch outside diameter PVC. 5. A thermistor will be located on the liquid and gas line. H. Electrical: 1. A separate power supply will be required of 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. The acceptable voltage range shall be 187 to 253 volts. 2. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor and outdoor unit shall be a maximum of 3,280 feet (total 6,560 feet). 3. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor unit and remote control- ler shall be a maximum distance of 1,640 feet. I. Control: 1. The unit shall have controls provided by Daikin to perform input functions necessary to operate the system. 2. The unit shall be compatible with interfacing with a BMS system via op- tional LonWorks or BACnet gateways. 3. The unit shall be compatible with a Daikin Intelligent Touch Manager ad- vanced multi -zone controller. J. Optional Accessories Available: 1. Remote "in- room" sensor kit KRCS01 -1 B 2. Condensate pump (DACA- CP1 -3) Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-55 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM 4.10 FXNQ- FLOOR CONSOLE CONCEALED UNIT A. General: Daikin indoor unit FXNQ shall be a floor or wall mounted console fan coil unit, operable with refrigerant R -410A, equipped with an electronic expansion valve, for installation within a conditioned space. It shall have a top discharge air grill and filtered bottom return air. This compact design un- finished casing shall be available in capacities from 7,500 Btu /h to 24,000 Btu /h. Model numbers are FXNQ07MVJU9, FXNQ09MVJU9, FXNQ12MVJU9, FXNQ18MVJU9 and FXNQ24MVJU9 to be connected to outdoor unit model RXYQ / RXYMQ / RWEYQ heat pump and REYQ / RWEYQ heat recovery model. The cabinets can be mounted on the floor with refrigerant and condensate lines directed downward or affixed to the wall with horizontal refrigerant and condensate knockouts. Computerized PID control shall be used to control superheat to deliver a comfortable room tem- perature condition. The unit shall be equipped with a programmed drying mechanism that dehumidifies while limiting changes in room temperature when used with Daikin remote control BRC1 E72, BRC1 E73 and BRC2A71. A mold- resistant, resin net air filter shall be included as standard equipment. The indoor units sound pressure shall range from 35 dB(A) to 40 dB(A) at high speed measured at 5 feet away and 5 feet high. B. Performance: Each unit's performance is based on nominal operating condi- tions: C. Indoor Unit: 1. The Daikin indoor unit FXNQ shall be completely factory assembled and tested. Included in the unit is factory wiring, piping, electronic proportional expansion valve, control circuit board, fan motor thermal protector, flare connections, self- diagnostics, auto - restart function, 3- minute fused time Model Number Cooling (Indoor 80 °F DB / 67 °F WB, Outdoor 95 °F DB, 25 ft pipe length) Heating (Indoor 47 °F DB / 43 °F W B, Outdoor 70 °F DB, 25 ft pipe length) FXNQ07MVJU9 7,500 8,500 FXNQ09MVJU9 9,500 10,500 FXNQ12MVJU9 12,000 13,500 FXNQ18MVJU9 18,000 20,000 FXNQ24MVJU9 24,000 27,000 delay, and test run switch. The unit shall have an auto -swing louver which ensures efficient air distribution, which closes automatically when the unit stops. 2. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes will be charged with dehydrated air prior to shipment from the factory. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-56 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM 3. Both refrigerant lines shall be insulated from the outdoor unit. 4. Return air shall be through a resin net mold resistant filter. 5. Condensate draining shall be made via gravity or external condensate pump. 6. The indoor units shall be equipped with a return air thermistor. 7. The indoor unit will be separately powered with 208- 230V/1- phase /60Hz. 8. The voltage range will be 253 volts maximum and 187 volts minimum. D. Unit Cabinet: 1. The cabinet shall be affixed to a factory supplied wall mounting template and located in the conditioned space. 2. The cabinet shall be constructed with sound absorbing fiberglass ure- thane foam insulation. 3. Maintenance access shall be a minimum of % inch in the rear, 4 inches on the right and left sides. E. Fan: 1. The fan shall be a direct -drive Sirocco type fan, statically and dynamically balanced impeller with high and low fan speeds available. 2. The fan motor shall operate on 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz with a motor output range 0.034 to 0.047 HP. 3. The airflow rate shall be available in high and low settings. 4. The fan motor shall be thermally protected. F. Filter: 1. The return air shall be filtered by means of a washable long -life filter with mildew proof resin. G. Coil: 1. Coils shall be of the direct expansion type constructed from copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond. 2. The coil shall be of a waffle louver fin and high heat exchange, rifled bore tube design to ensure highly efficient performance. 3. The coil shall be a 3 -row cross fin copper evaporator coil with 17 fpi de- sign completely factory tested. 4. The refrigerant connections shall be flare connections and the conden- sate will be 27/32 inch outside diameter PVC. 5. A thermistor will be located on the liquid and gas line. H. Electrical: 1. A separate power supply will be required of 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. The acceptable voltage range shall be 187 to 253 volts. 2. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor and outdoor unit shall be a maximum of 3,280 feet (total 6,560 feet). 3. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor unit and remote control- ler shall be a maximum distance of 1,640 feet. I. Control: 1. The unit shall have controls provided by Daikin to perform input functions necessary to operate the system. 2. The unit shall be compatible with interfacing with a BMS system via op- tional LonWorks or BACnet gateways. 3. The unit shall be compatible with a Daikin Intelligent Touch Manager ad- vanced multi -zone controller. J. Optional Accessories Available: 1. Remote "in- room" sensor kit KRCS01 -1B 2. Condensate pump (DACA- CP1 -3) Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-57 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM 4.11 FXTQ -VERTICAL AIR HANDLING UNIT A. General: Daikin indoor unit FXTQ PA shall be a floor mounted vertical or horizontal right air handling unit, operable with refrigerant R-41 OA, equipped with an electronic expansion valve and direct -drive ECM type fan with auto CFM adjustment, for installation within a conditioned space. When installed in a vertical configuration it shall have top discharge air and bottom return air. When installed in a horizontal right configuration it shall have a horizontal dis- charge air and horizontal return air. This compact design with pre - painted heavy -gauge steel casing shall be available in capacities from 12,000 Btu /h to 54,000 Btu /h. Model numbers are FXTQ12PAVJU, FXTQ18PAVJU, FXTQ24PAVJU, FXTQ30PAVJU ,FXTQ36PAVJU,FXTQ42PAVJU, FXTQ48PAVJU and FXTQ54PAVJU to be connected to outdoor unit model RXYQ / RXYMQ / RWEYQ heat pump and REYQ / RWEYQ heat recovery model. A KRCS01 -413 remote temperature sensor kit shall be required for all FXTQ indoor units not utilizing the thermistor in the Daikin remote controller BRC1 E72. Computerized PID control shall be used to control superheat to deliver a comfortable room temperature condition. The unit shall be equipped with a programmed drying mechanism that dehumidifies while limiting chang- es in room temperature when used with Daikin remote control BRC1 E72, BRC1 E73 and BRC2A71. B. Performance: Each unit's performance is based on nominal operating condi- tions: Model Number Cooling (Indoor 807 DB / 67 °F WB, Outdoor 95 °F DB, 25 ft pipe length) Heating (Indoor 47 °F DB / 43 °F WB, Outdoor 70 °F DB, 25 ft pipe length) FXTQ12PAVJU 12,000 13,500 FXTQ18PAVJU 18,000 20,000 FXTQ24PAVJU 24,000 27,000 FXTQ30PAVJU 30,000 34,000 FXTQ36PAVJU 36,000 40,000 FXTQ42PAVJU 42,000 47,000 FXTQ48PAVJU 48,000 54,000 FXTQ54PAVJU 54,000 60,000 C. Indoor Unit: 1. The Daikin indoor unit FXTQ _PA components shall be completely factory assembled and tested. Included in the unit is factory wiring, piping, elec- tronic proportional expansion valve, control circuit board, fan motor ther- mal protector, brazed connections, self- diagnostics, auto - restart function, 3- minute fused time delay, and test run switch. 2. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes will be charged with dehydrated air prior to shipment from the factory. 3. Both refrigerant lines shall be insulated from the outdoor unit. 4. Return air shall be through an optional or field supplied filter. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-58 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM 5. Condensate draining shall be made via gravity or external condensate pump. 6. The indoor unit will be separately powered with 208- 230V/1- phase /60Hz. 7. The voltage range will be 253 volts maximum and 187 volts minimum. D. Unit Cabinet: 1. The cabinet shall be constructed with sound absorbing, foil -faced insula- tion to control air leakage. 2. Select an installation location with adequate structural support, space for service access and clearance for air return and supply duct connections. 3. A field supplied secondary drain pan must be installed E. Fan: 1. The fan shall be a direct -drive Sirocco type fan, statically and dynamically balanced impeller with high and low fan speeds available. 2. The fan motor shall operate on 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz with a motor output range 0.2 to 0.5 HP. 3. The airflow rate shall be available in high setting. 4. The fan motor shall be thermally protected. 5. Fan motor external static pressure for nominal airflow: Model Number Fan ESP in. WG FXT012PAVJU Up to 0.5 FXTQ18PAVJU Up to 0.5 FXTQ24PAVJU Up to 0.5 FXTQ30PAVJU Up to 0.5 FXTQ36PAVJU Up to 0.5 FXTQ42PAVJU Up to 0.5 FXTQ48PAVJU Up to 0.5 FXTQ54PAVJU Up to 0.5 F. Filter: 1. The return air shall be filtered by means of a field supplied filter. G. Coil: 1. Coils shall be of the direct expansion type constructed from copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond. 2. The coil shall be of a waffle louver fin and high heat exchange, rifled bore tube design to ensure highly efficient performance. 3. The coil shall be a 4 -row cross fin copper evaporator coil with 15 fpi de- sign completely factory tested. 4. The refrigerant connections shall be brazed connections and the conden- sate will be 3/4 inch outside diameter PVC. 5. A thermistor will be located on the liquid and gas line. H. Electrical: 1. A separate power supply will be required of 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. The acceptable voltage range shall be 187 to 253 volts. 2. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor and outdoor unit shall be a maximum of 3,280 feet (total 6,560 feet). 3. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor unit and remote control- ler shall be a maximum distance of 1,640 feet. I. Control: 1. The unit shall have controls provided by Daikin to perform input functions necessary to operate the system. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-59 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM 2. The unit shall be compatible with interfacing with a BMS system via op- tional LonWorks or BACnet gateways. 3. The unit shall be compatible with a Daikin Intelligent Touch Manager ad- vanced multi -zone controller. J. Optional Accessories Available: 1. Field installed 3 -20kW electric heaters (HKR -03, HKR -05C, HKR -06, HKR -08C, HKR -10C). The indoor units shall have circuit breakers sup- plied with each electric heat kit. 2. Air filter (FIL 36 -42, FIL 48 -61). 3. Insulation kit for vertical (DPI 36- 42/20, DPI 48- 61/20) and horizontal (DPIH 36 -42, DPIH 48 -61) configurations. 4. BRC4C84 wireless controller. 4.12 FXMQ_MF - OUTSIDE AIR PROCESSING UNIT A. General: Daikin indoor unit FXMQ_MF shall be a built -in ceiling concealed fan coil unit, operable with refrigerant R -410A, equipped with an electronic expansion valve, for installation into the ceiling cavity. The unit shall be ca- pable of introducing up to 100% outside air controlled to a fixed discharge air temperature. It is constructed of a galvanized steel casing. It shall be availa- ble in capacities from 48,000 Btu /h to 96,000 Btu /h. Model numbers are FXMQ48MFVJU, FXMQ72MFVJU and FXMQ96MVJU to be connected to outdoor unit model RXYQ / RXYMQ / RWEYQ heat pump and REYQ / RWEYQ heat recovery model. It shall be a horizontal discharge air with hori- zontal return air configuration. All models feature a low height cabinet mak- ing them applicable to ceiling pockets that tend to be shallow. Computerized PID control shall be used to control superheat to deliver a comfortable room temperature condition. The indoor units sound pressure shall range from 42 dB(A) to 47 dB(A) at low speed measured 5 feet below the ducted unit. B. Performance: Each unit's performance is based on nominal operating condi- tions: Model Number Cooling (Outdoor 91 T DB / 82 °F WB, Discharge 64T DB, 25 ft pipe length) Heating (Outdoor 32T DB / 27T WB, Discharge 77T DB, 25 ft pipe length) FXMQ48MFVJU 48,000 30,000 FXMQ72MFVJU 72,000 47,000 FXMQ96MFVJU 96,000 59,000 C. Indoor Unit: 1. The Daikin indoor unit FXMQ_MF shall be completely factory assembled and tested. Included in the unit is factory wiring, piping, electronic propor- tional expansion valve, control circuit board, fan motor thermal protector, flare connections, self- diagnostics, auto - restart function, 3- minute fused time delay and test run switch. 2. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes will be charged with dehydrated air prior to shipment from the factory. 3. Both refrigerant lines shall be insulated from the outdoor unit. 4. The indoor units shall be equipped with a discharge air thermistor. 5. The indoor unit will be separately powered with 208- 230V/1- phase /60Hz. 6. The voltage range will be 253 volts maximum and 187 volts minimum. D. Unit Cabinet: Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-60 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM 1. The cabinet shall be located into the ceiling and ducted to the supply and return openings. 2. The cabinet shall be constructed with sound absorbing foamed polysty- rene and polyethylene insulation. Fan: 1. The fan shall be direct -drive Sirocco type fan, statically and dynamically balanced impeller with high and low fan speeds available. 2. The fan motor shall operate on 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz, with a motor output of 0.51 HP. 3. The fan motor shall be thermally protected. 4. Fan motor external static pressure for nominal airflow: Model Number Fan ESP in. WG FXMQ48MFVJU 0.88 FXMQ72MFVJU 0.96 FXMQ96MFVJU 1.03 F. Coil: 1. Coils shall be of the direct expansion type constructed from copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond. 2. The coil shall be of a waffle louver fin and high heat exchange, rifled bore tube design to ensure highly efficient performance. 3. The coil shall be a 3 row cross fin copper evaporator coil with 13 fpi de- sign completely factory tested. 4. The refrigerant connections shall be flare connections and the conden- sate will be 1 -5/16 inch outside diameter PVC. 5. A thermistor will be located on the liquid and gas line. G. Electrical: 1. A separate power supply will be required of 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. The acceptable voltage range shall be 187 to 253 volts. 2. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor and outdoor unit shall be a maximum of 3,280 feet (total 6,560 feet). 3. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor unit and remote control- ler shall be a maximum distance of 1,640 feet. H. Control: 1. The unit shall have controls provided by Daikin to perform input functions necessary to operate the system. 2. The unit shall be compatible with interfacing with a BMS system via op- tional LonWorks or BACnet gateways. 3. The unit shall be compatible with a Daikin Intelligent Touch Manager ad- vanced multi -zone controller. 4.13 FXUQ - 4 WAY CEILING SUSPENDED CASSETTE UNIT A. General: Daikin indoor unit model FXUQ shall be a ceiling suspended cas- sette fan coil unit, operable with R-41 OA refrigerant, equipped with an elec- tronic expansion valve, for installation onto a ceiling within a conditioned space. It shall be available in capacities from 18,000 Btu /h to 36,000 Btu /h. Model numbers are FXUQ18PVJU, FXUQ24PVJU, FXUQ30PVJU, FXUQ36PVJU to be connected to outdoor unit model RXYQ / RXYMQ / RWEYQ heat pump and REYQ / RWEYQ heat recovery model. It shall be a Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-61 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM four -way air distribution type, fresh white, impact resistant with a washable panel. The supply air is distributed via motorized louvers which can be hori- zontally and vertically adjusted from 0° to 60°. Computerized PID control shall be used to control superheat to deliver a comfortable room temperature condition. The unit shall be equipped with a programmed drying mechanism that dehumidifies while limiting changes in room temperature when used with Daikin remote control BRC1E73. The indoor units sound pressure shall range from 36 dB(A) to 40 dB(A) at low speed measured at 5 feet below the unit. Performance: Each unit's performance is based on nominal operating condi- tions: C. Indoor Unit: 1. The Daikin indoor unit FXUQ shall be completely factory assembled and tested. Included in the unit is factory wiring, piping, electronic proportional expansion valve, control circuit board, fan motor thermal protector, flare connections, condensate drain pan, condensate safety shutoff and alarm, self- diagnostics, auto - restart function, 3- minute fused time delay, and test run switch. 2. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes will be charged with dehydrated air prior to shipment from the factory. 3. Both refrigerant lines shall be insulated from the outdoor unit. 4. The 4 -way supply air flow can be field modified to 3 -way and 2 -way air- flow to accommodate various installation configurations including corner installations. 5. Return air shall be through the concentric panel, which includes a resin net mold resistant filter. 6. The indoor units shall be equipped with a condensate pan and conden- sate pump. The condensate pump provides up to 23 -5/8" of lift and has a built in safety shutoff and alarm. 7. The indoor units shall be equipped with a return air thermistor. 8. All electrical components are reached through the decoration panel, which reduces the required side service access. 9. The indoor unit will be separately powered with 208- 230V/1- phase /60Hz. 10. The voltage range will be 253 volts maximum and 187 volts minimum. D. Unit Cabinet: 1. The cabinet shall be space saving and shall be located into the ceiling. 2. Three auto -swing positions shall be available to choose, which include standard, draft prevention and ceiling stain prevention. 3. The airflow of the unit shall have the ability to shut down outlets with mul- tiple patterns allowing for simpler installation in irregular spaces. 4. The cabinet shall be constructed with sound absorbing foamed polysty- rene and polyethylene insulation. E. Fan: Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-62 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 Model Number Cooling (Indoor 807 DB / 67 °F WB, Outdoor 95 °F DB, 25 ft pipe length) Heating (Indoor 47 °F DB / 43 °F W B, Outdoor 70 °F DB, 25 ft pipe length) FXUQ18PVJU 18,000 20,000 FXUQ24PVJU 24,000 27,000 FXUQ30PVJU 30,000 34,000 FXUQ36PVJU 36,000 40,000 C. Indoor Unit: 1. The Daikin indoor unit FXUQ shall be completely factory assembled and tested. Included in the unit is factory wiring, piping, electronic proportional expansion valve, control circuit board, fan motor thermal protector, flare connections, condensate drain pan, condensate safety shutoff and alarm, self- diagnostics, auto - restart function, 3- minute fused time delay, and test run switch. 2. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes will be charged with dehydrated air prior to shipment from the factory. 3. Both refrigerant lines shall be insulated from the outdoor unit. 4. The 4 -way supply air flow can be field modified to 3 -way and 2 -way air- flow to accommodate various installation configurations including corner installations. 5. Return air shall be through the concentric panel, which includes a resin net mold resistant filter. 6. The indoor units shall be equipped with a condensate pan and conden- sate pump. The condensate pump provides up to 23 -5/8" of lift and has a built in safety shutoff and alarm. 7. The indoor units shall be equipped with a return air thermistor. 8. All electrical components are reached through the decoration panel, which reduces the required side service access. 9. The indoor unit will be separately powered with 208- 230V/1- phase /60Hz. 10. The voltage range will be 253 volts maximum and 187 volts minimum. D. Unit Cabinet: 1. The cabinet shall be space saving and shall be located into the ceiling. 2. Three auto -swing positions shall be available to choose, which include standard, draft prevention and ceiling stain prevention. 3. The airflow of the unit shall have the ability to shut down outlets with mul- tiple patterns allowing for simpler installation in irregular spaces. 4. The cabinet shall be constructed with sound absorbing foamed polysty- rene and polyethylene insulation. E. Fan: Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-62 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM 1. The fan shall be direct -drive turbo fan type with statically and dynamically balanced impeller with three fan speeds available. 2. The fan motor shall operate on 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz with a motor output range from 0.06 to 0.14 HP. 3. The airflow rate shall be available in three settings. 4. The fan motor shall be thermally protected. F. Filter: 1. The return air shall be filtered by means of a washable long -life filter with mildew proof resin. G. Coil: 1. Coils shall be of the direct expansion type constructed from copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond. 2. The coil shall be of a waffle louver fin and high heat exchange, rifled bore tube design to ensure highly efficient performance. 3. The coil shall be a 3 -row cross fin copper evaporator coil with 21 FPI de- sign completely factory tested. 4. The refrigerant connections shall be flare connections and the conden- sate will be 1 inch outside diameter PVC. 5. A condensate pan with antibacterial treatment shall be located under the coil. 6. A condensate pump with a 23 -5/8 inch lift shall be located below the coil in the condensate pan with a built -in safety alarm. 7. A thermistor will be located on the liquid and gas line. H. Electrical: 1. A separate power supply will be required of 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. The acceptable voltage range shall be 187 to 253 volts. 2. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor and outdoor unit shall be a maximum of 3,280 feet (total 6,560 feet). 3. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor unit and remote control- ler shall be a maximum distance of 1,640 feet. I. Control: 1. The unit shall have controls provided by Daikin to perform input functions necessary to operate the system. 2. The unit shall be compatible with interfacing with a BMS system via op- tional LonWorks or BACnet gateways. 3. The unit shall be compatible with a Daikin Intelligent Touch Manager ad- vanced multi -zone controller. J. Optional Accessories Available: 1. Remote "in- room" sensor kit (KRCS01 -4B). i. The Daikin wall mounted, hard wired remote sensor kit is recom- mended for ceiling- embedded type fan coils, which often result in a difference between set temperature and actual temperature. The sen- sor for detecting the temperature can be placed away from the indoor unit (branch wiring is included in the kit). 2. Sensor Kit (BRE49131 F) i. The infrared presence sensor can detect human presence and ad- just the airflow direction automatically to prevent drafts. Optional and configurable energy saving occupancy control can be performed when no presence is detected Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-63 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM ii. The infrared floor sensor can detect the floor temperature and au- tomatically adjust operation of the indoor unit to provide an improved and even temperature distribution 3. Air Outlet Blocking Decoration Panel (KDBTP49B140) 4. Blocking Material Kit for 2 -way Discharge (KDBHP49B140) 4.14 FXEQ -ONE WAY BLOW CASSETTE UNIT A. General: Daikin indoor unit model FXEQ shall be a ceiling suspended cas- sette fan coil unit, operable with R -410A refrigerant, equipped with an elec- tronic expansion valve, for installation onto a ceiling within a conditioned space. It shall be available in capacities from 7,500 Btu /h to 24,000 Btu /h. Model numbers are FXEQ07PVJU, FXEQ09PVJU, FXEQ12PVJU, FXEQ15PVJU, FXEQI8PVJU, FXEQ24PVJU to be connected to outdoor unit model RXYQ / RXYMQ / RWEYQ heat pump and REYQ / RWEYQ heat re- covery model. It shall be a one -way air distribution type, fresh white, impact resistant with a washable panel. The supply air is distributed via motorized vertical and horizontal louvers which can be adjusted from 0° to 45° and 20° to 70° respectively. Computerized PID control shall be used to control super- heat to deliver a comfortable room temperature condition. The unit shall be equipped with a programmed drying mechanism that dehumidifies while limit- ing changes in room temperature when used with Daikin remote control BRC1 E73. The indoor units sound pressure shall range from 26 dB(A) to 38 dB(A) at low speed measured at 3.3 feet below the unit. B. Performance: Each unit's performance is based on nominal operating condi- tions: Model Number Cooling (Indoor 80 °F DB / 6TF WB, Outdoor 95T DB, 25 ft pipe length) Heating (Indoor 47 °F DB / 43 °F WB, Outdoor 70T DB, 25 ft pipe length) FXEQ07PVJU 7,500 8,500 FXEQ09PVJU 9,500 10,500 FXEQ12PVJU 12,000 13,500 FXEQ15PVJU 15,000 17,000 FXEQ18PVJU 18,000 20,000 FXEQ24PVJU 24,000 27,000 C. Indoor Unit: 1. The Daikin indoor unit FXEQ shall be completely factory assembled and tested. Included in the unit is factory wiring, piping, electronic proportional expansion valve, control circuit board, fan motor thermal protector, flare connections, condensate drain pan, condensate lift pump, condensate safety shutoff and alarm, self- diagnostics, auto - restart function, 3- minute fused time delay, and test run switch. 2. The indoor unit shall be able to process up to 15% fresh air 3. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes will be charged with dehydrated air prior to shipment from the factory. 4. Both refrigerant lines shall be insulated from the outdoor unit. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-64 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM 5. Return air shall be through the flat back panel, which includes a white res- in net mold resistant filter. 6. The indoor units shall be equipped with a condensate pan and conden- sate pump. The condensate pump provides up to 33 -716" of lift and has a built in safety shutoff and alarm. 7. The indoor units shall be equipped with a return air thermistor. 8. Motor and some of the electrical components shall be reachable through the decoration panel. 9. The indoor unit will be separately powered with 208- 230V/1- phase /60Hz. 10. The voltage range will be 253 volts maximum and 187 volts minimum. D. Unit Cabinet: 1. The cabinet shall be space saving and shall be located into the ceiling. 2. The cabinet shall have a built in 4" knock -out to connect fresh air intake 3. The cabinet shall be constructed with sound absorbing foamed polyure- thane noise insulation. 4. The cabinet shall be equipped with foamed polystyrene and foamed poly- ethylene heat insulation. E. Fan: 1. The fan shall be direct -drive Sirocco fan type with statically and dynami- cally balanced impeller with five selectable fan speeds available. 2. The fan motor shall operate on 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz with a motor output range from 0.11 to 0.15 HP. 3. The airflow rate shall be available in five settings. 4. The fan motor shall be thermally protected. F. Filter: 1. The return air shall be filtered by means of a mold resistant Resin net fil- ter. 2. The filter shall be accessible from the decoration panel G. Coil: 1. Coils shall be of the direct expansion type constructed from copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond. 2. The coil shall be of a waffle louver fin and high heat exchange, rifled bore tube design to ensure highly efficient performance. 3. The coils for units up to 1 ton shall be a 2 -row cross fin copper evaporator coil with 20.5 FPI design completely factory tested for the 4. The coils for units from 1.25 ton to 2.0 ton shall be 2 -row cross fin copper evaporator coil with 20.5 FPI and an additional row with 15.9 FPI. 5. The refrigerant connections shall be flare connections and the conden- sate will be 1 -1/32 inch outside diameter PVC. 6. A condensate pan with antibacterial treatment shall be located under the coil. 7. A condensate pump with a 33 -7/16 inch lift shall be located below the coil in the condensate pan with a built -in safety alarm. 8. A thermistor will be located on the liquid and gas line. H. Electrical: 1. A separate power supply will be required of 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. The acceptable voltage range shall be 187 to 253 volts. 2. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor and outdoor unit shall be a maximum of 3,280 feet (total 6,560 feet). Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-65 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM 3. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor unit and remote control- ler shall be a maximum distance of 1,640 feet. Control: 1. The unit shall have controls provided by Daikin to perform input functions necessary to operate the system. 2. The unit shall be compatible with interfacing with a BMS system via op- tional LonWorks or BACnet gateways. 3. The unit shall be compatible with a Daikin Intelligent Touch Manager ad- vanced multi -zone controller. Standard Accessories Required: 1. Decoration panel BYEP40AW 1 shall be required for operation of FXEQ07 PVJU thru FXEQ15PVJU 2. Decoration panel BYEP63AW 1 shall be required for operation of FXEQ18PVJU and FXEQ24PVJU. Optional Accessories Available: 1. Remote controller wire type (BRC1 E73) 2. Simplified remote controller (BRC2A71) 3. Remote "in- room" sensor kit (KRCS01 -46). i. The Daikin wall mounted, hard wired remote sensor kit is recom- mended for ceiling- embedded type fan coils, which often result in a difference between set temperature and actual temperature. The sen- sor for detecting the temperature can be placed away from the indoor unit (branch wiring is included in the kit). 4. Central remote controller (DCS302C71) 5. Electrical box (KJB311AA) 6. Unified ON /OFF controller (DCS301C71) 7. Electrical box (KJB212AA) 8. Scheduled timer (DST301 BA61) 9. Intelligent Touch controller (DCS601 C71) 10. DIII -NET expander adaptor (DTA109A51) 11. Wiring adaptor printed circuit board (KRP1C75) 12. Group control adaptor printed circuit board (KRP4A74) 13. Adaptor mounting box (KRP1 B101) Part 5 - CONTROLS 5.01 PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS A. General: The control system shall be a neutral color plastic material. Each control may have a Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) B. System to be web -based for owner access, giving the following functions: schedule / set - point changes, alarms, status of equipment, etc.. System shall include access to all me- chanical equipment. System shall be graphical — based, allowing user - friendly access to systems via a floor -plan penetration scheme (via point and click of a graphical floorplan on the screen — to access individual units, etc.). Web -based system shall not require ac- cessing separate websites for each "mechanical system ", however, one central web page, with links to each system is acceptable (everything shall be accessible on the main web page). C. Interface control module to new building Energy Management System to be furnished and mounted by system manufacturer. Through this interface module, all Energy Man- agement functions (specified herein) shall be integrated to the ems and performed Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-66 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 — MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM through the ems. The interface is to be connected to ems for this project. All points shall be integrated to ems to provide full monitoring, setpoint adjustment (temp., etc.), oper- ating schedule adjustment (on /off), etc. Fully functionality shall be possible via ems or via local control. Provide all ems interface modules, parts, etc. as required for a com- plete installation. Interface shall be Bacnet compatible. 5.02 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS B. General: From each circuit board to the controls, the electrical voltage shall be 16 volts DC. C. Wiring: Control wiring shall be installed in a daisy chain configuration from indoor unit to indoor unit then to the branch selector box and outdoor unit. Control wiring shall run from the indoor unit terminal block to the specific controller for that unit. D. Wiring Size: The wire shall be a non - shielded, 2 -core sheathed vinyl cord or cable, size AWG18 -2. 5.03 CONTROLLER CHARACTERISTICS A. Individual Zone Controller- Wired Remote Controller (BRC1 E71) 1. The wired remote controller shall be able to control 1 group (maximum of 16 fan coil units) and shall be able to function as follows: i. The controller shall have a maximum wiring length of 1,640 feet. ii. The controller shall have a self diagnosis function that constantly moni- tors the system for malfunctions (total of 80 components). iii. The controller shall be able to immediately display fault location and condition. iv. An LCD digital display will allow the temperature to be set in VF incre- ments. v. The controller shall be equipped with a thermostat sensor in the remote controller making possible more comfortable room temperature control. vi. Auto - Changeover for Heat Pump and Heat Recovery at cooling setpoint +1 F and heating setpoint -1 F. vii. Independent cooling and heating setpoints in the occupied and unoccu- pied modes. viii. Backlight / Large native room temperature display. ix. Setpoint range limit with 1 deg. F setpoint increments. x. Operation buttons can be individually prohibited. xi. 48 Hour backup in case of power loss. OPERATION Start/Stop Operation Mode Temperature Setting 60 °F - 90 °F Set Point Range Fan Speed MONITORING Status Malfunction Flashing Malfunction Content Operation Mode Temperature Setting Permit/Prohibit Selection Fan Speed CONTROL MANAGEMENT Field Setting Mode Group Setting Auto Re -Start B. Individual Zone Controller- Simplified Wired Remote Controller (BRC2A71) Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-67 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 — MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM 1. The simplified wired remote controller shall be able to control 1 group (maximum of 16 fan coil units). 2. The simplified wired remote controller shall have the following features: OPERATION Start/Stop Operation Mode Temperature Setting 60 °F — 90 °F Set Point Range Fan Speed MONITORING Status Malfunction Flashing Malfunction Content Operation Mode Temperature Setting Permit /Prohibit Selection Fan Speed CONTROL MANAGEMENT Field Setting Mode Group Setting Auto Re -Start I -Touch Controllers Part 1 - General 1.01. Physical characteristics A. General: The advanced multi -zone controller shall be made from plastic materials with a neutral color. Each control shall have a LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) that shows On /Off, set - point, room temperature, mode of operation (Cool /Heat /Dry/Fan /Auto), louver position, and fan speed. 1.02. Electrical characteristics A. General: The advanced multi -zone controller will require 24 VAC to power the controller. The advanced multi -zone controller shall supply 16 VDC to the communication bus on the F1 F2 (out -out) terminal of the outdoor unit. The voltage may rise or fall in relation to the transmission packets that are sent and received. B. Wiring: The advanced multi -zone controller communication wiring shall be terminated in a daisy chain design at the outdoor unit, which is then daisy chained to branch selector (Heat Recovery system), then daisy chained to each indoor unit in the system and terminating at the farthest indoor unit. The termination of the wiring shall be non - polar. The remote control wiring shall run from the indoor unit control terminal block to the remote control- ler connected with that indoor unit. C. Wiring size: Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-68 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM Wiring shall be non - shielded, 2- conductor sheathed vinyl cord or cable, and 18 AWG stranded copper wire. 1.03. VRV Controls Network The VRV Controls Network is made up of local remote controllers, multi -zone control- lers, advanced multi -zone controllers, and open protocol network devices that transmit information via the communication bus. The VRV Controls Network shall also have the ability to be accessed via a networked PC. The VRV Controls Network supports opera. tion monitoring, scheduling, error e-mail distribution, general user software, tenant bill- ing, maintenance support, and integration with Building Management Systems (BMS) using open protocol via BACnet® interface. Part 2 - Products 2.01. Advanced Multi -zone Controllers The Daikin AC VRV advanced multi -zone controllers are compatible with all VRV, SkyAir, and Daikin RA and FTXS indoor units with the use of the KRP928BB2S RA Adapter. The advanced multi -zone controller wiring consist of a non -polar two -wire connection to the outdoor unit. The advanced multi -zone controllers may be wall - mounted and can be adjusted to maintain the optimal operation of up to 64 connected indoor unit groups and 128 indoor units. Set temperatures can be adjusted in incre- ments of VF In the cases where a system or unit error may occur, the VRV controllers will display a two -digit error code and the unit address. A. DCM601A71: intelligent Touch Manager (iTM) V2.XX.XX The intelligent Touch Manager (version 2.04) shall provide control for all VRV, SkyAir, and Daikin RA and FTXS indoor units with the use of the KRP928BB2S RA Adapter. It shall be capable of controlling a maximum or 64 indoor unit groups and 128 indoor units connected to a maximum of 10 outdoor units. The intelligent Touch Manager shall sup- port operations superseding that of the local remote controller, system configuration, daily /weekly scheduling, monitoring of operation status, and malfunction monitoring. The controller wiring shall consist of a non -polar two -wire connection to the indoor unit at terminals F1 F2 (out -out) of the outdoor unit. The intelligent Touch Manager is wall mounted and can be adjusted to maintain the optimal operation of the connected indoor unit(s). The intelligent Touch Manager can be used in conjunction with the BRC1 E73 (Naviga- tion Remote Controller), the BRC2A71 (Simplified Remote Controller), or the BRC4C82/7E83/7C812/7E818 (Wireless Remote Controller), BACnet interface to con- trol the same indoor unit groups. The remote controller shall require daisy chain wiring for grouping multiple indoor units (up to 16) together. Manual addressing is required of each remote controller group associated with the intelligent Touch Manager. Dill -NET address can be set for one (1) indoor unit or each indoor unit in the remote controller group. No more than 2 remote controllers can be placed in the same group. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-69 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM The intelligent Touch Manager shall be equipped with two RJ -45 Ethernet ports for 100 Mbps network communication to support interconnection with a network PC via the In- ternet, Local Area Network (LAN), or connection with a non - networked PC after com- pleted installation. Web access functions shall be available so that facility staff can securely log into each Intelligent Touch Manager via the PC's web browser to support monitoring, scheduling, error recognition, and general user functions. Error emails are also sent to designated email addresses. An additional optional software function Power Proportional Distribu- tion (PPD) tenant billing shall also be available. The optional software shall require ad- vanced purchase and can only be activated upon receipt of a license activation key from Daikin AC. 1. Mounting: The intelligent Touch Manager shall be mounted on the wall or into the mounting fix- tures included with the intelligent Touch Manager. 2. Display Features: a.The intelligent Touch Manager shall be approximately 11.42" x 9.57" x 1.97' in size with a backlit 10.4" LCD display. b. Display information shall be selectable from English, French, Italian, Kore- an, Dutch, Portuguese, Chinese, Japanese, German, or Spanish. c. Featured backlit LCD with auto off after 30 minutes (default) is adjustable be- tween 1 to 60 minutes, or the choice of 3 different screen savers. d. Area and Group configuration 1) Area contains one (1) or more Area(s) or Group(s) 2) A Group may be an indoor unit, Di, Dio point that has a Dill-Net address 3) A Group may be an external management point such as a Di, Do, Bi, Bo, Bv, Ai, Ao, Av, Mi, Mo, My that does not have a DIII -Net address e.An Area is a tiered group where management points (indoor unit, digital in- put /output, and analog input/output groups) can be monitored and controlled by global settings. Up to 650 Areas can be created. Area hierarchy can have up to 10 tiered levels (ex. top level: 1St floor West, 2nd level: offices, hallways, 3rd level: Office 101, 102, and 103, etc.). Area configuration shall classify levels of monitoring and control for each management point 1) Areas and Groups may be assigned names (ex. Office 101, Lobby, North Hallway, etc.) f. The Controller shall display On /Off, Operation Mode, Setpoint, Space Tem- perature, Louver Position, Fan Speed for each Area or Group. g. The Controller shall display Date (mm /dd /yyyy, yyyy /mm /dd, or dd /mm /yyyy format selectable) and day of the week along with the time of day (12hr or 24hr display selectable). h. The Controller shall adjust for daylight savings time (DST) automatically. i. Display information shall be updated every 3 seconds to show the latest sta- tus of the indoor unit groups. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-70 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM j. System status icons shall display On /Off (color coded), Malfunction /Error (color coded), Forced Stop, Setback, Filter, Maintenance, and Screen Lock. k. The controller shall display the temperature setpoint in one degree incre- ments with a range of 60 °F — 90 °F, 1 °F basis (16 °C — 32 °C, 0.1 °C basis). 1) Display of temperature setpoint information shall be configurable for Fahrenheit or Celsius 1. Display shall reflect room temperature in one tenth degree increments with a range of -58 °F — 248 °F, 0.1 °F basis ( -50 °C — 120 °C, 0.10C basis) with 0.10C accuracy. 1) Display of room temperature information shall be configurable for Fahr- enheit or Celsius m. The Menu List shall be used to configure options and display information for each Area or Group. n. Error status shall be displayed in the event of system abnormality /error with one of three color coded icons placed over the indoor unit icon or lower task ba r. 1) System errors are generated when the intelligent Touch Manager sys- tem with other VRV controls systems are combined incorrectly or power proportional distribution calculation errors occur. The intelligent Touch Manager shall display the error with a red triangle placed on the lower task bar. 2) Unit errors occurring within the VRV system shall be displayed with a yellow triangle placed over the indoor unit icon 3) Limit errors are based upon preconfigured analog input upper and lower limit settings and are generated when the limits have been met. When limit error is generated a yellow triangle will be placed over the unit icon. 4) Communication errors between the intelligent Touch Manager and the indoor units shall be displayed with a blue triangle placed over the indoor unit icon 5) Error history shall be available for viewing for up to 500,000 er- rors /abnormality events with operation events. o. Layout View 1) Capable of displaying site floor plan or graphical user interface (GUI) as the background for visual navigation. Indoor unit, Dill -Net Di and Dio, and External Di, Do, Ai, Ao, Av, Mi, Mo, My icons with operational status can be placed on the floor layout or GUI i) Up to 4 status points can be assigned to the indoor unit icon (room name, room temperature, setpoint, and mode) ii) Digital input and output icons will display On /Off status iii) Analog icons will display Ai, Ao and Av. iv) Multistate icons will display Mi, Mo and Mv. 2) Up to 60 floor layout sections can be created 3. Basic Operation: a.Capable of controlling by Area(s) or Group(s) b. Controller shall control the following group operations: Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-71 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM 1) On /Off 2) Operation Mode (Cool, Heat, Fan, Dry, and Auto) 3) Independent Cool and Heat dual Setpoints or single Setpoint for current mode in the occupied period 4) Controller shall be able to limit the user adjustable setpoint ranges indi- vidually for cooling and heating based upon the Area or Group configura- tions 5) Independent Setup (Cooling) and Setback (Heating) setpoints in the unoccupied mode adjustable to 50 - 950F i)Setup and Setback setpoints can only be set outside of the occupied setpoint range ii) The Setup and Setback setpoints will automatically maintain a 2 °F fixed differential from the highest possible occupied setpoints iii) The recovery differential shall be 40F (default) and adjustable be- tween 2 — 10 °F iv) Settings shall be applied based upon the Area or Group configura- tions 6) Fan Speed i) Up to 3 speeds (dependent upon indoor unit type) 7) Airflow direction (dependent upon indoor unit type) i) 5 fixed positions or oscillating 8) Remote controller permit/prohibit of On /Off, Mode, and Setpoint 9) Lock out setting for Intelligent Touch Manager display 10) Indoor unit Group /Area assignment c. Capable of providing battery backup power for the clock at least 1 year when no AC power is applied. 1) The battery can last at least 13 years when AC power is applied 2) Settings stored in non - volatile memory Programmability: a.Controller shall support weekly schedule settings. 1) 7 day weekly pattern (7) 2) Weekday + Weekend (5 + 2) 3) Weekday + Saturday + Sunday (5 + 1 + 1) 4) Everyday (1) 5) The schedule shall have the capabilities of being enabled or disabled 6) 100 independent schedules configurable with up to 20 events settable for each days schedule i) Each scheduled event shall specify time and target Area or Group ii) Each scheduled event shall include On /Off, Optimum Start, Opera- tion Mode, Occupied Setpoints, Setback Setpoints, Remote Control- ler On /Off Prohibit, Remote Controller Mode Prohibit, Remote Con- troller Setpoint Prohibit, Timer Extension Setting, Fan Speed, and Setpoint Range Limit • Setpoint when unit is On (occupied) Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-72 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM • Configurable Setup (Cooling) and Setback (Heating) setpoints when unit is Off (unoccupied) iii) Time setting in 1- minute increments iv) Timer Extension shall be used for a timed override (settable from 30 — 180 minutes) to allow indoor unit operation during the unoccupied period 7) A maximum of 40 exception days can be schedule on the yearly sched- ule (repeats yearly) i) Exception days shall be used to override specified days on the weekly schedule based upon irregular occupied /unoccupied conditions ii) Exception days can be configured on a set date (Jan 1) or floating date (1st Monday in September) Controller shall support auto - changeover. 1) Auto - change shall provide Fixed (default), Individual, Averaging, and Vote changeover methods for both Heat Pump and Heat Recovery sys- tems based upon the changeover group configuration. This will allow for the optimal room temperature to be maintained by automatically switch- ing the indoor unit's mode between Cool and Heat in accordance with the room temperature and setpoint. The following changeover scheme shall be applicable to the Fixed, Individual, and Averaging methods. i)Changeover to cooling mode shall occur at cooling setpoint + 1 °F (0.5 °C) as the primary changeover deadband and takes the guard timer into consideration • Configurable from 1 — 4 °F (0.5 — 2 °C) ii) Changeover to cooling mode shall occur at the primary changeover deadband to cooling + 1 °F (0.5 °C) as the secondary changeover deadband. • Configurable from 1 — 4 °F (0.5 — 2 °C) iii) Changeover to heating mode shall occur at heating setpoint - 1 °F (0.5 °C) as the primary changeover deadband and takes the guard timer into consideration • Configurable from 1 — 4 (1F (0.5 — 2 °C) iv) Changeover to heating mode shall occur at the primary changeover deadband to heating - 1OF (0.5 °C) as the secondary changeover deadband. • Configurable from 1 — 4 °F (0.5 — 2 °C) v) A weighted demand shall be configurable for the Averaging and Vote methods. 2) Fixed Method i) Changeover evaluated by room temperature and setpoint of the repre- sentative indoor unit (first registered indoor unit in changeover group) in the changeover group even when it is not operating (must be in Cool, Heat, or Auto mode) ii) Changeover affects all indoor unit groups in the changeover group. 3) Individual method (recommended for Heat Recovery Systems) Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-73 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM i) Changeover evaluated by room temperature and setpoints of the indi- vidual indoor unit group in the changeover group ii) Changeover affects individual indoor unit group in the changeover group 4) Average method i) Changeover evaluated by the average of all indoor unit group's room temperatures and setpoints operating in Cool, Heat, or Auto mode in the changeover group list ii) If none of the indoor units in the group meet the above requirements the Fixed method of changeover will be applied iii) A weighted demand (0 — 3) can be configured for each indoor unit in the changeover group. iv) Changeover affects all indoor unit groups in the changeover group. 5) Vote Method i) In each indoor unit, the cooling demand is calculated based upon the difference between the room temperature and cooling setpoint. If the room temperature falls below the primary cool changeover point (cool setpoint plus the primary changeover deadband) the cooling demand is considered as 0 (zero). Then the total cooling demand is calculated as the sum of each indoor unit's cooling demand ii) The opposite is true for the total heating demand iii) A weight (0 -3) can be added to each indoor unit's demand in the changeover group. The default setting is 1 iv) The weight 0 (zero) means the indoor unit's demand is not added in the total demand, so the indoor unit's demand is considered to be 0 (zero) v) The weight 2 or 3 means the indoor unit's demand is added 2 or 3 times in the total demand, respectively vi) Changeover to cooling mode shall occur when the total cooling de- mand is greater than the total heating demand. vii) The opposite is true for changeover to heating viii) Vote supports a Heating Override option, which prioritizes switching to the heating mode if at least one room temperature falls below the secondary heat changeover point (heat setpoint minus the secondary changeover deadband) even if the total cooling demand is greater than the total heating demand. ix) Changeover affects all indoor unit groups in the changeover group. 6) Changeover shall change the operation mode of the indoor unit that is set as the Changeover Master. The Changeover Master indoor unit shall then change the operation mode of all indoor unit groups daisy chained to the same outdoor unit in the Heat Pump system or branch se- lector box in the Heat Recovery system. 7) Guard timer i) Upon changeover, guard timer will prevent another changeover during the guard timer activation period (15, 30, 60 (default) min). Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-74 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM ii) Guard timer is ignored by a change of setpoint manually from either intelligent Touch Manger or Remote Controller, by schedule, or the room temperature meets or exceeds the secondary changeover deadband of the mode opposite of the current mode setting c. Controller shall support Interlock 1) Interlock feature for use with 3rd party equipment (DOAS, dampers, oc- cupancy sensing, etc...) to automatically control Groups or Areas corre- sponding to the change of the operation states or the On /Off states of any Group. 2) WAGO 1/0 unit — Di, Do, Ai, Ao i) On /Off based monitoring and control of equipment ii) Manual or scheduled operation of equipment iii) Operation based upon interlock with management points (group(s)) iv) Monitor equipment error /alarm status 3) Digital Input /Output (DEC102A51 -US2) unit or Digital Input (DEC101A51 -US2) unit i) On /Off based monitoring and control of equipment ii) Manual or scheduled operation of equipment iii) Operation based upon interlock with management points (group(s)) iv) Monitor equipment error /alarm status d. Controller shall support force shutdown of associated indoor unit groups. Web /Email Function a. Each intelligent Touch Manager shall be capable of monitoring, operating, and scheduling a maximum of 64 indoor unit groups (up to 512 indoor unit groups with the addition of the iTM Plus Adapter) from a networked PC's web browser. It shall also be capable of creating general user access and sending detailed error emails to a customized distribution list (up to 10 email addresses). b. All PCs shall be field supplied 6. Optional Software (Furnish) Licensed per option, per intelligent Touch Manager shall be required. a. DCM009A51: BACnet Client Option (Furnish) 1) The iTM BACnet Client Option shall be capable of making the intelligent Touch Manager work as a BACnet client using the BACnet /IP protocol. A BACnet client machine is able to send service requests to a BACnet server machine that then performs the services and reports the results to the client. By registering equipment and sensors connected to a BACnet server as management points, equipment and sensors can be monitored and controlled by the intelligent Touch Manager. The BACnet Client option must be enabled/ activated in each intelligent Touch Man- ager to be used. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-75 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM 2) System Capacity i) A maximum of 50 BACnet servers can be monitored and /or controlled by one intelligent Touch Manager. ii) A maximum of 1536 objects can be monitored and /or con- trolled by one intelligent Touch Manager. iii) A maximum of 512 management points, including BACnet management points, external management points, internal Ai man- agement points, AHU management points, and Chiller management points, can be registered in one intelligent Touch Manager. 3) Objects that can be used in BACnet management points are: i) Analog Input (Object Type Number 0) ii) Analog Output (Object Type Number 1) iii) Analog Value (Object Type Number 2) iv) Binary Input (Object Type Number 3) V) Binary Output (Object Type Number 4) vi) Binary Value (Object Type Number 5) Vii) Multi -Sate Input (Object Type Number 13) viii) Multi -Sate Output (Object Type Number 14) ix) Multi -Sate Value (Object Type Number 19) DCM014A51: BACnet Server Gateway Option (Furnish) 1) The iTM BACnet Server Gateway Option shall be capable of making the intelligent Touch Manager work as a BACnet gateway using the BACnet/IP protocol. The iTM BACnet Server Gateway Option shall be capable of exposing indoor unit management points as BACnet objects to the (BMS). The iTM BACnet Server /Gateway Option shall be capa- ble of allowing the BMS to monitor and control indoor units BACnet ob- jects. 2) The iTM BACnet Server Gateway Option shall be compatible with VRV, SkyAir, Outdoor Air Processing Unit, Mini -Split system with use of KRP928, and FFQ indoor unit for Multi -split system. 3) Functions: i. The iTM BACnet Server Gateway Option shall be capable of supporting Change of Value (COV) notification. ii. The iTM BACnet Server Gateway Option shall communicate to BMS using port number 47808 (configurable). iii. The iTM BACnet Server Gateway Option shall function as BAC- net router to provide unique virtual BACnet device identification number (ID) for every indoor unit group address. iv. The iTM BACnet Server Gateway Option shall provide configu- rable BACnet Network number. V. The iTM BACnet Server Gateway Option shall be capable of be- ing configured as a foreign device. It shall be capable of com- municating across BACnet Broadcast Management Devices (BBMD) in different subnet networks. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-76 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM vi. The iTM BACnet Server Gateway Option shall be run in envi- ronments with BACnet communication traffic up to 100 pack- ets /second. vii. The iTM BACnet Server Gateway Option functions shall be con- figurable through CSV file which shall be downloaded from iTM and configured by trained personnel. 4) System Capacity i. Max of 128 indoor units groups (Up to 256 indoor units) can be controlled from (BMS) ii. Max of 8 DIII -Net ports shall be connected to iTM. 5) The Building Management System shall monitor and control the follow- ing BACnet objects for indoor units i. Indoor unit ON /OFF status. ii. Alarm status with error description iii. Room temperature. iv. Indoor Unit ON details • Off • Normal [ON] • Override • Setback V. Filter sign status. vi. Fan status. vii. Communication status. viii. Thermo -on status. ix. Compressor status • On • Off • Defrost X. Aux heater status. xi. Occupancy Mode • Unoccupied, • Occupied • Standby xii. Operation Mode (Cool, Heat, Fan, and Dry) xiii. Cooling and Heating setpoints during occupied mode. xiv. Cooling and Heating setpoints during unoccupied mode. xv. Maximum and minimum cooling setpoint. xvi. Maximum and Minimum heating setpoint xvii. Minimum cooling and heating setpoint differential. xviii. Fan Speed • Up to 3 speeds (dependent upon indoor unit type) xix. Vane direction (dependent upon indoor unit type) • 5 fixed positions or swing position xx. Remote controller permit /prohibit • On /Off • Mode, Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-77 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM • Setpoint xxi. Filter sign reset for indoor units xxii. Forced indoor units off. 6) The Building Management System may choose to monitor and control the following BACnet objects linked to iTM control logic: i. Enable /Disable iTM Schedule operation. ii. Enable /Disable iTM Auto Changeover Operation. iii. Set Timed Override Minutes. • Monitor and configure timer extension on iTM (30, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180 minutes) iv. System forced off • Enable /Disable all emergency stop programs that are registered on the iTM. 7) Schedule The BMS shall utilize iTM schedule function or support weekly schedule settings through its programming. i. BMS schedule shall support the indoor unit: • Each scheduled event shall specify time and target group address. • Each scheduled event shall include Occupancy Mode, Operation Mode, Occupied Cooling Setpoint, Occupied Heating Setpoint, and Unoccupied cooling setpoint, Un- occupied heating setpoint, Remote Controller On /Off Permit/Prohibit, Remote Controller Mode Permit /Prohibit, Remote Controller Setpoint Permit/Prohibit, and Timed Override Enable. • An override shall be provided for use enabling indoor unit operation during the unoccupied period by the BMS pro- gramming. 8) Auto Changeover The BMS shall utilize iTM Auto changeover function or support auto - changeover through its programming. i. Auto - change shall provide changeover for both Heat Pump and Heat Recovery systems based upon the group configurations. This will allow the optimal room temperature to be maintained by automatically switching the indoor unit's mode between Cool and Heat in accordance with the room temperature and setpoint temperature. ii. Changeover shall change the operation mode of the indoor unit that is set as the Changeover Master. The Changeover Master indoor unit shall then change the operation mode of all indoor unit groups daisy chained on the same D111-Net communication bus to the same outdoor unit in the Heat Pump system or the same branch selector box in the Heat Recovery system. iii. Changeover to cooling mode shall occur when the room tem- perature is great than or equal to the cooling setpoint Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-78 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM • Differential to be determined by BACnet building man- agement system programming iv. Changeover to heating mode shall occur when room tempera- ture is less than or equal to the heating setpoint. • Differential to be determined by BACnet building man- agement system programming V. Guard timer • Upon changeover, guard timer will prevent another changeover during this period. • Guard timer should be ignored by a change of setpoint manually from the BMS, Intelligent Touch Controller, Remote Controller, or by schedule. • Guard timer to be configured by BMS programming (30 minute minimum recommended) 9) Setpoint limitation The BMS shall utilize maximum and minimum cooling and heating setpoint to configure upper and lower setpoints range. 10)System shutdown: BMS should utilize System forced off point to execute emergency stop program regis- tered on the iTM. 11)Restricted functions: The following iTM functions shall be prohibited when the BACnet Server Gateway op- tion enabled: i. Interlocking Control. ii. Emergency Stop (Emergency stop manual release). iii. Power Proportional Distribution (PPD) option. iv. BACnet Client option. v. D -Net Service. vi. External Management Point Registration B. DCM601A72: iTM Plus Adapter (Optional — At Contractor's Discrection) The iTM Plus Adapter shall provide control for all VRV, SkyAir indoor units, and Daikin RA and FTXS indoor units with the use of the KRP92813132S RA Adapter. It shall be capable of handling a maximum of 64 indoor unit groups and 128 indoor units connect- ed to a maximum of 10 outdoor units. The iTM Plus Adapter is to be used in conjunc- tion with intelligent Touch Manager. Up to 7 iTM Plus Adapters can be connected to a single intelligent Touch Manager. This combination will provide intelligent Touch Man- ager monitoring and control of up to 512 indoor unit groups, 1024 indoor units, and 80 outdoor units. The iTM Plus Adapter shall support operations superseding that of the local remote controller, system configuration, daily /weekly scheduling, monitoring of op- eration status, and malfunction monitoring. The controller wiring shall consist of a non -polar two -wire connection to the outdoor unit at terminals F1 F2 (out -out). The iTM Plus Adapter is wall mounted and is used in con- junction with the intelligent Touch Manager to maintain the optimal operation of the con - Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-79 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 — MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM nected indoor unit(s). The iTM Plus Adapter is connected to the intelligent Touch Man- ager via a polarity sensitive 18 -2 AWG stranded non - shielded wire (field supplied). The iTM Plus Adapter can be used in conjunction with the BRC1 E73 (Navigation Re- mote Controller), the BRC2A71 (Simplified Remote Controller), or the BRC4C82/7E83/7C812/7E818 (Wireless Remote Controller), BACnet interface, to con- trol the same indoor unit groups. No more than 2 remote controllers can be placed in the same group. The remote controller shall require daisy chain wiring for grouping multiple indoor units (up to 16) together. Manual addressing is required of each indoor unit group associated with the iTM Plus Adapter. 1. Mounting: The iTM Plus Adapter can be mounted on the wall or in a standard enclosure (field sup- plied). 2. Features: a. The iTM Plus Adapter shall be approximately 6.30" x 5.87" x 2.41" in size. 3. Basic Operation: a. Control of all associated indoor unit groups shall be done via the connected intelligent Touch Manager. 4. Programmability: a. Programming of all associated indoor unit groups shall be done via the connected intelligent Touch Manager. Accessories (As Required) Web software: DCS004A71 Proportional Power Distribution PPD: DCS002C71 Digital input: DEC101A51 -US- With an optional DI unit 8 inputs can be added , multiple DI units can con- nected depending on the available DIII line. Digital input /output : DEC702A51 -US- 4 contacts are available with the optional Dio unit D. HVAC EQUIPMENT ALTERNATE (GENERAL INFORMATION) 1.01 "Alternate" in the Description Below refers to anv eauipment brand that is not the basis of design (whether listed as approved equivalent or not. The proposed equiv- alent or non -basis of design equipment supplier shall provide to the owner and engineer a complete equipment data package. This package shall include, but is not limited to, equipment capacities at the design condition, power requirements, indoor units CFM /static pressures, fan curves, installation requirements, and physical dimensions. Nominal performance data is not acceptable. 1.02 The complete drawing package shall be furnished to the owner and engineer 15 days prior to bid day for bidding and installation. The drawing format shall be .dxf or equiva- lent, on 30 "x42" sheets. The HVAC and electrical series design documents will be made available in electronic format for use by the equipment supplier in preparing their draw- ings. The alternate equipment supplier shall prepare the following drawings: Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-80 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM XXX HVAC Floor Plan XXX HVAC Refrigerant Piping Plan XXX HVAC Refrigerant Piping /Controls Details XXX HVAC Control Wiring Plan XXX HVAC Details XXX HVAC Schedules XXX Electrical HVAC Power Plan (with Risers, Panel Schedules, etc.) XXX Plumbing HVAC Drain Piping Plan The supplier shall draft all piping circuits, components, overall building control schemat- ic, detailed control wiring diagrams, power wiring diagrams, system details and sched- ules for their system. The drawings shall convey all requirements to successfully install the alternate equipment suppliers system. Provide (2) drawing package sets. Provide (1) drawing package in electronic format (.dxf files) on CD. The submitted documents shall be complete system designs and show no less infor- mation than the HVAC equipment/controls contract bid documents. The equipment supplier shall bear all costs for: producing drawings / documentation as required in these specifications; added / revised electrical conduit, wiring, breakers, and panels as required to meet power requirements; added / revised mechanical pip- ing, wiring, devices, etc.; added / revised plumbing piping, drains, etc. - as re- quired for a complete system. 1.03 The equipment supplier shall submit as part of the equipment data package outdoor unit data sheets. Data sheets to include the following: Capacities: Cooling Cooling (Btu /h) Cooling Input Power (kW) Capacities: Heating Heating (Btu /h) Heating Input Power (kW) Operating Temperature Range: Cooling Heating Power Supply: Maximum Circuit Amps (MCA) Maximum Fuse Amps (MFA) Maximum Starting Current (MSC) Total Over Current Amps (TOCA) Outdoor Fan Motor Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-81 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239500 - MULTI - INDOOR VRV SYSTEM Refrigerant: Refrigerant Type /Charge Control Unit Data: Max. Number of Indoor Units Sound Pressure Level at 3ft. (dBA) Weight (Ibs) Dimensions 1.04 The equipment supplier shall guarantee the performance of their system and all pub- lished data submitted. Performance shall be based on the design criteria below. Room Temperature (Cooling): _ Room Temperature (Heating): _ Ambient Temperature (Summer): Ambient Temperature (Winter): _ 1.05 The alternate equipment supplier shall submit with bid, indoor unit data sheets. Data sheets to include the following: Capacities: Cooling (Btu /h) Heating (Btu /h) Air Flow (CFM) External Static Pressure (ESP) Electrical Data (MCA, MFA, FLA) Weight (Ibs) Dimensions END OF SECTION 239500 Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239500-82 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239700 - LOUVERS AND VENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fixed, extruded - aluminum louvers. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design louvers, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using structural and seismic performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. Structural Performance: Louvers shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without permanent deformation of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. 1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on pressures as indicated on Drawings. 2. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on a uniform pressure of 20 Ibf /sq. ft., acting inward or outward. C. Seismic Performance: Louvers, including attachments to other construction, shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI /ASCE 7. D. Louver Performance Ratings: Provide louvers complying with requirements specified, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units identical to those provided, except for length and width according to AMCA 500 -L. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages showing specified models with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals. B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles, and spacing. C. Samples: For each type of metal finish required. D. Delegated- Design Submittal: For louvers indicated to comply with structural and seismic performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. E. Product Test Reports: Based on tests performed according to AMCA 500 -L. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063 -T5, T -52, or T6. B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239700-1 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239700 - LOUVERS AND VENTS C. Galvanized -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 zinc coating, mill phosphatized. D. Stainless -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, No. 4 finish. E. Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions. 1. For fastening aluminum, use aluminum or 300 series stainless -steel fasteners. 2. For fastening galvanized steel, use hot - dip - galvanized steel or 300 series stainless -steel fasteners. 3. For fastening stainless steel, use 300 series stainless -steel fasteners. 4. For color - finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers. F. Bituminous Paint: Cold- applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 2.2 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints. B. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds concealed from view unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary. 2.3 FIXED, EXTRUDED - ALUMINUM LOUVERS A. Horizontal, Drainable -Blade Louver: 1. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. Air Balance Inc.; a Mestek company. b. Air Flow Company, Inc. C. Airolite Company, LLC (The). d. All -Lite Architectural Products. e. American Warming and Ventilating, Inc.; a Mestek company. f. Arrow United Industries; a division of Mestek, Inc. g. Carnes Company, Inc. h. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc. i. Construction Specialties, Inc. j. Dowco Products Group; Safe -Air of Illinois, Inc. k. Greenheck Fan Corporation. I. Industrial Louvers, Inc. M. Louvers & Dampers, Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. n. Metal Form Manufacturing Inc. o. NCA Manufacturing, Inc. P. Nystrom Building Products. q. Reliable Products, Inc. r. Ruskin Company; Tomkins PLC. S. United Enertech Corp. t. Vent Products Company, Inc. 2. Louver Depth: 4 inches. 3. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.060 inch for blades and 0.080 inch for frames. 4. Louver Performance Ratings: a. Free Area: Not less than 7.5 sq. ft. for 48 -inch- wide by 48 -inch- high louver. b. Point of Beginning Water Penetration: Not less than 900 fpm. C. Air Performance: Not more than 0.10 -inch wg static pressure drop at 750 -fpm free - area intake velocity. d. Air Performance: Not more than 0.15 -inch wg static pressure drop at 900 -fpm free - area exhaust velocity. 5. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239700-2 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239700 - LOUVERS AND VENTS 2.4 LOUVER SCREENS A. General: Provide screen at each exterior louver. B. Louver Screen Frames: Same kind and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are attached. 2.5 2.6 C. Louver Screening: 1. Bird Screening: Aluminum, 1/2 -inch- square mesh, 0.063 -inch wire. 2. Bird Screening: Stainless steel, 1/2 -inch- square mesh, 0.047 -inch wire. 3. Bird Screening: Flattened, expanded aluminum, 3/4 by 0.050 inch thick. 4. Bird Screening: Galvanized steel, 1/2 -inch- square mesh, 0.041 -inch wire. WALL VENTS (BRICK VENTS) A. Extruded - Aluminum Wall Vents: 1. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:Air Flow Company, Inc. a. Airolite Company, LLC (The). b. Arrow United Industries; a division of Mestek, Inc. C. Construction Specialties, Inc. d. Dowco Products Group; Safe -Air of Illinois, Inc. e. Greenheck Fan Corporation. f. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. g. Industrial Louvers, Inc. h. Louvers & Dampers, Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. i. Metal Form Manufacturing Inc. j. Nystrom Building Products. k. Reliable Products, Inc. I. Ruskin Company; Tomkins PLC. M. Sunvent Industries; Division of Sylro Sales Corp. n. United Enertech Corp. 2. Extruded - aluminum louvers and frames, not less than 0.125 -inch nominal thickness, assembled by welding; with 18- by -14- mesh, aluminum insect screening on inside face; incorporating weep holes, continuous drip at sill, and integral waterstop on inside edge of sill; of load- bearing design and construction. B. Cast - Aluminum Wall Vents: 1. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:Air Flow Company, Inc. a. Airolite Company, LLC (The). b. Greenheck Fan Corporation. C. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. d. Ruskin Company; Tomkins PLC. e. Sunvent Industries; Division of Sylro Sales Corp. 2. One- piece, cast - aluminum louvers and frames; with 18- by -14- mesh, aluminum insecl screening on inside face; incorporating integral waterstop on inside edge of sill; of load - bearing design and construction. ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA- M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. B. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA- M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. 1. Color: (by Architect and Owner). 2.7 GALVANIZED -STEEL SHEET FINISHES A. Finish louvers after assembly. Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239700-3 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18 DocuSign Envelope ID: 9826C043- 4C32- 49CD- A4CC- DC28ABAB7CE7 SECTION 239700 - LOUVERS AND VENTS B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so surfaces are free of oil and other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to be applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas and repair according to ASTM A 780. C. Baked - Enamel or Powder -Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard 2 -coat, baked -on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat, with a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil for topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.8 STAINLESS -STEEL SHEET FINISHES A. Repair sheet finish by grinding and polishing irregularities, weld spatter, scratches, and forming marks to match surrounding finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Locate and place louvers and vents level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work. B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection. C. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated. D. Repair damaged finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the factory and refinish entire unit or provide new units. E. Protect galvanized and nonferrous -metal surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint. END OF SECTION 239700 Reece, Noland & McElrath, Inc. 239700-4 Orange County Board of Elections Orange Co., NC 05/04/18